Trump’s Tariff Threats and BRICS

  • 17 Jul 2025

In News:

The recent 17th BRICS Summit in Rio de Janeiro (2025) has reignited tensions between the United States and the expanding BRICS grouping. Former U.S. President Donald Trump, who remains a dominant figure in Republican politics, has threatened to impose 10% tariffs on all BRICS nations, framing the bloc as a challenge to American economic hegemony. These threats signal a continuation of Trump's confrontational approach to global trade and reflect deeper anxieties about de-dollarisation efforts emerging from the Global South.

Trump’s concerns stem from what he perceives as an "anti-American" orientation of BRICS. The group's discussions around a common currency, increased use of national currencies, and the development of alternative cross-border payment systems have been interpreted by Trump as an attempt to weaken the U.S. dollar’s central role in international finance. This fear has been intensified post the Russia-Ukraine conflict, which saw several countries reconsider their reliance on dollar-based systems like SWIFT, particularly after Russia’s exclusion from them due to Western sanctions.

In response, Trump has floated punitive trade measures: a 10% tariff on BRICS-aligned nations, 50% on Brazil for its domestic political stance, and 30% on South Africa citing trade disputes and minority rights issues. He is also advocating for the Sanctioning Russia Act, 2025, which proposes an astronomical 500% tariff on Russian oil and related products. Such a move could disrupt oil-importing economies like India and China, both of which have deepened energy ties with Moscow in recent years.

However, BRICS leaders have clarified that de-dollarisation is not about dismantling the dollar-based order but about financial diversification and resilience. The Rio Declaration 2025 stopped short of any anti-U.S. language, instead emphasizing interoperability of payment systems and equitable reform of global institutions. This demonstrates a cautious diplomatic approach aimed at asserting economic agency without triggering direct confrontation.

India, in particular, has taken a measured stance. In Parliament, the Indian government distanced itself from suggestions that BRICS was pursuing an aggressive de-dollarisation agenda. External Affairs Minister S. Jaishankar reiterated that India has no official policy to replace the U.S. dollar, and that BRICS decisions are not monolithic but reflect the diversity of its member states. This is crucial, given India’s strategic balancing between the West and the Global South.

Founded in 2009 amid discontent with Western-dominated financial structures, BRICS has expanded to include 10 members, with new entrants like Iran, Egypt, Ethiopia, UAE, and Indonesia. While united by frustration over Western dominance, internal diversity—economic, political, and strategic—ensures that BRICS does not function as a rigid anti-West alliance.

At the Rio summit, BRICS condemned unilateral tariff practices and expressed concern over attacks on Iranian civilian infrastructure, showcasing solidarity without directly naming the U.S. or its allies. This signals a shift toward multilateral diplomacy grounded in soft balancing rather than confrontation.

In conclusion, while Trump’s tariff threats underline U.S. anxiety over shifting global power structures, BRICS’ response suggests a nuanced recalibration of the international order—not a radical overhaul. For India, the challenge remains to harness BRICS for strategic autonomy without undermining its multi-aligned foreign policy posture.

AI 171 Crash

  • 16 Jul 2025

In News:

On June 12, 2025, Air India flight AI 171, a Boeing 787-8 Dreamliner en route from Ahmedabad to London Gatwick, tragically crashed shortly after takeoff, killing 260 people—including 19 on the ground—in what is now the deadliest aviation disaster involving an Indian airline in four decades. A preliminary report by the Aircraft Accident Investigation Bureau (AAIB) has placed the aircraft’s fuel control switches at the centre of the crash investigation.

Fuel Control Switches: Function and Design

Fuel control switches are critical safety components that regulate the flow of fuel to aircraft engines. On a Boeing 787, equipped in this case with two GE engines, these switches are located below the thrust levers and are spring-loaded and bracket-protected to prevent accidental activation. They require a deliberate two-step manual action—lifting the switch and moving it between two positions:

  • RUN: Allows fuel flow for engine operation.
  • CUTOFF: Cuts fuel flow, effectively shutting down the engine.

These switches are typically used on the ground for engine startup and shutdown, and only in-flight during an engine failure or critical damage. Modern twin-engine aircraft like the 787 are capable of continuing flight on a single engine, making the simultaneous use of both switches highly unusual and dangerous.

Sequence of Events: Preliminary Findings

According to flight data from the Flight Data Recorder (FDR) and Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR), both engine fuel control switches were moved from ‘RUN’ to ‘CUTOFF’ within seconds of each other, shortly after takeoff. This led to simultaneous loss of thrust in both engines. Moments later, both switches were returned to the ‘RUN’ position, but by then the aircraft had lost critical altitude and control.

The cockpit recording captured one pilot asking the other why the fuel was cut off. The other responded that he had not done so. The pilots—Captain Sumeet Sabharwal with over 8,600 flying hours on the 787, and Co-pilot Clive Kundar with 1,100 hours—were both adequately experienced.

Technical and Human Factors under scrutiny

Aviation experts argue that accidental activation of both switches is nearly impossible due to the stop-lock mechanism and protective brackets. However, speculation persists over a possible technical malfunction, human error, or incorrect engine identification. A theory suggests that one engine may have failed and the pilots mistakenly shut down the working engine, though this remains unconfirmed.

Attention has also turned to the switches themselves, manufactured by Honeywell (Part No. 4TL837-3D). A 2018 FAA advisory had flagged potential issues with their locking mechanisms but did not mandate corrective action. Air India reportedly did not conduct voluntary checks, raising questions about maintenance protocols.

Conclusion:

The AI 171 crash highlights critical lapses in cockpit procedures, technical maintenance, and possibly design flaws. It underscores the need for stringent implementation of safety advisories, thorough crew training, and the use of redundant safety mechanisms. As investigations continue, the incident may prompt global regulatory reviews on cockpit ergonomics and fuel system safety protocols, reinforcing the imperative of fail-safe systems in civil aviation.

Maharashtra’s Special Public Security Bill, 2024

  • 15 Jul 2025

In News:

The Maharashtra Special Public Security Bill, 2024, passed by the Legislative Assembly, aims to combat “urban Maoism” and left-wing extremism (LWE). Modeled on the Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act (UAPA), the Bill introduces stringent provisions to identify and dismantle urban support networks aiding insurgents. However, it has generated significant legal and civil liberty concerns due to its vague definitions, broad executive powers, and pre-trial punitive measures.

Understanding Urban Maoism

Urban Maoism refers to the strategy of the banned CPI (Maoist) to infiltrate cities and mobilise intellectuals, students, professionals, and minorities through NGOs, protests, and media campaigns. This ideology, outlined in the 2004 document Strategies and Tactics of Indian Revolution (STIR), aims to build urban logistical support for rural armed struggles while operating under the legal guise of activism, journalism, or civil society work. Notable examples include the Elgar Parishad case (2018), where activists were arrested for alleged Maoist links following Bhima Koregaon violence.

Key Provisions of the Bill

The Bill allows the government to declare an organisation “unlawful” and penalises individuals associated with it—whether through membership, fundraising, or aiding operations. It defines “unlawful activity” as interference with public order, use of criminal force against officials, incitement to disobedience of the law, or even disrupting communication systems. Punishments range from 2 to 7 years of imprisonment along with fines. All offences are cognizable and non-bailable.

A major provision allows pre-trial forfeiture of property belonging to accused persons or organisations, with only 15 days’ notice. While the affected party can appeal to the High Court within 30 days, the initial declaration is confirmed only by an Advisory Board comprising High Court-qualified persons.

Constitutional and Legal Concerns

Civil society and legal experts argue that the Bill risks criminalising legitimate dissent and peaceful protest, given its ambiguous phrasing like “practising disobedience” or “generating apprehension in the public.” Unlike the UAPA, which requires a higher threshold for proving threat to national integrity, Maharashtra’s Bill introduces lower benchmarks that could conflate dissent with sedition.

The pre-trial forfeiture of property mirrors provisions in the Prevention of Money Laundering Act (PMLA), yet lacks equivalent safeguards like adjudication by a quasi-judicial body. Moreover, principles of natural justice, such as presumption of innocence and burden of proof on the state, appear diluted.

Broader Implications

While the state’s intent to counter urban LWE influence is valid—especially given the shift of Maoist strategies from forested hinterlands to urban centres—the means adopted pose risks to constitutional rights and federal norms. The legislation exemplifies a growing trend where extraordinary laws designed for national threats are adapted at the state level, potentially disrupting the balance between security imperatives and civil liberties.

Conclusion

The Maharashtra Special Public Security Bill reflects the complex challenge of safeguarding national security while upholding democratic freedoms. Any future enactment must incorporate judicial oversight, clearer definitions, and proportionate safeguards to ensure that the fight against extremism does not erode the fundamental rights enshrined in the Constitution.

India’s Reinvigorated Outreach to the Global South

  • 14 Jul 2025

In News:

India’s foreign policy has witnessed a dynamic recalibration with Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s expansive visit to Brazil, Ghana, Trinidad & Tobago, Argentina, and Namibia. While participation in the BRICS Summit in Rio de Janeiro was central, the broader aim was to deepen India’s leadership role within the Global South — a diverse group of developing nations in Asia, Africa, Latin America, and Oceania.

Reclaiming Leadership in the Global South

India has long championed the cause of the Global South, grounded in its non-aligned foreign policy legacy and postcolonial solidarity. This identity was rejuvenated through:

  • Hosting two Voice of the Global South Summits (2023, 2024), giving a platform to over 125 developing countries.
  • Advocating for and securing African Union’s permanent membership in the G20 during its presidency, symbolizing India’s commitment to an inclusive global governance architecture.

These initiatives portray India as a bridge between the Global North and South, positioning itself as a leader that represents the interests of the voiceless in multilateral forums.

Diplomatic Course Correction: The Gaza Challenge

India’s explicit support for Israel during the Gaza conflict (post-October 7, 2023) triggered discomfort among many Global South countries, especially in the Arab and African regions that strongly support the Palestinian cause. Consequences included:

  • India’s defeat to Pakistan in the UNESCO Executive Board Vice-Chair election.
  • Limited engagement from key Global South nations in the Second Voice of the Global South Summit.

Recognizing these diplomatic setbacks, India recalibrated its stance. At the BRICS Foreign Ministers’ Meeting (2024) and the 2025 Rio BRICS Summit, India joined in expressing grave concern over Israeli military operations in Gaza and condemned strikes on Iran, signaling a return to its balanced, multivector diplomacy.

Strategic Gains at BRICS: Securing Core Interests

India also used the BRICS platform to secure vital national interests. The BRICS Leaders’ Declaration condemned the Pahalgam terror attack in Kashmir and called for combating terrorism, including cross-border terror financing. This was diplomatically significant, given:

  • China’s prior reluctance to name Pakistan-based terror actors.
  • BRICS’ growing relevance in shaping global narratives.

India’s success in inserting its security concerns into multilateral dialogue marks a maturing assertiveness in diplomacy.

Countering China, Offering Alternatives

India’s proactive outreach also serves to counter China’s rising influence in the Global South. Unlike Beijing’s Belt and Road Initiative, India emphasizes:

  • Transparent, demand-driven development assistance.
  • Capacity-building and digital partnerships.
  • Ethical, sustainable models of cooperation.

Through initiatives like International Solar Alliance, Digital Public Infrastructure partnerships, and humanitarian aid, India offers a democratic, credible alternative to Chinese financing and infrastructure diplomacy.

Conclusion:

India’s current foreign policy trajectory reflects a delicate balancing act—protecting strategic partnerships with global powers while retaining the trust of fellow developing nations. As global multipolarity deepens, India’s role as a consensus builder, ethical voice, and pragmatic actor will shape its success in becoming the leading voice of the Global South.

UNFCCC and the Crisis of Credibility in Global Climate Governance

  • 13 Jul 2025

In News:

The United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), signed in 1992 at the Earth Summit in Rio de Janeiro and enforced from 1994, is the central international treaty to combat climate change by limiting greenhouse gas emissions. With 198 member countries and an annual Conference of the Parties (COP), the UNFCCC provides the primary forum for negotiating global climate action. However, in recent years, its credibility has come under scrutiny due to persistent inaction, structural inefficiencies, and failure to deliver climate justice—particularly for developing nations.

The Credibility Crisis: Key Concerns

A major source of discontent is the failure of developed countries to meet both emission reduction targets and financial commitments under the Paris Agreement and earlier protocols. Vulnerable nations—especially small island developing states (SIDS) and low-income countries—have raised concerns over exclusion from critical negotiations, lack of accountability from wealthier nations, and limited progress on equity and justice.

The withdrawal of the United States from the Paris Agreement during the Trump administration further damaged trust in the multilateral climate process, reinforcing perceptions of the UNFCCC as an ineffective and increasingly irrelevant institution.

Bonn Meeting and Brazil’s Role Ahead of COP30

The mid-year climate talks in Bonn (June 2025) aimed to restore faith in the negotiation process ahead of COP30, to be hosted by Brazil. Brazil has taken an active leadership role by proposing a comprehensive 30-point reform agenda, seeking to make negotiations more inclusive, transparent, and results-oriented.

Proposed Structural Reforms

Key reform suggestions emerging from Brazil and other stakeholders include:

  • Streamlining negotiation procedures by eliminating repetitive agenda items, reducing negotiation time, and capping delegation sizes to prevent overcrowding and domination by rich nations.
  • Restricting host eligibility: Proposals advocate barring countries with poor climate records—particularly fossil fuel-reliant nations—from hosting COPs. This follows criticism over COP28 (UAE) and COP29 (Azerbaijan).
  • Mainstreaming climate discourse across other international platforms, such as the UN General Assembly, IMF, and multilateral banks, to enable faster action through complementary mechanisms.

The Unmet Climate Finance Pledge

Climate finance remains the most contentious issue. Under the Paris Agreement, developed countries had pledged $100 billion per year by 2020 to support climate action in developing countries. However, at the Baku (COP29) meeting, a new proposal of $300 billion per year starting 2035 fell far short of the actual requirement—estimated at $1.3 trillion annually.

Developing countries, especially BRICS and G77, have demanded urgent action to define a new climate finance goal. They stressed the need for finance to be predictable, equitable, and accessible to all vulnerable nations.

Role of Civil Society and Observers

There is growing demand from civil society organizations and observer groups for reforms to ensure greater transparency, restrict the influence of fossil fuel lobbies, and democratize the negotiation process.

Conclusion

While significant reforms may face resistance due to entrenched geopolitical and economic interests, Brazil’s proactive approach marks a turning point. If supported, these efforts could rejuvenate the UNFCCC process by embedding inclusivity, accountability, and justice at its core—essential for addressing the escalating global climate crisis.

Tamil Nadu’s TB Death Prediction Model

  • 12 Jul 2025

In News:

Tamil Nadu has become the first Indian state to integrate a predictive model for tuberculosis (TB) deaths into its State TB Elimination Programme. This initiative, in partnership with the Indian Council of Medical Research’s National Institute of Epidemiology (ICMR-NIE), marks a significant step in India’s public health innovation, aimed at reducing TB-related mortality through data-driven, early intervention strategies.

The model has been embedded within the existing TB SeWA (Severe TB Web Application) platform, launched under the state’s Tamil Nadu Kasanoi Erappila Thittam (TN-KET), a differentiated care initiative operational since 2022. It enables real-time triaging and prioritisation of severely ill patients at the time of diagnosis, improving early access to hospital care—a crucial step, as over 70% of TB deaths occur within the first two months of treatment.

How the Predictive Model Works

The model is based on five triage indicators:

  • Body Mass Index (BMI)
  • Pedal oedema (foot/ankle swelling)
  • Respiratory rate
  • Oxygen saturation
  • Ability to stand without support

Healthcare workers input these variables into the TB SeWA app, which calculates a predicted probability of death, ranging from 10% to 50% for severely ill patients. For those not flagged, the risk ranges between 1% and 4%. This objective risk estimate empowers frontline health workers to make urgent and informed decisions about hospital admission and care.

Data used for model development included nearly 56,000 TB patients diagnosed in Tamil Nadu’s public health facilities between July 2022 and June 2023. Notably, 10–15% of adults with TB in the state were found to be severely ill at diagnosis. The model's predictive accuracy has been validated as equivalent to the national Ni-kshay portal, which captures a broader range of data but with a delay of up to three weeks—often too late for timely intervention.

Implementation and Impact

The model is now functional across all 2,800 public health facilities in Tamil Nadu, from Primary Health Centres to Medical Colleges. The average time from diagnosis to hospital admission is already around one day, but delays of 3–6 days still occur in about 25% of cases. By introducing objective, real-time risk assessment, the model aims to eliminate such delays and further reduce early TB deaths.

The TN-KET initiative has shown promising results: nearly two-thirds of districts have documented reduced mortality and losses in the TB care cascade. Tamil Nadu remains the only Indian state to systematically record and act upon these five triage variables at the point of diagnosis.

National and Global Relevance

India carries the highest TB burden globally, with two TB-related deaths every three minutes, according to the WHO. Tamil Nadu’s model aligns with global findings, such as those from Ethiopia, identifying low body weight, age, and TB/HIV co-infection as key mortality predictors. Addressing these early improves outcomes significantly.

This innovation presents a scalable, replicable model for other Indian states and developing nations striving to eliminate TB by 2030, in line with WHO’s End TB Strategy and India’s National Strategic Plan.

The Role of ‘Invisible’ Trade in India’s Foreign Exchange Earnings

  • 11 Jul 2025

In News:

India's foreign trade landscape has undergone a fundamental transformation, with "invisible" trade—comprising services exports and private remittance inflows—emerging as a dominant contributor to foreign exchange earnings. Traditionally, international trade is associated with the export and import of physical goods. However, the increasing weight of intangibles such as services and remittances has positioned India as the “office of the world” in contrast to China’s role as the “factory of the world.”

Trends in India’s Visible vs Invisible Trade

India’s merchandise exports rose from $66.3 billion in 2003–04 to $456.1 billion in 2022–23, before dipping slightly to $441.8 billion in 2024–25. While goods exports have fluctuated with global economic cycles, invisibles have exhibited resilient and consistent growth.

  • Invisible receipts increased from $53.5 billion in 2003–04 to $233.6 billion in 2013–14, and further to $576.5 billion in 2024–25.
  • In 2024–25, invisible receipts exceeded merchandise exports by $135 billion, reversing the trend from a decade earlier.

Composition of Invisible Earnings

  • Services Exports:
    • Valued at $387.5 billion in 2024–25, up from $26.9 billion in 2003–04.
    • Software services remain dominant ($180.6 billion), but significant growth has also been noted in business, financial, and communication services ($118 billion).
  • Private Transfers (Remittances):
    • Amounted to $135.4 billion in 2024–25, up from $22.2 billion in 2003–04.
    • Reflects the export of Indian human capital, with inflows from expatriates, especially in the Gulf and North America.

Economic Significance

  • Current Account Management: India’s merchandise trade deficit ballooned to $287.2 billion in 2024–25, but this was substantially offset by a net invisible surplus of $263.8 billion, keeping the current account deficit at $23.4 billion, lower than 2013–14 levels.
  • Geopolitical Immunity: Invisible earnings have remained relatively insulated from global trade tensions, protectionist tariffs, and geopolitical shocks. Unlike goods trade, services have not been significantly impacted by events such as the pandemic or global conflicts.
  • Limited Policy Support, High Impact: Despite minimal reliance on FTAs, tariff negotiations, or production-linked incentives, invisibles have flourished—highlighting the natural comparative advantage India holds in the global services and remittances market.

Comparison with China

China recorded a merchandise trade surplus of $768 billion in 2024, but faced a deficit of $344.1 billion on the invisibles front. In contrast, India posted a services trade surplus of $188.8 billion, emphasizing its role as a global service hub rather than a manufacturing powerhouse.

Conclusion

India’s foreign trade narrative has shifted decisively towards intangible exports. With robust growth in services and remittances, invisibles have become the invisible hand stabilizing India’s external sector. For sustained macroeconomic resilience, policymakers must now institutionalize support for the services sector, facilitate human capital mobility, and leverage digital infrastructure to enhance India’s global footprint in knowledge-based trade.

AI-Based Warfare in the Agentic Age

  • 10 Jul 2025

In News:

Artificial Intelligence (AI) is transforming the character of warfare, ushering in an era of “agentic warfare—a paradigm where autonomous systems, not humans, are poised to dominate the battlefield. Military strategies today increasingly hinge on multi-domain operations (MDO) involving land, air, sea, cyber, and space, where decision-making speed, precision, and adaptability are crucial. AI is central to enabling this shift—but it comes with a critical caveat: energy dependency.

AI and the New Battlefield

Modern warfare relies on Big Data analytics, machine learning (ML), predictive modelling, and natural language processing (NLP)—tools that demand not only computational power but also massive energy inputs. Countries like China have already made significant strides. Its military, the People’s Liberation Army (PLA), is actively integrating AI into combat functions under the doctrine of “intelligentised warfare.” Applications range from automating artillery systems to deploying generative AI-enabled drones for radar targeting.

China’s AI developments, such as the DeepSeek model, complement battlefield deployments. Of concern to India is China’s support to Pakistan’s Centre of Artificial Intelligence and Computing (PAIC), which focuses on Cognitive Electronic Warfare. India’s Deputy Chief of Army Staff, Lt Gen Rahul Singh, revealed that Pakistan possibly used real-time Chinese satellite intelligence and AI analytics during Operation Sindoor.

India’s Response and Gaps

India was an early mover, establishing the DRDO’s Centre for Artificial Intelligence and Robotics (CAIR) in 1986 to develop AI applications for target recognition, navigation, logistics, and mine detection. However, the pace of deployment has lagged, especially compared to China. Lt Gen Amardeep Singh Aujla underlined the increasing intensity of warfare, emphasizing the necessity of C4ISR (Command, Control, Communications, Computers, Intelligence, Surveillance and Reconnaissance) and civil-military fusion to enhance readiness.

The Centre for Joint Warfare Studies (CENJOWS) notes the growing global use of AI in weapon systems, battlefield simulation, and cyber defence. For instance, Ukraine’s AI-powered drones have autonomously struck Russian oil facilities. Israel’s “Lavender” AI system has reportedly identified over 37,000 Hamas targets, exemplifying the real-time integration of AI in warfare.

Energy: The Hidden Backbone

While AI’s capabilities are evident, its energy appetite is equally significant. AI infrastructure—data centres, servers, and cooling systems—requires vast amounts of electricity, often from stable sources like nuclear energy. India’s current installed nuclear capacity (~7.5 GW) is starkly inadequate when compared to countries like South Korea (over 22 GW), limiting India's long-term AI defence potential.

Kris P. Singh, CEO of Holtec International, argues that Small Modular Reactors (SMRs) placed near AI data hubs could be the solution. He proposes co-locating SMRs with military or strategic data centres to power next-generation capabilities like drones, smart soldiers, and robotics. India's past policy to limit thermal power and insufficient storage in renewable energy has created grid instability, further compounding the challenge.

Way Forward

To remain strategically relevant, India must:

  • Accelerate AI adoption in defence through institutional synergy and private sector participation.
  • Invest in energy infrastructure, particularly clean, stable sources like SMRs.
  • Promote indigenous AI R&D, focusing on secure, sovereign data ecosystems.
  • Establish MDO doctrines incorporating AI, space, and cyber capabilities.

In the agentic age, the nation that combines AI mastery with robust energy capacity will define the future of warfare. India’s security strategy must urgently align with this reality.

India’s Emerging Equity Model

  • 09 Jul 2025

In News:

According to the World Bank’s latest estimates, India has emerged as the fourth most income-equal country in the world, registering a Gini Index of 25.5 in 2022–23. This significant milestone places India just behind the Slovak Republic, Slovenia, and Belarus, surpassing many advanced and developing economies in income equality.

This achievement is paralleled by a sharp decline in extreme poverty—from 16.2% in 2011–12 to 2.3% in 2022–23—with over 171 million people lifted out of poverty in the past decade. It reflects the combined impact of sustained economic growth and the Indian state’s proactive welfare architecture.

Understanding the Gini Index and India’s Ranking

The Gini Index measures income inequality on a scale from 0 (perfect equality) to 100 (maximum inequality). With a score of 25.5, India falls into the "moderately low inequality" bracket (25–30), indicating a fair distribution of income. This is in sharp contrast to countries like China (35.7) and the United States (41.8). India's position is particularly noteworthy given its population size and diversity.

Poverty Reduction as a Catalyst for Equality

A key driver of this improved equality has been the drastic reduction in poverty, based on the World Bank’s threshold of $2.15/day (PPP). The decline to 2.3% extreme poverty signals successful poverty alleviation through targeted welfare, representing one of the most remarkable social transitions globally in the last decade.

Government Schemes and Inclusive Interventions

India’s equity gains are not accidental but the result of well-designed and executed social policies, supported by digital infrastructure and targeted delivery.

1. Financial Inclusion and DBT

  • PM Jan Dhan Yojana enabled over 55 crore bank accounts, promoting financial access across rural and urban populations.
  • Aadhaar-linked Direct Benefit Transfers (DBT) reduced leakages, saving ?3.48 lakh crore by March 2023.

2. Health Security: Ayushman Bharat provides ?5 lakh insurance coverage, with over 41 crore beneficiaries enhancing access to secondary and tertiary healthcare.

3. Food Security: PM Garib Kalyan Anna Yojana (PMGKAY) ensured food availability to 80 crore people during COVID-19 and beyond, securing nutrition and resilience.

4. Livelihood Support: Stand-Up India and PM Vishwakarma Yojana support entrepreneurship, skilling and credit access for SCs, STs, women, and traditional artisans.

A Model of Equity-Oriented Growth

India has demonstrated that inclusive digital governance, if integrated with fiscal discipline and political will, can lead to tangible socioeconomic transformation. The convergence of growth, inclusion, and resilience sets a strong foundation for social equity.

A Social Welfare Department official aptly noted, “The Gini Index of 25.5 reflects real change—better access to jobs, food, healthcare, and dignity.”

Global Context and India’s Unique Approach

Unlike Scandinavian countries that rely on entrenched welfare states, India’s equality model stems from scalable digital infrastructure, direct cash transfers, and community-centric schemes. Among 167 countries surveyed, India’s outcome stands as a beacon for other developing nations striving to achieve balanced and sustainable development.

Global Drought Hotspots 2023–2025

  • 08 Jul 2025

In News:

Between 2023 and 2025, the world has witnessed one of the most extensive drought-induced crises in recorded history. According to the UN Convention to Combat Desertification (UNCCD) and the U.S. National Drought Mitigation Center (NDMC), droughts intensified by climate change, El Niño, and poor land and water management are triggering cascading failures in food, water, energy, and socio-economic systems across continents.

A Slow-Moving Catastrophe

Labelled as “slow-moving catastrophes,” these droughts have disrupted the lives of millions across Africa, the Mediterranean, Latin America, and Asia, creating a silent but widespread humanitarian emergency. In Eastern and Southern Africa, over 90 million people face acute hunger. Zimbabwe’s maize production declined by 70% in 2024, while Zambia's Kariba Dam fell to 7% capacity, resulting in 21-hour daily blackouts and the collapse of health and industrial services.

The Mediterranean region faces shrinking agriculture and groundwater reserves. Spain's olive oil production dropped by 50%, leading to price spikes across Europe. In Türkiye, groundwater depletion triggered over 1,600 sinkholes, raising alarm over infrastructure safety and aquifer depletion.

In the Amazon Basin, rivers reached record low levels, killing over 200 endangered dolphins and leaving Indigenous communities without drinking water. The Panama Canal, vital for global trade, saw daily ship transits fall from 38 to 24, forcing rerouting and delaying supply chains. Similarly, Southeast Asia, including India and Thailand, suffered drought-related disruptions in rice and sugar production, affecting global food prices.

Social Disintegration and Vulnerabilities

The report underscores how drought disproportionately affects women, children, and marginalized communities. In Ethiopia, child marriages doubled in drought-hit regions as families exchanged dowries for survival. Zimbabwe reported mass school dropouts due to hunger and sanitation challenges. In Somalia, 4.4 million people now face food crises, with 1.7 million children suffering from acute malnutrition.

India in the Drought Lens

India, though not as severely impacted, faces growing intra-seasonal monsoon variability. River basins like Krishna and Godavari endure recurrent droughts due to groundwater over-extraction, deforestation, and inefficient irrigation. Drought-prone states like Maharashtra, Rajasthan, and Karnataka are witnessing farmer distress, inflationary pressures, and internal migration.

 

Drivers and Consequences

The principal drivers include global warming, unsustainable land use, El Niño amplification, and poor governance. Drought is no longer a mere meteorological event but a multi-dimensional crisis affecting health, education, biodiversity, economy, and social stability. The OECD estimates droughts today cost twice as much as in 2000, with an expected rise of 35–110% by 2035.

Call to Action: Building Drought Resilience

The report calls for urgent global and national action:

  • Early Warning Systems: For real-time drought and impact monitoring.
  • Nature-Based Solutions: Restoring watersheds, adopting drought-resilient crops.
  • Drought-Resilient Infrastructure: Off-grid power, alternative water sources.
  • Gender-Sensitive Adaptation: Empowering women and girls during crises.
  • Transboundary Cooperation: Joint management of river basins and trade routes.
  • Financial Mobilization: Through platforms like IDRA for vulnerable nations.

Conclusion

Droughts are no longer sporadic natural phenomena; they are structural emergencies threatening the planet’s sustainability and human well-being. Without urgent investment in resilience, governance, and international cooperation, these creeping crises could become the defining climate emergency of the 21st century.

Employment-Linked Incentive (ELI) Scheme

  • 07 Jul 2025

In News:

The Government of India has approved the Employment-Linked Incentive (ELI) Scheme with an outlay of ?99,446 crore, aimed at promoting formal employment generation, particularly in the manufacturing sector. Announced in the 2024–25 Union Budget, the scheme is part of a broader employment strategy that includes internships, skill development, and youth engagement initiatives.

Key Features of the Scheme

The ELI scheme, operational from August 1, 2025 to July 31, 2027, targets the creation of over 3.5 crore jobs. Of these, 1.92 crore newly employed individuals are expected to benefit directly. It is being implemented through the Employees Provident Fund Organisation (EPFO).

For eligible new recruits earning up to ?1 lakh/month:

  • EPFO will transfer one month’s EPF wage (up to ?15,000) in two instalments—after 6 and 12 months of continuous service.
  • Part of the incentive will be deposited in a fixed savings instrument, withdrawable later by the employee.

Incentives for employers include:

  • ?3,000 per employee/month for two years for each new employee retained for at least six months.
  • For the manufacturing sector, this benefit may extend into the third and fourth years.

Who Benefits?

The scheme primarily benefits:

  • New entrants into the formal labour market.
  • Labour-intensive sectors, especially manufacturing.
  • Employers incentivized to sustain job creation.
  • Small businesses, if implementation is expanded inclusively.

Industry Response

The industry has largely welcomed the initiative. According to FICCI’s former president, it is an “innovative” step that rewards both employees and employers. The Confederation of Indian Industry (CII) noted its potential to reshape India’s employment architecture.

However, Laghu Udyog Bharati, representing micro and small businesses, emphasized the need to include units with less than 20 employees, which dominate India’s enterprise landscape. Entrepreneurs’ associations also called for simplified and direct reimbursement models linked to verified payroll data, particularly under the MSME Ministry.

Trade Union Perspectives

While the Bharatiya Mazdoor Sangh (BMS) cautiously endorsed the scheme, other central trade unions criticized it for allegedly favoring corporates. They compared it to the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme of 2020, where funds reportedly failed to create jobs and ended up benefiting large firms. Unions have demanded expansion of social security coverage and improved quality of employment, rather than subsidizing private sector wage bills.

Concerns and Challenges

Key concerns include:

  • The role of EPFO, traditionally a custodian of worker savings, now being tasked with implementing a government-funded job creation scheme.
  • Lack of clarity on fund disbursement responsibilities, raising doubts over accountability and oversight.
  • Fear of misuse, given past precedents of incentive leakage.
  • The structural issue of economic slowdown and stagnant worker incomes, which the scheme doesn’t directly address.

Conclusion

The ELI Scheme is a bold intervention in India’s formal employment landscape, combining wage subsidies with retention incentives. However, for it to be truly transformative, it must ensure inclusive coverage, maintain transparency, and be integrated into a broader strategy that enhances domestic demand and quality of employment. As India aims for equitable economic growth, effective implementation and stakeholder trust will be critical to its success.

PM-POSHAN

  • 06 Jul 2025

In News:

The midday meal scheme, introduced a century ago by the Madras Municipal Corporation in 1925, has evolved into a cornerstone of India’s social welfare and education policy. Now known as PM-POSHAN (Pradhan Mantri Poshan Shakti Nirman), the scheme provides cooked meals to students up to Class 8 in government and aided schools. However, despite its proven benefits in enhancing enrolment, retention, and learning outcomes, the scheme continues to face serious implementation challenges across Indian states.

Originally launched nationwide in 1995 as the National Programme of Nutritional Support to Primary Education, the scheme was rebranded as PM-POSHAN for 2021–2026, with shared funding between the Centre and States. Yet, funding shortfalls, delayed disbursements, and logistical bottlenecks have undermined its effectiveness. In states like Kerala and Uttar Pradesh, headteachers report borrowing funds and delaying salaries to cover rising food and fuel costs. Teachers are forced to juggle between administrative duties and managing meals, often without adequate staff or infrastructure.

Tamil Nadu has emerged as a success story with the Chief Minister’s Breakfast Scheme launched in 2022, now reaching over 17.5 lakh students. The state also assesses students’ Body Mass Index (BMI), integrates Anganwadis for early nutrition, and prioritizes public investment in health and education, reflecting the Dravidian model. This has led to a measurable decline in malnutrition and school dropout rates, especially among girls.

In contrast, states like Bihar lag behind, with widespread complaints of mismanagement and food safety lapses. Caste-based discrimination further mars the scheme’s inclusive vision, with reports from both north and south India highlighting segregated seating and removal of cooks from marginalized communities due to social prejudice.

Despite PM-POSHAN’s intended goals, its design often reflects a one-size-fits-all approach, neglecting state-specific challenges. For example, nutrition gardens or IT-based monitoring systems remain tokenistic in under-resourced regions. The uniform allocation norms do not account for price inflation, regional dietary needs, or additional requirements like eggs or milk, leading to nutritional gaps.

Experts argue for a context-sensitive redesign. Dipa Sinha, a development economist, emphasizes that centrally sponsored schemes must account for states’ limited fiscal capacity, especially as most taxes are collected by the Union government. There is a need for increased central assistance and flexibility in fund allocation to match ground realities.

Moving forward, replicating best practices from Tamil Nadu, Kerala, and Odisha, promoting community-level engagement, and allowing NGOs to address psychosocial gaps can help strengthen the programme. Customizing menus based on local needs, ensuring timely fund flow, recruiting adequate staff, and addressing social discrimination are essential to achieve the dual goals of universal education and child nutrition.

Conclusion

PM-POSHAN, though visionary, struggles in its current form. To fulfill its true potential as a tool for social justice and inclusive development, it must shift from being a centrally driven subsidy programme to a locally empowered, child-centric nutrition model embedded within the education system.

A New BHARAT: Establishing India-Specific Parameters for Healthy Ageing

  • 05 Jul 2025

Introduction

As India advances toward becoming a super-aged society by the middle of this century, the focus must shift from merely increasing lifespan to enhancing healthspan—the period of life spent in good health. Recognising this, the Indian Institute of Science (IISc), Bengaluru, launched a pioneering research initiative titled BHARAT (Biomarkers of Healthy Aging, Resilience, Adversity, and Transitions). It aims to map physiological, genetic, environmental, and socio-economic indicators that define healthy ageing in the Indian context.

The Need for India-Specific Healthy Ageing Parameters

Global research in ageing has largely been Western-centric, leading to the development of diagnostic thresholds, biomarkers, and treatment regimes based on non-Indian populations. This lack of contextual relevance often results in misdiagnosis and inappropriate treatments in countries like India. For instance, biomarkers such as cholesterol, vitamin D, or C-reactive protein (CRP) may exhibit different baseline levels among Indians due to genetic, nutritional, and environmental factors, but are often interpreted using Western standards.

Furthermore, while life expectancy has increased globally, the incidence of age-related disorders like Parkinson’s and dementia is projected to rise sharply in India—by 168% and 200%, respectively, by 2050. Thus, there is an urgent need to identify early biomarkers that can predict organ deterioration before the onset of overt disease.

BHARAT Study: Objectives and Methodology

BHARAT is part of IISc’s Longevity India Programme, and seeks to establish a Bharat Baseline—a reference for what is physiologically normal for the Indian population across age groups. It will build a comprehensive, multidimensional database that includes:

  • Genomic biomarkers (genetic predisposition to diseases)
  • Proteomic and metabolic profiles (pathway-level health indicators)
  • Environmental and lifestyle factors (pollution exposure, dietary habits)

Crucially, it acknowledges that chronological age does not always match biological age, and seeks to develop more nuanced, organ-specific age markers that could enable preventive and personalised interventions.

Role of Artificial Intelligence

Given the complexity and volume of biological and lifestyle data, artificial intelligence (AI) and machine learning models are essential tools in this initiative. These technologies will aid in pattern recognition, risk prediction, and simulation of intervention outcomes, ultimately helping researchers select the most effective strategies before launching costly human trials.

Challenges and the Way Ahead

India’s vast genetic, geographic, and socio-economic diversity presents both opportunities and challenges. The BHARAT team faces hurdles such as:

  • Difficulty in recruiting healthy adult volunteers
  • Securing long-term public and private funding
  • Scaling the study to ensure pan-India representation

However, the potential impact is profound. By building an India-specific ageing dataset, BHARAT can influence the development of better diagnostics, public health policies, and preventive healthcare systems for an ageing population.

Conclusion

The BHARAT study marks a critical shift in India’s biomedical research priorities, focusing not only on longevity but on quality of life during ageing. As India prepares to navigate the challenges of demographic transition, initiatives like BHARAT will be instrumental in creating a resilient, inclusive, and health-aware society, rooted in evidence that reflects its own people.

Changing Patterns in Agricultural Output

  • 04 Jul 2025

In News:

The Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI) recently released the “Value of Output from Agriculture and Allied Sectors” report (June 2025), revealing significant structural changes in India’s agricultural production and consumption over the past decade. The data reflects a shift away from staple cereals toward high-value crops such as fruits, vegetables, and spices—mirroring broader socio-economic transformations.

Key Findings: Rise of High-Value Crops

The Gross Value of Output (GVO)—the total value of agricultural production before deducting input costs—highlights changing food habits and production priorities. Between 2011–12 and 2023–24, the GVO of several non-traditional crops rose sharply. For example:

  • Strawberries saw a 40-fold rise in GVO at constant prices (from ?1.32 crore to ?55.4 crore), and nearly 80-fold at current prices.
  • Pomegranate GVO quadrupled to ?9,231 crore.
  • Parmal (parwal) and pumpkin increased by 17 and 10 times, respectively.
  • Mushroom and dry ginger witnessed 3.5x and 285% growth, the latter aided by improved agro-processing infrastructure.

This transformation indicates increasing demand for horticultural and niche crops with higher returns, aligning with government focus on nutritional security and export diversification.

Declining Importance of Cereals

Contrasting the rise of high-value crops is the decline in cereal dominance. The share of cereals in agricultural GVO fell from 17.6% (2011–12) to 14.5% (2023–24). Simultaneously, consumption data shows cereals’ share in urban MPCE dropped from 6.61% to 3.74%, and in rural MPCE from 10.69% to 4.97% over the same period. This trend aligns with Engel’s Law, where rising incomes lead to a shift in spending from staples to diversified food categories.

Rising Animal Product Consumption

The share of meat in agricultural GVO increased from 5% to 7.5%, reflecting higher protein intake as incomes grew. However, its GVO growth (131%) was still lower than that of some horticultural produce like strawberry (4,000%).

Changing Consumption Patterns

Data from the 2023–24 Household Consumption Expenditure Survey (HCES) supports this structural shift. The share of fresh fruits in rural MPCE rose slightly from 2.25% to 2.66%, while in urban areas it slightly declined. Yet, a 2024 study co-authored by Shamika Ravi indicates broader accessibility, with the proportion of rural households consuming fresh fruits increasing from 63.8% to 90.3%, especially among the bottom 20% income group.

Policy and Economic Implications

This transition from staple grains to high-value crops is driven by technological advancements, shifting consumer preferences, nutritional awareness, export potential, and government support for crop diversification. It reflects a move toward a more resilient, market-oriented agricultural system.

However, challenges remain in ensuring equitable access to high-value markets, stabilizing prices, and addressing risks associated with monoculture trends.

Conclusion

The MoSPI data reveals a critical inflection point in Indian agriculture. While traditional staples are declining in prominence, the rise of high-value horticulture and livestock signals both economic opportunity and the need for targeted policy to support inclusive, nutrition-sensitive agricultural growth.

Conserving the Western Ghats

  • 03 Jul 2025

Context:

The Western Ghats, a UNESCO World Heritage Site and one of the world’s eight hottest biodiversity hotspots, stretch across six Indian states—Gujarat, Maharashtra, Goa, Karnataka, Kerala, and Tamil Nadu. Rich in endemic flora and fauna, they play a critical role in influencing the Indian monsoon, regulating climate, and sustaining major river systems like the Godavari, Krishna, and Kaveri. However, this ecologically sensitive region faces growing environmental and governance challenges.

Renowned ecologist Madhav Gadgil has strongly advocated for a community-led conservation model, citing the failures of top-down forest bureaucracy and the neglect of the Forest Rights Act (FRA), 2006. He argues that without empowering local communities, conservation efforts will remain ineffective.

Geological and Ecological Background

The Western Ghats are ancient, formed through Precambrian cratonic uplift and Deccan Traps volcanism over 600 million years ago. The western edge of the Deccan Plateau subsided post-Gondwana breakup, forming the escarpments we see today. Over time, monsoon-fed rivers carved deep valleys, resulting in the current terrain of lateritic plateaus and ridges.

With over 7,400 species—many of them endemic—the region is home to unique ecosystems. Yet, despite its ecological importance, conservation has suffered due to flawed governance, industrial exploitation, and neglect of community rights.

Challenges in Western Ghats Conservation

  • Flawed Forest Governance:Government agencies often rely on outdated and inflated forest data. For instance, Gadgil's 1975 study in Uttara Kannada revealed bamboo stocks were overestimated tenfold to justify resource extraction.
  • Industrial Pollution:Unregulated industries operate in fragile zones. The Grasim Rayon Factory in Kerala discharged mercury into the Chaliyar River, decimating fisheries and affecting tribal livelihoods.
  • Non-implementation of FRA (2006):Despite legal entitlements, Community Forest Rights (CFR) remain unimplemented in most districts, particularly in Kerala and Karnataka.
  • Monoculture Plantations:Replacement of native forests with eucalyptus and acacia has led to biodiversity loss, declining soil health, and reduced pollinator populations, as seen in Wayanad.
  • Forest Fires from Unsustainable Practices:Fire-based tendu leaf collection methods degrade forest cover. For instance, Gadchiroli and Karnataka have witnessed increased fire incidents.
  • Inaccessible Ecological Data:Forest data remains aggregated and delayed. Studies using NRSC and Global Forest Watch have exposed discrepancies in official forest cover claims.

Committee Recommendations

  • WGEEP (2011), led by Gadgil, advocated for Ecologically Sensitive Area (ESA) zoning, Gram Sabha-led conservation, and strict implementation of CFR.
  • The Kasturirangan Committee (2013) diluted these recommendations by reducing ESA coverage and favouring development-centric governance.

Way Forward

  • Implement CFR Provisions: E.g., Pachgaon in Maharashtra demonstrates how CFR-based governance can lead to sustainable bamboo harvesting and fire prevention.
  • Promote Democratic Decentralisation: Empowering Gram Sabhas, as in Kerala’s VSS model, ensures accountability and local participation.
  • Modernise Ecological Monitoring: Tools like Google Earth and Bhuvan offer real-time forest tracking, countering manipulated datasets.
  • Ban Unsustainable Industries in ESA: SC orders on mining bans in wildlife corridors must be enforced, especially in states like Goa and Kerala.
  • Support Biodiversity-Friendly Livelihoods: NTFP-based enterprises, eco-tourism, and agroforestry, like Wayanad tribal co-operatives selling organic turmeric and wild honey, can align conservation with income.

Conclusion

The Western Ghats are central to India’s ecological, hydrological, and cultural stability. Conservation rooted in community empowerment, transparent governance, and ecological integrity is essential. Only a democratic, decentralized, and data-driven model, as envisioned by Gadgil, can secure the future of this ecological treasure.

Statistical Report on Value of Output from Agriculture and Allied Sectors (2011–12 to 2023–24)

  • 02 Jul 2025

In News:

The National Statistics Office (NSO), under the Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation, released its annual publication, Statistical Report on Value of Output from Agriculture and Allied Sectors (2011–12 to 2023–24). This comprehensive report provides granular data on output values across crop, livestock, forestry, and fisheries sectors at both current and constant (2011–12) prices, offering crucial insights into trends, sectoral contributions, and regional dynamics in Indian agriculture.

Growth Trajectory and Sectoral Contributions

The Gross Value Added (GVA) of agriculture and allied sectors at current prices rose by 225%, from ?1,502 thousand crore in 2011–12 to ?4,878 thousand crore in 2023–24. At constant prices, the Gross Value of Output (GVO) increased by 54.6%, from ?1,908 thousand crore to ?2,949 thousand crore during the same period.

The crop sector remained the backbone of the agricultural economy, contributing ?1,595 thousand crore or 54.1% of the total GVO in 2023–24. Within this, cereals and fruits & vegetables together formed 52.5% of the crop output. Notably, paddy and wheat alone accounted for 85% of cereal GVO. Five states—Uttar Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh, Punjab, Telangana, and Haryana—contributed 53% of the total cereal output, with Uttar Pradesh maintaining its top position despite a decline in share from 18.6% to 17.2%.

Shifting Dynamics in Horticulture

The horticulture sector has witnessed dynamic changes. In fruits, banana (?47,000 crore) surpassed mango (?46,100 crore) in 2023–24, breaking mango’s longstanding dominance. In the vegetable group, potato retained its lead, with GVO rising from ?21,300 crore to ?37,200 crore between 2011–12 and 2023–24.

Floriculture emerged as a growing commercial interest, with its GVO nearly doubling from ?17,400 crore to ?28,100 crore. The shifts in leading states in the production of fruits, vegetables, and floriculture underscore regional diversification in agricultural growth.

Rise of Livestock and Allied Sectors

The livestock sector experienced substantial growth, with its GVO nearly doubling from ?488 thousand crore to ?919 thousand crore. While milk remained the dominant product, its share slightly decreased from 67.2% to 65.9%, whereas meat products increased their share from 19.7% to 24.1%.

In the condiments and spices category, Madhya Pradesh emerged as the top contributor with a 19.2% share, followed by Karnataka (16.6%) and Gujarat (15.5%).

The forestry and logging sector saw a moderate increase in GVO from ?149 thousand crore to ?227 thousand crore. Significantly, the share of industrial wood surged from 49.9% to 70.2%, indicating growing commercialization.

Emerging Importance of Fisheries

The fishing and aquaculture sector is becoming increasingly vital, with its contribution to total agricultural GVO rising from 4.2% to 7.0% over the period. While inland fish share declined from 57.7% to 50.2%, marine fish increased from 42.3% to 49.8%. States like West Bengal and Andhra Pradesh witnessed substantial structural shifts in fisheries production patterns.

China-Led Trilateral Nexus: A Strategic Challenge for India

  • 01 Jul 2025

Context:

In a significant development, China recently hosted the first China-Pakistan-Bangladesh trilateral dialogue in Kunming, following a similar China-Pakistan-Afghanistan meeting. These efforts signal Beijing’s strategic push to consolidate its influence in South Asia, creating new geopolitical challenges for India.

Understanding the Emerging Nexus

The trilateral arrangements—China-Pakistan-Bangladesh and China-Pakistan-Afghanistan—are part of China’s broader strategic framework to establish deeper regional roots. China drives the agenda, with Pakistan gaining strategic relevance, while Bangladesh and Afghanistan are drawn in for economic, political, and connectivity incentives.

Motivations Behind the Trilateralism

  • China aims to dilute India’s regional influence, expand the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), and leverage Pakistan to complicate India's neighbourhood strategy.
  • Pakistan seeks Chinese economic and strategic backing to offset India, especially after facing diplomatic isolation globally.
  • Bangladesh and Afghanistan are attracted by Chinese infrastructure investment, diplomatic weight, and development assurances in a multipolar Asia.

Historical Context

  • 1962 Indo-China War: Set the foundation for Sino-Pakistan convergence as a counterweight to India.
  • 1965 Siliguri Strategy: Pakistan attempted to encircle India with support from China, Nepal, and East Pakistan, a strategy echoing today.
  • China’s Shielding at UNSC: Regular blocking of India’s attempts to designate Pakistan-based terrorists, such as Lashkar-e-Taiba operatives, at the United Nations.
  • Operation Sindoor, 2025: Pakistan deployed Chinese drones and radars; Beijing criticized India’s counterstrike, reaffirming its alliance.

Implications for India

  • Security Threats: China-Pakistan cooperation now gains a regional sheen, legitimizing their cross-border strategies, e.g., the Pahalgam attack (2025).
  • Diplomatic Setbacks: China’s increasing footprint in Dhaka and Kabul limits India’s traditional influence.
  • Strategic Encroachment: Enhanced trilateralism boosts BRI's presence in South Asia, undercutting India-led alternatives like BBIN or the Chabahar corridor.

Impact on South Asian Stability

  • Regional Polarization: Smaller nations are forced to balance between India and China, causing strategic fragmentation.
  • Risk of Proxy Conflicts: Chinese cover may embolden Pakistan’s use of cross-border terrorism.
  • Dilution of Regional Forums: SAARC and other platforms may become ineffective under Chinese influence.

Way Forward for India

  • Assert Strategic Redlines: India must clearly articulate consequences for neighbours compromising its sovereignty.
  • Deepen Regional Cooperation: Utilize BIMSTEC, IORA, and the Indo-Pacific frameworks to counterbalance Chinese presence.
  • Economic Diplomacy: Increase targeted investments, credit lines, and market access to offer credible alternatives to BRI.
  • Defence Engagement: Expand military and strategic ties with Bangladesh, Maldives, and Afghanistan.
  • Narrative Building: Promote India as a cooperative, non-hegemonic regional partner to counter Chinese narratives.

Conclusion
The China-led trilateral dialogues mark a recalibration in South Asia’s geopolitical landscape aimed at constraining India’s rise. India’s response must be multifaceted—merging strategic assertiveness with regional diplomacy and economic outreach. A confident and inclusive India can safeguard its interests and lead a stable, multipolar South Asian order.

Foreign Universities in India: A New Era in Higher Education

  • 30 Jun 2025

Context:

India is witnessing a transformative moment in its higher education sector with globally reputed foreign universities preparing to set up campuses within the country. Enabled by the UGC (Setting up and Operation of Campuses of Foreign Higher Educational Institutions in India) Regulations, 2023, and inspired by the vision of the National Education Policy (NEP) 2020, this move could reshape the academic landscape. Locations such as GIFT City (Gujarat) and Navi Mumbai have been identified as early sites for these institutions. As of mid-2025, seven universities from the UK, five from Australia, and one each from the US, Canada, and Italy have initiated or secured regulatory approvals.

Drivers of Foreign University Interest in India

  • Demographic and Economic Potential:India hosts over 40 million students in higher education, with a Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) below 30% (AISHE 2021–22), indicating untapped potential. A growing urban middle class, rising aspirations, and the need for globally competitive education have made India an attractive destination.
  • Global Decline in Student Numbers:Countries in the Global North face declining domestic enrolments due to falling birth rates. In 2023, international students accounted for 22% in the UK, 24% in Australia, and 30% in Canada. Top U.S. universities reported up to 27% international enrolments, underscoring their reliance on overseas students for revenue.
  • Policy Tightening in Host Nations:Visa caps and policy restrictions in Australia, the UK, and Canada have constrained student inflows. Consequently, foreign institutions are exploring in-country campuses in emerging markets like India to maintain their global reach and financial sustainability.

Opportunities and Advantages

  • Academic Diversification: Indian students will gain access to internationally benchmarked curricula, faculty, and research ecosystems without the need to go abroad.
  • Cost-Effective Alternative: For students unable to afford international education, foreign campuses in India provide a more affordable and accessible option.
  • Quality Enhancement: The presence of foreign institutions could push Indian universities to raise academic standards through competition and collaboration.
  • Regional Education Hub: India may also attract students from South Asia and Africa, enhancing its regional soft power.

Challenges Ahead

  • Affordability: Tuition fees at foreign university campuses may still be beyond the reach of average Indian households, potentially limiting their impact to elite segments unless subsidized.
  • Mixed Global Precedents: Similar ventures in China and Southeast Asia have seen varied success, with some facing regulatory and financial hurdles.
  • Regulatory and Cultural Complexities: India’s bureaucratic processes, socio-cultural diversity, and policy uncertainties could pose operational challenges.
  • Modest Initial Scale: In the short term, student intake and institutional presence are expected to be limited, with success depending on market response and adaptability.

Regulatory Framework and Future Outlook

The UGC’s FHEI Regulations, 2023, provide foreign institutions with autonomy in curriculum design, faculty recruitment, admissions, and repatriation of surplus funds. Only top 500 globally ranked universities, or those with exceptional expertise in niche domains, are eligible. These reforms reflect India’s commitment to making higher education globally competitive.

If effectively implemented, foreign campuses can act as catalysts for academic reform, foster global partnerships, and elevate India’s position as an education hub. However, ensuring affordability, equitable access, and academic integrity will be key to long-term success.

Strait of Hormuz Blockade

  • 29 Jun 2025

Context:

The recent approval by Iran’s Parliament to potentially close the Strait of Hormuz, pending a final decision by its Supreme National Security Council, has intensified global concerns about energy security and geopolitical stability. This comes in response to U.S. strikes on Iranian military sites, marking a serious escalation in the Gulf region.

Strategic Significance of the Strait of Hormuz

  • The Strait of Hormuz is a 33 km-wide maritime chokepoint linking the Persian Gulf with the Gulf of Oman and, subsequently, the Arabian Sea. It handles over 25% of global seaborne oil trade, 20% of global oil consumption, and 20% of LNG trade, primarily from Qatar.
  • The geographical location of the strait—falling within Iranian and Omani territorial waters—makes it one of the most sensitive energy corridors globally.
  • The strait’s vulnerability is compounded by its narrow 3 km-wide navigational channels, making it susceptible to blockades, naval mines, missile strikes, or cyberattacks.
  • Historically, Iran has issued such threats without actual closure, even during periods of conflict, largely due to its own dependency on the strait for oil exports, especially to China.

Implications of a Blockade

A complete or even partial blockade could have catastrophic global impacts:

  • Disruption of Global Energy Supply: With no alternative sea route, any disruption would curtaildaily movement of 20 million barrels of oil, causingsharp price spikes.
  • Limited Overland Alternatives: Saudi Arabia’s East-West pipeline (5 million bpd) and the UAE’s Fujairah pipeline (1.8 million bpd) cannot compensate for the loss of Hormuz transit.
  • Higher Shipping and Insurance Costs: Perceived risk increases freight rates, insurance premiums, and logistical expenses globally.

Impact on India

India, the third-largest crude oil consumer, imports over 85% of its oil and 50% of its natural gas. In May 2025 alone, 47% of India’s crude imports passed through the Strait of Hormuz. Disruption would result in:

  • Price Volatility: Even if supplies are not entirely blocked, oil and gas prices will spike, stressing the economy.
  • Macroeconomic Stress: A surge in energy prices could widen the trade deficit, weaken the rupee, reduce forex reserves, and raise inflation.
  • Competitive Pressure: If Iran’s exports to China are blocked, Beijing may seek oil from other producers, increasing global demand and costs, impacting India’s energy budget.

India’s Resilience and Strategic Measures

Despite the vulnerabilities, India has certain buffers:

  • Diversification of Energy Sources: Imports from Russia, the U.S., Africa, and Latin America are not dependent on Hormuz. Russian oil arrives via the Suez Canal or Cape of Good Hope, while Qatar’s LNG also uses alternate maritime routes.
  • Strategic Reserves: India maintains 9–10 days’ worth of strategic oil reserves for emergencies.
  • Government Policy Levers: In case of a prolonged crisis, the government may offer price subsidies for diesel and LPG to contain inflation.

Conclusion

The Strait of Hormuz remains a vital artery of global energy supply and a flashpoint of geopolitical tensions. While India has taken commendable steps toward energy diversification and crisis preparedness, continued diplomatic engagement in West Asia, investments in energy alternatives, and strengthening strategic reserves will be key to mitigating the fallout from any potential blockade.

Fossil Fuel Financing in 2024

  • 28 Jun 2025

In News:

In a stark contradiction to global climate goals, the world’s 65 largest banks increased their fossil fuel financing by $162 billion in 2024, reaching a total of $869 billion, up from $707 billion in 2023, according to the Fossil Fuel Finance Report 2025. This trend threatens to derail global commitments under the Paris Agreement and undermines the International Energy Agency’s (IEA) roadmap to achieving net-zero emissions by 2050.

India’s Position:

Among global lenders, the State Bank of India (SBI) was the only Indian bank featured in the top 65, rising from the 49th to 47th position. SBI’s fossil fuel financing increased modestly by $65 million, taking its 2024 total to $2.62 billion. Cumulatively, between 2021 and 2024, SBI extended $10.6 billion to fossil fuel projects. In contrast, JPMorgan Chase topped the global list with $53.5 billion in 2024 alone.

Despite this, SBI has also signalled intent to transition. It has pledged to become net zero by 2055, and aims to ensure that 7.5% of its domestic advances are green by 2030. As of March 2024, SBI had sanctioned ?20,558 crore in sustainable finance. However, this dual-track financing model raises questions about the coherence of India's green finance agenda.

Global Setbacks and Policy Rollbacks

2024 witnessed a rollback in climate-related financial commitments, particularly in the United States. The withdrawal of the US from the Paris Agreement, scheduled to take effect in 2026, was accompanied by policy shifts like exiting the Net Zero Banking Alliance and the Network for Greening the Financial System (NGFS). Major banks such as Wells Fargo abandoned their net-zero commitments, signaling a broader retreat from climate-aligned finance.

This global trend is no longer confined to North America. European banks, traditionally viewed as progressive, also weakened fossil fuel exclusion policies. The result: a global rise in fossil fuel merger and acquisition financing, which reached $82.9 billion in 2024, up by $19.2 billion from 2023. Although M&As do not directly add infrastructure, they consolidate fossil fuel power at a time when the world urgently needs to pivot to renewables.

Indian Banks and the Coal Dilemma

Indian financial institutions, barring a few exceptions like Federal Bank and RBL Bank, lack explicit coal exclusion policies. According to Climate Risk Horizons, this constitutes a major blind spot. The economics of energy is shifting — renewables and storage are now often cheaper than coal, making continued fossil fuel investments financially and environmentally risky.

Conclusion

The rise in fossil fuel financing reflects a disconnect between climate rhetoric and financial action, threatening the global transition to clean energy. For India, this highlights the need for a coherent climate finance strategy, integrating environmental, financial, and developmental priorities. As a signatory to the Paris Agreement and a G20 economy, India must not only align public finance with green goals but also push for global financial reforms that discourage fossil fuel dependencies and reward sustainable investments.

Rising Participation and Casualties of Women in Left-Wing Extremism

  • 27 Jun 2025

Context:

There has been a sharp surge in the number of women Maoist cadres killed in anti-Naxal operations in Chhattisgarh since 2024. This rise has coincided with the intensification of counter-insurgency efforts under the Ministry of Home Affairs’ (MHA’s) renewed push to eliminate Left-Wing Extremism (LWE) by March 2026.

Behind these numbers lies a disturbing narrative of coercion, indoctrination, gender-based exploitation, and the systemic use of women and children as tools in extremist strategies.

Trends in Women Maoist Casualties (2024–2025)

  • 2024: Out of 217 Maoists killed, 74 were women (~34%)
  • 2025 (till June 20): Out of 195 killed, 82 were women (~42%)
  • Comparison with previous years:
    • 2019: 65 total killed | 17 women
    • 2020: 40 total | 7 women
    • 2021: 51 total | 13 women
    • 2022: 30 total | 9 women
    • 2023: 20 total | 5 women

This data indicates a doubling of women fatalities as a proportion of total casualties in Maoist operations since the launch of targeted operations.

Recruitment Through Coercion: Bal Dastas and Gendered Exploitation

According to the MHA, Maoists have been increasingly recruiting young Adivasi girls and forming “Bal Dastas” (child squads) in Chhattisgarh and Jharkhand. Key observations include:

  • Parental coercion: Many impoverished tribal families are forced to give up their girl children under threats and pressure.
  • Ideological indoctrination: Children are brainwashed to adopt Maoist ideology from an early age.
  • Gendered exploitation: Although the Maoists outwardly reject patriarchy, the representation of women in leadership roles such as the Polit Bureau and Central Committee remains negligible.
  • Use of women as foot soldiers and human shields, exposing them disproportionately to fatal encounters with security forces.

Underlying Issues: Security, Society, and Maoist Strategy

  • Deliberate Alienation Strategy:
    • Maoists systematically attack schools and educational infrastructure.
    • As per MHA, education fosters critical thinking and alternate livelihoods, which are seen as a threat to Maoist influence.
  • Civilian and Infrastructure Loss:
    • Since 2019:
      • 725 civilians killed in LWE violence.
      • 263 incidents of attacks on economic infrastructure recorded.
  • Socio-Economic Backdrop:
    • Lack of education, healthcare, livelihood options, and state presence in remote tribal areas fuel Maoist recruitment.
    • Women and children from these regions become the most vulnerable and easily exploited demographic.

Security Forces' Perspective and Response

  • Initial recruitment of women was largely based on coercion and misinformation.
  • Once inside the Maoist ranks, women face physical, mental, and emotional exploitation.
  • Maoists use women primarily as human shields and expendable foot soldiers.

However, the security forces are increasingly pursuing a sensitive, gender-aware approach, prioritizing:

  • Voluntary surrender schemes
  • Gender-sensitive rehabilitation policies offering:
    • Education
    • Vocational training
    • Healthcare access
    • Social reintegration pathways

Way Forward: A Multi-Pronged Strategy

  • Strengthen Surrender and Rehabilitation Frameworks:
    • Expand socio-economic reintegration schemes tailored for women ex-cadres.
    • Ensure psycho-social counselling, particularly for minors and survivors of exploitation.
  • Enhance State Presence and Welfare Delivery:
    • Accelerate development of infrastructure, education, and healthcare in LWE-affected districts.
    • Promote community policing and tribal leadership in governance processes.
  • Child Protection Measures:
    • Strengthen child protection systems, including monitoring of Bal Dastas.
    • Empower and engage Anganwadi workers, school teachers, and local NGOs in vulnerable zones.
  • Gender-Sensitive Counter-Insurgency Doctrine:Train forces in humane engagement, protection of rights, and de-escalation tactics when dealing with women and child cadres.

India’s Quantum Leap in Secure Communication

  • 26 Jun 2025

In News:

Recently, India marked a major milestone in quantum technology with the successful demonstration of quantum secure communication over free space by IIT Delhi, in collaboration with the Defence Research and Development Organisation (DRDO). This achievement represents a significant step forward in India’s pursuit of quantum cybersecurity, quantum networks, and the future quantum internet, with vital applications in both defence and civilian domains.

What is Quantum Communication?

Quantum communication leverages principles of quantum mechanics, particularly quantum entanglement, to enable secure data transmission. In entanglement, the quantum state of two or more particles (usually photons) becomes correlated such that the measurement of one instantly determines the state of the other—regardless of the distance between them.

Security Advantage: Any attempt to intercept or measure the entangled photons disturbs their state, instantly revealing the breach. This makes quantum communication unbreakable by classical computational means.

Quantum Key Distribution (QKD): The Core Mechanism

Quantum communication is often employed for Quantum Key Distribution (QKD)—a method to securely generate and share encryption keys between two parties. Once both parties obtain identical secret keys via QKD, traditional algorithms (like AES) can be used to encrypt and decrypt actual messages.

There are two main types of QKD:

  • Prepare-and-Measure QKD: Single photons are prepared in specific states and then measured.
  • Entanglement-Based QKD: Pairs of entangled photons are distributed between users; any interception disturbs the entanglement, flagging the intrusion.

IIT-Delhi’s 2025 Breakthrough: Key Highlights

  • Achievement: Demonstrated entanglement-assisted free-space QKD over a distance of more than 1 km at IIT Delhi campus.
  • Secure Key Rate: ~240 bits per second.
  • Quantum Bit Error Rate (QBER): <7%, which is acceptable under current protocols.
  • Setting: Conducted under the DRDO-funded project “Design and development of photonic technologies for free space QKD”, in the presence of senior dignitaries from DRDO and IIT Delhi.

Free-space QKD offers a critical advantage—eliminating the need for laying optical fibres, making it viable in mountainous terrain and congested urban zones.

Previous Achievements by the IIT-Delhi & DRDO Team

  • 2022: India’s first intercity quantum communication link established between Vindhyachal and Prayagraj using commercial dark optical fibre.
  • 2023: Achieved QKD over 380 km using optical fibre with a QBER of 1.48%.
  • 2024: Demonstrated entanglement-based QKD over 100 km using telecom-grade optical fibre.

Significance:

Strategic Applications:

  • Defence Communication: Enables tamper-proof messaging and data sharing during operations.
  • Cybersecurity: Shields critical infrastructure from quantum and AI-based cyber threats.
  • Surveillance Immunity: Makes quantum networks resilient to conventional hacking or surveillance.

Civilian Applications:

  • Banking and Finance: Secure real-time financial data transmission.
  • Telecommunications: Enhances privacy in communication systems.
  • Quantum Internet: Enables ultra-secure networking, distributed quantum computing, and time-synchronised communication.

Quantum Networks and the Road Ahead

India’s long-term goal is to establish a multi-node quantum network capable of secure long-range communication. This includes establishing:

  • Satellite-to-ground QKD links, enabling nation-wide secure key distribution.
  • Urban quantum networks, ensuring secure communication for government and military hubs.

India is drawing inspiration from China’s 4,600 km quantum network and U.S. plans for a quantum internet by the 2030s.

To this end, the National Quantum Mission (NQM) was approved in 2023, with an outlay of ?6,000 crore (2023–2031). It aims to:

  • Develop 20–50 qubit quantum computers.
  • Build quantum communication and sensing technologies.
  • Establish four Thematic Hubs on quantum applications in computing, metrology, communication, and materials.

Institutional Mechanism: DIA-CoEs

The work was conducted under the DRDO-Industry-Academia Centre of Excellence (DIA-CoE) model. DIA-CoEs are collaborative platforms set up in premier academic institutions such as IITs and IISc, focused on developing cutting-edge defence technologies.

There are 15 DIA-CoEs currently operational across India.

Conclusion: India’s Quantum Communication Trajectory

India’s demonstration of free-space quantum secure communication marks a critical leap in strategic technology self-reliance. With continued support through the National Quantum Mission and institutional synergy between academia, industry, and the military, India is well-positioned to emerge as a global leader in quantum-enabled security infrastructure.

Reforming India’s Food and Fertiliser Subsidies

  • 25 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s food and fertiliser subsidy regime has played a critical role in ensuring food security and supporting farm productivity. However, with extreme poverty declining from 27.1% in 2011 to a historic low of 5.3% in 2022, and the combined food and fertiliser subsidy bill exceeding ?3.5 lakh crore in FY26, there is a growing policy imperative to reimagine these subsidies for greater efficiency, fiscal prudence, and long-term sustainability.

The Current Landscape

Food and fertiliser subsidies in India are a mix of direct and indirect support mechanisms. Direct subsidies include schemes like PM-KISAN, while indirect subsidies include low-cost foodgrains under the National Food Security Act (NFSA) and price-controlled fertilisers. As per government data:

  • Food subsidy is budgeted at ?2.03 lakh crore, reaching over 800 million beneficiaries through the Public Distribution System (PDS).
  • Fertiliser subsidy is pegged at ?1.56 lakh crore, driven by rising global prices and a skewed demand for urea.

Challenges in the Current Subsidy System

  • Mismatch Between Poverty and Coverage: Despite poverty falling to 5.3%, 84% of households still possess ration cards, many of whom are no longer poor. This reflects poor targeting and leads to welfare leakages.
  • Nutritional Deficiency in PDS: The PDS remains cereal-centric, primarily distributing rice and wheat, while nutrition insecurity persists due to insufficient supply of pulses, edible oils, and micronutrients.
  • Fertiliser Misuse: The overuse of nitrogen-based fertilisers (particularly urea) has caused an ecological imbalance, deteriorating soil health and reducing long-term farm productivity.
  • Fiscal Constraints: Massive subsidy expenditures are crowding out investments in rural infrastructure such as irrigation, cold storage, and extension services—critical for doubling farmer incomes.
  • Leakages and Ghost Beneficiaries: Despite digitisation and Aadhaar seeding, leakages continue in both PDS and fertiliser channels, with instances like card cancellations in Jharkhand pointing to persistent inefficiencies.

Government Initiatives So Far

  • PMGKAY during COVID-19 extended free foodgrains to NFSA beneficiaries, and has now been merged with NFSA provisions.
  • Digitisation of ration cards and Aadhaar-enabled ePoS machines are being used to plug PDS leakages.
  • Neem-coated urea and the Nutrient-Based Subsidy (NBS) policy aim to reduce misuse and promote balanced fertilisation.
  • Direct Benefit Transfer (DBT) for fertilisers is being piloted to streamline subsidy flows and reduce diversion.

Reform Measures Needed

  • Targeting and Gradation: Use PM-KISAN, SECC, and Aadhaar-linked databases to better identify the poorest 15% households and gradually taper subsidies for others.
  • Digital Food Coupons: Introduce ?700/month digital wallets or coupons for nutrient-rich food purchases (pulses, eggs, milk), improving dietary diversity and nutrition security.
  • Fertiliser Coupons & Price Rationalisation: Introduce fertiliser coupons, deregulate prices, and incentivise eco-friendly inputs like bio-fertilisers and organic compost.
  • Improve Monitoring: Strengthen data triangulation using land records, crop surveys, and income data to reduce inclusion/exclusion errors.
  • Farmer Sensitisation: Communicate the rationale for reforms clearly to farmers to avoid mistrust or resistance, as witnessed during earlier protests.

Conclusion

India’s welfare architecture must evolve with its changing socio-economic landscape. With poverty rates at historic lows, continued universal subsidies are both fiscally unsustainable and inefficient. Smartly targeted reforms in food and fertiliser subsidies are vital for improving nutritional outcomes, restoring soil health, and ensuring optimal allocation of public resources. A calibrated transition to a more efficient, inclusive, and sustainable system will enhance welfare delivery without compromising economic growth.

Reshaping Energy and Geopolitics in West Asia

  • 24 Jun 2025

In News:

The geopolitical landscape of West Asia is undergoing a profound transformation driven by escalating conflicts, realignments of power, and the increasing weaponisation of energy. The Israel-Iran conflict, rising threats to critical maritime routes, and the shifting allegiances of Gulf states are redefining the region’s strategic and energy equations, with direct implications for global stability and India’s national interests.

 

West Asia’s Centrality to Global Energy Security

  • The Gulf region holds over 50% of global proven oil reserves, producing around 33% of the world’s oil and 17% of global natural gas.
  • Despite a global shift to renewables, the world still consumes ~100 million barrels of oil daily, with ~50% used for transport and ~20% for petrochemicals.
  • Natural gas accounts for 23% of global energy consumption, supplying a quarter of global electricity.

 

Geopolitical Flashpoints: Conflict and Energy Disruption

  • Israel’s airstrikes on Iran’s nuclear facilities and Iran’s missile retaliation have heightened the risk of regional war.
  • Iran may block the Strait of Hormuz, through which ~20% of global oil trade passes. Even the threat has increased insurance and freight rates.
    • Charter costs for Very Large Crude Carriers (VLCCs) from the Gulf to China have risen from ~$20,000 to ~$48,000 per day.
  • Iran’s oil exports (~2 million barrels/day) form ~2% of global oil supply, difficult to replace due to limited spare capacity among other producers.
  • Threat of attacks on energy infrastructure by Iran-backed militias adds to regional instability.

 

Strategic Realignments in West Asia

  • Gulf states (Saudi Arabia, UAE, Qatar) are moving toward multi-polar engagements, strengthening ties with China and Russia, and reducing dependence on the US.
  • Historical precedent: The 1973 Arab oil embargo demonstrated the region's ability to influence global politics through oil.
  • Arab monarchies’ reluctance to support Western-backed regime change in Iran stems from fears of regional destabilisation and domestic backlash.
  • Public sentiment in Gulf nations remains strongly pro-Palestinian and anti-Western, adding internal pressures on ruling elites.

 

Weaponisation of Energy as a Strategic Tool

  • The use of oil embargoes or supply disruptions is re-emerging as a geopolitical instrument.
  • Iran could resort to asymmetric warfare or encourage proxy attacks on rival oil facilities, particularly in Iraq (which produces over 4 million barrels/day) and the Gulf.

 

Implications for India

Opportunities:

  • Scope to diversify energy suppliers and enhance strategic petroleum reserves (SPR).
  • India’s position in BRICS and SCO offers diplomatic space to act as a moderating influence.

Risks:

  • 40–50% of India’s energy imports transit through the Strait of Hormuz—any disruption threatens energy security.
  • Surging oil prices can fuel imported inflation, impacting transport, agriculture, and industrial costs.
  • Indian projects like Chabahar Port, the International North-South Transport Corridor (INSTC), and the India-Middle East-Europe Corridor (IMEC) face operational uncertainties.
  • Strain on India’s balanced ties with Israel and Iran, with diplomatic fallout possible.
  • Gulf remittances (a vital source of foreign exchange) may decline if regional conflict escalates.

Conclusion

West Asia’s reconfiguration is a reminder of the enduring nexus between energy and geopolitics. For India, navigating this complex terrain requires strategic autonomy, energy diversification, and robust regional diplomacy. Balancing relations amid shifting alliances, while securing national interests in energy and trade, must remain central to India’s foreign policy calculus.

Panch Parivartan Strategy

  • 23 Jun 2025

In News:

As India approaches its centenary of independence in 2047, the focus on reshaping its educational landscape has gained significant momentum. A noteworthy initiative in this direction is the Panch Parivartan Strategy launched by Vidya Bharati Akhil Bharatiya Shiksha Sansthan under its Vision 2047 roadmap. This five-pronged reform framework aims to redefine Indian education by integrating cultural values, social inclusivity, gender equity, environmental consciousness, and self-reliance.

What is the Panch Parivartan Strategy?

The strategy envisions a transformative shift in the Indian education system through five core components, collectively aimed at holistic nation-building. It seeks to develop not only knowledge and skills but also instill values rooted in India’s civilizational ethos.

1. Samajik Samrasata (Social Harmony)

This component focuses on inclusive education, bridging divides across caste, class, region, and religion. By ensuring that educational institutions become spaces of social integration, it promotes equality and mutual respect—core principles enshrined in the Constitution of India. This aligns with the larger vision of social justice and unity in diversity.

2. Kutumb Prabodhan (Family Value Integration)

Recognizing the family as the primary institution of socialization, this strategy integrates cultural practices such as Matri-Pitri Pujan (reverence for parents) and traditional joint family values into the educational process. The goal is to strengthen inter-generational bonds and instill respect for elders, thereby reinforcing India’s intangible cultural heritage.

3. Paryavaran Sanrakshan (Environmental Protection)

Environmental stewardship is another cornerstone of the strategy. Vidya Bharati has facilitated the planting of over 5.2 lakh saplings, developed 3,400 green campuses, and implemented water conservation practices in more than 1,800 schools. This aligns closely with the principles of sustainable development and promotes ecological consciousness among students, in line with India’s commitments under SDG-13 (Climate Action).

4. Swa (Self-Identity and Self-Reliance)

With a strong emphasis on vocational education, skilling, and rootedness, this pillar nurtures youth empowerment by offering training through ITIs, local crafts, and digital technologies even in remote areas like Kargil and Kiphire. It seeks to instill a sense of Bharatiyata (Indianness) while preparing students to be globally competent. This component supports the Atmanirbhar Bharat Abhiyan, aimed at creating a self-reliant India.

5. Nari Samman (Dignity of Women)

Focusing on girls’ education, leadership training, and self-defence programs, this strategy has already benefited over 14.4 lakh girls. By empowering women through education and capacity-building, it addresses gender disparities and aligns with SDG-5 (Gender Equality), promoting women as key agents of social transformation.

Significance for India@100

The Panch Parivartan Strategy serves as a unique model of value-based, inclusive, and sustainable education, blending modern learning tools (AI, robotics, coding) with India’s traditional wisdom (yoga, Sanskrit, dharmic values). It promotes an education model that is contextually Indian yet globally relevant, echoing the goals of the National Education Policy (NEP) 2020.

In a rapidly changing global order, this initiative represents a bottom-up approach to educational reform, fostering a generation of youth who are skilled, ethical, environmentally aware, and socially responsible—hallmarks of a Viksit Bharat (Developed India).

National Green Hydrogen Mission

  • 22 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s green hydrogen sector stands at a critical crossroads. Once buoyed by global enthusiasm for clean fuels, it now faces export-related headwinds due to geopolitical uncertainties and wavering international policy commitments. In response, India has strategically pivoted toward building a robust domestic ecosystem to ensure long-term energy security and decarbonisation.

National Green Hydrogen Mission

Launched in 2023, the National Green Hydrogen Mission aims to establish India as a global green hydrogen hub. With an outlay of ?19,744 crore, the mission targets the production of 5 million metric tonnes (MMT) of green hydrogen by 2030, along with domestic manufacturing of electrolysers under the SIGHT (Strategic Interventions for Green Hydrogen Transition) programme.

To ensure credibility and transparency, the Ministry of New and Renewable Energy (MNRE) introduced a measurement and certification framework in April 2025 to verify green hydrogen at the production stage. These foundational steps are essential for market integrity, both domestically and internationally.

Export Slowdown: Policy and Geopolitical Challenges

India’s early ambitions to become a major green hydrogen exporter have been hampered by global developments. Projects like ReNew’s green ammonia facility in Odisha face uncertain prospects due to declining international demand. Contributing factors include policy uncertainty in key markets like the United States, where a potential rollback of the Inflation Reduction Act (via the “Big Beautiful Bill”) threatens long-term clean energy investments.

Moreover, European procurement initiatives, such as Germany’s Hintco under the H2Global Foundation, have seen low industry response, reflecting weak investor confidence. In response, India has initiated talks with European ports like Rotterdam and Antwerp, and is pushing for FTA provisions to lower import duties on green hydrogen, aiming to keep future export channels open.

Domestic Market Creation:

Faced with uncertain exports, India is actively cultivating domestic demand. A recent tender for 8 lakh tonnes of green hydrogen received full bids, indicating growing interest from Indian firms. The Solar Energy Corporation of India (SECI) is managing another tender for 7 lakh tonnes, primarily for the fertiliser sector.

Pilot initiatives are also being deployed in sectors such as steel, shipping, and transportation. For example, hydrogen fuel cell buses are being tested in five cities, including Ladakh. Industry experts advocate for mandatory blending in sectors like fertilisers to accelerate adoption.

Cost Competitiveness: The Core Challenge

At present, green hydrogen costs $4–$5 per kg, significantly higher than $2.3–$2.5 per kg for grey hydrogen. A report by CII, Bain & Co., and RMI attributes this to immature supply chains, high capital costs, and limited scale. The report recommends pragmatic interventions such as:

  • Blending green hydrogen into existing grey hydrogen or natural gas systems.
  • Promoting uptake in niche sectors like ceramics and chemicals.
  • Public procurement of green steel to create economies of scale.

Conclusion:

While India’s long-term vision to lead the green hydrogen transition remains intact, current challenges necessitate a strategic rebalancing. Prioritising domestic demand creation, infrastructure development, and cost reduction over near-term exports will be key. If implemented effectively, India may replicate its renewable energy success, positioning itself as a global leader in green hydrogen by the next decade.

The Rising Cost of Imports: A Concern for India's Food Security and Farmers

  • 21 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s increasing dependence on imports of pulses and edible oils has raised serious concerns about agricultural sustainability, trade deficits, and farmer welfare. Despite policy claims of self-reliance in agriculture, recent trends highlight structural imbalances in domestic production and pricing mechanisms, especially for pulses and oilseeds.

Farmers at the Receiving End

Farmers cultivating pulses and oilseeds, such as moong, chana, masoor, and soyabean, are struggling due to poor price realization and lack of systematic procurement at Minimum Support Prices (MSP). Rao Gulab Singh Lodhi, a farmer from Madhya Pradesh, harvested 90 quintals of moong in summer 2025. Despite an MSP of ?8,682/quintal, he had to sell his produce in the open market at ?6,000/quintal due to the absence of procurement infrastructure. Soyabean prices, too, are well below MSP, selling at ?4,100–4,200/quintal against an MSP of ?5,328 (for 2025–26).

Unlike rice and wheat, for which procurement is extensive and assured, pulses and oilseeds lack institutional support, even in regions where agro-climatic conditions favour their cultivation. This discourages farmers from growing these critical crops, despite using high-yielding and climate-resilient varieties.

Pulses: From Self-Reliance to Import Surge

India witnessed a record 7.3 million tonnes (mt) of pulses imports worth $5.5 billion in 2024–25, surpassing the previous high of 6.6 mt in 2016–17. This comes after years of reduced imports, thanks to improved domestic production which had peaked at 27.3 mt in 2021–22.

However, the El Niño-induced drought in 2023–24 brought down production to 24.2 mt, leading to higher retail inflation in pulses and prompting duty cuts on imports. While these imports helped control prices—with CPI inflation in pulses falling to –8.2% by May 2025—they also depressed mandi prices. In Maharashtra, arhar and chana are currently trading below MSPs, impacting farmer incomes.

Major pulse imports in 2024–25 included:

  • 2.2 mt of yellow/white peas (Canada, Russia),
  • 1.6 mt of chana (Australia),
  • 1.2 mt each of arhar and masoor (Africa, Canada, Australia),
  • 0.8 mt of urad (Myanmar, Brazil).

Edible Oils: Worsening Import Dependency

India’s vegetable oil imports more than doubled in a decade—from 7.9 mt in 2013–14 to 16.4 mt in 2024–25. In value terms, imports jumped from $7.2 billion to $20.8 billion, driven partly by global supply disruptions (e.g., Russia-Ukraine war) and high domestic consumption.

India now imports over 60% of its edible oil needs, with palm (7.9 mt), soyabean (4.8 mt), and sunflower oil (3.5 mt) forming the bulk. In May 2025, CPI inflation for vegetable oils stood at 17.9%. In response, the Centre slashed import duties on crude palm, soyabean, and sunflower oil from 20% to 10%, reducing the overall tariff to 16.5%.

While the move may lower consumer prices, industry bodies like the Soyabean Processors Association of India have warned it will "flood the market with cheap imports", making domestic oilseed cultivation less viable. Farmers may shift to alternative crops in the coming kharif season, further weakening India’s self-sufficiency goals.

Conclusion

India’s growing import reliance for essential food commodities like pulses and edible oils, coupled with poor farm-level price realization and weak procurement systems, undermines the objectives of food security and self-reliance. Sustainable import substitution must be driven by robust domestic production incentives, fair pricing mechanisms, and resilient procurement frameworks—especially for non-cereal crops.

Why Governments Revise GDP Base Year and Why India’s 2026 Revision Matters

  • 20 Jun 2025

Context:

The Gross Domestic Product (GDP) is the most critical metric used to measure the size and performance of a country’s economy. The "base year" is the reference year against which future GDP growth is calculated. India’s current GDP base year is 2011–12. The government, through the Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI), is now preparing to revise it to 2022–23, with the updated series to be released in February 2026.

Why GDP Base Years are Revised

Base year revisions are necessary to reflect structural changes in the economy, incorporate improved and updated data sources, and align with global statistical standards. GDP calculation, by its definition—the market value of all final goods and services produced in an economy—requires accurate, timely, and sectorally-relevant data. However, India’s economy evolves rapidly, particularly with the expansion of the services sector and changes in consumption, production, and labour patterns.

Past revisions (seven since 1948-49) reflect efforts to modernize methodology and include newer data sources, such as the shift from decennial Census-based workforce estimates to five-yearly Employment-Unemployment Surveys by the NSSO. This aligns with the National Statistical Commission’s recommendation of rebasing economic indices every five years.

The last revision occurred in 2015 (base year changed to 2011–12), following which methodological changes attracted controversy. Experts, including former Chief Economic Advisor Arvind Subramanian, argued that the revised methodology overestimated India’s GDP growth, especially in manufacturing, due to reliance on corporate database MCA-21 over the traditional Annual Survey of Industries.

Why the 2026 Revision Is Crucial

The 2026 revision comes after India missed a base year update in 2017–18 due to data-related concerns. Two key surveys—the Consumer Expenditure Survey (CES) and the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS)—faced credibility and methodological challenges. The 2017-18 CES suggested rising poverty, while the PLFS showed a 45-year high in unemployment—trends contrary to government narratives. These issues led to scrapping the proposed 2017–18 base year.

Additionally, disruptive policy changes like demonetisation (2016) and the rollout of GST (2017), followed by the COVID-19 pandemic, meant the following years were not "normal" reference points. The 2022–23 base year is likely to mark the first post-pandemic stable year suitable for a revised series.

This revision is especially significant as India is poised to become the world’s third-largest economy by nominal GDP. At such a juncture, the quality, accuracy, and global credibility of GDP data will directly influence investor confidence, credit ratings, and policymaking.

The base year revision will also extend to other indicators: the Index of Industrial Production (IIP) will be revised to 2022–23, and the Consumer Price Index (CPI) to 2023–24. These changes ensure that inflation and industrial output metrics remain reflective of present-day consumption and production structures.

Conclusion

Revising the GDP base year is not merely a technical exercise—it is central to economic governance. The upcoming 2026 revision must restore faith in India's statistical systems, offer a transparent methodology, and align with international best practices. Its credibility will shape India’s economic narrative for the decade to come, both domestically and on the global stage.

India’s uneasy balancing act in the Bay of Bengal

  • 19 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s engagement in the Bay of Bengal is increasingly being shaped by the intersection of strategic priorities and economic imperatives. While New Delhi seeks to position itself as the regional integrator and promoter of cooperative regionalism, recent developments — particularly in relation to Bangladesh — underscore the challenges of maintaining this balance.

 

At the surface, India’s maritime and port infrastructure along the eastern seaboard has seen considerable progress. Cargo throughput at Visakhapatnam, Paradip, and Haldia has steadily risen. Initiatives like the Sagarmala Programme and coastal shipping incentives have doubled cargo movement on the east coast in the last decade. The signing of the BIMSTEC Maritime Transport Cooperation Agreement in early 2025 further aims to harmonise customs procedures and reduce port-related frictions.

 

Yet, India’s decision to withdraw the transshipment facility granted to Bangladesh in April 2025, which had enabled Dhaka to route exports through Indian ports to third-country destinations, sparked concern. While Indian officials cited logistical congestion, many in Bangladesh interpreted the move as politically motivated — possibly in response to Dhaka’s growing engagement with China and a speech by a Bangladeshi leader in Beijing framing India’s northeast as “landlocked” and dependent on Bangladesh.

 

This decision, followed by India’s restrictions in May 2025 on the import of seven Bangladeshi product categories via land ports, has fueled bilateral tensions. These developments have particularly impacted Bangladesh’s ready-made garment sector, which constitutes over 85% of its export earnings and had increasingly relied on Indian ports for efficiency. New routing requirements via Kolkata or Nhava Sheva have added delays and costs, weakening the trade facilitation narrative India has long championed.

 

While Bangladesh has asserted its regional role by diversifying trade partners — including reopening maritime trade with Pakistan — these are sovereign choices. India’s use of trade access as a signaling mechanism, if perceived as coercive, risks undermining the credibility of the neutral and rules-based regional architecture it seeks to build under BIMSTEC.

 

This is significant beyond bilateral ties. Regional actors like Myanmar, Sri Lanka, Bhutan, and Thailand observe India's actions closely. If India's trade facilitation appears contingent on political alignment, smaller states may opt to hedge or diversify partnerships, potentially weakening India’s centrality in the Bay of Bengal order.

 

India remains the region’s best-equipped actor in terms of port capacity, connectivity, and logistics infrastructure, giving it a leadership edge. However, credibility and consistency are equally vital. Without a clear separation between economic cooperation and strategic messaging, India’s regional ambitions risk being derailed.

 

To restore balance, India could consider reinstating the transshipment facility under a rules-based framework, ensuring transparency and predictability in trade logistics. This would reassure neighbours, revive trust, and reinforce India’s image as a stable anchor in a geopolitically dynamic region.

The Bay of Bengal is at a crossroads. It can evolve into a vibrant economic corridor between South and Southeast Asia, or descend into a fragmented arena of mistrust. India’s choices today will determine whether regional cooperation remains the cornerstone of its foreign policy — or becomes another casualty of strategic competition.

 

India’s Aviation Safety Oversight: Global Recognition Amid AI-171 Crash Investigation

  • 18 Jun 2025

In News:

The recent crash of Air India flight AI-171 in Ahmedabad, claiming 241 lives, marks the deadliest aviation accident in India in over a decade. As investigations proceed, the spotlight is on India’s aviation safety standards and regulatory preparedness, particularly the role of the Directorate General of Civil Aviation (DGCA) and India’s standing in global aviation safety audits.

India has received commendable recognition from two premier global aviation oversight bodies: the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) and the US Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). These ratings assume greater relevance now, as the Aircraft Accident Investigation Bureau (AAIB) leads the probe into the Air India crash, in coordination with international stakeholders.

ICAO’s Positive Evaluation of India’s Aviation Oversight

In its 2022 audit under the Universal Safety Oversight Audit Programme (USOAP), the ICAO rated India’s overall Effective Implementation (EI) score at 85.65%, a sharp improvement from 69.95% in 2018. India outperformed the global average across all eight USOAP parameters—legislation, organisation, licensing, operations, airworthiness, accident investigation, air navigation services, and aerodromes.

In two critical areas, India scored remarkably high:

  • Operations: India scored 94.02%, compared to the global average of 72.28%, and even surpassed the US (86.51%) and China (90%).
  • Airworthiness: India achieved 97.06%, again ahead of the US (89.13%) and China (94.83%).

These ratings reflect significant reforms in civil aviation governance and oversight mechanisms. India’s regulatory capabilities are aligned with ICAO protocols, demonstrating strong institutional capacity to manage operational safety and technical compliance in aviation.

FAA's Endorsement: Retaining Category 1 Status

Further affirming India’s safety standards, the FAA retained India’s Category 1 status in April 2023 after a comprehensive audit in 2021 of DGCA’s oversight in aircraft operations, airworthiness, and personnel licensing. This classification means that India complies with international safety norms under the Chicago Convention and allows Indian carriers to expand operations to the US and enter into code-share agreements with American airlines.

The FAA acknowledged DGCA’s consistent improvement and commitment to safety, especially considering India’s rapid aviation growth—it is the world’s third-largest domestic aviation market and the fastest-growing among major economies.

Multinational Collaboration in Crash Investigation

In the wake of the AI-171 crash, a multi-agency probe has been launched. The AAIB, as per ICAO norms, is leading the investigation. The US National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB) and the UK’s Air Accidents Investigation Branch (AAIB-UK) are involved due to the aircraft’s American origin (Boeing), and the presence of British citizens onboard. Boeing and engine manufacturer GE will also assist in the investigation, adhering to ICAO’s investigation protocols.

Conclusion

India’s strong global safety ratings by ICAO and FAA underscore the DGCA’s enhanced regulatory performance and the country’s growing credibility in civil aviation safety. However, the tragic AI-171 crash serves as a reminder that even well-rated aviation systems must remain vigilant, responsive, and transparent—especially in post-crisis investigations.

Centre’s Push for Forest Rights Act Implementation

  • 17 Jun 2025

In News:

The Forest Rights Act (FRA), 2006, was enacted to address the historical injustice faced by Scheduled Tribes (STs) and Other Traditional Forest Dwellers (OTFDs) by recognising their rights over forest land and resources. Its implementation, for nearly two decades, has been the sole responsibility of State governments. However, in a major policy shift, the Union government has begun funding support structures to aid its implementation through the Dharti Aaba Janjatiya Gram Utkarsh Abhiyaan (DAJGUA), launched in October 2024.

DAJGUA and Structural Support for FRA

For the first time, the Ministry of Tribal Affairs has sanctioned 324 district-level and 17 State-level Forest Rights Act (FRA) cells across 18 States and Union Territories. These cells aim to facilitate, not replace, the statutory process mandated under the FRA. The funding is routed through Grants-in-Aid General, with a budget allocation of ?8.67 lakh per district cell and ?25.85 lakh per State-level cell. Operational control rests with State Tribal Welfare Departments.

States like Madhya Pradesh (55 cells), Chhattisgarh (30), Telangana (29), Maharashtra (26), Assam (25), and Jharkhand (24) have received the highest number of sanctioned FRA cells. Notably, while Madhya Pradesh and Chhattisgarh report low pendency, States like Assam and Telangana have pending claim rates exceeding 60% and 50% respectively.

Mandate and Function of FRA Cells

These FRA cells are designed to support claimants and Gram Sabhas in the technical and administrative aspects of filing claims. Their responsibilities include:

  • Preparing documentation and gathering supporting evidence;
  • Assisting in Gram Sabha resolutions;
  • Digitising land records and maintaining claim status;
  • Facilitating the conversion of forest habitations into revenue villages;
  • Supporting demarcation and record updates.

Importantly, these cells are not empowered to influence the decisions of statutory committees such as Forest Rights Committees (FRCs), Sub-Divisional Level Committees (SDLCs), or District Level Committees (DLCs), which are central to the FRA’s decentralised decision-making framework.

Concerns of a Parallel Mechanism

Despite their limited mandate, forest rights activists and experts express concerns that these cells may create a parallel mechanism outside the FRA’s statutory framework. Critics argue that the responsibilities assigned to the FRA cells—documentation, verification, facilitation—already fall under the statutory roles of the FRCs and other committees. This overlap risks creating confusion at the grassroots level and may dilute the authority of legally mandated bodies.

Furthermore, structural challenges—such as infrequent SDLC/DLC meetings and delays by Forest Departments even after DLC approval—are cited as key reasons for pending claims, which currently stand at 14.45% of the total 51.11 lakh claims filed across 21 States/UTs. Over 42% of the 43 lakh claims disposed of have been rejected, highlighting systemic inefficiencies.

A Cautious Step Forward

While DAJGUA represents a broader tribal welfare initiative involving 25 schemes across 17 ministries, the FRA facilitation component must tread carefully to respect the legal sanctity of the FRA. If implemented transparently and collaboratively, the FRA cells can bridge capacity gaps and support timely disposal of claims.

However, the success of this intervention hinges on maintaining the balance between administrative innovation and legal integrity—ensuring that support structures complement, rather than compete with, the FRA’s decentralised governance.

Israel–Iran Strike 2025

  • 15 Jun 2025

In News:

On June 13, 2025, Israel launched a large-scale military strike on Iran, targeting nuclear and military sites in Tehran. The attack resulted in the deaths of Iran’s Revolutionary Guard chief and two top nuclear scientists, marking a sharp escalation in the long-running shadow conflict between Israel and Iran.

Backdrop: Iran’s Nuclear Programme and Global Concerns

Iran claims its nuclear programme is peaceful, aimed at energy production and medical research. However, international skepticism remains high. The International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) recently declared Iran in breach of its non-proliferation obligations for the first time in two decades, citing a lack of transparency, failure to account for undeclared nuclear material, and enrichment of uranium up to 60% purity, dangerously close to weapons-grade (90%). According to reports, Iran possesses enough stockpiled uranium to build up to nine nuclear weapons, raising alarm globally.

Israel’s Strategic Calculus and the Execution of the Strike

Israel has long opposed Iran’s nuclear ambitions and the 2015 nuclear deal (JCPOA). The June 2025 assault was the culmination of years of covert operations, including the 2020 assassination of Mohsen Fakhrizadeh and earlier strikes on Iran-linked targets. The latest strike, targeting nuclear and missile facilities as well as residences of top scientists and generals, is seen as the most severe blow to Iran since the 1979 revolution.

The collapse of Iran’s regional deterrence network—its so-called “axis of resistance”—following the fall of Syrian President Bashar al-Assad in December 2024 played a critical role. With Syria no longer serving as a strategic corridor between Tehran and Hezbollah, Israel perceived an opportune moment to act.

US Foreign Policy Shift and Trump’s Role

The re-election of President Donald Trump in 2024 introduced a more confrontational posture toward Iran. Although the U.S. initially delayed the planned May strike to explore diplomacy, the failure of talks led to U.S. backing for the June operation, using military pressure as leverage for a new nuclear deal demanding Iran's full disarmament.

Regional Fallout and Global Economic Implications

The strike triggered an immediate 8% rise in global oil prices, exposing energy vulnerabilities across oil-importing nations. Particularly affected is India, which imports over 80% of its crude oil. Though India imports little directly from Iran, it depends heavily on Gulf producers like Iraq, Saudi Arabia, and the UAE, whose exports transit through the Strait of Hormuz—a vital chokepoint now under threat.

Further, disruptions in Red Sea and Suez Canal shipping routes may force Indian exporters to reroute via the Cape of Good Hope, increasing transit times by 15–20 days and pushing shipping costs up by 40–50%.

Market Response and Strategic Concerns

While oil prices are expected to stabilise due to global reserves and supply diversification, gold prices surged above ?1 lakh per 10g as investors moved to safer assets. The broader geopolitical uncertainty may stoke inflationary pressures, affecting global and Indian economic stability.

Conclusion

The Israel–Iran conflict, while regionally contained for now, holds serious global implications—challenging non-proliferation efforts, disrupting energy security, and threatening global economic stability. For India, the crisis underscores the need for diversified energy sourcing, geopolitical agility, and resilient export infrastructure to mitigate such strategic shocks.

Iran’s Non-Compliance with IAEA Safeguards

  • 16 Jun 2025

In News:

In a pivotal move, the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) Board of Governors, recently passed a resolution declaring Iran in breach of its 1974 Comprehensive Safeguards Agreement. This marks the first formal non-compliance declaration since 2006 and signals a possible escalation of Iran’s nuclear issue to the United Nations Security Council (UNSC). The resolution was passed with 19 votes in favour, 3 against (China, Russia, Venezuela), and 11 abstentions.

What led to the resolution?

The IAEA expressed grave concern over Iran’s failure to explain uranium traces found at three undeclared sites—Lavisan-Shian, Varamin, and Turquzabad. These sites, suspected to be part of an undeclared nuclear program until the early 2000s, reflect Iran’s longstanding reluctance to grant the IAEA full access and credible information.

The IAEA resolution cited Iran’s “many failures” since 2019 to provide timely cooperation. This includes Iran’s inability to account for undeclared nuclear material and activities, in violation of its obligations under the Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT) and its 1974 Safeguards Agreement.

IAEA Safeguards and Article XII.C

Under the 1974 Safeguards Agreement, Iran is legally required to:

  • Declare all nuclear materials and maintain detailed inventories.
  • Notify the IAEA about any new nuclear facilities.
  • Allow routine and special inspections and surveillance.

The IAEA’s inability to verify the absence of nuclear material diversion for weaponisation constitutes a major safeguard failure.

The resolution was passed under Article XII.C of the IAEA Statute, which grants the Board powers to:

  • Demand corrective actions.
  • Suspend technical assistance.
  • Notify all member states.
  • Refer the case to the UNSC.

This rare Article has only been invoked six times before—against Iraq, North Korea, Iran (2006), Libya, Romania, and Syria.

Iran’s Response and Regional Tensions

Iran denounced the resolution as “political” and retaliated by:

  • Announcing plans for a new underground uranium enrichment facility.
  • Upgrading centrifuges at Fordow.
  • Placing air defence systems on alert.
  • Threatening “proportional measures” in response to Israeli and Western pressure.

A day after the IAEA resolution, Israel launched preliminary airstrikes on Iranian nuclear sites and declared a state of emergency. Iran reportedly mobilised drones in response, escalating military tensions in the region.

Broader Geopolitical Implications

This development coincides with the October 2025 deadline for the expiration of U.N. sanctions relief under the 2015 Iran Nuclear Deal (JCPOA). The U.S., which exited the JCPOA in 2018, has signaled support for “special inspections” of Iranian sites. Meanwhile, back-channel talks in Oman remain stalled, and the threat of sanctions “snapback” looms large.

The IAEA also maintains $1.5 million worth of peaceful nuclear projects in Iran, including in radiopharmaceuticals and desalination—now potentially at risk.

What lies ahead?

Iran now has a limited window to respond. If it fails to provide adequate clarifications, the Board may escalate the issue to the UNSC, which could result in renewed sanctions or binding resolutions. A follow-up Board meeting and vote is expected in September 2025.

Conclusion

The IAEA’s resolution represents a critical juncture in global non-proliferation diplomacy. It underscores the challenges of verification in the absence of cooperation and the rising tensions in the Middle East nuclear landscape. For India and the world, this raises important questions on nuclear governance, energy diplomacy, and regional stability.

 

Childhood Obesity in India: A Growing Public Health Challenge

  • 14 Jun 2025

Introduction

Childhood obesity has emerged as a serious public health concern in India, mirroring global trends. A recent study places India among the top countries grappling with rising obesity among children. This phenomenon, once limited to affluent sections, is now widespread across urban and semi-urban regions, driven by a complex interplay of dietary, behavioural, genetic, and socio-economic factors.

Understanding the Causes

  • Dietary Shifts and Unhealthy Eating Habits: The increasing consumption of calorie-dense, ultra-processed foods, sugary beverages, and fast food is one of the primary contributors to childhood obesity. Traditional, balanced home-cooked meals are being replaced due to changing family dynamics and time constraints, leading to poor nutritional choices among children.
  • Sedentary Lifestyle and Screen Time: The decline in physical activity among children is alarming. Excessive screen exposure through television, mobile phones, and video games, coupled with a lack of safe outdoor spaces and diminishing emphasis on physical education in schools, has led to a largely sedentary routine among adolescents.
  • Genetic and Medical Predispositions: Genetic predisposition plays a significant role. Children with a family history of obesity are more susceptible. Medical conditions like hypothyroidism and insulin resistance further increase vulnerability.

Consequences of Childhood Obesity

  • Physical Health Risks: Obese children are at an elevated risk of early-onset non-communicable diseases (NCDs) such as Type 2 diabetes, cardiovascular ailments, hypertension, and musculoskeletal disorders. They may also experience early puberty and related hormonal imbalances.
  • Psychosocial Impact: Beyond physical health, obesity in children is linked to psychological distress. Affected children often face bullying, social exclusion, low self-esteem, and are more prone to depression and anxiety. These challenges can persist into adulthood, impacting mental well-being and social functioning.

Preventive Strategies: The Role of Family, Schools, and Policy

  • Parental Involvement and Home Environment
    • Promoting home-cooked nutritious meals over packaged or junk food.
    • Integrating physical activities like walking, yoga, or family sports into daily routines.
    • Educating children on food labels, nutrition, and healthy choices.
    • Involving children in meal preparation and encouraging mindful eating practices.
  • School-based Interventions
    • Making physical education compulsory and structured in the school curriculum.
    • Conducting regular health screenings and awareness campaigns.
    • Promoting healthy food environments in school canteens and classrooms.
    • Organizing workshops on nutrition, mental health, and lifestyle habits.
  • Health Monitoring and Medical Intervention
    • Periodic health check-ups to identify early signs of obesity and related conditions.
    • Early medical and nutritional interventions to prevent progression to severe obesity or associated NCDs.

Policy Imperatives and Way Forward

Given its long-term implications on public health and healthcare burden, childhood obesity must be addressed through a multi-sectoral approach involving:

  • Policy frameworks that regulate food marketing targeted at children, particularly unhealthy snacks and beverages.
  • Urban planning that ensures safe public spaces for physical activity and sports infrastructure in schools.
  • Integration with national health programmes like the Rashtriya Bal Swasthya Karyakram (RBSK) and POSHAN Abhiyan to monitor and support child nutrition holistically.
  • Mass awareness campaigns to de-stigmatize obesity and promote healthy behaviours.

Conclusion

Childhood obesity is no longer a concern confined to individuals—it is a looming public health challenge with intergenerational consequences. If not addressed early, it risks leading to a population burdened by NCDs and compromised productivity. Collaborative action by parents, educational institutions, healthcare providers, and government agencies is critical to reversing this trend and ensuring a healthier future for India’s children.

Mental Healthcare in India

  • 13 Jun 2025

Introduction

Mental health has long been neglected in mainstream healthcare discourse. However, recent developments, especially in the post-pandemic era, have sparked a paradigm shift in both public perception and policy priorities. With the Mental Healthcare Act, 2017 and subsequent directives from the Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority of India (IRDAI), mental health is now legally and practically on par with physical health in India’s insurance ecosystem.

Global and National Context

  • According to the World Health Organization (WHO), mental health conditions affect 1 in 5 adults globally, resulting in over $1 trillion in productivity loss annually.
  • In India, increased awareness and policy changes have led to mental health coverage being integrated into mainstream health insurance.

Policy Milestones and Insurance Evolution

  • Mental Healthcare Act, 2017: A landmark legislation mandating equal treatment of mental and physical illnesses.
  • IRDAI Directives: Instructed insurers to include mental illness in their policy coverage.
  • Health Insurance Trends:
    • Mental health–related claims (for therapy, stress, anxiety medication) have risen by 30–50% over the past 2–3 years.
    • Outpatient Department (OPD) benefits now cover therapy, counselling, and psychiatric consultations.

Demographic and Behavioural Trends

1. Young Adults (25–35 years)

  • Major drivers of insurance adoption for mental health.
  • Key stressors include work-life imbalance, digital overload, and financial pressures.
  • Show preference for app-based therapy and digital mental health platforms.

2. Women

  • Higher uptake of mental health-inclusive policies.
  • Insurance aligned with life-stage challenges (e.g., pregnancy, menopause, caregiving).
  • Reflects increased cultural recognition of women’s emotional well-being needs.

3. Urban-Rural Divide

  • Tier-1 cities account for over 50% of mental health insurance uptake.
  • Better therapy networks, progressive employers, and higher digital literacy.
  • Tier-2 cities showing promising growth in awareness and access.

Workplace Shifts

  • Growing emphasis on mental wellness programs.
  • Initiatives include:
    • Stress management workshops
    • In-house counsellor access
    • Flexible work arrangements
  • Indicates an evolving perception of mental health as integral to employee well-being.

Challenges Ahead

  • Despite broader coverage, utilisation remains low due to:
    • Lack of awareness about existing benefits (e.g., OPD coverage, cashless therapy).
    • Social stigma and low mental health literacy.
    • Accessibility gaps in rural and semi-urban areas.

Way Forward

  • Awareness Campaigns: Promote knowledge of insurance entitlements and available services.
  • Capacity Building: Increase mental health professionals and digital outreach platforms.
  • School and Workplace Integration: Embed emotional literacy and psychological support in institutions.
  • Insurance Product Innovation: Develop simplified, accessible plans tailored to diverse demographic needs.
  • Data Collection and Monitoring: Use claim trends to shape targeted mental health interventions.

Conclusion

Mental healthcare in India is at a pivotal moment. The convergence of legal reform, insurance innovation, and shifting public attitudes is laying the foundation for a more inclusive and responsive mental health system. However, inclusion on paper must translate to accessibility in practice. Bridging this gap requires sustained efforts in awareness, education, and empathetic policy implementation.

Mental health is no longer an afterthought — it is an essential pillar of human well-being and economic productivity.

 

India’s Growing Gig Economy

  • 12 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s gig and platform economy is undergoing a significant transformation, driven by digital technologies, evolving labour market dynamics, and an increasing preference for flexible work arrangements. According to a recent study by the VV Giri National Labour Institute (VVGNLI), affiliated with the Ministry of Labour and Employment, India’s gig workforce is projected to grow to 62 million by 2047, accounting for 15% of the total non-agricultural workforce.

 

This forecast builds on estimates from the 2022 NITI Aayog report, which pegged the number of gig workers at 3 million in 2020, employed across 11 major platform companies. This figure is expected to rise to 23 million by 2030 (7% of the non-farm workforce). Under optimistic scenarios, gig employment could expand to 90.8 million, though external shocks like policy shifts or technological disruptions may cap growth at 32.5 million.

 

The gig economy in India initially found its foothold in ride-sharing and food delivery services. Over time, it has diversified into sectors such as healthcare, education, digital content creation, and professional consulting, indicating its expanding relevance in the overall employment landscape.

 

Despite this rapid growth, gig workers face significant structural challenges. These include the lack of social security, unregulated working hours, occupational stress, and the absence of effective grievance redressal mechanisms. Many gig workers are also vulnerable to retaliatory practices, such as app-based ID deactivation, for voicing concerns against unfair algorithms or wage-related issues.

 

One of the most pressing issues highlighted by the study is the ambiguous classification of gig workers. While countries such as the UK, Canada, Spain, France, and Denmark have legally recognised gig workers and provided appropriate labour protections, India continues to grapple with defining the boundary between employees and independent contractors. This ambiguity deprives workers of legal safeguards, especially those working full-time on digital platforms.

 

The VVGNLI study calls for urgent regulatory interventions. These include:

  • Legal recognition of gig workers and their right to unionize and collectively bargain.
  • Algorithmic accountability, to ensure transparency in task allocation and wage determination.
  • Minimum income guarantees, regulated working hours, and integration of occupational health and safety standards.
  • Establishing a National Registry for Platform and Gig Workers, managed jointly by central and state governments, to facilitate social security coverage.

 

Additionally, the Code on Social Security, 2020, provides a legislative foundation to extend health insurance, accident coverage, and retirement benefits to gig and platform workers. It proposes a social security fund, with contributions from aggregators, to support these provisions.

To ensure long-term sustainability, the government must also invest in skill development and upskilling initiatives, particularly in digital literacy, entrepreneurship, and emerging trades, to improve employability and economic resilience among gig workers.

 

In conclusion, India’s gig economy holds the potential to redefine employment patterns and contribute substantially to inclusive economic growth. However, this potential can only be fully realised through a rights-based, inclusive, and regulation-driven framework that balances innovation with worker welfare.

U.K.–EU Reset: A Strategic Gateway for India

  • 11 Jun 2025

In News:

The recent diplomatic overture by the United Kingdom under Prime Minister Keir Starmer to reset relations with the European Union (EU) marks a pivotal moment in Euro-Atlantic cooperation. Though the development appears Eurocentric, its implications for India are profound — ranging from trade facilitation and foreign policy realignment to diaspora and talent mobility. For India, this evolving Western convergence offers a unique opportunity to recalibrate its economic and strategic engagements.

Redefining India’s Trade Corridors

The renewed UK-EU cooperation — covering food safety, fisheries, customs, and border controls — has the potential to ease operational frictions for Indian exporters that emerged post-Brexit.

  • Current Trade Landscape: In FY2024, India’s exports to the EU stood at $86 billion, and to the U.K. at $12 billion, reflecting the strategic importance of these partners.
  • Post-Brexit Challenges: Indian businesses, especially in pharmaceuticals, textiles, and agri-products, faced dual regulatory requirements.
  • Reset Opportunities: A harmonised regulatory framework can reduce compliance redundancies and lower costs. India, which meets over 25% of the U.K.’s pharmaceutical demand, could benefit from unified drug approvals.
  • Sectoral Impact:
    • Indian seafood exports (worth approx. $7.38 billion) could see improved access if sanitary and phytosanitary norms are streamlined.
    • However, SMEs may face challenges in adapting to tighter European standards.

Policy Recommendation: India must bolster its export competitiveness through schemes like RoDTEP, PLI, and enhanced certification infrastructure to meet higher technical standards.

Deepening Strategic and Diplomatic Ties

A more aligned U.K.-EU foreign and defence policy creates new avenues for India to build deeper multilateral and trilateral engagements.

  • Existing Frameworks:
    • India–EU: Strategic Partnership Roadmap to 2025
    • India–U.K.: Comprehensive Strategic Partnership (2022), covering cybersecurity, climate, and maritime security
  • Potential Synergies:
    • Enhanced coordination in forums like the UN, G-20, and WTO
    • Scope for defence collaboration in the Indo-Pacific through joint naval exercises, technology transfers, and intelligence sharing

India’s partnerships with France, Germany, and the U.K. already focus on defence modernisation and green technologies. A coordinated U.K.–EU posture could formalise India’s role in shaping Western responses to strategic challenges in Asia, especially China’s assertiveness.

Global South Leadership: India can also leverage this alignment to push for climate finance, digital public infrastructure, and multilateral reform, reinforcing its leadership role post-G20 2023.

Reimagining Talent Mobility and Diaspora Engagement

India possesses the world’s largest diaspora, with significant populations in the U.K. and EU.

  • Mobility Trends:
    • In 2024, the U.K. issued over 1,10,000 student visas to Indian nationals.
    • Post-Brexit, mobility of Indian professionals to the EU was curtailed.
  • Potential Reset:
    • Renewed U.K.–EU coordination on border and migration policy may enable partial mobility reintegration.
    • India’s migration pacts with France, Germany, and Portugal could benefit from a wider U.K.–EU framework.

This realignment could lay the groundwork for a semi-integrated talent corridor, enhancing the movement of students, skilled professionals, and researchers.

Conclusion: Strategic Imperatives for India

The U.K.–EU reset is more than a European internal realignment — it is a geostrategic moment that India must strategically exploit. Whether through trade harmonisation, defence diplomacy, or diaspora engagement, India stands to gain significantly. However, to capitalise on this, India must:

  • Accelerate trade facilitation and infrastructure modernisation
  • Strengthen its regulatory frameworks
  • Enhance institutional diplomatic coordination
  • Assertively position itself in multilateral platforms

This convergence of economic and diplomatic opportunity presents India with a chance to reshape its place in the evolving global order.

Scaling India's Apparel Sector for Export Growth

  • 10 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s textiles and apparel (T&A) sector is one of its oldest and most employment-intensive industries, contributing 2.3% to GDP and employing over 45 million people, making it the second-largest employer after agriculture. Despite this, India’s share in global apparel trade has remained stagnant at around 3% for two decades—far below its potential. With global apparel trade at $529.3 billion, India’s contribution stands at just $15.7 billion, and the ambitious target of $40 billion in exports by 2030 remains distant unless bold structural reforms are initiated.

Structural Challenges

The fragmentation of the industry is a major bottleneck. Over 80% of apparel units are MSMEs, operating with limited scale, informal labour, and poor integration. In contrast, countries like China, Vietnam, and Bangladesh have achieved scale by setting up large, export-oriented factories or coordinated "buying houses" to pool capacity.

India’s cost of capital (≈9%) also hampers competitiveness, compared to 3–4.5% in China and Vietnam. Further, rigid labour laws, such as mandatory 2x overtime pay, discourage formal employment. Supply chains are dispersed, increasing delivery timelines and logistics costs. These issues are compounded by low female labour force participation, despite women comprising 70% of the workforce in leading apparel hubs.

Success Story: Shahi Exports

The example of Shahi Exports illustrates what is achievable with scale, professionalism, and inclusive practices. From a 15-member unit in 1974, it has evolved into India’s largest apparel exporter, employing over 100,000 workers (70% women) across 50+ factories in 8 states, with over $1 billion in revenue. It shows that Indian firms can scale and compete globally, but organic growth alone is too slow to meet national export goals.

Policy Reforms: A Way Forward

To unlock the sector’s full potential, transformative policy measures are required:

  • Capital Access for Scale: A 25–30% capital subsidy and a 5–7 year tax holiday for units with 1,000+ machines would help achieve viable scale. Linking incentives to size, as proposed under PLI 2.0, is essential.
  • Flexible Labour Norms: Labour reforms, such as rationalising overtime pay to 1.25x (ILO standard), and easing compliance can encourage formal hiring. Linking MGNREGA funds (25–30%) to wage subsidies in garment units can promote productive, formal employment.
  • Skilling for Demand: Schemes like SAMARTH should be expanded for short-cycle, demand-driven training, especially for women and youth, to bridge the skills gap in the sector.
  • Cluster-Based Development: At least two PM MITRA Parks should be designated as garment hubs in labour-abundant, low-cost states like Uttar Pradesh and Madhya Pradesh to reduce migration, cut costs, and promote inclusive industrialisation.
  • Export-Linked Incentives (ELI): Shift from production-linked to export-linked schemes that reward global competitiveness, not just output.

Conclusion

The apparel sector offers a rare opportunity to generate mass employment, promote inclusive growth, and boost exports. But without scale, reforms, and a strategic policy shift, the $40 billion export dream will remain elusive. India must act swiftly to replicate success stories like Shahi Exports, not over decades, but within years. The time for bold policy innovation is now.

Reforming Research Procurement in India

  • 09 Jun 2025

In News:

In a landmark move to boost scientific research and innovation, the Finance Ministry of India recently announced a series of reforms easing the procurement norms for scientific equipment. This policy shift addresses long-standing grievances from the research community about sub-standard materials, procedural delays, and restricted autonomy due to rigid procurement rules under the Government e-Marketplace (GEM).

Background: Challenges with GEM Procurement

The GEM portal, launched to promote “Make in India” procurement, mandated government institutions to source all goods through it. However, scientists highlighted serious concerns about its inefficiency, especially the inability to procure high-quality, customised scientific instruments required for cutting-edge research. Delays in procurement approvals and the necessity to first prove non-availability on GEM further hindered project timelines and research output.

Key Policy Reforms and Amendments

To rectify these issues, the government amended the General Financial Rules (GFR), introducing the following major changes:

  • Exemption from GEM Mandate:
    • Select scientific institutions and universities are now allowed to procure equipment and consumables outside the GEM portal.
    • This restores procurement autonomy to Directors, Vice-Chancellors, and Chancellors—similar to the pre-GEM era—enabling timely purchases from specialised, quality vendors.
  • Enhanced Financial Autonomy:
    • Without Quotation: Procurement limit increased from ?1 lakh to ?2 lakh for direct purchases.
    • Purchase Committee Limit: Raised from ?10 lakh to ?25 lakh, enabling quicker institutional decision-making.
    • Tender Enquiry Ceiling: Enhanced from ?50 lakh to ?1 crore, facilitating mid-level procurements efficiently.
    • These changes reflect inflation adjustments and reduce the administrative burden on research institutions.
  • Global Tender Enquiry (GTE):
    • Directors and Vice-Chancellors are now authorised to approve GTEs up to ?200 crore, a responsibility earlier restricted to departmental Secretaries.
    • This decentralisation helps avoid bottlenecks and streamlines large-scale procurements critical for advanced R&D.

Strategic Relevance and Broader Objectives

These reforms are strategically aligned with India’s aspirations under Atmanirbhar Bharat and its goal to emerge as a global science and technology leader. By reducing bureaucratic hurdles, enhancing institutional autonomy, and ensuring timely access to world-class research tools, the reforms empower innovation across sectors like health, defence, space, and agriculture.

Institutions benefitting from these measures include:

  • Department of Science and Technology (DST)
  • Department of Biotechnology (DBT)
  • Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR)
  • Department of Atomic Energy (DAE)
  • Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR)
  • Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR)
  • Defence Research and Development Organisation (DRDO)
  • Postgraduate research institutions under central and state universities

Conclusion

The revised GFR norms signify a progressive policy intervention aimed at creating a facilitative research ecosystem in India. By streamlining procurement, restoring institutional trust, and removing operational roadblocks, the government has responded positively to the scientific community's demands. As acknowledged by Science Minister Jitendra Singh, this reform is not just administrative; it is transformative—unlocking India's potential for innovation and scientific excellence.

India’s Decline in Extreme Poverty: A Decade of Significant Gains

  • 08 Jun 2025

In News:

According to the latest World Bank estimates, India’s extreme poverty has sharply declined from 27.1% in 2011-12 to 5.3% in 2022-23, based on an updated $3/day consumption threshold adjusted for 2021 purchasing power parity (PPP). In absolute terms, the number of extremely poor people has reduced from 344.47 million to 75.24 million, indicating 269 million people were lifted out of extreme poverty during this period.

The progress is more striking when viewed under the previous poverty line of $2.15/day (2017 prices). Under this standard, the extreme poverty rate fell from 16.2% to 2.3%, translating to a drop in the number of poor from 205.93 million to 33.66 million—a reduction of 172 million individuals.

Even as the poverty threshold was raised globally, India managed to outperform most developing countries. The lower-middle-income (LMIC) poverty rate, measured at a higher threshold of $4.20/day, also fell substantially—from 57.7% in 2011-12 to 23.9% in 2022-23. This decline reduced the number of people under LMIC poverty from 732.48 million to 342.32 million over 11 years.

The fall in poverty occurred despite high inflation during the decade. When adjusted for domestic inflation, even the $3/day threshold (new benchmark) is higher than the inflation-adjusted $2.60/day from previous estimates, making the achievement more credible.

The World Bank estimates also reveal stark differences in poverty distribution:

  • The top five populous states—Uttar Pradesh, Maharashtra, Bihar, West Bengal, and Madhya Pradesh—accounted for 65% of extreme poverty in 2011-12, but still made up 54% in 2022-23.
  • Rural India still shows significant poverty, with 90% of rural individuals reporting average monthly per capita expenditures below Rs 5,763, and the bottom 5% class spending just Rs 1,677.
  • Urban poverty is relatively lower, with 25.78% in the bottom 40%, compared to 45.44% in rural areas.
  • Educational attainment remains a strong poverty determinant; in 2022-23, 35.1% of Indians without schooling lived below the LMIC poverty line, compared to 14.9% with post-secondary education.

In terms of non-monetary deprivation, India also recorded improvement. As per the Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI), which considers factors such as access to education, electricity, water, and sanitation, multidimensional poverty fell from 53.8% in 2005-06 to 15.5% in 2022-23. NITI Aayog estimates it to be 11.28%, down from 29.17% in 2013-14.

To ensure continued tracking, NITI Aayog is planning a new income-based extreme poverty measure with broader consultation. Meanwhile, the Household Consumption Expenditure Survey (HCES) 2023-24 indicates a 45.4% rise in rural consumption and 38% in urban consumption, reinforcing the World Bank’s findings.

Conclusion

India’s remarkable poverty reduction over the last decade reflects successful economic reforms, social welfare schemes, and increased consumption. However, regional, educational, and rural-urban disparities persist, necessitating continued policy focus, data refinement, and inclusive growth strategies.

Empowering India’s Elderly through Age-Tech

  • 14 Apr 2025

In News:

India is undergoing a demographic transition, with its senior citizen population (aged 60+) currently at 15 crore, projected to rise to 32 crore by 2050. This unprecedented ageing poses socio-economic challenges, especially in urban areas like Bengaluru, where shrinking family structures leave many elderly citizens isolated and purposeless. To address these concerns, a new sector—age-tech—is emerging, leveraging technology to support the physical, emotional, and cognitive well-being of the elderly.

Understanding Age-Tech and its Role

Age-tech refers to technology-driven solutions tailored to the elderly’s needs. Bengaluru has emerged as a hub of innovation in this domain. Platforms like Sukoon Unlimited, founded in 2024, create communities where seniors engage in emotional counselling, volunteering, group therapies, and concierge services. Notably, both service providers and receivers are senior citizens, fostering peer support and a sense of purpose. Sukoon’s community has grown from 200 to 6,000 members across 400 towns in a year.

Technology is also being used to combat loneliness. WHO in 2022 highlighted that one in four older adults suffers from social isolation, increasing mortality risk. AI-powered conversational tools are being employed by platforms like Sukoon to provide companionship in over 100 languages.

Employment and Purpose in Silver Years

Age-tech also facilitates post-retirement employment. Wisdom Circle, for instance, connects retired professionals with employers seeking experienced talent. With 95,000 users and 1,500 companies onboard, it promotes hybrid and part-time roles. Beyond financial gain, seniors are driven by the need for relevance and contribution to society—many even apply for lower-paid or non-profit roles.

Addressing Cognitive and Physical Health

The cognitive health of seniors is another pressing concern. Over 80 lakh Indians currently suffer from dementia. Ivory, a cognitive health start-up, offers neuroscience-backed assessments to detect risks early and recommends personalized brain training. It has over 30,000 users, predominantly women from urban areas.

Orthopaedic health is also crucial. Around 50% of seniors need assistance with basic mobility. TransleadMedtech, an IISc-incubated start-up, has developed assistive chairs and commodes to aid mobility without power sources. With rising knee replacements, such innovations are critical for safety and dignity in ageing.

Challenges and the Digital Divide

Despite potential, age-tech faces hurdles. Experts warn that over-engineering tech can alienate elderly users. Solutions must be designed with the user’s needs, not just tech potential, in mind. The urban-rural divide is stark—most services target urban, financially independent seniors, excluding rural and low-income populations.

Additionally, rapid digitisation has excluded many elderly from essential services like transport and e-commerce. Digital illiteracy also exposes them to scams. Startups like Elderra work to bridge this gap by training seniors in basic digital tools.

Way Forward

For age-tech to become inclusive, the government must play an enabling role. Public-private partnerships can make these services affordable and accessible. Ageing with dignity should be a national priority, combining technology, policy, and empathy to ensure India’s elderly are not left behind in the digital era.

Jyotiba Phule: Pioneer of Social Justice and Emancipation

  • 13 Apr 2025

Introduction:

Jyotiba Phule (1827–1890) stands out as one of the foremost social reformers of 19th-century India, whose contributions to education, caste reform, women's rights, and rationalist thought continue to influence contemporary debates on social justice.

Born into the Mali casteinMaharashtra, Phule’s awakening began in 1848 after facing caste-based humiliation at a Brahmin wedding. That same year, inspired by Cynthia Farrar (a Christian missionary) and rationalist Thomas Paine, he and his wife Savitribai Phule established India’s first school for girls. By 1851, they had opened 18 schools, and later, night schools for workers and women—challenging both gender and caste hierarchies in education.

Phule’s activism extended beyond education. In 1873, he founded the SatyashodhakSamaj (Society of Truth Seekers), an organization aimed at eradicating caste-based oppression and challenging Brahminical dominance. His work Gulamgiri (Slavery) (published in 1873) likened the condition of Dalits and Shudras to that of African-American slaves, emphasizing systemic subjugation through religious orthodoxy.

Phule argued for compulsory primary education, particularly for the rural poor. In his Statement to the Education Commission, he recommended scholarships, annual prizes, and mandatory schooling up to age 12, noting that agricultural poverty kept children away from education.

In his agrarian treatise ShetkaryancheAsud (Farmer’s Whip), Phule proposed:

  • Employing army personnel in public works like dams and bunds.
  • Returning village pasture lands from the Forest Department.
  • Importing cattle for meat to preserve draught animals crucial to agriculture.

These proposals reflected his commitment to economic upliftment of farmers and sustainable agricultural practices.

Phule’s spiritual views evolved toward rational humanism. Though he respected the equality-based ethics in Islam and Christianity, his final philosophical work, Sarvajanik Satya Dharma Pustak, rejected all sectarian religious texts and called for a universal spiritual order. He questioned caste sanctity, ridiculed the notion of sacred superiority, and criticized the irrationalities in scriptural justifications.

He strongly supported women’s rights, defended PanditaRamabai’s conversion, and denounced polygamy, arguing for gender parity in both religious and social spheres. He wrote, “How would men feel if women married more than one man?

Despite opposition from Bal Gangadhar Tilak and orthodox Hindu nationalists, Phule remained focused on uplifting the oppressed, even bailing Tilak out of jail at one point—illustrating his commitment to justice over personal differences.

Phule’s legacy remains crucial in modern India’s quest for social equity. His efforts to democratize education, dismantle caste, and promote inclusive governance laid the groundwork for India's later constitutional and social reforms.

Revisiting NREGA Wage Rates: A Case for Urgent Reform

  • 12 Apr 2025

In News:

The Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA) is the world’s largest public employment programme, aimed at ensuring livelihood security through guaranteed rural employment. However, a recent report by the Parliamentary Standing Committee on Rural Development and Panchayati Raj (April 2025) underscores a critical challenge: the wage rates under MGNREGA are increasingly inadequate, failing to provide even subsistence-level income.

With over 25 crore registered workers, the scheme is central to rural welfare. Yet, its effectiveness is diluted due to systemic underpayment. For FY 2025–26, MGNREGA wages vary from ?241 in Nagaland to ?400 in Haryana, averaging only ?294 nationally—a meagre 5% increase from the previous year. In many states, this rate is significantly lower than the prevailing minimum wage, in some cases by over ?200, raising serious questions about wage fairness and constitutional obligations.

Legal and Policy Background

Section 6 of the MGNREGA Act permits the Centre to fix wage rates independently of the Minimum Wages Act, 1948, though the wage cannot be below ?60. Historically, from 2005 to 2009, NREGA wages matched each state’s minimum agricultural wage. However, the Centre capped NREGA wages at ?100 in 2009 due to financial concerns, leading to payments falling below statutory minimum wages—a move that the Karnataka High Court (2011) and Supreme Court (2012) found violative of labour rights.

In response to mounting concerns, wage indexation to the Consumer Price Index for Agricultural Labourers (CPI-AL) began in FY 2011–12, with 2009 as the base year. Nevertheless, CPI-AL is narrow in scope compared to CPI-Rural (CPI-R), which better reflects the cost of living for rural workers across sectors.

Ignored Recommendations and Institutional Apathy

Several expert bodies have urged wage revisions. The Jean Dreze Committee (2010) advocated aligning NREGA wages with state minimum wages or, at the very least, indexing them effectively. The Mahendra Dev Committee (2014) recommended CPI-R-based indexing with an updated base year, while the Anoop Satpathy Committee (2019) proposed a national floor wage of ?375 (at July 2018 prices). However, the Centre has largely disregarded these suggestions, citing fiscal constraints.

Only a few states, including Odisha and Himachal Pradesh, have supplemented NREGA wages from their own budgets. Most continue with the Centre’s insufficient rates, causing regional disparities and undermining the constitutional promise of equal pay for equal work (Article 39).

Need for Course Correction

The current wage structure risks violating Article 23 of the Constitution, as flagged in the Supreme Court’s 1983 Sanjit Roy vs State of Rajasthan verdict, which held that paying less than the minimum wage constitutes “forced labour.”

Moreover, stagnant wages have contributed to declining worker participation. The Standing Committee rightly argues that current wages do not meet basic daily expenses and recommends a minimum daily wage of ?400. Without wage parity and realistic indexation, the scheme fails to uphold its foundational promise of dignified rural employment.

Conclusion

MGNREGA is more than a welfare scheme—it is a statutory right. To realize its full potential in promoting rural livelihoods and inclusive growth, wage reforms are imperative. Revising NREGA wages to reflect minimum wage laws, inflation trends, and regional parity is not just an economic necessity—it is a constitutional obligation.

Marine Litter Crisis: A Call for Unified Global and National Action

  • 11 Apr 2025

Context:

Marine litter, particularly plastic waste, has emerged as a critical global environmental issue. With over 700 marine species affected and microplastics infiltrating food chains, the issue demands both global cooperation and local implementation. Despite India's efforts in solid and plastic waste management, a direct legislative mandate to mitigate marine litter remains absent.

Magnitude of the Crisis

  • UNESCO warns: By 2050, plastic volume in oceans could exceed fish biomass.
  • Ghost Gear: Lost/discarded fishing gear (nets, traps, lines) poses severe threats:
    • 5.7% of nets, 8.6% of traps, and 29% of fishing lines are lost annually (UNEP).

Key Global Frameworks

  • MARPOL (Annex V) – In force since 1983, regulates ship-generated garbage disposal in oceans.
  • UNCLOS (1994) – Part XII mandates nations to prevent pollution from land-based and sea-based sources, including ghost gear.
  • Global Programme of Action (1995) – First UN initiative addressing land-based marine pollution.
  • SDGs:
    • SDG 14.1: Reduce marine pollution, especially plastics.
    • SDG 6.3: Improve water quality via integrated management.
  • Honolulu Commitment (2011):
    • Reduce land-based debris
    • Address sea-based litter
    • Clean up accumulated coastal & deep-sea litter

Institutional and Voluntary Actions

  • Global Partnership on Marine Litter (GPML, 2012) – UNEP-led initiative uniting stakeholders for source-to-sea plastic mitigation.
  • AHEG (2017) – UNEP expert group assessing policy responses for marine litter and recommending frameworks.
  • Clean Seas Campaign (2017) – Advocates for elimination of single-use plastics and behaviour change.
  • UNEA Resolutions on Marine Litter:
    • Adopted in 2014 (UNEA-1), 2016 (UNEA-2), 2017 (UNEA-3), and 2019 (UNEA-4).
    • While non-binding, they push for total elimination of litter discharge and evidence-based policymaking.

Scientific Support

  • GESAMP (Group of Experts on the Scientific Aspects of Marine Environmental Protection) has, since 2010, guided scientific research on:
    • Microplastic sources
    • Marine ecosystem impacts
    • Monitoring and mitigation strategies

India’s Current Status and Initiatives

  • No direct marine litter law or policy yet exists.
  • A multi-ministerial body involving MoES, MoST, and MoFAD is drafting a National Marine Litter Action Plan.
  • Relevant policies in place:
    • Plastic Waste Management Rules, 2016 (includes Extended Producer Responsibility – EPR)
    • Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016
    • Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974

Challenges in India

  • Fragmented implementation
  • Limited monitoring of litter entering marine zones
  • Lack of focus on coastal-level execution

Way Forward

  • Adopt a national marine litter policy with local implementation mechanisms.
  • Strengthen enforcement of international agreements like MARPOL and UNCLOS.
  • Promote circular economy models and enhance waste infrastructure.
  • Encourage public-private partnerships, community awareness, and behaviour change.
  • Support scientific monitoring, research, and innovation.

Conclusion

The transboundary nature of marine litter necessitates global cooperation backed by national accountability. India's next steps must include a dedicated marine litter law, enhanced inter-ministerial coordination, and alignment with international best practices to secure its coastal and marine ecosystems.

Kashmir Rail Link: A Strategic and Developmental Milestone

  • 07 Jun 2025

In News:

The launch of the Vande Bharat Express between Katra and Srinagar by Prime Minister Narendra Modi marks a transformative chapter in Jammu and Kashmir’s infrastructural journey. The long-awaited completion of the Udhampur-Srinagar-Baramulla Rail Link (USBRL) is not merely a technological feat, but a symbol of national integration, economic upliftment, and inclusive development in the Kashmir Valley.

Historical Background

The evolution of rail connectivity in Jammu and Kashmir dates back to the colonial era when, in 1897, a 40–45 km rail line linked Jammu to Sialkot (now in Pakistan). Subsequent plans to extend railways to Srinagar in the early 20th century were shelved. After the 1947 Partition, Jammu was cut off from the rail grid as Sialkot became part of Pakistan. The region had to wait until 1975 for the inauguration of the Pathankot–Jammu line. The Jammu–Udhampur line, started in 1983, was completed only in 2004.

In 1994, the rail project was further extended to include Srinagar and Baramulla, and the USBRL was declared a national project in 2002, with the initial estimated cost of ?2,500 crore.

USBRL: Engineering Triumph

The fully operational 272 km USBRL has been completed at a revised cost of ?43,780 crore. It includes 36 tunnels, 943 bridges, and several record-setting engineering marvels in the seismically active, snow-covered terrain of the Shivalik and Pir Panjal ranges.

  • Chenab Bridge: The world’s tallest railway arch bridge, 359 meters above the riverbed, surpassing even the Eiffel Tower. Designed to withstand wind speeds of 260 km/h and extreme temperatures, it spans 1,315 meters and has a life expectancy of 120 years.
  • Anji Khad Bridge: India’s first cable-stayed rail bridge, located in Reasi, towers 331 meters above the river and stretches 725 meters. Its iconic inverted Y-shaped pylon is supported by 96 high-tensile cables.
  • Tunnel T-49: At 12.77 km, it is India’s longest transport tunnel, located in Ramban district, designed to ensure seamless all-weather connectivity.

Strategic and Socio-Economic Significance

This rail link is a game-changer for the region. By reducing Katra–Srinagar travel time to just 3 hours, it ensures year-round, all-weather accessibility, even during harsh Himalayan winters. The connectivity is critical not only for civilians but also for the rapid movement of security personnel in this strategically sensitive region.

Economically, the rail link is poised to boost trade and tourism. It will facilitate the quicker and more cost-effective transport of local produce such as apples, walnuts, saffron, pashmina, and handicrafts, thereby integrating the Valley with national markets. Reduced logistics costs will also lower the prices of essential goods imported into Kashmir.

Way Forward

The upcoming extension to Jammu Tawi aims to further enhance nationwide connectivity to Srinagar. This project stands as a testament to India’s commitment to inclusive development, national unity, and strategic infrastructure in border regions. With its blend of engineering excellence and socio-political impact, the USBRL reinforces the vision of a Viksit Bharat that leaves no region behind.

Tiger Conservation in India

  • 06 Jun 2025

In News:

India, which hosts over 70% of the world’s wild tiger population, holds a dual responsibility of pride and stewardship. The near-collapse of tiger numbers in 2006, with populations falling to around 1,400 and local extinctions in Sariska and Panna, prompted a national awakening. Strengthened interventions such as the formation of the National Tiger Conservation Authority (NTCA) and Project Tiger rejuvenation efforts helped India register over 3,600 tigers in the 2023 census, reflecting significant progress.

From Crisis to Recovery: Institutional Response

The disappearance of tigers due to poaching, habitat degradation, and poor monitoring led to structural reforms post-2006. The NTCA (established in 2005) ensured stricter protocols, better surveillance, and habitat restoration. India now boasts 53 Tiger Reserves, with central and southern states like Madhya Pradesh, Karnataka, and Uttarakhand emerging as conservation success stories.

Emerging Challenge: Prey Base Decline

Despite rising tiger numbers nationally, several reserves in eastern and central India—such as Guru Ghasidas, Indravati, Udanti-Sitanadi (Chhattisgarh), Palamau (Jharkhand), and Simlipal and Satkosia (Odisha)—have shown worrying trends of tiger decline. The core issue is not direct poaching but the fall in prey density, especially species like chital, sambar, and gaur. Scientific evidence indicates that tiger viability is closely tied to prey abundance, with a threshold of at least 10–15 prey animals per sq km required for stable populations.

Socioeconomic Roots of Ecological Depletion

Many affected reserves lie in poverty-stricken tribal regions. In the absence of alternative protein sources and sustainable livelihoods, communities turn to bushmeat hunting using traditional snares and traps. This not only reduces herbivore populations but also threatens predator survival. Palamau Reserve is a stark example where both large herbivores and tigers have nearly vanished under such pressures.

Institutional Recommendations and Ecological Restoration

The NTCA-WII 2023 report recommends short-term herbivore breeding enclosures but recognizes their limitations in rewilding success. A sustainable solution lies in habitat quality enhancement and involving communities in conservation. Some reserves still retain dense forests, providing an ecological foundation for revival. The decline of left-wing extremism in many areas also opens avenues for focused conservation interventions.

Towards Inclusive Conservation: Eco-Tourism and Livelihoods

Prosperous reserves like Bandhavgarh and Ranthambore benefit from conservation-linked tourism and community participation. In contrast, remote and underdeveloped areas lack such economic linkages. Promoting inclusive eco-tourism, skill development, and income-generation activities—such as SHGs, poultry farming, and forest produce marketing—can transform local attitudes.

Way Forward: Integrated, People-Centric Approaches

India must adopt multidimensional strategies combining ecological, institutional, and social measures:

  • Implement prey recovery plans in Tiger Conservation Plans (TCPs).
  • Provide targeted funding and technical support to underperforming states.
  • Restore grasslands, ensure wildlife corridors, and adopt technology (drones, AI) for monitoring.
  • Recognize community forest rights, promote Gram Sabha governance, and expand MGNREGA to conservation-linked jobs.

Conclusion

India’s tiger conservation success is laudable but remains precarious if prey depletion continues unchecked. The path ahead demands a shift from protectionism to participatory conservation—rooted in equity, ecological integrity, and community empowerment. The survival of the tiger is not merely a wildlife concern, but a test of India’s commitment to sustainable development and inclusive environmental governance.

Population Census 2027

  • 05 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s next population census is scheduled to be completed by March 1, 2027, marking a historic return to the decennial exercise after a 16-year gap—the longest in independent India’s history. Announced by the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA), this census will be India’s first digital census and the first to include caste enumeration since Independence.

The census will be conducted intwo phases:

  1. House Listing and Housing Schedule
  2. Population Enumeration (including caste data)

The enumeration process will run from April 1, 2026 to February 28, 2027, with March 1, 2027, set as the reference date for most of India. For Ladakh and snow-bound areas of J&K, Himachal Pradesh, and Uttarakhand, the reference date will be October 1, 2026.

This exercise will be conducted under the Census Act, 1948 and the Census Rules, 1990. A gazette notification, expected on June 16, 2025, will formally announce the schedule. Around 25–30 lakh enumerators, largely schoolteachers, will be retrained to use a custom mobile app—a key component of the digital data collection process.

A major inclusion in this census is caste enumeration, extending beyond the current Scheduled Caste (SC) and Scheduled Tribe (ST) data. A separate input field will record caste data for all categories, making it a potentially transformative tool for targeted welfare policies and social justice initiatives.

However, the 2027 Census is not just a demographic exercise—it holds critical constitutional and political significance, especially in the context of delimitation and women's political reservation.

Under Articles 81 and 82 of the Constitution, the next delimitation of Lok Sabha and State Assembly constituencies must be based on the first census after 2026. The current 543 Lok Sabha seats are still based on the 1971 Census. The 42nd Constitutional Amendment (1976) had frozen seat redistribution, which was extended by the 84th Amendment (2002) until after 2026.

Once census data is finalized (likely by late 2027), Parliament must pass a Delimitation Act, following which a Delimitation Commission—headed by a retired Supreme Court judge and including the Chief Election Commissioner—will be constituted. This commission will determine the new seat allocation formula based on population per constituency.

Importantly, the implementation of 33% reservation for women in Parliament and State Assemblies, as mandated by the Women’s Reservation Act, is contingent upon the completion of this delimitation exercise.

This has triggered concerns, particularly from southern states like Tamil Nadu, which have seen slower population growth due to effective family planning. Redistribution based solely on population may reduce their parliamentary representation, leading to demands—such as by Tamil Nadu CM M.K. Stalin—for extending the status quo based on the 1971 census until 2056.

Political opposition has also criticized the delayed timeline, with Congress terming the 23-month postponement from 2021 as administrative inefficiency.

Moreover, there was no mention of updating the National Population Register (NPR), which is the first step towards the controversial National Register of Citizens (NRC).

In sum, Census 2027 is not just a statistical necessity but a politically sensitive and constitutionally mandated process, central to the future of electoral representation, gender justice, and federal balance in India.

India’s Green Economy: A Catalyst for Employment and Sustainable Development

  • 04 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s transition to a green economy is not only central to achieving its environmental and climate goals but is also emerging as a powerful engine for economic growth and employment generation.

According to a recent report by NLB Services, India’s green sector is expected to generate approximately 7.29 million new jobs by FY2027–28, with the figure projected to rise to 35 million by 2047, aligning with India’s long-term net-zero commitments.

Understanding the Green Economy

A green economy encompasses sectors and activities that contribute to ecological sustainability, low-carbon development, and resource efficiency, while also promoting inclusive employment. It integrates environmental goals with economic planning, thus creating green jobs in areas such as renewable energy, electric mobility, sustainable construction, waste management, and green agriculture.

Sectoral and Regional Dynamics

The most significant employment potential lies in industries such as renewable energy, electric vehicles (EVs), green infrastructure, sustainable textiles, and waste-to-energy solutions. These sectors have witnessed rising investments and policy focus under national missions such as PM-KUSUM, Faster Adoption and Manufacturing of Hybrid and Electric Vehicles (FAME), and the National Hydrogen Mission.

While metropolitan areas like Mumbai, Bengaluru, and Delhi remain hubs for green employment, tier II and III cities are poised to play a crucial role in the decentralisation of the green economy. Cities such as Jaipur, Coimbatore, Bhubaneswar, Visakhapatnam, and Indore are projected to account for 35–40% of the green job creation by FY28, primarily in logistics, warehousing, sustainable agriculture, and urban waste management.

Evolving Skill Demands

The transition towards green employment is redefining workforce skill requirements. Modern green jobs demand a blend of environmental sustainability expertise and technological proficiency, particularly in AI, IoT, GIS, blockchain, and data analytics. This digital integration is reshaping job profiles and creating pathways for future-ready employment.

In response, industries are shifting hiring strategies to focus more on skill-based recruitment rather than conventional degrees. There is also a growing emphasis on industry-academia collaborations to align curricula with the evolving demands of the green economy, thus fostering climate-literate and digitally equipped professionals.

Gender Inclusion and Equity Challenges

Despite the promising employment potential, women currently constitute only 11–12% of the green workforce in India. Barriers include limited access to STEM education, workplace safety concerns, and socio-cultural constraints. However, progressive employers are increasingly adopting inclusive hiring practices, promoting women-centric skill development programmes, and partnering with training agencies to build a more diverse and equitable green talent pipeline. These efforts are expected to improve female participation by 12–15% in the next 5–6 years.

Economic Significance

India’s green economy is expected to contribute significantly to national GDP. Its valuation is projected to reach $1 trillion by 2030, and expand to $15 trillion by 2070, supporting India’s target of achieving net-zero emissions by 2070. Thus, it offers a dual dividend—economic prosperity and environmental security.

Conclusion:
India’s green transition presents a transformative opportunity to simultaneously address climate change, unemployment, and regional disparities. With appropriate policy support, capacity building, and inclusivity, the green economy can become the bedrock of sustainable and equitable growth.

Technology Industry and Climate Goals

  • 03 Jun 2025

Introduction

The global technology sector, while being a driver of economic growth and innovation, is also a significant contributor to greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. With the rapid expansion of cloud computing and digital services, data centres—the backbone of the digital economy—consume massive amounts of energy, primarily for cooling.

A recent landmark study by Microsoft and WSP Global, published in Nature, highlights the potential of advanced cooling technologies to significantly reduce the environmental footprint of data centres.

The Problem: Heat and Emissions from Data Centres

  • Energy Consumption: In modern data centres, cooling systems consume nearly as much electricity as computing itself.
  • Heat Management: As chips become smaller and faster, they generate more heat. Without effective cooling, systems overheat, leading to failure and reduced efficiency.
  • Climate Targets: The Information and Communications Technology (ICT) sector aims to reduce emissions by 42% by 2030 (from 2015 levels) and achieve net-zero by mid-century.

Cooling Innovations: The Game-Changers

1. Cold Plate Cooling (Direct-to-Chip Cooling)

  • Coolant flows through microchannels on a plate attached directly to the chip.
  • Reduces the need for energy-intensive air conditioning.
  • Heat is transferred away efficiently and silently.

2. Immersion Cooling

  • Entire hardware systems are submerged in thermally conductive, non-conductive liquid.
  • Uses one-phase (liquid remains stable) or two-phase (liquid vaporises and condenses) systems.
  • Ensures near-total heat dissipation and longer component life.

Environmental Impact (Study Findings):

Compared to traditional air cooling:

  • GHG Emissions by 15–21%
  • Energy Use by 15–20%
  • Water Consumption by 31–52%

With 100% renewable energy:

  • Emissions by 85–90%
  • Water use by 55–85%

Tech Industry’s Broader Climate Actions

  • Carbon Credits: Google, Netflix, and others invest in verified carbon offsets.
  • Blockchain for Carbon Markets: Ensures transparency; used by Indian IT firms for ESG compliance.
  • Renewable Energy: Tech giants like Apple, Meta, and Amazon power operations with green energy.
  • Indian Leadership: Infosys, Reliance, and Tech Mahindra lead in green operations using AI and energy-efficient systems.

Challenges and Limitations

  • Lifecycle Trade-offs: Coolant production and disposal can offset benefits.
  • Capital Cost: Retrofitting old data centres is expensive.
  • Regulatory Issues: Lack of global standards for coolants and fragmented carbon credit policies.
  • Dependence on Grid: Benefits are reduced if electricity is still coal-based.
  • Slow Deployment: Complex designs and supply chain delays hinder implementation.

Way Forward

  • Life Cycle Assessments (LCAs): Evaluate true environmental costs over the product lifecycle.
  • Unified Carbon Standards: Develop global frameworks for carbon credit verification and climate disclosures.
  • Government Support: Provide tax incentives, green finance, and subsidies for early adopters.
  • Strengthen R&D: Focus on low-impact coolants and AI-driven cooling systems.
  • Public-Private Partnerships: Encourage innovation through collaboration among tech firms, startups, and governments.

Conclusion

The technology industry stands at a crossroads where sustainable innovation is essential. Cooling technologies like cold plates and immersion cooling, coupled with renewable energy adoption and carbon offset mechanisms, can enable the ICT sector to significantly reduce its environmental footprint. With effective policy support and strategic innovation, the tech sector can become a pillar of global climate action.

Urban Flooding in India: A Growing Challenge and the Path to Resilience

  • 02 Jun 2025

In News:

Urban flooding has emerged as a critical challenge in India’s rapidly urbanising landscape. Cities like Delhi, Mumbai, Bengaluru, and Chennai face recurrent inundations, leading to loss of life, infrastructure damage, and economic disruptions. This crisis stems from a combination of outdated urban drainage systems, rapid concretisation, encroachment on natural water bodies, and climate change-induced extreme weather events.

The Urban Drainage Crisis

Urban drainage refers to the infrastructure that manages rainwater and prevents flooding. However, over 70% of India’s urban areas lack scientifically designed stormwater systems (MoHUA, 2019). Mumbai’s stormwater drains, originally built in the 1860s, can handle only 25 mm of rainfall per hour, while rainfall events often exceed 100 mm/hour. Delhi's drainage is based on 1976 norms, incapable of handling current rainfall intensities, such as the 185.9 mm received in a single day in May 2025. Bengaluru’s network is outdated, with over 65% of its lakes encroached and connected stormwater drains severely undersized.

Key causes of urban flooding include:

  • Natural Factors: Intensifying short-duration rainfalls due to climate change, low-lying topographies.
  • Man-made Factors: Unplanned urbanisation, loss of wetlands, illegal constructions, outdated design standards, infiltration of sewage into stormwater lines, and poor maintenance.

Economic and Environmental Impacts

Floods cause the highest economic damage among natural disasters in India. In 2024, Mumbai received 300 mm of rain in six hours, crippling the city’s transport and health systems. Chennai’s monsoon floods in 2024 led to massive waterlogging due to blocked drains and concretised surfaces.

Urbanisation has drastically increased impervious surfaces, reducing natural infiltration and increasing runoff. Nashik, for instance, witnessed rapid impervious expansion, contributing significantly to urban flooding.

Technological Solutions: GIS and Remote Sensing

To tackle urban flooding, advanced tools like Geographic Information Systems (GIS) and remote sensing are being deployed:

  • Satellite Monitoring: ISRO and NRSC use high-resolution imagery to monitor rainfall, land use, and flood-prone zones. LiDAR-generated Digital Elevation Models (DEMs) help map vulnerable areas.
  • Hydrological Modelling: Tools like HEC-HMS and HEC-RAS simulate flood scenarios and help plan mitigation strategies.
  • Urban Drainage Mapping: GIS assists in identifying drainage bottlenecks and encroachments. For instance, GIS studies in Ahmedabad and West Bengal’s Keleghai Basin have enabled flood risk zoning.

Government Interventions

Several policies and programs support flood mitigation:

  • AMRUT 2.0 and Smart Cities Mission: Promote integrated stormwater systems and sustainable urban drainage.
  • Model Building Bye Laws (2016): Mandate rainwater harvesting.
  • Jal Shakti Abhiyan, Atal Bhujal Yojana, and Amrit Sarovar Mission: Encourage water body rejuvenation and groundwater recharge.
  • NDMA Guidelines: Recommend real-time flood forecasting and risk mitigation using satellite data.

Future Directions

Moving forward, flood resilience must be built through:

  • Green Infrastructure: Restoring wetlands, using bioswales and permeable pavements.
  • Smart Drainage Systems: IoT-enabled sensors for real-time monitoring and early warnings.
  • AI Integration: Enhancing prediction models using real-time meteorological data.
  • Policy Enforcement: Preventing illegal constructions on floodplains and drainage channels.
  • Community Engagement: Raising awareness on waste disposal and flood preparedness.

Conclusion

Urban flooding in India reflects the failure to integrate environmental planning into urbanisation. However, with the aid of emerging technologies, inter-agency coordination, and proactive governance, Indian cities can transform from reactive flood responses to resilient urban systems. A holistic approach combining infrastructure, nature-based solutions, and data-driven policies is essential for sustainable urban development.

Preserving Glaciers: A Cry for Climate Justice and Water Security

  • 01 Jun 2025

In News:

In 2025, the United Nations has declared the year as the International Year of Glaciers’ Preservation, underscoring the urgent global need to address the retreat of glaciers. This critical issue was the focus of the International Conference on Glaciers’ Preservation held in Dushanbe, Tajikistan, co-hosted by the Republic of Tajikistan with the support of the UN and attended by leaders and experts from across the globe.

Glaciers, often referred to as the “water towers of the world”, store nearly 70% of Earth’s freshwater. However, accelerating glacier melt—driven by global warming—has become a slow-moving catastrophe. Since 1975, over 9,000 billion tons of glacial ice have been lost. The period from 2022 to 2024 marked the highest recorded glacier mass loss, with many smaller glaciers projected to vanish entirely within this century. This phenomenon threatens not only mountain ecosystems but also global water security, food systems, biodiversity, infrastructure, and human livelihoods.

Developing countries, particularly those in Asia, Africa, and Latin America, face disproportionate vulnerabilities due to glacier retreat. Communities dependent on glacier-fed rivers for drinking water, irrigation, and hydropower are witnessing increased poverty, forced migration, and infrastructure damage. Melting glaciers also contribute significantly to sea-level rise, placing coastal cities and low-lying regions at risk of displacement and flooding, as seen in Nigeria’s Niger Delta and Lagos.

The conference served as a clarion call to transition from pledges to concrete action. It recognized that 83% of global emissions that require mitigation lie with just 35 countries, emphasizing the need for collective ambition. The summit also launched the Decade for Cryosphere Science (2025–2034) and advocated for the establishment of a UN Glacier Preservation Fund to ensure sustained, long-term financing for adaptation.

Key recommendations included:

  • Integration of glacier preservation into national climate policies, especially Nationally Determined Contributions (NDCs) and National Adaptation Plans (NAPs).
  • Development of early warning systems and predictive tools for climate-related disasters in mountainous regions.
  • Investments in data-driven adaptation, using AI and hydrological models to forecast risks and optimize resilience strategies.
  • Promotion of gender-inclusive water governance, especially involving women in glacial and water-related decision-making.
  • Establishment of hydro-meteorological services for glacier-dependent regions to safeguard water access and ensure resilience.

The Deputy Secretary-General of the UN stressed that resilience pays — every dollar spent on adaptation strengthens economies, protects livelihoods, and mitigates future losses. The upcoming Fourth UN Conference on Financing for Development in Seville and COP30 in Brazil were identified as critical moments to elevate financing and policy commitments.

In conclusion, glacier loss is not merely an environmental concern but a humanitarian and developmental crisis. The protection of glaciers is central to achieving SDG 6 (Clean Water and Sanitation) and must be addressed with the urgency, equity, and international solidarity it demands. The world must act now—so that future generations do not inherit a planet where glaciers and the lifelines they sustain have become a relic of the past.

Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha

  • 30 May 2025

In News:

The office of the Deputy Speaker of the Lok Sabha, though not explicitly bound by rigid timelines, holds constitutional and democratic significance in India's parliamentary democracy. Under Article 93 of the Constitution, the Lok Sabha must elect a Speaker and Deputy Speaker from among its members "as soon as may be." Despite this mandate, the Deputy Speaker’s post has remained vacant since June 2019, reflecting a deepening divergence from constitutional propriety and democratic convention.

Constitutional Framework and Election Process

The Deputy Speaker is elected by Lok Sabha members, with the election date fixed by the Speaker and communicated through a parliamentary bulletin. As per Article 94, the Deputy Speaker remains in office until resignation, disqualification, or removal by a resolution supported by a majority. If the seat falls vacant, the House must elect a replacement. Constitutionally, under Article 95, the Deputy Speaker exercises all powers of the Speaker in their absence, including presiding over sessions, maintaining order, and ensuring legislative discipline.

While the Constitution does not mandate a time frame for this election, the phrase “as soon as may be” is intended to ensure prompt appointment to avoid any constitutional vacuum. However, the absence of legal compulsion has been misinterpreted, leading to prolonged delays.

Functions and Powers

The Deputy Speaker assists the Speaker in running the House and steps in as presiding officer when the Speaker is absent. In legislative committees, if nominated, the Deputy Speaker automatically assumes chairmanship. Distinctively, unlike the Speaker, the Deputy Speaker may participate in debates and vote on all matters when not presiding. When chairing, however, the Deputy Speaker can only vote in case of a tie. The salary of the Deputy Speaker is charged on the Consolidated Fund of India, ensuring financial independence from executive discretion.

Parliamentary Convention and Historical Practice

India's parliamentary practice, inspired by the Westminster model, has traditionally ensured balance by allocating the Deputy Speaker’s post to the Opposition, especially since the post-Emergency era. Notable examples include G.G. Swell (1969–77) and Godey Murahari (1977–79), both from Opposition parties. The intent has been to uphold a power-sharing mechanism and offer space for dissent within the House's functioning.

Democratic Concerns Arising from Prolonged Vacancy

The continued absence of a Deputy Speaker through the 17th and now 18th Lok Sabha raises serious concerns. It undermines Articles 93–95, and violates Rule 8 of the Lok Sabha Rules (1952), which mandates timely election post a formal motion. The delay centralizes authority in the Speaker—typically from the ruling party—and distorts the democratic balance between treasury and Opposition benches.

Moreover, the non-appointment sidelines the principles of consensus-based governance and institutional checks and balances, weakening parliamentary accountability. It also poses risks during any potential Speaker vacancy, potentially triggering a constitutional crisis.

Conclusion

The Deputy Speaker's post is not a ceremonial redundancy but a constitutional necessity for balanced legislative functioning. Upholding this institution is critical for the health of India’s democracy. The ongoing vacancy reflects not just administrative inaction but a gradual erosion of parliamentary conventions, warranting urgent political consensus and constitutional fidelity.

Base Editing Breakthrough

  • 29 May 2025

In News:

In a landmark medical feat, a nine-month-old American boy, Kyle “KJ” Muldoon Jr., became the first known human to be successfully treated using base editing, a next-generation gene editing technique derived from CRISPR-Cas9. KJ was born with Carbamoyl Phosphate Synthetase I (CPS1) deficiency, a rare genetic disorder that disrupts nitrogen breakdown, leading to toxic ammonia buildup—known as hyperammonemia—which can be fatal if untreated.

From CRISPR-Cas9 to Base Editing: Evolution of Gene Editing Tools

CRISPR-Cas9, developed in 2012 by Jennifer Doudna and Emmanuelle Charpentier, revolutionized biotechnology and earned them the 2020 Nobel Prize in Chemistry. Modeled after a microbial immune system, CRISPR works by creating “genetic memory”—capturing viral DNA and guiding the Cas9 enzyme, which acts as molecular scissors, to target and cut specific DNA sequences. This enables scientists to eliminate or repair faulty genes by inducing a double-strand break followed by insertion of a corrected DNA sequence.

However, the double-strand break mechanism raised concerns about unintended genetic consequences. Enter base editing, a refined tool that modifies single DNA bases—the letters A, T, C, G—without cutting both strands of the DNA. Instead of scissors and glue, base editing works like a pencil and eraser, replacing one incorrect base pair with the correct one using a fusion of Cas9 and a base-modifying enzyme. In KJ’s case, the specific base mispair causing CPS1 deficiency was successfully corrected using this technique.

 

Advantages of Base Editing

  • Precision and Safety: Avoids double-strand breaks, reducing off-target effects.
  • Compactness: Easier to deliver to cells via viral vectors.
  • No foreign DNA: Eliminates need for donor DNA insertion.
  • Customisation: Suitable for diseases caused by single-nucleotide mutations.

Challenges: Economic, Ethical, and Regulatory

Despite its promise, base editing faces several bottlenecks:

  • Cost and Accessibility: The procedure is prohibitively expensive—estimated in the range of hundreds of thousands of dollars—and was funded by research institutions and biotech firms in KJ’s case.
  • Scalability: The therapy was custom-designed for KJ’s specific mutation, limiting its use for others. Such personalised medicine lacks the economies of scale that attract pharmaceutical investment.
  • Regulatory hurdles: Countries like India face issues of bureaucratic red tape and outdated ethical frameworks that delay the deployment of advanced genomic therapies.
  • Ethical concerns: As the technology becomes more powerful, there are concerns about misuse, eugenics, and the potential editing of germline cells.

Conclusion

KJ’s treatment marks a paradigm shift in personalised medicine, highlighting the transformative potential of base editing in addressing rare and otherwise untreatable genetic disorders. However, wider application requires systemic reforms in bioethics, regulatory frameworks, and healthcare infrastructure. To ensure equitable access, future efforts must focus on cost reduction, public funding, global collaboration, and ethical oversight. If successfully scaled, base editing could revolutionise medicine for millions suffering from rare genetic diseases.

India Becomes the 4th Largest Economy

  • 26 May 2025

In News:

In a significant milestone for the Indian economy, India has officially surpassed Japan to become the 4th largest economy in the world in nominal GDP terms, as per the IMF World Economic Outlook (April 2025). According to NITI Aayog CEO B.V.R. Subrahmanyam, India’s GDP now stands at $4.19 trillion, marginally higher than Japan’s $4.18 trillion. This marks a historic moment, reflecting a shift in the global economic order and reaffirming India's rising stature on the world stage.

From Fifth to Fourth: A Decade of Accelerated Growth

India’s economic rise has been particularly notable over the past decade. From a GDP of $2 trillion in 2014, India has more than doubled its output to cross the $4 trillion mark in 2025. This rapid expansion has also been accompanied by a sharp rise in per capita income, which has grown from $1,438 in 2014 to $2,880 in 2025. In global rankings, India moved from the 5th position in 2024 to 4th in 2025, overtaking Japan and trailing only the United States, China, and Germany.

Factors Driving the Surge

India’s ascent is the result of multiple structural reforms and policy initiatives undertaken in recent years. Programs such as Digital India, Atmanirbhar Bharat, and the Production Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme have enhanced domestic manufacturing, boosted digital infrastructure, and encouraged self-reliance. The government’s focus on ease of doing business, tax reforms (GST, corporate tax rationalisation), and large-scale infrastructure investment under schemes like Gati Shakti have further catalysed growth.

Despite global trends towards supply chain diversification and reshoring, India continues to attract foreign companies due to its cost-effective labor, large consumer base, and improving logistics. For instance, companies like Apple continue to expand their operations in India, viewing it as a reliable manufacturing hub.

Strategic and Geopolitical Implications

India’s new economic position carries significant geopolitical weight. As the 4th largest economy, India’s influence in global financial institutions, climate negotiations, trade partnerships, and multilateral forums such as G20 and BRICS is set to grow. The achievement enhances investor confidence, thereby potentially increasing foreign direct investment (FDI) inflows.

Domestically, this growth presents an opportunity for addressing structural issues such as unemployment, regional disparities, and income inequality. The challenge ahead lies in ensuring that growth remains inclusive, sustainable, and innovation-driven.

Future Outlook

According to NITI Aayog, India is poised to surpass Germany within the next 2.5–3 years, potentially becoming the third-largest economy globally. For this, sustaining macroeconomic stability, boosting exports, enhancing skill development, and transitioning to a green economy will be crucial.

Conclusion

India’s rise to the 4th largest economy marks a defining moment in its development trajectory. It reflects not just statistical growth, but also the success of structural reforms, demographic potential, and policy resilience. As India prepares for its next leap, balancing economic dynamism with social equity will be the key to truly becoming a global economic leader.

Structural Shift in India’s Remittance Landscape

  • 07 Apr 2025

In News:

According to the RBI’s latest Remittances Survey (2023–24), there has been a significant structural transformation in India's inward remittance patterns. Advanced Economies (AEs) — led by the United States, the United Kingdom, Canada, Singapore, and Australia — have overtaken the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) nations as the primary sources of remittances. This shift holds major implications for India’s migration, financial inflows, and socio-economic planning.

Changing Source Geography of Remittances

India’s total remittance inflow touched USD 118.7 billion in 2023–24, doubling since 2011. The United States alone accounted for 27.7%, followed by the UAE (19.2%), the UK (10.8%), Saudi Arabia (6.7%), and Singapore (6.6%). This marks a departure from the earlier dominance of the Gulf region, whose collective share has dropped to 38%, while Advanced Economies now contribute over 50%.

The top recipient states of these remittances in India are Maharashtra (20.5%), Kerala, and Tamil Nadu.

Factors Behind the Shift

1. Evolving Migration Trends:There has been a surge in professional, high-skilled Indian migrants heading to AEs, particularly in sectors like STEM, finance, and healthcare. These migrants tend to earn higher wages, have stronger job security, and remit more per capita compared to their low-skilled counterparts in the Gulf.

2. Declining Opportunities in the GCC:Several Gulf countries have implemented nationalisation policies like Saudi Arabia’s “Nitaqat,” which prioritise local hiring. Moreover, automation and economic diversification have reduced demand for foreign low-skilled workers. This, combined with COVID-19-induced job losses and return migration, has contributed to the decline in remittances from the region.

3. Education-Driven Migration:Countries like the UK, Australia, and Canada have emerged as popular education destinations. For instance, Indian migration to the UK tripled from 76,000 in 2020 to 250,000 in 2023. Post-study work opportunities and migration partnerships like the India-UK “Migration and Mobility Partnership” (2021) have bolstered this trend.

4. Cost and Mode of Transfers:Digitalisation has reduced remittance costs to India below the global average, although it still exceeds the SDG target of 3% for a US$200 transfer. Nonetheless, cash-based transactions remain significant for smaller amounts.

Economic and Policy Implications

1. Macroeconomic Importance:Remittances contribute about 3–3.5% of India’s GDP, consistently surpassing FDI and Official Development Assistance (ODA). They help finance nearly half of the merchandise trade deficit and act as buffers against external economic shocks.

2. Household-Level Impact:Remittances are pivotal for improving living standards, enabling expenditure on food, healthcare, and education. In Kerala, for instance, remittances account for over 36% of the state's domestic product.

3. Policy Challenges and Recommendations:

  • Skill Alignment: Training systems must align with global job markets to prevent ‘wilful deskilling’ — where highly educated migrants take up low-skilled jobs.
  • Migration Diplomacy: India must proactively negotiate bilateral/multilateral mobility agreements to secure rights, fair wages, and career progression for migrants.
  • Diaspora Engagement: Policies should encourage productive use of remittances (e.g., investments, health, education) and tap diaspora networks for technology and knowledge transfer.

Conclusion

India’s remittance ecosystem is transitioning from Gulf-led low-skilled flows to knowledge-intensive, high-value contributions from Advanced Economies. Sustaining this trend will require strategic migration governance, skill reforms, and deepened engagement with the global Indian diaspora.

India’s Employment Challenge: Bridging the Gap Between Labour& Capital in the Era of Technological Transformation

  • 06 Apr 2025

Context:

India is experiencing a paradoxical trend — despite a rapidly expanding working-age population and rising production capacity, the generation of formal employment opportunities remains insufficient. Since 2017–18, while the working-age population has increased by approximately 9 crore, formal sector jobs have grown by only 6 crore, indicating an annual shortfall of around 50 lakh jobs. This mismatch is further compounded by the dominance of self-employment and informal sector jobs, especially in rural areas, raising concerns about both the quality and sustainability of employment.

Structural Shift Towards Capital-Intensive Growth

The country’s production systems are increasingly exhibiting capital-intensive tendencies — even in traditionally labour-intensive sectors such as textiles and food processing. This phenomenon, often referred to as "skill-biased technological change," is driven by two broad factors:

  • Demand-Side Factors: The pressure to enhance productivity and reduce costs incentivises adoption of automated and capital-intensive technologies, especially in high-value manufacturing and services.
  • Supply-Side Constraints: A shortage of skilled and technically trained labour impedes the effective utilisation of labour resources. Less than 10% of India’s workforce has received formal vocational or technical training, and most youth entering the labour market lack industry-relevant skills.

The declining cost of technology, coupled with stagnant real wages and rigid labour laws in some states, further tilts the balance in favour of machines over human labour.

Policy Interventions and Challenges

The Government of India has initiated schemes such as the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme and the Employment Linked Incentive (ELI) Scheme to address the employment deficit.

  • PLI Scheme: While it aims to boost manufacturing output, the scheme is heavily focused on high-tech sectors like electronics, drones, and IT hardware — which are capital- and skill-intensive. Despite this, the highest job creation under the PLI has been observed in food processing and pharmaceuticals, suggesting a disconnect between investment focus and employment potential.
  • ELI Scheme: Designed to subsidise the cost of hiring untrained workers in labour-intensive sectors, the ELI provides short-term financial support via EPFO contributions. However, its long-term efficacy in ensuring sustainable skilling and employment remains uncertain due to lack of outcome data and short subsidy duration (2–3 years).

Need for a Cohesive Labour-Capital Policy Framework

India’s employment challenge cannot be addressed through fragmented policies. A cohesive framework is required that integrates:

  • Industrial Policy with Skilling Policy: Ministries responsible for industrial production, labour, and skilling must work in tandem to ensure the availability of a workforce with skills that are aligned with the demands of emerging sectors.
  • Incentive Structuring: The current flat subsidies under ELI could be modified into a graded structure, where higher transfers are provided for higher levels of certified skill acquisition, encouraging continuous skill upgrading.
  • Skill Supply Chain Reform: Skill development institutions like ITIs and vocational centres should be incentivised based on placement rates and wage outcomes, not just enrolments or certifications.
  • Labour Law Flexibility: State-level reforms in labour regulations are essential to reduce the cost of employing formal workers and to encourage job creation, especially in micro, small, and medium enterprises (MSMEs).

Way Forward for a Viksit Bharat (Developed India)

As India transitions towards becoming a high-value production economy, it must simultaneously invest in its human capital. This requires:

  • Dynamic Skill Development Programs: Adaptive skilling strategies must be designed to align with evolving technological trends such as Artificial Intelligence (AI), robotics, and green energy.
  • Data-Driven Employment Policies: Regular labour market surveys and outcome tracking of employment schemes are critical for evidence-based policymaking.
  • Support for Labour-Intensive Sectors: Focused support to industries with high employment elasticity, such as textiles, leather, food processing, tourism, and construction, can yield substantial job creation.

In conclusion, advancing the agenda of Viksit Bharat demands equal emphasis on capital and labour. Without a strong and skilled workforce, India's demographic dividend risks turning into a demographic burden. Therefore, employment generation must be at the core of India’s development policy, with a strategic vision that links skilling, production, and structural transformation.

Waqf (Amendment) Bill, 2025

  • 05 Apr 2025

In News:

The Waqf (Amendment) Bill, 2025, tabled in the Lok Sabha on April 2, 2025, seeks to amend the Waqf Act, 1995, which governs the administration of waqf properties in India. The revised Bill incorporates the recommendations of a Joint Parliamentary Committee (JPC) and has sparked significant political and community debate due to its proposed structural and procedural reforms.

1. Retention and Restriction of ‘Waqf by User’ Doctrine

  • Background: The doctrine allows property to be treated as waqf based on uninterrupted communal usage, even without formal documentation.
  • Revised Provision: Retains ‘waqf by user’ for properties registered before the enactment of the law but prohibits its use for future claims.
  • Criticism: The introduction of a clause requiring individuals to prove Islamic practice for five years to establish waqf status is seen as exclusionary and arbitrary.

2. Inclusion of Non-Muslims in Waqf Institutions

  • Provisions:
    • Mandates the inclusion of at least two non-Muslims in the Central Waqf Council and State Waqf Boards.
    • Removes the requirement that the CEO of a Waqf Board be Muslim.
    • Redefines Waqf Tribunals to include a district judge, a Joint Secretary-level officer, and a Muslim law expert.
  • Criticism: Raises questions about community autonomy in religious affairs under Article 26 of the Constitution.
  • Government's Justification: Aims to enhance expertise, transparency, and administrative efficiency.

3. Enhanced Government Oversight in Waqf Property Surveys

  • New Mechanism:
    • Surveys to be conducted by senior officials above the rank of District Collector.
    • Such officers will serve as the final authority in determining whether land is waqf or government-owned.
    • Tribunal jurisdiction curtailed in such disputes.
  • Implications:
    • Centralizes decision-making within the state bureaucracy.
    • Raises concerns about executive overreach and weakening of judicial oversight in waqf matters.

4. Centralised Registration and Digital Governance

  • Digital Portal:
    • Mandatory online registration of all waqf properties within six months.
    • Extensions can be granted by waqf tribunals upon demonstration of "sufficient cause."
  • Objective: To curb encroachment, enhance transparency, and create a uniform digital record of waqf assets.

5. Application of the Limitation Act, 1963

  • Change Introduced: Repeals Section 107 of the Waqf Act, 1995, which exempted waqf properties from the statutory limitation period.
  • Implication: Allows claims of adverse possession after 12 years; may legitimize longstanding illegal occupations of waqf land.
  • Opposition View: Seen as a move that undermines waqf rights and aids encroachers.

6. Judicial Review and Appeals

  • Revised Provision:
    • Waqf tribunal decisions are no longer final.
    • Appeals can be made to the High Court within 90 days.
    • Courts can dismiss suits if properties are not registered within the stipulated time unless “sufficient cause” is shown.
  • Impact: Enhances judicial scrutiny but also limits access to justice in certain cases through procedural conditions.

Critical Analysis

  • Pros:
    • Encourages transparency and formalisation of waqf governance.
    • Introduces checks against misuse and encroachments.
    • Provides a digital framework for property management.
  • Cons:
    • Risks state interference in religious institutions, impacting minority rights under Articles 25–28.
    • Exclusion of oral traditions may erase significant community practices and histories.
    • Implementation challenges due to administrative overburden and community mistrust.

Conclusion

The Waqf (Amendment) Bill, 2025, represents a significant shift in the governance of waqf properties by increasing state oversight, standardising processes, and promoting digital reforms. However, it raises serious questions about religious autonomy, federal balance, and minority rights. A careful balance between administrative efficiency and constitutional guarantees is essential to ensure inclusive and equitable governance.

India’s Air Pollution Crisis

  • 03 Apr 2025

Context:

India’s air pollution crisis has evolved from a seasonal concern into a persistent public health emergency. Urban skylines disappearing under layers of smog, overflowing hospitals with respiratory cases, and frequent school closures point to the alarming scale of the issue. Indian cities consistently rank among the most polluted globally, and without a coordinated, inclusive, and locally-driven strategy, the situation may deteriorate further.

Institutional and Structural Complexities

Air pollution in India is not merely a technical issue; it is deeply embedded in structural and governance-related challenges. It reflects a mix of socio-economic disparities, weak municipal capacity, behavioral norms, and fragmented institutional mandates. Municipal bodies — key actors in controlling local pollution sources — often lack adequate funding, data access, and administrative autonomy. Their responsibilities are rarely aligned with national clean air targets.

India aims to reduce PM2.5 levels by 40% (from 2017 levels) by 2026 under the National Clean Air Programme (NCAP), but progress remains slow. This is due in part to a reliance on ambient air quality data, which can fluctuate based on meteorological factors and may not accurately reflect ground-level interventions. A shift toward activity-based metrics — such as the number of biomass stoves replaced or diesel vehicles retired — is needed to measure real impact.

Key Interventions and Their Gaps

India has introduced several programs to combat air pollution:

  • National Clean Air Programme (NCAP): Targets 20–30% reduction in PM10 and PM2.5 by 2026 in 132 cities.
  • Bharat Stage VI (BS-VI): Introduced in 2020 to enforce strict vehicular emission norms.
  • Pradhan Mantri Ujjwala Yojana (PMUY): Promotes LPG usage to reduce dependence on biomass.
  • FAME II: Incentivizes electric vehicles.
  • Swachh Bharat Mission (Urban): Addresses urban waste, a significant pollution source.

However, between 2019 and 2023, only about 60% of NCAP funds were utilized — not due to lack of intent, but due to institutional misalignment and poor coordination. Additionally, India’s clean air budget is dwarfed by global comparisons; China invested ?22 lakh crore over five years, while India’s NCAP allocation is less than 1% of that. Even when related programs (PMUY: ?18,128 crore; FAME II: ?10,795 crore; SBM-U: ?1.4 lakh crore) are included, the challenge lies in integrating these efforts meaningfully.

The Need for a Phased, Data-Driven Approach

A transformative clean air strategy should include:

  • Phase I: Build high-resolution, local emissions inventories.
  • Phase II: Link funding to data-driven, actionable plans.
  • Phase III: Track reductions in emissions, not just pollution concentrations.

Governance reforms must empower local authorities, integrate air quality goals into urban planning, and ensure open access to real-time emissions data.

Guarding Against Technological Overdependence

India must avoid over-reliance on AI dashboards, smog towers, and other high-tech tools that may benefit elite urban areas while neglecting rural and informal sectors — major contributors to emissions. Instead of focusing on optics, efforts must prioritize structural reforms and equitable interventions.

Global Lessons, Local Adaptation

India can learn from other countries:

  • China: Closed coal plants aggressively.
  • Brazil: Enabled community-led waste management.
  • California: Reinvested pollution revenue in vulnerable populations.
  • London: Implemented bans before adopting high-tech monitoring.

India’s path must be rooted in federalism, tailored to its informal economy, and driven by behavioral and structural change. Clean air must be recognized as a universal right, not a privilege — and achieving it demands people-centric governance, consistent funding, and courageous implementation.

Nutrition and Education: UNESCO’s Call for Integrated Human Capital Development

  • 02 Apr 2025

Context:

In March 2025, UNESCO released its global report titled “Education and Nutrition: Learn to Eat Well” at the ‘Nutrition for Growth’ summit in France. The report brings to light the critical intersection between child nutrition and educational outcomes, positioning school feeding programs not merely as welfare schemes but as foundational investments in human capital.

Global and Indian Context

As per the report, 418 million children across 161 countries benefit from school meal programs, yet over half of these initiatives lack adequate portions of fruits and vegetables. Alarmingly, nearly one-third of the programs include sugary beverages. This dietary imbalance is reflected in the rising tide of childhood obesity, which has doubled in over 100 countries in the past two decades.

In India, the PM-POSHAN (formerly Mid-Day Meal) scheme remains a vital intervention, feeding approximately 118 million children daily, making it one of the largest school meal programs globally. Despite this extensive reach, the report notes a persisting issue of "hidden hunger" — widespread micronutrient deficiencies stemming from poor dietary diversity.

Nutrition-Education Nexus

The report strongly advocates for recognizing nutrition as an enabler of learning. Well-balanced meals in schools contribute to better attention spans, memory retention, and academic performance. In countries like Brazil and Finland, where nutrition programs are closely aligned with educational frameworks, data shows improved enrolment, retention, and performance metrics.

School meals also serve as instruments of social equity, especially for children from low-income families and marginalized communities. They act as a safety net, improving attendance — particularly for girls — and reducing hunger-related learning barriers. When sourced locally, these programs can additionally boost rural economies and support sustainable agriculture, creating farm-to-table ecosystems.

Challenges Identified

The report flags several systemic challenges. A majority of school feeding programs are heavily dependent on staple grains, offering minimal variety. Many meals still include ultra-processed and low-nutrient foods, while nutrition education remains largely absent from school curricula — only 17 countries integrate it with national food standards.

Further, an urban-rural divide in infrastructure, such as cold storage and supply chains, leads to inconsistent delivery. Monitoring gaps also persist — just 8% of countries track school meals against WHO nutritional standards, making outcome assessment difficult.

Recommendations and Way Forward

UNESCO proposes a holistic approach for countries to bridge the education-nutrition divide:

  • Curriculum Integration: Nutrition should be embedded into educational content across disciplines and levels.
  • Science-Based Standards: National guidelines should align with WHO dietary recommendations.
  • Local Procurement: Meal sourcing must prioritize seasonal and region-specific produce to enhance diversity.
  • Teacher Training: Educators should be equipped to impart food literacy effectively.
  • Robust Monitoring: Countries must develop national strategies on school nutrition with clear benchmarks, accountability, and evaluation mechanisms.

Conclusion

The report makes a compelling case that education and nutrition must be interlinked to foster meaningful development. Investing in nutritious school meals is not merely about feeding children — it is about shaping a healthier, more capable future generation. In the long run, a well-nourished child is better positioned to learn, thrive, and contribute to nation-building, making this a strategic priority for policymakers worldwide.

India–US Civil Nuclear Deal

  • 01 Apr 2025

Context:

Nearly two decades after the landmark India–US Civil Nuclear Agreement (123 Agreement) was signed in 2007, a major operational milestone has been achieved. In March 2025, the US Department of Energy (DoE) granted regulatory clearance under “10CFR810” of the US Atomic Energy Act (1954), allowing Holtec International, a US-based nuclear engineering firm, to transfer unclassified Small Modular Reactor (SMR) technology to three Indian private entities: Holtec Asia (its subsidiary), Tata Consulting Engineers (TCE), and Larsen & Toubro (L&T).

Key Regulatory and Safeguard Provisions

  • Authorization Duration: 10 years, subject to a five-year review.
  • Safeguards: Technology to be used only for peaceful nuclear activities under IAEA safeguards.
  • Restrictions:
    • No retransfer to other Indian or foreign entities without US approval.
    • Prohibited for military/naval propulsion or enrichment purposes.
    • No access to Sensitive Nuclear Technology.
  • Compliance: Holtec is required to file quarterly progress reports to the US DoE.

Strategic and Technological Significance for India

  • Modernizing India's Nuclear Fleet: India's nuclear program has traditionally relied on Pressurised Heavy Water Reactors (PHWRs) using natural uranium. The transfer of SMR technology based on Pressurised Water Reactors (PWRs) represents a shift towards the global mainstream of nuclear reactor technology.
  • Boost to Domestic Manufacturing: Collaboration with Indian firms like L&T and TCE can localize manufacturing and engineering, promoting Make in India and self-reliance in nuclear energy technology.
  • Entry into Global SMR Supply Chain: This development aligns India with an emerging global trend, as SMRs (30–300 MWe) are increasingly viewed as crucial for decarbonization and energy security.
  • Strategic Counterbalance to China: As China advances its SMR technology for energy diplomacy in the Global South, this India–US initiative presents a geopolitical counterweight, especially as both nations face challenges in independently competing with China’s scale and state-led investments.

Legal and Policy Bottlenecks

  • Civil Liability for Nuclear Damage Act, 2010: Cited by foreign companies as a barrier due to concerns about supplier liability in case of accidents.
  • Atomic Energy Act, 1962: Needs amendments to permit private sector participation in nuclear generation, currently reserved for public sector undertakings like NPCIL and NTPC.
  • Despite Holtec's request, these PSUs were not included in the initial authorization due to pending non-proliferation assurances from the Indian government. However, they may be added later, contingent on further diplomatic progress.

Way Forward and Future Prospects

  • Holtec’s Expansion Plans: Its non-nuclear manufacturing unit in Dahej, Gujarat is poised for expansion, with a potential doubling of its workforce once SMR manufacturing begins.
  • Partnership Pipeline:
    • TCE for engineering design.
    • L&T for high-precision nuclear component manufacturing.
    • Future engagement with NPCIL and NTPC as operators of Holtec’s SMR-300 reactors.
  • Clean Energy Strategy: SMRs are positioned as a key component of India's low-carbon energy transition, addressing both rising power demands and global climate commitments.

Conclusion

The US’s clearance for technology transfer to Indian private firms marks a pivotal operational step in the long-stalled India–US civil nuclear partnership. It opens the door for India to enter the global SMR market, boosts its domestic nuclear industry, and strengthens strategic cooperation with the US. However, legal reforms and institutional readiness remain critical for realizing the full potential of this deal.

Maternity Leave as a Constitutional and Reproductive Right

  • 25 May 2025

Background:

In a landmark ruling in K. Umadevi v. Government of Tamil Nadu (May 2025), the Supreme Court (SC) affirmed that maternity leave is not merely a welfare measure but a constitutional and reproductive right of women. Setting aside the Madras High Court’s judgment, the apex court extended maternity benefits to a government school teacher for her third child, rejecting the Tamil Nadu government's policy that restricts such benefits to only the first two children.

Background of the Case:

The petitioner, a teacher employed in a Tamil Nadu government school, was denied maternity leave for her third biological child, citing Fundamental Rule 101(a) which limits benefits to women with fewer than two surviving children. Notably, the child in question was from her second marriage, while the earlier two children were in the custody of her former husband and born before her employment. The single bench of the High Court had ruled in her favour, finding the state rule inconsistent with the Maternity Benefit Act, 1961 and invalid under Article 254 (repugnancy with central law). However, a division bench reversed this decision, prompting an appeal to the SC.

Key Observations by the Supreme Court:

  • Maternity leave is integral to a woman’s reproductive autonomy and thus protected under Article 21 of the Constitution, which ensures personal liberty.
  • It is also aligned with Directive Principles of State Policy (Article 42) that mandate the state to ensure humane work conditions and maternity relief.
  • The SC emphasized that reproductive rights are recognized under international human rights law, including the rights to health, privacy, dignity, equality, and non-discrimination (as per the Universal Declaration of Human Rights).
  • The Court clarified that population control, though a valid public policy goal, cannot override the constitutional guarantee of reproductive choice and health.

Reaffirming the Maternity Benefit Act, 1961 (Amended 2017):

  • The Act applies to workplaces with 10 or more employees, including both public and private sectors.
  • Provides 26 weeks of paid maternity leave for women with fewer than two surviving children, and 12 weeks for the third or subsequent child.
  • Also covers adoptive and commissioning mothers with 12 weeks of leave.
  • Ensures job security, access to crèche facilities in establishments with 50+ employees, and promotes work-from-home options during or after pregnancy.

Significance of the Judgment:

  • The verdict ensures gender equity in the workforce by reinforcing women’s right to combine motherhood with professional aspirations.
  • It highlights the need to harmonize state policies with central welfare legislation and constitutional mandates.
  • It reflects the Court's broader jurisprudence, such as in Suchita Srivastava v. Chandigarh Administration, which had affirmed a woman’s reproductive choices as part of her autonomy.

Implications for Policy and Governance:

This judgment strengthens women’s workforce participation by addressing a key dropout point—childbirth. It serves as a precedent for inclusive, rights-based policy design and calls for reviewing restrictive service rules across states. It aligns with India's commitments under international human rights frameworks and the Sustainable Development Goals (SDG 5: Gender Equality).

In conclusion, the Supreme Court’s verdict elevates maternity leave to a constitutionally protected right, advancing both social justice and women’s empowerment in India’s democratic framework.

Why India needs stable urban forests

  • 24 May 2025

In News:

Urban forests are increasingly emerging as critical ecological buffers amidst India’s rapidly expanding cities. The recent controversy over the Kancha Gachibowli forest in Hyderabad—where 400 acres of urban forest land were earmarked for industrial development—has reignited debates on sustainable urbanisation and environmental governance. The Supreme Court’s intervention to halt further deforestation underscores the urgent need to prioritise ecological assets in urban planning.

Importance of Urban Forests

Urban forests such as Kancha Gachibowli (Hyderabad), Aarey (Mumbai), Turahalli (Bengaluru), Neela Hauz and the Ridge (Delhi), and Dol Ka Baadh (Jaipur) play a vital role in maintaining ecological balance within metropolitan environments. Their multifaceted contributions include:

  • Air Pollution Mitigation: Urban forests absorb pollutants such as PM2.5 and PM10, which are major contributors to urban air pollution from vehicular emissions and construction activity.
    • A 2006 study by the USDA Forest Service found that one hectare of forest can remove approximately one ton of air pollutants annually.
    • In November 2024, the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) recorded a hazardous AQI of 494 in Delhi, highlighting the urgent need for natural air purifiers.
  • Climate Regulation: These forests help reduce the urban heat island effect, control stormwater runoff, and mitigate urban flooding and erosion.
  • Carbon Sequestration: Trees in urban forests trap atmospheric carbon, contributing to climate change mitigation efforts.
  • Biodiversity Preservation: They serve as urban habitats for endangered birds, insects, and other fauna, supporting biodiversity within city limits.
  • Socio-Cultural Benefits: Urban forests offer green spaces for recreation, promote mental well-being, and enhance the overall livability of urban areas.

Threats and Challenges

Despite their importance, urban forests in India face increasing threats due to:

  • Unregulated Urban Expansion: Urban planning often disregards ecological sustainability, prioritising infrastructure and industrial development over green spaces.
  • Lack of Legal Clarity: State governments sometimes contest the status of forest lands, as seen in Telangana’s claim over Kancha Gachibowli, undermining forest protections.
  • Real Estate Pressures: Encroachments and land-use changes for commercial gain are frequent, with environmental concerns often sidelined.

Judicial Interventions and Constitutional Provisions

Indian courts have played a pivotal role in safeguarding urban forests:

  • T.N. GodavarmanThirumulpad Case (1996): Expanded the definition of "forest" to include areas recorded as forest in government records, irrespective of ownership or classification.
  • Delhi High Court (2015): Directed the protection and notification of the Delhi Ridge forest.
  • Supreme Court Stay on Aarey Tree Felling (2020): Responded to civil society petitions to preserve Mumbai’s Aarey forest.
  • Rajasthan High Court Suo Motu Action (2024): Intervened against deforestation in biodiversity-rich Baran district.

Constitutional Backing:

  • Article 21: Guarantees the Right to Life, interpreted by courts to include the right to a clean and healthy environment.
  • Article 48A: Directs the State to protect and improve the environment.
  • Article 51A(g): Makes it a fundamental duty of citizens to protect the natural environment.

Policy Interventions: Nagar Van Yojana

In response to growing ecological concerns, the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) launched the Nagar Van Yojana in 2020 with the goal of developing 1,000 urban forests by 2027.

  • As per the India State of Forest Report 2023, the initiative has already led to an increase of 1,445.81 sq km in tree and forest cover in urban areas.
  • The scheme aligns with other policy frameworks such as the National Forest Policy (1988) and the National Mission for Green India (2014), which promote afforestation and ecological restoration.

Way Forward

To ensure sustainable urbanisation, India must:

  • Integrate ecological planning into urban masterplans, with mandatory forest inventories and zoning protections.
  • Strengthen legal protections for notified and unnotified forests within urban areas.
  • Foster community participation and civil society engagement in urban environmental stewardship.
  • Promote green infrastructure through Smart Cities and AMRUT missions.

Conclusion

Urban forests are not peripheral luxuries but ecological necessities. Their conservation is essential for ensuring environmental resilience, public health, and urban quality of life. As India continues its urbanisation journey, a harmonious balance between development and ecological preservation is indispensable.

Overfishing in India

  • 23 May 2025

Context:

India, the second-largest fish-producing nation globally, contributes around 8% to world fish production. With an estimated marine fisheries potential of 5.31 million tonnes, India’s sector has reached its maximum sustainable yield, currently stabilizing at 3–4 million tonnes annually. However, this apparent success masks deep ecological and socio-economic distress, primarily due to overfishing.

Inequity and Overexploitation

Despite their 90% share in the fishing population, small-scale fishers harvest merely 10% of the total catch, while mechanised trawlers dominate volumes. This has left three-fourths of marine fisher families below the poverty line. Escalating the problem is the race to increase yields using more powerful engines and finer mesh nets—leading to marginal gains at steep ecological and financial costs.

Trawling operations, especially shrimp trawlers, demonstrate the magnitude of bycatch—where for every kilogram of shrimp, over 10 kg of juvenile and non-target species are discarded. Such practices degrade marine biodiversity, deplete spawning stocks, and destabilise food webs. Examples from Canada’s cod fishery (1992) and California’s sardine fishery collapse (1960s–80s) show the irreversible impacts of mismanaged stocks.

Policy Fragmentation and Regulatory Loopholes

Each coastal state in India governs its marine fisheries through its own Marine Fisheries Regulation Act (MFRA), resulting in a regulatory patchwork. Fishers exploit these inconsistencies—for example, landing juvenile fish legally in one state that are protected in another. This undermines conservation and facilitates laundering of protected species.

Moreover, the fish-meal and fish-oil (FMFO) industry fuels ecological damage by incentivising bycatch. Much of this low-value catch is processed into meal, mostly for export, depriving domestic consumers and aquaculture of vital nutritional inputs.

Government Initiatives

The Union Budget 2025–26 allocated a record ?2,703.67 crore to the fisheries sector, focusing on the sustainable harnessing of resources from the EEZ and high seas, especially around Lakshadweep and the Andaman & Nicobar Islands. Key schemes include:

  • Pradhan Mantri MatsyaSampada Yojana (PMMSY): Focuses on inland fisheries and aquaculture for food security.
  • Blue Revolution Scheme: Enhances productivity in marine and inland fisheries.
  • Technological Interventions: Satellite-based vessel tracking, Oceansat for forecasting Potential Fishing Zones (PFZ), and GIS mapping are being deployed.

Path to Sustainability

India’s National Policy on Marine Fisheries (2017) embeds sustainability at its core, promoting measures like:

  • 61-day uniform fishing bans during monsoons;
  • Prohibitions on harmful methods like pair and bull trawling, and LED light usage;
  • Promotion of mariculture, artificial reefs, and sea ranching.

Successful models abroad offer direction. New Zealand’s Quota Management System (QMS) aligns catch limits with stock assessments and uses transferable quotas to regulate fishing. India could pilot such a model for its mechanised fleet.

Domestically, Kerala’s enforcement of a Minimum Legal Size (MLS) for threadfin bream boosted catches by 41% in one season. Scaling such practices nationally can ensure ecological recovery and economic benefits.

Way Forward

India must urgently move towards a unified, science-based regulatory framework, including:

  • National MLS norms,
  • Gear restrictions to reduce juvenile catch,
  • Scientific catch limits,
  • Closed seasons aligned with spawning cycles.

Simultaneously, fisher cooperatives must be empowered, FMFO quotas capped, and consumer awareness campaigns launched to encourage demand for legally sized, sustainable seafood.

In conclusion, India stands at a critical juncture. Ignoring overfishing risks deepening poverty and ecological collapse. The solutions—rooted in science, equity, and sustainability—are within reach and must be swiftly implemented to safeguard marine wealth and livelihoods for future generations.

Judicial Independence vs Accountability

  • 22 May 2025

Context:

The recent controversy surrounding Justice Yashwant Varma and the subsequent remarks by Vice President Jagdeep Dhankhar have reignited a crucial debate in Indian constitutional discourse: How can the judiciary remain independent while also being held accountable? At the heart of this debate lies the tension between institutional autonomy and the growing demand for transparency in judicial conduct.

The Varma Case: Catalyst for a Larger Debate

In March 2024, unaccounted cash was reportedly found at the residence of Justice Yashwant Varma, then serving on the Delhi High Court. Following the discovery, he was transferred to the Allahabad High Court. An in-house inquiry conducted by the Supreme Court found him culpable, yet it dismissed a petition seeking criminal investigation, forwarding the report instead to the President and Prime Minister.

Vice President Dhankhar questioned the constitutional basis of the in-house mechanism and called for a re-examination of the K Veeraswami judgment (1991), suggesting that the current legal framework grants excessive immunity to judges and hampers accountability.

Constitutional Safeguards and In-House Procedures

The Indian Constitution protects judicial independence through Article 124, which stipulates that judges of the Supreme Court and High Courts can only be removed through impeachment—a process that requires a special majority in Parliament. However, this safeguard has made judicial removal politically difficult. Despite several attempts, no judge has ever been successfully impeached since independence.

To address ethical complaints, the judiciary devised the in-house inquiry mechanism, wherein a panel headed by senior judges examines allegations against fellow judges. While this preserves the judiciary’s autonomy, the mechanism lacks statutory backing and has no power to impose penalties or recommend criminal prosecution.

The Veeraswami Judgment: Balancing Act or Bottleneck?

In the K Veeraswami case, the Supreme Court ruled that a judge could be treated as a public servant under the Prevention of Corruption Act. However, it mandated that any criminal case against a judge could proceed only with the approval of the Chief Justice of India (CJI), not the executive. This was intended to prevent misuse of prosecutorial powers and ensure judicial independence.

Critics argue that this judgment has created a judicial monopoly over sanctioning investigations, undermining public accountability. In practice, criminal prosecution against judges remains extremely rare. Notably, in 2019, then CJI Ranjan Gogoi sanctioned an FIR against Justice S.N. Shukla of the Allahabad High Court—one of the few instances of such approval.

Towards a Transparent and Accountable Judiciary

The current episode underscores a critical gap in India’s judicial accountability mechanisms. While independence is essential to prevent executive interference, absolute immunity risks eroding public confidence in the judiciary. The lack of transparency and enforceability in in-house inquiries has further exacerbated this perception.

There is a growing case for revisiting the Veeraswami judgment, possibly through constitutional or legislative reform, to allow limited and well-regulated avenues for criminal investigation into judicial misconduct—without compromising judicial independence.

Conclusion

A nuanced balance must be struck between judicial independence and accountability. India’s democracy cannot afford a judiciary that is either vulnerable to political manipulation or immune from public scrutiny. Strengthening internal accountability frameworks, reinforcing institutional checks, and ensuring transparency in disciplinary processes are essential to uphold both the dignity and integrity of the judiciary.

WHO Pandemic Agreement: A Landmark Step Towards Global Health Security

  • 21 May 2025

Context:

The World Health Assembly (WHA), the decision-making body of the World Health Organization (WHO), adopted the first-ever Pandemic Agreement at its 78th session in May 2025. This historic and legally binding agreement, three years in the making, aims to strengthen global pandemic preparedness, prevention, and response with a focus on equity, solidarity, and scientific evidence. Triggered by the gaps and inequities exposed during the COVID-19 crisis, the accord marks a milestone in global health governance under Article 19 of the WHO Constitution, previously used for the 2003 Framework Convention on Tobacco Control.

The agreement was unanimously approved by 124 countries, with no opposition and 11 abstentions. It emphasizes that national sovereignty remains intact, explicitly stating that WHO cannot mandate domestic laws or measures such as lockdowns, vaccine mandates, or travel restrictions. This provision addresses concerns of state overreach and promotes voluntary, collaborative international action.

A central feature is the creation of a Pathogen Access and Benefit Sharing (PABS) system, wherein countries that share virus samples will receive equitable access to vaccines, diagnostics, and therapeutics. Participating pharmaceutical companies must allocate 20% of their real-time production (10% as donations, 10% at affordable prices) to WHO for distribution based on public health needs, especially in developing nations. This move addresses the vaccine nationalism witnessed during COVID-19 and promotes global health equity.

To support this system, the agreement calls for the establishment of a Global Supply Chain and Logistics Network (GSCL), coordinated by WHO, to ensure timely and fair distribution of essential health products during public health emergencies. Member states are encouraged to develop national pandemic prevention plans, improve disease surveillance, and invest in routine immunisation, antimicrobial resistance control, and zoonotic disease prevention.

Another key pillar is the promotion of sustainable local production of health products and technology transfer to developing countries. Mechanisms such as licensing, regulatory incentives, and financing are to be used to facilitate regional and global tech hubs. These efforts are aimed at reducing reliance on a few manufacturing nations and improving rapid response capabilities globally.

The agreement’s adoption is politically significant in reaffirming multilateralism amid rising nationalism. WHO Director-General Dr. Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus hailed it as a “victory for public health and multilateral cooperation.” However, the absence of the United States — a major global health funder and former leader in pandemic response — casts a shadow. The U.S. withdrew from the drafting process following the Trump administration’s move to exit WHO, raising concerns about the treaty’s universality and enforcement.

Despite the lack of a penalty mechanism for non-compliance, the agreement represents a global consensus on shared responsibility for health security. It acknowledges that pandemics pose transboundary risks requiring coordinated international action, especially to protect vulnerable populations and frontline workers.

Expected to enter into force after ratification by 60 countries and the finalisation of PABS and GSCL mechanisms by May 2026, the WHO Pandemic Agreement is a pivotal step in ensuring the world is better prepared, more resilient, and more just in the face of future pandemic threats.

Live Baiting and the Conservation Dilemma

  • 20 May 2025

Context:

In recent years, India's tiger conservation practices have come under scrutiny due to the continued use of live baiting, particularly for feeding injured or aging tigers. While originally a hunting tactic used by British colonialists—placing prey like buffalo or goats to lure tigers for easy shooting—live baiting found new life in post-independence India as a tourism tool in reserves like Sariska. This practice was officially banned in 1982 by Prime Minister Indira Gandhi, yet it persists in conflict scenarios and as a means of care for ailing tigers.

National Policy and Ecological Concerns

According to the Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) of the National Tiger Conservation Authority (NTCA), live baiting for tourism is prohibited, and its use for injured or old tigers is “not advisable.” The SOP emphasizes minimal human intervention, underscoring that wildlife conservation must adhere to the principle of survival of the fittest. Artificial feeding undermines this, fostering dependency, disrupting natural selection, and increasing the risk of human-wildlife conflict.

Despite these guidelines, many reserves continue the practice under humanitarian or public pressure. Feeding wild tigers, even as an emergency measure, is permitted only in exceptional cases—such as when an injured tigress with dependent cubs cannot hunt. Experts like Valmik Thapar recommend baiting no more than once every two weeks and only for a short duration of up to three months.

Case Studies Highlighting Consequences

The tragic case of Kankati, a 23-month-old tigress in Ranthambore, illustrates the dangers of early habituation. Raised on live bait after her mother, Arrowhead, fell ill, Kankati and her siblings lost their fear of humans. She has since killed two people, raising alarms about human safety in reserves.

Similar outcomes have been observed in the cases of T36, T37, and Simba—young tigers raised on bait following the deaths of their mothers. Without learning essential hunting skills, these tigers either perished prematurely or became threats to others. Even aging icons like Machhli and T2 were kept alive unnaturally with bait; while Machhli survived on human-provided food for seven years, T2 died too weak to kill.

The Cultural Shift Toward Over-Intervention

A growing culture of emotional overreach is increasingly shaping wildlife management. Tourists now demand treatment for limping or injured tigers, triggering unnecessary tranquilizations and medical interventions. From transporting prey animals to creating artificial water sources during dry spells, reserves like Corbett, Kanha, Bandipur, and Pench are altering ecosystems to sustain tigers artificially.

This overmanagement leads to unnatural survival of weaker individuals, overcrowding, and territorial conflicts—not just between tigers but also between tigers and humans. Experts caution that such interference only weakens the ecological integrity of tiger populations.

Conclusion: Let Nature Lead

Veteran conservationists argue that wild tigers do not require pet-like care. The most effective conservation strategy remains the preservation of natural habitats and prey bases, with minimal human interference. Misplaced kindness, though emotionally compelling, endangers both tiger and human populations by disrupting nature’s balance.

For India to achieve sustainable tiger conservation, it must resist populist interventions and re-anchor policies in ecological wisdom—protect, don’t pamper.

Kolkata-Northeast Sea Route and the Strategic Highway Project

  • 19 May 2025

In News:

India’s northeast has long faced logistical isolation due to its geographical constraints and overdependence on the narrow Siliguri Corridor, also known as the Chicken’s Neck. A recent strategic initiative aims to transform this scenario through the creation of a multi-modal connectivity route that bypasses Bangladesh and directly links the Northeast to the sea via Myanmar and Kolkata. This development gains added relevance in light of recent remarks by Bangladesh’s interim leader Muhammad Yunus, who described Northeast India as “landlocked” and dependent solely on Dhaka for maritime access—a claim that India seeks to counter through tangible connectivity upgrades.

Kaladan Multi-Modal Transit Transport Project (KMTTP)

At the heart of this initiative lies the Kaladan Multi-Modal Transit Transport Project (KMTTP), a flagship project under India’s Act East Policy, designed to connect the eastern seaport of Kolkata to the landlocked Northeast through Myanmar. The project includes:

  • Sea Leg: Kolkata Port to Sittwe Port in Myanmar (~539 km).
  • Inland Waterway: From Sittwe to Paletwa via the Kaladan River (~158 km).
  • Road Leg in Myanmar: Paletwa to Zorinpui on the India-Myanmar border (~110 km).
  • Indian Extension: Zorinpui to Lawngtlai and Aizawl in Mizoram, connecting to the national highway network.

This corridor not only reduces reliance on routes through Bangladesh but also serves as a strategic counterbalance in India’s regional geopolitics, particularly in strengthening ties with Southeast Asia and enhancing its maritime influence in the Bay of Bengal.

Strategic Shillong-Silchar Highway

Complementing the KMTTP is the construction of a 166.8 km four-lane high-speed highway from Mawlyngkhung (near Shillong) to Panchgram (near Silchar) along NH-6. This is the first high-speed corridor in the North-East and the first in a hilly terrain, and is slated for completion by 2030. The project is being developed under the Hybrid Annuity Model (HAM) at a cost of ?22,864 crore, with implementation by NHIDCL for the Ministry of Road Transport and Highways (MoRTH).

The highway will include:

  • 19 major bridges, 153 minor bridges, 326 culverts
  • 22 underpasses, 26 overpasses, 8 subways, and 34 viaducts

It will reduce travel time between Shillong and Silchar from 8.5 to 5 hours and act as a crucial link to states like Mizoram, Tripura, and Manipur. More significantly, it will integrate with the Kaladan route, offering a direct link to Kolkata via Myanmar and the Bay of Bengal.

Strategic and Economic Significance

This integrated connectivity initiative holds multi-dimensional importance:

  • Reduces dependency on Bangladesh and the Siliguri Corridor
  • Enhances trade and people-to-people ties with ASEAN nations
  • Strengthens regional integration under the Act East Policy
  • Boosts economic development in the North-East through improved logistics
  • Improves India’s strategic posture in the Indo-Pacific and Bay of Bengal

In conclusion, the Kolkata-Northeast sea route and supporting infrastructure like the Shillong-Silchar highway represent a decisive step towards bridging geographical constraints, boosting regional development, and reinforcing India’s strategic autonomy in the eastern frontier.

Operation Sindoor

  • 18 May 2025

In News:

Operation Sindoor marked a significant leap in India's military and technological prowess, not only achieving its strategic objectives but also demonstrating the operational maturity of Made-in-Indiadefence systems. The operation was characterised by a multi-layered approach involving precision strikes, air defence, unmanned systems, and advanced surveillance tools—most of which were indigenously developed.

Precision and Navigation Capabilities

One of the defining features of Operation Sindoor was the pinpoint accuracy of strikes deep inside Pakistan and Pakistan-occupied Kashmir. Specific terrorist camps and infrastructure were destroyed with minimal collateral damage, underlining India’s commitment to responsible military engagement. This precision was enabled by a combination of advanced guidance systems and real-time data from space-based and ground-based assets.

India's indigenous Navigation with Indian Constellation (NavIC) system, offering positional accuracy of 10–20 cm, played a pivotal role. High-resolution satellites such as Cartosat, RISAT, and EOS provided real-time imagery, allowing sub-metre targeting. These capabilities are a result of sustained investments by DRDO and ISRO and reflect the prioritisation of guidance and navigation as a critical technology domain in DRDO’s 2023 R&D roadmap.

Lethality and Advanced Weapon Systems

The destruction caused during Operation Sindoor also demonstrated the high lethality of Indian weapon systems. Deep penetration warheads, advanced fusing mechanisms, and powerful propulsion systems—developed under the Integrated Guided Missile Development Programme—were central to the operation’s success. The likely use of the BrahMos missile, equipped with state-of-the-art guidance and propulsion, underscores the maturity of indigenous missile technology.

Emerging technologies such as Directed Energy Weapons (DEWs), including laser-based systems, were reportedly deployed to neutralise incoming drones. DEWs have been a priority sector for the Defence Ministry since 2022, and DRDO showcased them during the 2025 Republic Day Parade.

Integrated Air Defence and Radar Systems

A critical success factor in Operation Sindoor was India’s ability to neutralise almost every aerial threat, including drones and missiles. This was achieved through a combination of imported and indigenous systems. The S-400 Triumph, along with DRDO-developed radars like Rajendra, Rohini, LLTR, and low-level 3D radars, formed a robust air defence network. These systems enabled accurate detection, tracking, and interception of aerial threats.

Cutting-edge R&D continues in radar technologies, including AI-powered signal processing, stealth detection, and foliage-penetrating radars, which will further enhance India’s battlefield awareness and response capability.

Role of Unmanned Systems

For the first time in an India-Pakistan conflict, drones played a decisive role. Indian UAVs executed deep strikes into Pakistani territory, while enemy drone swarms were largely neutralised. India also deployed upgraded Bofors guns and SAMAR systems to counter low-flying threats. The success of unmanned platforms indicates a paradigm shift towards hybrid warfare, with manned-unmanned teaming becoming a future norm.

However, to sustain this capability, India must strengthen its domestic manufacturing base, ensure secure raw material supply chains, and foster collaboration between industry, academia, and the armed forces.

Conclusion:
Operation Sindoor represents a watershed moment in India’s defence preparedness. It validated years of indigenous R&D and affirmed India’s self-reliant defence posture. As warfare evolves, India’s ability to synergise space, cyber, and kinetic capabilities with unmanned platforms will be critical in ensuring strategic deterrence and national security.

Road Safety in India

  • 16 May 2025

Context:

India is at a critical juncture in its mobility transformation. With over 6.3 million km of road network, the second-largest globally, the nation faces a paradox: rapid urbanisation and vehicle growth have brought both economic momentum and a rising toll of road fatalities. In 2022, India recorded 1.68 lakh road deaths, translating to 12.2 deaths per 1 lakh population—substantially higher than countries like Japan (2.5) and the UK (2.6). These crashes cost India 3% of its GDP annually, eroding human capital and stalling development.

Road Safety as a Fundamental Right

The right to safe mobility stems from Article 21 of the Constitution, which guarantees the right to life. This makes road safety not merely a technical issue but a public good and a human right. With India’s urban population expected to reach 50% by 2047, ensuring the safety of all road users—particularly pedestrians, cyclists, elderly, and children—is essential for inclusive development.

Key Challenges in India’s Road Safety Landscape

  • Human Error: About 78% of crashes are due to driver fault—overspeeding, drunk driving, and poor lane discipline.
  • Infrastructure Gaps: Over 5,000 black spots, inadequate pedestrian zones, and unscientific road designs persist across urban and rural areas.
  • Weak Enforcement: Despite the Motor Vehicles (Amendment) Act, 2019, enforcement is inconsistent, and deterrence is weak.
  • Emergency Care Deficits: Rural areas suffer from delayed trauma response, poor ambulance coverage, and lack of cashless care.
  • Fragmented Governance: Overlapping responsibilities between Centre and States lead to diluted accountability and suboptimal implementation.

Government Response: The Four Es Framework

  • Engineering: Mandatory safety audits, black spot rectification, e-DAR digital accident recording, and vehicle safety mandates (airbags, ABS, Bharat NCAP ratings).
  • Enforcement: e-Challans, CCTV-based monitoring, automated vehicle fitness testing, and stricter penalties under the MV Act.
  • Education: Road Safety Advocacy Scheme, National Road Safety Month, driver training centres in every district.
  • Emergency Care: Good Samaritan protections, ambulances with paramedics at toll plazas, and pilot cashless treatment schemes.

Strategic Roadmap:

  • Safe System Approach: Design roads that are forgiving of human error—wider footpaths, dedicated cycling lanes, pedestrian islands, and speed calming measures.
  • National Road Safety Authority: A unified central body to integrate policy, funding, and enforcement between Centre and States.
  • Innovative Financing: Mandate auto manufacturers to channel CSR funds into road safety initiatives for 20–25 years, supporting infrastructure, trauma care, and R&D.
  • Data-Driven Policies: Strengthen digital accident databases to enable evidence-based decision-making and real-time response.
  • Capital Investment: Adopt the World Bank’s recommendation of $109 billion investment over a decade to halve road deaths by 2030.

Conclusion

Road safety is not an adjunct concern—it is integral to India’s Vision of Viksit Bharat 2047. Reducing road fatalities is essential for economic productivity, public health, and constitutional morality. A coordinated, inclusive, and adequately financed national strategy can transform India’s roads from death traps into pathways of safe, equitable mobility.

Voter ID Rules in India

  • 15 May 2025

Context:

Recent developments surrounding the deportation of Pakistani nationals from India, many of whom reportedly held Indian identity documents such as Voter IDs, Aadhaar, and ration cards, have sparked concern over the integrity of the electoral rolls and the effectiveness of the voter verification process. This issue holds significant implications for the sanctity of India’s democratic system, particularly with regard to voter eligibility and the legal safeguards against electoral fraud.

Constitutional and Legal Provisions

Under Article 326 of the Indian Constitution, the right to vote is granted to every citizen of India aged 18 years and above, provided they are not disqualified under any law. The Representation of the People Act, 1950, particularly Section 16, lays down conditions for disqualification from voter registration, including non-citizenship, unsound mind (as declared by a competent court), and legal disqualification due to corrupt practices.

To register as a new elector, applicants must fill out Form 6 of the Election Commission of India (ECI). While proof of age and address are mandatory, no separate citizenship document is required. Instead, a self-declared statement affirming Indian citizenship is submitted. However, under Section 31 of the RP Act, submitting false information, particularly with respect to citizenship, can attract legal penalties including imprisonment of up to one year, a fine, or both.

Verification and Role of Electoral Authorities

The onus of verifying the eligibility of voters lies primarily with the Electoral Registration Officer (ERO), assisted by Booth Level Officers (BLOs). These authorities are empowered to conduct investigations, hold hearings, and scrutinize documents before accepting applications. In cases of doubt or objections, the ERO must assess all evidence independently and ensure that non-citizens are not included in the electoral roll.

Citizenship is typically assumed unless there is a reason to believe otherwise. However, in instances of objection, the applicant bears the initial burden of proof to establish citizenship. For internal migrants or married women lacking documentation, alternative proofs such as prior voter registration or certificates from local authorities may be accepted.

Issues of Non-Citizens Holding Voter IDs

Instances of non-citizens obtaining Indian voter IDs have occurred in the past and are not isolated. The ECI has previously identified and removed such names from the electoral roll following investigations. In such cases, legal proceedings are initiated against individuals who fraudulently secured voter registration.

The current incident involving deported Pakistani nationals allegedly holding Indian Voter IDs brings this issue back into focus. It highlights systemic lapses in identity verification and raises concerns over the use of forged or easily obtainable documents to exploit electoral loopholes.

Current Measures and Challenges

To curb such malpractices, the ECI has initiated a linkage between Aadhaar and Voter ID cards to detect and eliminate duplicates and ineligible entries. However, this initiative has limitations, as Aadhaar is not proof of citizenship. Non-citizens can still possess Aadhaar cards, making this linkage an insufficient standalone measure for verifying voter eligibility.

Conclusion

The integrity of India’s electoral system is foundational to its democracy. While the legal framework governing voter registration is robust, implementation gaps, documentation loopholes, and lax verification processes expose vulnerabilities. Strengthening the verification mechanisms, enhancing accountability of electoral officers, and exploring alternative digital authentication methods are imperative to safeguard the electoral roll from misuse and to uphold the principle of “one citizen, one vote.”

Plastic Pollution in the Indian Himalayas

  • 13 May 2025

In News:

The fragile ecosystems of the Indian Himalayas are increasingly threatened by mounting plastic pollution. According to the Himalayan Cleanup (THC) 2024 report, over 70% of the plastic waste collected in this region is non-recyclable, posing a severe environmental and ecological challenge. This pollution not only endangers biodiversity but also impacts the livelihoods and health of mountain communities reliant on pristine natural resources.

Nature and Sources of Plastic Pollution

The report highlights that more than 80% of plastic debris in the Himalayas stems from single-use food and beverage packaging. These include instant noodles, energy drinks, and snack wrappers, with prominent brands such as Wai Wai, Maggi, Sting, Mountain Dew, Lays, and Bingo contributing substantially to the waste load. A striking 71% of this plastic waste comprises multi-layered plastics (MLPs), which are notoriously difficult to recycle due to their composite nature and lack of viable recycling markets.

Multi-layered plastics form nearly 68.5% of the total waste, rendering traditional recycling methods ineffective. These plastics often end up as litter in remote mountain areas, where waste collection and management infrastructure is minimal or absent, exacerbating environmental degradation.

Environmental and Socioeconomic Implications

Plastic pollution in the Himalayas disrupts fragile mountain ecosystems, threatening native flora and fauna. The persistence of non-biodegradable waste affects soil quality, water sources, and the aesthetic and cultural value of the region. Moreover, plastic litter contributes to microplastic contamination in water bodies, entering food chains and posing health risks to local populations and wildlife alike.

Economically, the growing plastic menace undermines tourism, a vital livelihood source in many Himalayan districts. Untouched landscapes attract visitors, but increasing waste reduces their appeal, impacting local economies dependent on sustainable tourism.

Policy Recommendations from the THC 2024 Report

To address this mounting crisis, the report recommends comprehensive policy and administrative measures:

  • Ban on Multi-Layered Plastics (MLPs): Given that MLPs constitute nearly 68.5% of plastic waste and are largely non-recyclable, the report calls for an immediate ban on their manufacture, sale, and distribution, especially in sensitive ecological zones such as the Himalayas.
  • Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR): The report urges policymakers to enforce stringent EPR frameworks, holding manufacturers and brands accountable for the lifecycle of their packaging waste. This would incentivize producers to innovate sustainable packaging solutions and participate actively in waste collection and recycling.
  • Restrict Junk Food and Energy Drinks near Schools: Recognizing the health and environmental impact, the report recommends banning the sale of such products near educational institutions to curb littering and reduce children’s exposure to unhealthy food items.
  • Mandatory Front-of-Pack Labelling: To inform consumers about the environmental and health risks, the report advocates mandatory clear labelling on high-risk products, promoting responsible consumption.
  • Transition from Recycling to Waste-Redesign: The focus should shift from merely recycling waste to redesigning packaging to eliminate waste generation at source. Adopting a ‘design-out-waste’ approach can significantly reduce plastic pollution.
  • Empowering Local Governance: The report emphasizes strengthening rural and mountain municipalities by providing technical resources, funding, and training in waste management to enhance local capacity to handle plastic waste effectively.

Conclusion

The Himalayan plastic pollution crisis underscores the urgent need for coordinated action involving governments, industries, and local communities. Effective implementation of bans on non-recyclable plastics, coupled with robust producer responsibility laws and community-based waste management, can restore the ecological balance of the Himalayas. Additionally, fostering public awareness and promoting sustainable consumption patterns remain crucial in preserving this ecologically sensitive and culturally significant region for future generations.

Operation Sindoor and the Emerging Imperative of Digital Warfare in India’s National Security

  • 12 May 2025

In News:

On May 7, India launched Operation Sindoor, targeting terrorist bases in Pakistan in response to the Pahalgam terrorist attack on April 22. This military action quickly became a case study in how modern warfare extends beyond physical battlegrounds to include digital and information domains.

Managing Information During Conflict

Following the operation, India’s Ministry of Defence issued an advisory on May 9 urging media, digital platforms, and individuals to avoid live or real-time reporting of military movements. The Press Information Bureau (PIB) also stressed sharing only official updates to counter the spread of misinformation. This advisory was crucial after fake news, including false claims that the INS Vikrant aircraft carrier attacked Pakistani ports, spread rapidly on social media and TV channels. The misinformation originated from a fraudulent social media account pretending to be the INS Vikrant, causing panic and confusion, which was then amplified by Pakistani sources.

Hybrid Nature of Modern Conflicts

Modern conflicts have evolved into “hybrid wars” that combine traditional military operations with sophisticated information warfare. Research from King’s College London highlights how states use both traditional and social media platforms for “perception management”—influencing public opinion to strengthen domestic support or destabilise opponents. In such environments, misinformation spreads rapidly due to media pressure to break news first, public anxiety seeking instant updates, and social media algorithms that prioritise sensational content regardless of accuracy.

Cyber Warfare: The Invisible Battlefield

Digital warfare also includes cyberattacks on critical infrastructure and military networks. Since the Pahalgam attack, India has faced several cyber intrusions originating from Pakistani and spoofed networks. Cyber operations now run parallel to physical conflicts, forming a multi-domain battlespace where controlling information flow and disrupting enemy networks are as vital as territorial gains.

Recent global examples include Russia’s cyberattacks on Ukraine during the 2022 invasion and retaliatory cyber operations by Ukrainian hackers. Similarly, after Hamas’s October 2023 attack, Israel faced massive cyber assaults and widespread disinformation campaigns on social media using AI-generated content.

Challenges in Cyber Conflict

Cyber warfare is especially challenging because attacks are remote, anonymous, and difficult to attribute. Attackers hide behind proxies and compromised systems, complicating diplomatic responses and exposing gaps in international laws governing cyber conflicts. As tensions rise, India may encounter more frequent and sophisticated cyberattacks targeting its infrastructure, military communications, and financial systems, alongside conventional military threats.

India’s Preparedness Strategy

To tackle these challenges, India must adopt a comprehensive strategy combining legal, diplomatic, and technological measures:

  • Legal: Strengthen cybersecurity laws under the Information Technology Act and push for international agreements to regulate state-sponsored cyberattacks.
  • Diplomatic: Enhance cooperation in global forums like the UN Group of Governmental Experts (GGE) and partner with technologically advanced nations to identify and counter hostile cyber activities.
  • Technological: Invest heavily in cyber defence and offence capabilities. Critical infrastructure must be fortified through security audits, network segmentation, and resilient backups. Agencies such as the National Critical Information Infrastructure Protection Centre (NCIIPC) and CERT-In need enhanced capacities to detect and respond to threats. Regulators should promote continuous network monitoring and public awareness on cybersecurity, exemplified by the Reserve Bank of India’s directives to banks.

Conclusion

The digital battlefield—comprising misinformation and cyberattacks—demands a coordinated government response and active citizen engagement. As conventional and digital warfare increasingly overlap, India’s national security depends on not only military preparedness but also information resilience and cybersecurity. With well-planned, multi-dimensional strategies, India can effectively confront emerging digital threats and secure its sovereignty in an increasingly complex geopolitical environment.

Revitalizing State Universities: NITI Aayog’s Vision for Quality Higher Education

  • 11 May 2025

In News:

India’s higher education sector, the third largest in the world, is largely shaped by its state universities. In its recent report titled ‘Expanding Quality Higher Education through States and State Universities’, NITI Aayog critically analyses the systemic challenges in these institutions and offers a strategic roadmap to enhance their quality, inclusivity, and global competitiveness.

Role of State Universities in India’s Higher Education Ecosystem

State universities constitute nearly 80% of all higher education institutions in India and cater to the majority of enrolled students. They play a pivotal role in ensuring access to education across socio-economic and geographical divides, particularly in underserved regions. Their contribution is crucial to India’s goals of inclusive development, knowledge-driven growth, and human capital formation. Consequently, their performance directly influences India’s research output, innovation capacity, and global academic standing.

Challenges Highlighted in the Report

1. Inadequate Investment and Uneven Funding Patterns: The report underscores the lack of consistent public investment in higher education. While some states like Kerala and Tamil Nadu invest substantially, others like Karnataka, despite high college density and enrolment, spend comparatively less. This disparity leads to uneven development and limits potential in several regions.

2. Declining Financial Commitment from States: There is a noticeable decline in state-level financial support for higher education, compounded by limited capacity to implement recommended reforms. The report calls for greater central assistance to bridge fiscal gaps and ensure a uniform quality of education nationwide.

3. Quality Deficit and Research Gaps: State universities often lack robust infrastructure, qualified faculty, and research funding. As a result, India’s institutions fall short in global rankings, reflecting systemic weaknesses. There exists a pressing need to strengthen research ecosystems and align academic output with innovation.

4. Governance and Autonomy Issues: Excessive political interference and bureaucratic hurdles dilute institutional autonomy. The report flags the tension between central regulatory bodies and state institutions, urging reforms that empower universities with greater academic and administrative freedom.

Key Recommendations

  • Strengthening Research and Innovation: The creation of Centres of Excellence, dedicated research universities, and collaboration with global institutions are essential. Funding mechanisms should prioritise research aligned with national goals.
  • Pedagogical Reforms and Multidisciplinary Learning: Promotion of interdisciplinary education, digital tools, and experiential learning is advocated. Regular faculty training and industry collaboration are needed to ensure skill-oriented learning.
  • Financial Reforms and Public-Private Partnerships: States should aim to increase GDP spending on higher education. The report recommends performance-linked funding and encourages PPP models for infrastructure and capacity building.
  • Performance Monitoring: Over 120 performance indicators have been proposed to evaluate outcomes. A system of short-, medium-, and long-term targets will guide progress through regular institutional reviews.
  • Governance Reforms: Autonomy is key to excellence. Decentralised decision-making, transparent accreditation, and robust ranking systems are essential for institutional accountability and quality assurance.

Implementation Challenges

The success of these reforms hinges on overcoming several hurdles. Financial constraints, political interference, and faculty shortages persist. Mobilising alternative funding sources like CSR, insulating academia from politics, and capacity building are crucial steps.

Conclusion

NITI Aayog’s blueprint provides a timely and necessary intervention to revitalise India’s state universities. These institutions, forming the bedrock of India’s higher education framework, must be empowered through coordinated action by both state and central governments. Only then can India realize its vision of inclusive, equitable, and globally competitive higher education.

Child Labour in India

  • 10 May 2025

In News:

Despite a comprehensive constitutional and legal framework designed to prohibit child labour, India continues to face the persistent challenge of millions of children engaged in hazardous and exploitative work. The prevalence of child labour in sectors such as matchstick factories, brick kilns, leather processing units, and construction sites highlights the gap between legal intent and ground realities.

Defining Child Labour

Child labour involves employing children in work that deprives them of their childhood, interferes with education, and is harmful mentally, physically, socially, or morally. It constitutes a violation of basic child rights and hampers the child’s overall development.

Legal and Constitutional Framework

India’s fight against child labour is backed by strong constitutional provisions and statutes:

  • Constitutional Safeguards:
    • Article 24 prohibits the employment of children below 14 years in factories, mines, and hazardous occupations.
    • Directive Principles (Articles 39(e) and 39(f)) direct the State to protect children from exploitation and ensure their development.
  • Statutory Measures:
    • The Child and Adolescent Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act, 1986 (amended in 2016) prohibits employment of children under 14 and restricts adolescents (14–18 years) from hazardous work. However, it permits work in family enterprises after school hours, a provision often misused.
    • The Juvenile Justice (Care and Protection) Act, 2015 treats child labour victims as children in need of care and protection.
    • The Right to Education Act, 2009 mandates free and compulsory education for children aged 6–14, indirectly aiming to reduce child labour by keeping children in schools.
  • Judicial Interventions:
    • The Supreme Court has reinforced child rights under Article 21 (Right to Life with dignity), with landmark rulings emphasizing the state’s duty to eradicate child labour(e.g., M.C. Mehta v. State of Tamil Nadu, 1996).

Magnitude and Ground Realities

According to UNICEF’s analysis of the Periodic Labour Force Survey (2018-19), approximately 18 to 33 lakh children are engaged in labour in India. Nearly half of these children work within their families, making detection and intervention difficult. The worst-affected sectors include agriculture, fireworks, glass-making, leather tanning, mining, and construction.

Children working in these sectors face hazardous conditions involving exposure to toxic substances, long working hours, and physical and verbal abuse. This leads to long-term damage to their physical health, mental well-being, and education prospects. The lack of access to sanitation and healthcare further exacerbates their vulnerability.

Enforcement Challenges

Despite the severity of the problem, enforcement remains weak. In 2021, only 613 cases under the Child Labour Act were registered, indicating a large enforcement gap. Additionally, data on child labour is outdated and fragmented, with the last Census conducted in 2011 and poor disaggregation of data by gender and rural-urban divide. Coordination between labour departments, police, and child welfare agencies is inadequate.

Instances like the 2024 Madhya Pradesh distillery case, where 58 children were rescued after working long hours in hazardous conditions, expose the failures in inspection and enforcement at the state level.

Root Causes

Poverty remains the primary driver of child labour. The International Labour Organization highlights that child labour is both a cause and consequence of poverty. Families often push children into work due to economic necessity, especially when adult unemployment is high (estimated 6 million unemployed adults). Malnutrition and deprivation perpetuate this cycle, with India accounting for half of the world's wasted children.

Way Forward

To effectively combat child labour, India must focus on:

  • Strengthening Enforcement:Establishing a National Child Labour Enforcement Grid integrating labour inspectors, district magistrates, Juvenile Justice Boards, NGOs, and Child Welfare Committees to ensure coordinated action.
  • Closing Legal Gaps:Revisiting the “family enterprise” exemption and mandating compulsory reporting and rehabilitation of child labourers under the Juvenile Justice Act.
  • Improving Data Systems:Fast-tracking the 2021 Census and including child labour modules in PLFS and NFHS, leveraging technology like geo-tagging and mobile apps for real-time monitoring.
  • Linking Education and Welfare:Strengthening schemes like Samagra Shiksha, PM POSHAN, and Anganwadi services, alongside conditional cash transfers to incentivize withdrawal of children from labour.
  • Raising Awareness:Scaling up mass communication campaigns to change societal attitudes toward child labour.

Conclusion

While India’s legal framework against child labour is among the strongest globally, enforcement weaknesses and socio-economic realities hinder progress. Addressing poverty, improving governance, and ensuring children’s right to education and protection are imperative to break the cycle of child labour and promote a just and equitable society.

Mental Health Insurance Coverage in India

  • 09 May 2025

Context:

Mental health insurance coverage in India remains critically inadequate despite rising awareness of mental health issues. According to the RiseUP for a Better Tomorrow: Mental Health Report 2025, mental health accounts for less than 1% of total health insurance claims, reflecting a glaring disparity in healthcare priorities. This neglect persists despite a robust legal and regulatory framework aimed at promoting mental health coverage.

The Mental Healthcare Act, 2017 legally mandates that mental health be treated on par with physical health in insurance policies. In line with this, the Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority of India (IRDAI) issued guidelines in 2019 requiring insurers to include mental health illnesses in coverage plans. However, implementation remains patchy, especially in group insurance policies. Many plans continue to exclude essential mental health services, undermining legislative intent.

Current insurance offerings are heavily skewed towards hospitalization for severe mental illnesses, with minimal coverage for outpatient care—counselling, therapy, and medication—which forms the backbone of mental healthcare. Only 17% of insured individuals have access to outpatient mental health services. Additionally, schemes like Ayushman Bharat offer limited support for mental health, and common exclusions such as substance abuse and self-inflicted injuries reduce the scope of coverage.

On the demand side, awareness is a significant barrier. Around 42% of people are unaware of their mental health coverage, while 83% of organizations report low utilization of mental health insurance. Out-of-pocket expenses still account for 60–70% of mental healthcare costs (NMHS 2015–16), adding to the economic burden. A staggering 70–90% of individuals with mental disorders remain untreated, largely due to poor insurance access.

From the supply perspective, policy design is often modeled on physical health, failing to account for the chronic and outpatient nature of many mental health conditions. Nearly 50% of respondents in the RiseUP report cited high treatment costs as a deterrent to seeking care, a concern aggravated by restrictive policies and long claim settlement periods. Furthermore, the limited empanelment of mental health professionals constrains access for insured individuals.

Social stigma continues to be a pervasive barrier. Nearly half of the surveyed individuals fear discrimination if their mental health needs are revealed. This stigma leads to underreporting and delays in seeking care, further deepening the treatment gap.

Government initiatives like the National Mental Health Programme (NMHP) and Tele-MANAS are promising steps but require integration with insurance mechanisms to be effective. Seamless coordination between public services and insurance schemes is crucial.

Way Forward:

There is a pressing need to redesign insurance policies to comprehensively include outpatient mental health care, increase awareness through targeted campaigns, reduce stigma through public health messaging, streamline claims processing, and expand provider networks. Regulatory bodies like IRDAI must ensure compliance through audits and penalties, while employers should be incentivized to offer robust mental health coverage.

Conclusion:
Expanding mental health insurance is vital for a healthier, more inclusive, and productive society. Achieving this calls for a multi-stakeholder approach involving legal enforcement, policy reform, public education, and systemic coordination between government and private actors.

India’s Human Development Index 2025

  • 08 May 2025

In News:

India has made steady progress in the Human Development Index (HDI), improving its rank from 133rd in 2022 to 130th in 2023 among 193 countries. Its HDI value rose from 0.676 to 0.685, reflecting advancements in key areas such as health, education, and income. Despite these gains, significant challenges, particularly inequality, continue to limit India’s overall human development.

Understanding India’s HDI Progress

The HDI is a composite measure that captures a country’s average achievements in three core dimensions: health (life expectancy), education (years of schooling), and income (gross national income per capita). India currently belongs to the ‘medium human development’ category and is approaching the threshold for ‘high human development’ (an HDI value of 0.700).

Several factors have driven India’s recent improvement:

  • Health: Life expectancy increased markedly from 58.6 years in 1990 to 72 years in 2023. This improvement is supported by flagship health schemes like Ayushman Bharat, the National Rural Health Mission, Janani Suraksha Yojana, and PoshanAbhiyaan, which have enhanced healthcare access and nutrition.
  • Education: The expected years of schooling grew from 8.2 years in 1990 to 13 years in 2023, while mean years of schooling rose from 4.1 to 6.9 years. Policies such as the Right to Education Act and the National Education Policy 2020 have played critical roles in improving educational quality and accessibility.
  • Income: India’s per capita Gross National Income surged from $2,167 in 1990 to $9,046 in 2023. Social welfare programs like MGNREGA and Jan Dhan Yojana have contributed to this growth by lifting approximately 135 million people out of multidimensional poverty between 2015-16 and 2019-21.

Persistent Challenges: Inequality and Gender Disparity

Inequality poses a major impediment to India’s HDI progress. It is estimated that disparities reduce India’s HDI by 30.7%, one of the highest losses in South Asia. The wealthiest 10% earn nearly 57% of the national income, while the poorest 50% share only 13%. Gender inequality further complicates the picture: India’s Gender Development Index (GDI) stands at 0.874, with female HDI (0.631) significantly lower than male HDI (0.722). Despite policy efforts, female labor force participation and political representation remain limited.

Regional and Global Context

Regionally, India lags behind neighbors like China (75th) and Sri Lanka (89th) but shares a similar HDI value with Bangladesh (130th), and surpasses Nepal (145th) and Pakistan (168th). Globally, the 2025 Human Development Report highlights a slowdown in HDI growth—the slowest since 1990—but emphasizes the transformative role of Artificial Intelligence (AI) in fostering inclusive development. India holds 20% of global AI researchers, positioning it to harness AI’s potential in sectors such as healthcare, education, and productivity.

Strategic Innovations and National Initiatives

India’s pursuit of sustainable development complements its HDI goals through key initiatives:

  • Scientists have developed a metal-free catalyst leveraging mechanical energy for sustainable hydrogen fuel production, supporting the National Green Hydrogen Mission to promote clean energy.
  • The Indian Navy’s deployment of INS Sharda to the Maldives for its inaugural Humanitarian Assistance and Disaster Relief (HADR) exercise under the MAHASAGAR vision showcases India’s leadership in regional disaster preparedness and maritime security.
  • Developments in regional defense, such as Iran’s unveiling of the solid-fuel GhassemBasir medium-range missile, highlight ongoing security challenges necessitating vigilance and capability enhancement.

Way Forward

To advance into the ‘high human development’ category, India must:

  • Implement targeted policies to reduce income and gender inequalities.
  • Invest in quality education and healthcare, especially for underserved populations.
  • Promote inclusive economic growth benefiting marginalized groups.
  • Leverage emerging technologies like AI responsibly to enhance public services without deepening disparities.
  • Strengthen regional cooperation and disaster resilience to protect socio-economic gains.

Conclusion

India’s HDI improvement reflects meaningful progress in health, education, and income. Yet, to fully realize its human development potential, India must tackle persistent inequalities and strategically harness technological innovations alongside regional cooperation. With sustained, inclusive efforts, India can continue its upward trajectory toward equitable growth and global leadership.

Biodiversity Benefit Sharing Regulations 2025

  • 07 May 2025

In News:

The National Biodiversity Authority (NBA), under the Biological Diversity Act, 2002, has notified the Biodiversity Benefit Sharing Regulations, 2025 to regulate fair and equitable sharing of benefits arising from the use of India’s rich biological resources, including digital sequence information (DSI). This move strengthens India’s compliance with global Access and Benefit Sharing (ABS) frameworks under the Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD).

Background and Need

India’s vast biodiversity is a vital national asset, deeply linked with traditional knowledge of local and indigenous communities. The updated regulations address concerns that industries and researchers benefit commercially from biological resources without adequately compensating custodians of biodiversity or associated knowledge. The 2025 regulations supersede the 2014 guidelines and incorporate digital sequence information, a significant addition in the biotechnology era, where genetic information is often used without accessing physical resources.

Key Provisions of the Regulations

  • Turnover-Based Benefit Sharing Slabs:The regulations introduce slabs based on the annual turnover of users accessing biological resources or associated knowledge:
    • ?0–5 crore: No benefit sharing
    • ?5–50 crore: 0.2% of ex-factory turnover
    • ?50–250 crore: 0.4%
    • Above ?250 crore: 0.6%
  • Mandatory Reporting:All users with annual turnover exceeding ?1 crore must submit an annual statement detailing biodiversity resource usage.
  • Exemption for Cultivated Medicinal Plants:In alignment with the Biological Diversity (Amendment) Act, 2023, cultivators of medicinal plants, and Indian traditional medicine practitioners are exempt from benefit sharing. This supports promotion of medicinal plant cultivation while balancing conservation.
  • High-Value and Threatened Species Clause:For species with significant conservation or economic importance — such as red sanders, sandalwood, agarwood, and other notified threatened species — minimum benefit sharing is set at 5%, which can rise above 20% for commercial exploitation.
  • Inclusion of Digital Sequence Information (DSI):Recognizing that genetic data can substitute physical biological samples, DSI has been brought under the ABS ambit, ensuring benefits from its use are also equitably shared.
  • Researchers and Intellectual Property Rights (IPR):Those conducting research or applying for IPR based on Indian biodiversity must comply with benefit-sharing obligations.

Mechanism for Utilization of Benefits

The collected benefits are distributed such that approximately 10–15% is retained by the NBA to support biodiversity conservation efforts, while the remaining is transferred to claimant communities and biodiversity conservers who have preserved and nurtured these resources.

Institutional Role: National Biodiversity Authority (NBA)

Established in 2003 and headquartered in Chennai, the NBA implements the Biological Diversity Act. Its key functions include regulating access to biological resources, granting approvals to foreign and domestic entities, overseeing State Biodiversity Boards (SBBs), and advising the central government on biodiversity conservation policies. The NBA ensures compliance with international protocols like the Nagoya Protocol under the CBD, reinforcing India’s commitment to global biodiversity governance.

Global Context and International Compliance

At COP16 of the CBD held in Cali, Colombia (2024), member nations adopted a multilateral mechanism to ensure benefit sharing from the use of DSI. This is critical given the global usage of genetic resources by sectors such as pharmaceuticals, agriculture, cosmetics, and biotechnology. India’s updated regulations align with these international norms, demanding equitable compensation for communities that are custodians of biodiversity and traditional knowledge.

Conclusion

The Biodiversity Benefit Sharing Regulations 2025 mark a significant advancement in India’s biodiversity governance by closing regulatory gaps, especially around digital information and high-value species. The policy balances biodiversity conservation with sustainable use and incentivizes communities by ensuring fair economic returns, thereby promoting India’s leadership in global biodiversity stewardship.

16th Finance Commission

  • 06 May 2025

In News:

The 16th Finance Commission (FC), constituted under Article 280 of the Constitution in December 2023, and chaired by Arvind Panagariya, faces a formidable task: redefining the contours of fiscal federalism for the period 2026–2031 amidst growing demands for fiscal autonomy by states and mounting fiscal pressures on the Union government.

The central concern is the shrinking divisible tax pool. Though the 15th Finance Commission recommended a 41% share of the divisible pool for states (reduced from 42% due to the reorganization of Jammu & Kashmir), the effective share received by states has hovered around 32%, owing to the increasing use of cesses and surcharges, which are not shared. According to RBI data, the divisible pool has shrunk from 88.6% in 2011–12 to 78.9% in 2021–22 of the Centre’s gross tax revenue. Consequently, many states are demanding that their share be increased to 50%, and a cap be placed on cesses and surcharges.

However, expanding transfers is fiscally challenging. The Union government is already borrowing to fund grants to states, raising concerns over sustainability and fiscal priorities. States account for nearly 60% of general government expenditure, and their argument for greater fiscal autonomy is not unfounded. A possible resolution lies not in increasing total transfers, but in restructuring the compositionshifting from tied to untied transfers.

The overreliance on Centrally Sponsored Schemes (CSS), which dictate how funds must be spent, has constrained state-level innovation and discretion. Rationalizing CSS and expanding untied transfers would empower states to prioritize their unique developmental needs. However, this is politically sensitive, as CSS often serve national priorities and electoral interests.

Yet, more untied funds come with trade-offs. Several states, including Karnataka and Punjab, are grappling with rising revenue deficits, indicating growing expenditure on salaries, interest payments, and subsidies rather than capital investment. This raises the risk that untied funds may be diverted to populist schemes, such as non-merit subsidies or quasi-universal cash transfers. A report by Axis Bank notes that 14 states have launched income transfer schemes, amounting to 0.6% of GDP, raising concerns about the long-term fiscal discipline.

A key question is whether increased untied transfers will improve inter-state equity in public service delivery. Low-income states like Bihar have far lower per capita spending on health, education, and infrastructure. Without accountability frameworks, there is a risk that increased autonomy may not translate into equitable development outcomes.

Moreover, the third tier of governance—local bodies—remains underfunded. Greater untied transfers could incentivize states to empower panchayats and municipalities, aligning with the principle of subsidiarity and deepening democratic decentralization.

Conclusion

The 16th Finance Commission must strike a delicate balance—ensuring fiscal autonomy for states without jeopardizing national fiscal stability. It must consider capping non-divisible levies, reforming transfer mechanisms, and introducing performance-linked incentives to strengthen accountability. Only a recalibrated, transparent, and equitable devolution framework can advance India’s cooperative federalism in both spirit and practice.

Judicial Remedies and Systemic Reforms for Effective Waste Management in India

  • 04 May 2025

Context:

India is currently facing an escalating waste management crisis, exacerbated by rising urbanization, inadequate infrastructure, and weak enforcement. According to a 2024 study published in Nature, India is the world’s largest plastic polluter, emitting 9.3 million tonnes (Mt) of plastic annually—nearly 20% of global plastic emissions. This is largely due to widespread mismanaged waste, including open dumping and burning.

Despite claims of 95% national waste collection coverage, the situation on the ground reveals stark contrasts. Dumpsites outnumber sanitary landfills by a ratio of 10:1, and rural areas along with the informal sector remain excluded from official data. The actual per capita plastic waste generation in India may be as high as 0.54 kg/day, much higher than the reported 0.12 kg/day.

The problem is particularly acute in ecologically sensitive areas like the Indian Himalayan Region, where data gaps, poor infrastructure, and lack of state capacity have led to severe plastic accumulation, threatening biodiversity and public health.

According to TheEnergy and Resources Institute (TERI), India generates 62 Mt of waste annually, including 5.6 Mt of plastic waste, 7.9 Mt of hazardous waste, and 1.5 Mt of e-waste. However, only 43 Mt is collected, with 12 Mt treated, and 31 Mt remains untreated in waste yards.

Institutional and Legal Framework

India has implemented several regulatory frameworks under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, such as the Solid Waste Management Rules (2016), Plastic Waste Management Rules (2016), and the E-Waste Management Rules (2022). The Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) mechanism mandates producers to manage the entire lifecycle of products. As of 2022, EPR has been extended to plastic packaging, battery waste, and used oil.

Initiatives like Swachh Bharat Mission (SBM) and Waste to Wealth have promoted community engagement and technology use. SBM Urban 2.0 aims to create "Garbage Free Cities" by enhancing material recovery and waste-to-energy infrastructure. By 2024, 4.75 lakh villages had solid waste systems, and 5.14 lakh had liquid waste management systems.

Challenges

However, implementation gaps persist. Waste audits are inconsistent, especially in rural areas governed by Panchayati Raj institutions. Infrastructure for segregation, recycling, and recovery is insufficient. Establishing kiosks and MRFs in remote areas remains a logistical and financial challenge.

Way Forward: Judicial and Systemic Interventions

A promising approach is the use of continuing mandamus by the judiciary. In the 2025 Vellore District Environment Monitoring Committee vs. District Collector case, the Supreme Court emphasized remediation under the “polluter pays” principle. Judicial mandates for compliance, third-party audits, and public data transparency can significantly enhance accountability.

Technological tools like geotagging waste infrastructure on EPR portals can improve tracking and efficiency. Local bodies must be integrated with MRFs, recyclers, and EPR kiosks for seamless waste flow.

Additionally, product redesign for circularity, international cooperation through platforms like GACERE, and citizen engagement are critical to building a sustainable waste management ecosystem.

Bonded Labour in India

  • 03 May 2025

Context:

Despite constitutional safeguards and decades-old abolition laws, bonded labour continues to haunt India’s informal economy. Marked by coercion, caste oppression, and systemic apathy, this form of modern slavery traps millions in exploitative work conditions under the guise of debt repayment or social obligation.

Ground Reality and Human Cost

The harrowing experiences of survivors like Mukesh Adivasi from Madhya Pradesh and K. Thenmozhi from Andhra Pradesh underscore the brutality of bonded labour. Lured by paltry advances (?500–?2,000), these individuals were trafficked across states, subjected to 14–16 hours of daily toil, and endured beatings, confinement, and psychological trauma. Their stories reflect the plight of an estimated 1.84 crore bonded labourers, as acknowledged by the Ministry of Labour and Employment (MoLE) in 2016.

However, between 2016 and 2021, only 12,760 individuals were officially rescued and rehabilitated — less than 1% of the total. Achieving the 2030 rehabilitation target would require rescuing over 11 lakh individuals annually, a goal far from the current trajectory.

Structural and Social Triggers

Bonded labour is not merely an economic issue but a complex interplay of poverty, caste discrimination, and weak governance. Immediate triggers include emergencies like illness, job loss, or dowries, pushing families to seek advances from exploitative employers. However, deeper systemic factors — such as caste-based exclusion (over 80% of bonded labourers belong to SC/ST/OBCs), illiteracy, and employer monopolies in rural credit and labour markets — perpetuate this cycle.

The Global Slavery Index lists India among the countries with the highest prevalence of modern slavery. Studies from states like Punjab reveal that 84% of bonded workers belong to backward castes, reinforcing the role of social stratification in this injustice.

Policy Gaps and Legal Shortcomings

Though bonded labour was abolished under the Bonded Labour System (Abolition) Act, 1976, enforcement remains weak. Many states deny its existence or fail to report cases, delaying rehabilitation. The Trafficking of Persons Bill, 2018, criticised for excluding bonded labour, further highlights legislative gaps.

Labour law reforms have exacerbated vulnerabilities. The Labour Codes (2019–2020) undermined unionisation and collective bargaining — vital tools once advocated by B.R. Ambedkar for worker empowerment.

Additionally, 90% of India’s workforce is in the informal sector (NSSO, 2023), lacking formal contracts, social security, or grievance redressal. This unregulated landscape fosters exploitation, especially among migrants fleeing climate distress and rural unemployment.

Way Forward

  • Enforcement Reforms: Empower District Vigilance Committees with legal powers; digitise complaint tracking and link it with Aadhaar-based databases.
  • Legal Overhaul: Amend labour codes to restore union rights and introduce caste-sensitive protections.
  • Social Empowerment: Launch targeted rehabilitation schemes for SC/ST communities, offer skill training and land rights, and use vernacular media for rights education.
  • Transparency and Data: Establish a national registry of rescued bonded labourers to monitor their reintegration and prevent re-trafficking.

Conclusion

Bonded labour in India represents a fundamental failure of justice, governance, and social equity. Real transformation requires a multi-pronged approach — strengthening laws, empowering vulnerable communities, and confronting the caste-class nexus of exploitation. Until then, India’s economic growth will remain morally compromised by the invisible chains of forced labour.

AI and Sustainability

  • 02 May 2025

In News:

Artificial Intelligence (AI) is poised to transform India’s economy and governance landscape. A Google report estimates that AI adoption could add ?33.8 lakh crore to India’s economy by 2030, contributing 20% to GDP and supporting the USD 1 trillion digital economy target by 2028. However, this growth is accompanied by significant environmental costs, particularly from the energy-intensive AI infrastructure and data centres.

Environmental Costs of AI Expansion

Data centres—the backbone of AI—consume massive electricity, primarily from fossil fuels. In 2024, global data centres consumed 415 TWh, projected to reach 945 TWh by 2030, surpassing Japan’s electricity usage. A single AI query uses 10x the energy of a Google search. According to the IMF, AI expansion could raise electricity prices by up to 9% in the U.S.

In addition, training large AI models can consume up to 700,000 litres of water (equivalent to producing 320 Tesla cars). AI infrastructure may soon consume six times Denmark’s water needs. The mining of rare earths for AI hardware also contributes to deforestation and soil degradation, while increasing e-waste with hazardous components like lead and mercury.

Economic and Social Gains from AI

Despite these costs, AI offers transformative benefits. In agriculture, tools like Microsoft’s Project FarmVibes boost productivity by 40%, reduce water use by 50%, and lower fertilizer costs by 25%. In manufacturing, firms like Tata Steel employ AI for predictive maintenance and quality control under the ‘Make in India’ drive. Financial inclusion is advancing through AI platforms like OnFinanceAI, aiding the unbanked using mobile data. Public services are being enhanced via initiatives like Bhashini and AI-driven Digital Public Infrastructure.

AI also supports environmental monitoring. Tools like IBM’s Green Horizon track pollution, while Google’s GenCast improves extreme weather forecasting. AI-driven satellite imagery aids forest and ocean conservation, with initiatives like Fishial.AI monitoring marine biodiversity.

India’s Policy Response and Renewable Integration

Recognizing the challenges, India’s IndiaAI Mission and NITI Aayog’s AI strategy emphasize sustainable AI development. At the AI Action Summit in Paris, India reiterated the importance of aligning AI growth with renewable energy use. The country is exploring small modular reactors (SMRs) and promoting solar and wind to reduce the carbon footprint of data centres.

Currently, only 44.72% of India’s installed capacity is from non-fossil sources. Intermittent renewable supply, weak grid infrastructure, high upfront costs, and lack of integrated policies remain challenges.

Way Forward: Sustainable AI Growth

  • Expand Renewable Energy: Scale solar and wind under National Solar Mission and Green Energy Corridors.
  • Green Backup Power: Replace diesel generators in data centres with hydrogen fuel cells and batteries under the Green Hydrogen Mission.
  • AI for Energy Optimization: Develop AI-powered smart grids and promote energy-efficient chips and cooling systems.
  • Policy and Incentives: Establish unified AI–clean energy policy frameworks and incentivize 100% green data centres.
  • Support Innovation: Fund pilot projects and promote green tech in over 1,000 AI and clean energy startups.

Conclusion

India’s journey to becoming a global AI powerhouse must be anchored in sustainability. Balancing technological ambitions with the 2070 net-zero goal is not just an environmental necessity but also a strategic imperative for resilient, inclusive growth.

India’s Decade of Progress in Poverty Reduction

  • 01 May 2025

In News:

The World Bank’s Spring 2025 Poverty and Equity Brief has lauded India for lifting 171 million people out of extreme poverty between 2011-12 and 2022-23, reducing the poverty rate from 16.2% to 2.3%. This achievement underscores India’s sustained commitment to inclusive development, driven by economic growth, targeted welfare interventions, and improved access to essential services.

Key Findings:

The Poverty and Equity Briefs (PEBs), published biannually by the World Bank, assess poverty trends using international benchmarks (USD 2.15/day for extreme poverty, USD 3.65/day for lower-middle-income poverty), and include multidimensional poverty indicators and Gini Index estimates for income inequality.

  • Rural and Urban Progress:
    • Rural extreme poverty declined from 18.4% to 2.8%.
    • Urban extreme poverty fell from 10.7% to 1.1%.
    • The rural-urban poverty gap narrowed significantly, indicating more balanced regional development.
  • Lower-Middle-Income Poverty (USD 3.65/day line):
    • National poverty fell from 61.8% to 28.1%, lifting 378 million people out of poverty.
    • Rural poverty declined from 69% to 32.5%, and urban from 43.5% to 17.2%.
  • State-wise Contribution:Uttar Pradesh, Maharashtra, Bihar, West Bengal, and Madhya Pradesh—accounting for 65% of India’s poor in 2011—contributed two-thirds of the total poverty reduction by 2022-23.
  • Multidimensional Poverty:
    • MPI fell from 53.8% (2005-06) to 16.4% (2019-21).
    • By 2022-23, it further reduced to 15.5%, indicating improvements in health, education, and living standards.
  • Income Inequality:India’s Gini Index improved from 28.8 to 25.5, signaling a modest reduction in income disparities.

Employment and Structural Shifts

Employment growth has been robust post-2021:

  • Female employment has increased, though still only 31%, with a 234 million gender gap in paid work.
  • Urban unemployment declined to 6.6% in Q1 FY24-25, the lowest since 2017-18.
  • A shift from rural to urban employment was noted among men, while rural women increasingly engage in agricultural self-employment.

Persistent Social Challenges

Despite progress, several social challenges persist:

  • Marginalized communities (SCs/STs) face limited access to quality education, healthcare, and formal jobs.
  • Malnutrition and health disparities remain despite schemes like POSHAN Abhiyaan.
  • Water and energy poverty still affect large segments—49.8% of rural households lack piped water (NFHS-5), and many still rely on biomass despite the Ujjwala Yojana.
  • Mental poverty due to chronic stress, unemployment (29% among graduates), and social stigma hinders productivity.
  • Environmental degradation from unsustainable resource use affects the poorest most, worsening poverty cycles.

Policy Recommendations

To build on this progress, India must:

  • Strengthen affirmative action and welfare delivery (e.g., PMJDY, DDU-GKY, Aadhaar-based targeting).
  • Promote gender equality through effective implementation of BetiBachaoBetiPadhao, SSY, and gender-inclusive job creation.
  • Expand clean energy and water access via solar microgrids and the Jal Jeevan Mission.
  • Scale up mental health services using ASHA workers and awareness campaigns.

Conclusion

India’s success in drastically reducing poverty—both monetary and multidimensional—demonstrates the impact of focused development policies. However, the path ahead requires deeper reforms targeting inequality, gender disparity, and service delivery inefficiencies to ensure sustained, inclusive growth.

India’s Coastal Crisis

  • 31 Mar 2025

In News:

India’s vast coastline, stretching over 7,500 kilometres across nine states and four Union Territories, is a crucial ecological and economic asset. It supports diverse marine ecosystems, sustains the livelihoods of approximately 16 million fishers, and contributes around 4% to the national GDP through fisheries, tourism, and shipping activities. However, India’s coastal regions face a growing crisis from two interconnected challenges: rampant illegal light fishing and accelerating coastal erosion.

Illegal Light Fishing: Ecological and Socioeconomic Impacts

Light fishing, a method that employs high-powered artificial lights to attract fish and squid to the surface at night, is officially banned in India’s Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ) since 2017. Despite this, enforcement remains weak and patchy, particularly within territorial waters of Maharashtra, Tamil Nadu, Andhra Pradesh, and Kerala. Mechanized boats equipped with powerful LED lights continue this practice, causing severe ecological disruption and threatening traditional fishing communities.

High-intensity lights lure not only adult fish but also juveniles and non-target species (bycatch), resulting in overfishing and depletion of juvenile stocks. This has been linked to coral reef degradation and altered marine food webs, especially impacting slow-moving species like squid, which are vital to the coastal ecosystem. Studies by institutions like the Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute have highlighted how light fishing disrupts spawning cycles and jeopardizes fish recruitment during critical periods.

Socially, light fishing disadvantages artisanal fishers who rely on traditional methods and smaller boats. The National Fishworkers Forum has documented declining catches and conflicts between small-scale fishers and mechanized operators. Moreover, the economic incentives for illegal light fishing are high, as single trips can yield profits exceeding ?1 lakh, whereas penalties, such as fines of ?16,000, are insufficient deterrents.

Coastal Erosion: Increasing Vulnerability and Habitat Loss

Alongside overfishing, India’s coastline is increasingly vulnerable to erosion, exacerbated by rising sea levels (currently about 3.2 mm per year), frequent cyclones, and human activities such as sand mining and unregulated coastal development. Recent government data indicates that 33.6% of India’s coastline is affected by erosion, with places like Dakshina Kannada in Karnataka losing nearly half of their shoreline over three decades.

Coastal ecosystems such as mangroves and coral reefs serve as natural buffers against wave action, reduce erosion, and play a critical role in carbon sequestration. For instance, the Bhitarkanika mangroves in Odisha absorb four times more carbon than terrestrial forests, helping mitigate climate change. However, urban expansion and infrastructure projects have led to significant mangrove loss—Mumbai has lost 40% since 1987—reducing the coastline’s resilience against natural disasters.

Pollution from plastic waste and industrial effluents further degrades marine habitats, while weak enforcement of Coastal Regulation Zone (CRZ) norms allows illegal constructions that exacerbate ecological damage.

Way Forward: Policy, Enforcement, and Community Engagement

Addressing India’s coastal crisis requires a multi-pronged approach:

  • Strengthening Enforcement: There is an urgent need for uniform nationwide enforcement of the light fishing ban, enhanced patrolling using technologies like AI-enabled drones, and more stringent penalties to deter violations.
  • Ecological Restoration: Initiatives such as artificial reefs, mangrove afforestation, and sand replenishment can restore natural coastal buffers. Programs like those in Puducherry and Odisha demonstrate the effectiveness of such measures.
  • Community Participation: Empowering fisherfolk through capacity-building and involving local communities in surveillance and sustainable fishing practices is critical. Tamil Nadu’s fisher unions serve as a successful model of local stewardship.
  • Climate Adaptation and Research: Relocating vulnerable settlements, investing in cyclone-resistant infrastructure, and expanding scientific research, such as satellite monitoring of erosion hotspots, are essential for long-term resilience.

Conclusion

India’s coastal regions are at a crossroads, balancing economic development, ecological sustainability, and social equity. Illegal light fishing and coastal erosion threaten marine biodiversity and the traditional livelihoods of millions. Effective governance, backed by technological innovation and community collaboration, is indispensable to safeguard India’s maritime heritage and ensure sustainable use of coastal resources in alignment with Sustainable Development Goal 14.

Myanmar-Thailand Earthquake 2025

  • 30 Mar 2025

In News:

Recently, a devastating 7.7 magnitude earthquake struck central Myanmar near Mandalay, resulting in catastrophic destruction across Myanmar and Thailand. The tremor, the strongest in the region in 75 years and globally the most powerful in two years, occurred at a shallow depth of 10 km, amplifying its destructive impact.

Human and Structural Impact

In Myanmar, at least 144 people were killed and 730 injured, while in Thailand, particularly Bangkok, eight deaths were confirmed, including three from a 33-storey building collapse. The death toll is expected to rise as search and rescue operations continue. Infrastructure damage was widespread—residential buildings, pagodas, a dam, and a 90-year-old bridge in Myanmar collapsed. In Bangkok, high-rises swayed dangerously, rapid transit systems shut down, and panic gripped the city. Over 90 people were reported missing in Bangkok’s construction site collapse.

The quake severely impacted regions already suffering from ongoing humanitarian crises, particularly Myanmar, where a civil war has displaced over 3 million people, and 20 million are in need of assistance, according to the UN. Emergency services were hindered by damaged roads and downed power lines.

Geological Context and Causes

The earthquake was caused by strike-slip faulting along the Sagaing Fault, a major tectonic boundary between the Indian and Eurasian plates. This north-south fault is highly seismically active and has been responsible for several past quakes, including those in 1839 (M 8.3), 1912 (M 7.9), and 2016 (M 6.9).

Shallow-focus earthquakes like this one, occurring at just 10 km depth, tend to cause significant surface damage due to minimal energy dissipation before the seismic waves reach the surface. Additionally, seismic waves radiate along the entire fault line, affecting regions far beyond the epicenter, including China’s Yunnan and Sichuan provinces, where structural damage and injuries were also reported.

Preparedness and Vulnerabilities

Myanmar's infrastructure is ill-prepared for high-magnitude earthquakes, especially in the Mandalay region where modern seismic-resistant construction is limited. The USGS estimated potential fatalities between 10,000 and 100,000, and economic losses up to 70% of Myanmar’s GDP, underscoring the country’s vulnerability. The affected area lies in the central region of the country, less accustomed to high-magnitude tremors than the traditionally more seismically active western regions.

International and Regional Response

Myanmar declared a state of emergency in six regions, including Naypyidaw and Mandalay. Thailand’s city hall declared Bangkok a disaster zone to mobilize emergency responses. Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi offered immediate support, stating that Indian authorities and the Ministry of External Affairs are in touch with both governments. The disaster also holds diplomatic relevance, with Bangkok set to host the BIMSTEC Summit, highlighting the importance of regional disaster cooperation.

Conclusion

The 2025 Myanmar-Thailand earthquake exposes the urgent need for seismic resilience, urban preparedness, and regional disaster response cooperation in South and Southeast Asia. With climate change and tectonic vulnerabilities intersecting, India and neighboring nations must integrate robust disaster management frameworks into developmental planning and regional diplomacy.

India’s E-Retail Landscape

  • 28 Mar 2025

Context:

India’s e-retail sector has emerged as a global frontrunner, surpassing the United States in terms of online shopper base and attaining a Gross Merchandise Value (GMV) of $60 billion in 2024. Despite this milestone, the sector’s growth rate halved from historical averages of 20% to 10–12% in 2024. This deceleration is attributed primarily to macroeconomic headwinds—particularly high inflation and stagnation in real wages, which have also slowed private consumption growth from 11% (2017–19) to 8% (2022–24).

Structural Drivers and Government Support

Notwithstanding short-term sluggishness, India’s long-term e-retail outlook remains promising. Key government initiatives—such as Digital India, Make in India, Startup India, and Skill India—have laid a strong digital foundation. The Government e-Marketplace (GeM) crossed ?4 lakh crore GMV in FY24, reflecting growing public sector adoption of digital commerce.

Policy reforms have facilitated e-commerce expansion:

  • 100% FDI in B2B e-commerce
  • Implementation of Consumer Protection (E-commerce) Rules, 2020
  • Strengthening digital infrastructure through 5G rollout
  • The CSC-ONDC partnership aims to democratize access to digital markets in rural areas.

Key Growth Trends Shaping the Sector

The Flipkart–Bain & Company report identifies three transformative trends:

  1. Quick Commerce:Quick commerce now commands over two-thirds of e-grocery orders and constitutes 10% of total e-retail spending. It is projected to grow at over 40% CAGR until 2030, driven by faster deliveries, increasing product categories, and geographic expansion into Tier-2 and Tier-3 cities.
  2. Trend-First Commerce:Particularly dominant in fashion, this segment caters to consumers who prioritize latest trends and styles. Trend-first fashion alone is forecasted to grow fourfold to $8–10 billion by 2028, with more than half of the sales occurring online.
  3. Hyper-Value Commerce:This model emphasizes ultra-low-priced assortments aimed at lower-middle-income consumers. Its share of e-retail GMV has increased from 5% in 2021 to over 12% in 2024, gaining momentum in smaller towns and cities.

Demographic and Regional Shifts

The e-retail customer and seller base is witnessing increasing diversification:

  • Since 2020, 60% of new shoppers have emerged from Tier-3 or smaller cities.
  • The Northeastern states show 1.2 times higher e-retail penetration compared to the national average.
  • Similarly, 60% of new sellers since 2021 are from Tier-2 or smaller towns, indicating broad-based entrepreneurial participation.

Future Outlook

E-retail is expected to reach a GMV of $170–190 billion by 2030, growing at over 18% annually. A key inflection point will be when India’s GDP per capita crosses the $3,500–4,000 threshold, historically associated with significant upticks in discretionary digital spending. By 2030, one in ten retail dollars is projected to be spent online, with high-frequency categories such as grocery, lifestyle, and general merchandise accounting for two-thirds of e-retail expenditure.

Conclusion

India’s e-retail sector reflects the dynamic interplay of technology, policy, and socio-economic shifts. While macroeconomic challenges have tempered short-term growth, strong structural fundamentals and strategic disruptions position the sector for robust expansion. The transformation of digital commerce, particularly through inclusivity and value-driven models, is not only reshaping consumer behavior but also holds significant implications for employment, urbanization, and digital governance in India’s developmental journey.

India’s Deep Tech Ecosystem & the Government’s ?20,000 Crore Funding Initiative

  • 27 Mar 2025

Context:

India’s deep technology (deep tech) sector is emerging as a key driver of transformative innovation, leveraging advanced scientific breakthroughs to address complex challenges across sectors such as defence, healthcare, artificial intelligence (AI), biotechnology, aerospace, and renewable energy. Deep tech encompasses disruptive technologies including AI and machine learning, quantum computing, biotechnology, advanced materials, robotics, and aerospace systems.

Growth and Potential of India’s Deep Tech Sector

India’s deep tech ecosystem has seen rapid expansion in recent years. According to NASSCOM’s 2024 report, over 3,600 deep tech startups operate in India, with 480 new startups launched in 2023 alone, doubling the number from the previous year. While India ranks as the third-largest startup ecosystem globally, its deep tech sector ranks sixth worldwide. This growth reflects a rising blend of entrepreneurial ambition, government support, and increasing collaboration between academic institutions, research organisations, and industry.

Government initiatives such as the Draft National DeepTech Start-up Policy, the National Quantum Mission, India AI Mission, and substantial venture capital funds (e.g., ?1,000 crore for space tech startups) underscore India’s commitment to strengthening this ecosystem. Programmes like the Atal Innovation Mission, NITI Aayog’s innovation initiatives, and Start-up India provide critical support through incubators, accelerators, and funding mechanisms.

The ?20,000 Crore Deep Tech Fund

In the Union Budget 2024-25, Finance Minister announced a ?20,000 crore allocation as a 50-year interest-free loan to private sector-driven deep tech research and innovation. The fund aims to catalyse cutting-edge R&D and position India as a global leader in disruptive technologies.

However, the Parliamentary Standing Committee on Science and Technology, Environment, Forests and Climate Change has raised significant concerns about this scheme. While acknowledging the boldness of the initiative, the Committee warned of risks including potential misallocation of funds, national security implications, and low return on investment for the government. It expressed doubts over the competence of fund managers in selecting impactful projects, cautioning that private entities might benefit disproportionately at public expense.

The Committee suggested that directing such substantial funding toward government research institutions might yield more measurable impact. It emphasized the need for transparency, accountability, and a robust framework to guide the implementation of the fund.

Underutilisation of Scientific Research Funds and Reviving Public Sector Units

The Committee also flagged suboptimal utilisation of allocated funds by the Department of Scientific and Industrial Research, with over half of the budget remaining unused late into the financial year. A significant portion (62%) is consumed by salaries and pensions, leaving limited funds for actual research and infrastructure development.

Further, the Committee highlighted concerns over the poor condition of two public sector undertakings under the Department of Biotechnology—BIBCOL and IVCOL. It recommended their revival to ensure affordable vaccine availability domestically and improve India’s position in the global vaccine market, especially for exports.

Policy Recommendations and Future Outlook

To unlock the full potential of deep tech innovation, the Committee and experts suggest multiple policy measures for Budget 2025 and beyond:

  • Ensuring long-term, patient capital through government grants and venture capital funds to meet the high risk and capital-intensive nature of deep tech ventures.
  • Strengthening intellectual property rights and establishing commercialisation hubs for startups.
  • Enhancing public-private partnerships and specialised talent development through tailored skilling and certifications in AI, robotics, and quantum computing.
  • Modernising infrastructure by establishing research hubs, technology parks, and national facilities such as wind tunnels.
  • Streamlining regulatory frameworks for faster deployment of emerging technologies like autonomous vehicles and drones.
  • Promoting sustainability by incentivising green and climate tech innovations.

Conclusion:

India’s deep tech sector is poised for a transformative leap, but its success hinges on addressing governance, funding utilisation, and ecosystem-building challenges. The government’s strategic interventions and sound policy frameworks will be crucial in translating India’s scientific prowess into global technological leadership.

Universal and Equitable Tuberculosis Care in India

  • 26 Mar 2025

In News:

India has made significant strides in tuberculosis (TB) care, exemplified by a 17.7% reduction in TB incidence from 237 to 195 per lakh population between 2015 and 2023. This progress reflects a comprehensive approach incorporating rapid molecular testing, new drug regimens, enhanced nutritional support, and community engagement. However, to achieve universal health coverage (UHC) and eliminate TB by 2025, as targeted by the National Tuberculosis Elimination Programme (NTEP), further integration and decentralization of services are crucial.

Key Developments in TB Care

India’s efforts to combat TB have included the roll-out of the BPaLM regimen (a combination of four drugs: Bedaquiline, Pretomanid, Linezolid, and Moxifloxacin), which shortens the treatment period for drug-resistant TB.

Additionally, the Ni-kshayPoshan Yojana (NPY), which provides nutritional support of ?1,000 per month to TB patients, addresses the need for holistic care. Community participation has also been enhanced through the inclusion of TB survivors as “TB champions,” promoting awareness and treatment adherence at the grassroots level.

Furthermore, TB care has been integrated into the Ayushman Bharat scheme, ensuring that TB services are available through the Pradhan Mantri Jan Arogya Yojana (PMJAY) and Ayushman Arogya Mandirs (AAMs), which offer comprehensive primary health care across India. These efforts aim to decentralize TB care, ensuring that treatment is accessible at the community level, reducing delays in diagnosis, and minimizing out-of-pocket expenses for patients.

Challenges to Achieving Equitable TB Care

Despite these advancements, challenges persist. Over 50% of TB patients seek treatment in the private sector, where standards are inconsistent, leading to delays and higher costs. The private sector’s underreporting further complicates the efforts to ensure complete coverage and comprehensive care. Additionally, barriers such as gender, caste, disability, and socio-economic status often affect TB diagnosis and treatment outcomes. These social determinants necessitate a targeted approach to ensure equitable access to care.

TB services in India have largely remained vertical, with distinct TB care pathways separate from general healthcare services. Integrating TB care into the broader public health system is critical for the country’s goal of achieving UHC. Another challenge is the lack of integrated care that combines TB treatment with screening for other diseases like chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), diabetes, and mental health conditions.

Recommendations

India must focus on five key strategies to enhance TB care and achieve UHC:

  • Person-Centered Care: Model programs like Tamil Nadu’s KasanoiErappilaThittam, which identifies vulnerable populations and provides tailored care, should be scaled up nationwide.
  • Intersectionality: Address the intersection of gender, caste, disability, and socio-economic status to ensure that marginalized groups are not left behind.
  • Integrated Care: TB care should be integrated with the broader healthcare system, including screenings for non-communicable diseases (NCDs) and mental health issues, using tools like AI-enabled diagnostics.
  • Financial Protection: Expanding social protection measures such as wage-loss schemes, livelihood support, and extended nutritional assistance will reduce financial barriers for TB patients.
  • Awareness and Communication: A multi-platform public education campaign similar to the one used during the COVID-19 pandemic is essential to dispel myths, reduce stigma, and promote early detection and treatment.

Conclusion

India’s ambitious goal to eliminate TB by 2025, ahead of the global target, is a crucial step toward achieving UHC. By strengthening integrated, person-centered, and equitable care, addressing the social determinants of health, and promoting community-driven initiatives, India can lead the global fight against TB and set a benchmark for future health interventions.

Tracking Migration in India

  • 25 Mar 2025

In News:

The Covid-19 pandemic significantly altered migration patterns in India, with a massive reverse migration from urban areas to rural regions. The first lockdown saw 44.13 million people migrating, followed by 26.3 million during the second lockdown. These migrants, mostly low-wage workers, faced hardships like wage theft, food insecurity, and a lack of healthcare. Many, reliant on remittances, were economically strained.

Rebound of Rural-to-Urban Migration

Five years post-pandemic, migration trends have largely reverted to pre-Covid patterns. The rural economy struggled to accommodate returning migrants, offering limited job opportunities and low wages, leading many to return to urban centers. Rural distress and urban aspirations, supported by schemes like the Smart Cities Mission, continue to drive migration. Projections suggest that by 2026, 40% of India’s population will reside in urban areas. Additionally, climate change is intensifying migration, especially in agrarian states like Odisha, where disrupted agriculture forces people to migrate.

Shifts in International Migration

International migration also experienced changes post-Covid. While Indian emigrants faced challenges like job losses and poor living conditions abroad, remittances remained resilient, reaching $83.15 billion in 2020. Migration patterns shifted, with increasing numbers moving to Europe, particularly skilled professionals benefiting from the EU Blue Card program. Migration to Africa has also risen, driven by growth in sectors like IT and healthcare. The pandemic also fueled a rise in student migration, with the number of student emigrants from Kerala nearly doubling from 1.29 lakh in 2018 to 2.5 lakh in 2023.

Governance Challenges in Migration

Despite changes in migration patterns, several governance challenges persist. The lack of up-to-date migration data, compounded by delays in the 2021 Census and outdated figures from the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS), hampers effective policy-making. The Ministry of External Affairs' data underrepresents seasonal and temporary migrants, while illegal migration remains largely untracked.

Moreover, social security schemes remain inadequately implemented. The e-Shram portal, designed for unorganised workers, faces limited uptake due to digital exclusion and awareness gaps. Similarly, the One Nation One Ration Card (ONORC) scheme only covers part of the migrant population. Legal protections for migrant workers, like those under the Inter-State Migrant Workmen Act, 1979, remain weak, and the implementation of new Labour Codes introduced in 2020 is still incomplete.

Vulnerabilities and Gaps in Support

Certain vulnerable groups, such as migrant women and children, are often neglected in migration policies. Women face risks of trafficking and exploitation, while children suffer from disrupted education and inadequate healthcare. Climate-induced migration, resulting from floods and droughts, is also under-addressed in disaster management and climate adaptation policies, leaving communities unsupported during distress-induced mobility.

Recommendations for Strengthening Migration Governance

To address these challenges, India must strengthen migration governance:

  • Robust Migration Data Systems: Expand Kerala’s migration surveys to other states for better national data systems.
  • National Migration Policy: Expedite the NITI Aayog’s draft policy to ensure inter-ministerial coordination and gender-sensitive provisions.
  • International Migration Frameworks: Enhance labour mobility agreements with emerging destinations like Europe and Africa, along with skill-building initiatives.
  • Improved Social Security Access: Implement the Code on Social Security, 2020, and ensure portability of benefits across states.
  • One-Stop Migrant Facilitation Centers: Establish urban centers to assist migrants with registration, legal aid, and grievance redressal.
  • Address Vulnerable Groups: Develop policies protecting migrant women and children, ensuring education and healthcare access.
  • Climate-Induced Migration: Integrate climate migration in national policies for adequate community support.

Conclusion

Migration in India has largely returned to urban centers, but governance remains a challenge. Strengthening migration data, enhancing social security systems, and improving coordination at all levels of government will ensure that migration serves as a tool for development and the welfare of millions of migrants across India.

India’s Counter-Naxal Strategy

  • 24 Mar 2025

In News:

The Government of India, has adopted a zero-tolerance policy against Left-Wing Extremism (LWE), commonly referred to as Naxalism. The Central Government has set a target to make India Naxal-free by March 2026, a goal backed by integrated security, developmental, and governance strategies.

Current Status and Achievements

Recent operations in Chhattisgarh’s Bijapur and Kanker districts led to the neutralization of 22 Naxalites, highlighting the success of the ongoing ‘Naxalmukt Bharat Abhiyan’. In 2025 alone, 90 Naxalites were killed, 104 arrested, and 164 surrendered. In 2024, these figures stood at 290 neutralized, 1,090 arrested, and 881 surrendered. Additionally, 15 top Naxal leaders have been eliminated.

There has been a 53% decline in Naxal-related incidents, from 16,463 cases (2004–14) to 7,744 (2014–24). Casualties among security forces have dropped by 73%, and civilian deaths by 70% in the same period. Fortified police stations increased from 66 (2014) to 612 (2024). The number of Naxal-affected districts has drastically reduced from 126 to 12, indicating a marked shrinkage in the Red Corridor.

India’s Multi-Pronged Approach

The National Policy and Action Plan to Address LWE (2015) guides the Centre’s counter-Naxal efforts through three pillars: security enhancement, development outreach, and ensuring rights and entitlements.

  • Security Operations:
    • Major operations like Operation Green Hunt deploy Central Armed Police Forces (CAPFs), CoBRA commandos, and state-level forces like Greyhounds (Andhra Pradesh).
    • 302 new security camps and 68 night landing helipads have been established in vulnerable regions for better mobility and reach.
  • Development Initiatives:
    • Under PMGSY-II, the Road Connectivity Project for LWE Areas improves access to remote villages.
    • 130 Eklavya Model Residential Schools (EMRS) ensure tribal children receive quality education.
    • The ROSHNI Scheme and establishment of Industrial Training Institutes (ITIs) provide skill development and livelihood avenues to tribal youth.
    • The Universal Service Obligation Fund (now Digital Bharat Nidhi) has led to widespread mobile tower installation in forested areas.
    • Tribal Youth Exchange Programs promote national integration and awareness among tribal youth.
  • Legal and Institutional Measures:
    • The Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act, 1967 (UAPA) bans CPI (Maoist) and affiliated organizations.
    • Forest Rights Act (2006) and PESA (1996) aim to protect tribal land and forest rights.
    • Surrender-cum-Rehabilitation policies provide financial aid, vocational training, and reintegration support.

Understanding Naxalism

Naxalism, rooted in the 1967 uprising in Naxalbari (West Bengal), is a Maoist-inspired insurgency seeking to overthrow the Indian state through armed rebellion. Factors contributing to its rise include landlessness, tribal alienation, poverty, displacement from mining and industrial projects, and state neglect. The insurgency remains concentrated in the “Red Corridor” encompassing Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand, Odisha, Maharashtra, and Bihar.

Conclusion

India’s counter-Naxal policy demonstrates that a balanced approach combining firm security enforcement with development and governance reforms can significantly curb insurgency. Continued emphasis on inclusive growth and tribal empowerment remains crucial to achieving lasting peace in affected regions.

Holocene Epoch and its relevance to Climate Change and Sea-Level Rise

  • 23 Mar 2025

In News:

The Holocene Epoch, the current geological epoch, began approximately 11,700 years ago following the end of the Pleistocene Ice Age. This epoch is marked by a pronounced warming trend, glacial retreat, and the rise of human civilization. Understanding the environmental dynamics of the Holocene—particularly sea-level rise during its early phase—is crucial to predicting future climate scenarios driven by anthropogenic warming.

The term "Holocene" was introduced by Paul Gervais in 1869 and was formally adopted by the International Geological Congress in 1885. It encompasses significant geological, climatic, and anthropogenic changes that have shaped the modern Earth system.

Climatic and Geological Evolution

The early Holocene witnessed the final stages of deglaciation, characterized by rapid sea-level rise due to the melting of massive ice sheets. Geological data, particularly from regions like the North Sea, have helped resolve earlier uncertainties in sea-level reconstructions. Meltwater pulses—especially those around 10,300 years ago and 8,300 years ago—contributed to an estimated sea-level rise of about 37.7 meters between 11,000 and 3,000 years ago.

This period also saw the formation of key geographical features such as the Hudson Bay, Baltic Sea, North Sea (with the submergence of Doggerland), and the Great Lakes in North America. The global retreat of glaciers reshaped coastlines, river systems, and deltas, fostering the development of modern terrestrial ecosystems.

Climate Events and Ecological Shifts

The Holocene has not been climatically uniform. After the abrupt cooling of the Younger Dryas (12,900–11,700 years ago), the Earth entered a warmer phase. The Holocene Climate Optimum (9000–5000 BCE) witnessed elevated temperatures that supported the expansion of forests, grasslands, and wetlands. Later, the Little Ice Age (1300–1850 CE) brought cooler temperatures, especially in the Northern Hemisphere, affecting agriculture and socio-economic conditions in Europe.

Impact on Human Societies

The climatic stability of the Holocene was instrumental in the Neolithic Revolution (~10,000 BCE), wherein humans transitioned from nomadic hunter-gatherers to sedentary agricultural communities. This transformation led to the rise of early civilizations such as Mesopotamia, the Indus Valley, Ancient Egypt, and China, all supported by predictable climate and fertile river systems.

Significant cultural and technological milestones occurred during the Holocene, including the invention of writing (~3200 BCE in Sumer), the beginning of the Bronze Age (~3300 BCE), and the emergence of urban centers.

Modern Relevance and the Anthropocene Debate

In recent centuries, particularly after the Industrial Revolution (~1750 CE), human activity has become a dominant force influencing Earth's climate and ecosystems. Rising CO? levels, deforestation, biodiversity loss, and accelerated global warming have led some scientists to propose a new epoch—the Anthropocene—though it remains a debated classification.

Understanding sea-level patterns from the early Holocene provides essential context for modern climate models. Past trends demonstrate that ice melt and thermal expansion can lead to rapid sea-level rise, a warning echoed by contemporary concerns over melting polar ice and global warming.

US Airstrikes on Houthis

  • 22 Mar 2025

In News:

The renewed US military offensive against the Iran-backed Houthi rebels in Yemen reflects intensifying geopolitical tensions in the Red Sea and surrounding West Asian region. In early 2025, the US launched over 40 airstrikes targeting Houthi-controlled areas, including Sanaa, Saada, and the strategic port city of Hodeidah. The escalation follows months of Houthi attacks on international shipping, ostensibly in solidarity with Palestinians during the ongoing Gaza conflict.

Strategic Background and US Objectives

Houthi disruptions to maritime trade in the Red Sea—through drone, missile, and small-boat attacks—have endangered key shipping lanes through Bab-el-Mandeb and the Suez Canal. With nearly 15% of global seaborne trade passing through this corridor, including vital energy supplies, their actions have compelled ships to reroute around Africa, escalating shipping costs and global inflation risks.

Former US President Donald Trump, now leading a second administration, has vowed decisive retaliation. He re-designated the Houthis as a Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO) in early 2025 and emphasized that attacks by the Houthis would be interpreted as attacks by Iran, warning Tehran of dire consequences. Trump’s administration asserts that the airstrikes are aimed at restoring freedom of navigation and deterring Iranian influence in the region. However, critics argue this could be a calibrated signal to avoid direct confrontation with Iran while maintaining pressure ahead of potential nuclear negotiations.

Regional and International Dynamics

The Houthis, officially called Ansar Allah, have displayed remarkable resilience, withstanding over 20,000 airstrikes by the Saudi-led coalition since 2015. Their asymmetric warfare tactics, inspired by groups like Hezbollah, rely on mobility, modular units, and advanced missile and drone technology. Despite repeated bombardments, they retain operational capabilities, evidenced by continued attacks on US naval assets and commercial vessels.

Although Tehran remains the group's principal backer, Houthi ties extend to Russia and China. Beijing, by purchasing nearly 90% of Iran’s oil exports in 2024, indirectly funds the Houthi supply chain. Many of the group’s anti-ship cruise missiles are derivatives of older Chinese designs, while Moscow reportedly provides targeting intelligence and small arms. This triangulation complicates US efforts, making the Houthis part of a broader anti-Western strategic bloc.

Regional Responses and the Humanitarian Toll

Interestingly, major Arab states, including Saudi Arabia—formerly the Houthis' chief adversary—have distanced themselves from the US offensive. Riyadh advised restraint in early 2024 and has reportedly avoided providing logistical support for the strikes. This signals a regional fatigue with military solutions and a possible pivot toward political engagement.

On the ground, the strikes have intensified the humanitarian crisis in Yemen. The Houthi-run health ministry reports at least 31 deaths and over 100 injuries. Yet, the group remains defiant, pledging to continue targeting vessels linked to the US, UK, or Israel until the Gaza blockade is lifted.

Conclusion

The Houthi-US conflict in the Red Sea epitomizes the nexus of regional geopolitics, maritime security, and great power rivalries. For India, which depends heavily on Suez Canal routes for trade and energy imports, developments in this theatre bear close watching. A prolonged conflict could disrupt global supply chains, heighten oil prices, and challenge freedom of navigation principles, central to India’s Indo-Pacific strategy.

India’s 5G Revolution

  • 21 Mar 2025

Context:
India is undergoing a digital transformation powered by rapid expansion in mobile broadband. According to Nokia’s Mobile Broadband Index (MBiT) Report 2024, India’s average monthly data usage per user reached an all-time high of 27.5 GB. The exponential growth in 5G adoption, traffic, and device readiness reflects a critical shift in the country’s telecom and digital infrastructure landscape.

Key Trends in Data Consumption and 5G Expansion

The report highlights several key trends that underline India's accelerating digital momentum:

  • Average Data Consumption: The average mobile user in India consumed 27.5 GB/month in 2024, underlining the growing demand for video streaming, social media, and real-time applications.
  • Surge in 5G Traffic: 5G data traffic tripled over the past year, with projections indicating it will overtake 4G by Q1 2026. The shift is especially noticeable in urban areas.
  • Metro-Centric 5G Usage: In India’s metro circles, 5G now accounts for 43% of total mobile broadband usage, up from 20% in 2023, suggesting early saturation and readiness in Tier 1 cities.
  • Rural Uptake Rising: While metros lead the way, Category B and C circles are witnessing strong growth in 5G uptake, aided by affordable smartphones and increased network coverage.
  • Device Readiness: There were 271 million active 5G devices in India in 2024, doubling year-on-year. By 2025, 90% of replaced smartphones are expected to be 5G-enabled, indicating widespread device transition.
  • Fixed Wireless Access (FWA): Users with 5G FWA consume 12 times more data than typical mobile users, showing the potential of 5G in delivering high-speed home internet in underserved areas.

Implications for India’s Digital Future

  • Economic Growth and Innovation: The 5G revolution is expected to unlock new avenues in fintech, ed-tech, health-tech, and smart manufacturing. Higher data speeds and lower latency will enhance productivity and efficiency across sectors.
  • Bridging the Digital Divide: Increasing rural adoption of 5G, aided by government and private investments, can significantly reduce the urban-rural connectivity gap and foster inclusive development.
  • Employment and Start-up Ecosystem: The emergence of a robust 5G ecosystem will create demand for new skills, boosting employment in AI, IoT, cloud computing, and edge technologies.
  • Network Transformation: The transition from 4G to 5G marks a fundamental change in telecom infrastructure, requiring upgradation in backhaul capacity, spectrum efficiency, and fibre penetration.

Challenges and the Road Ahead

Despite rapid adoption, challenges remain. Ensuring affordable access in rural areas, addressing cybersecurity risks, and enhancing digital literacy are vital. Policy coherence, right-of-way (RoW) reforms, and spectrum management will determine the pace and inclusivity of 5G deployment.

Conclusion

India’s 5G journey marks a pivotal step toward becoming a digitally empowered society. With supportive policy frameworks, private sector innovation, and public investment in digital infrastructure, the country is well-positioned to leverage 5G as a tool for economic transformation, digital inclusion, and technological leadership.

Criminalization of Politics in India

  • 20 Mar 2025

Introduction

The increasing presence of individuals with criminal backgrounds in legislative bodies has emerged as a serious concern for Indian democracy. The phenomenon, commonly referred to as the criminalization of politics, undermines constitutional values and erodes public confidence in democratic institutions. Data released by the Association for Democratic Reforms (ADR) has brought renewed focus to this persistent challenge.

Current Scenario and Data Highlights

As per ADR’s recent analyses (2024–2025):

  • 44% of Lok Sabha MPs and 45% of MLAs across the country have disclosed criminal cases in their election affidavits. Notably, 29% of these cases involve grave charges like murder, attempt to murder, and crimes against women.
  • States such as Andhra Pradesh (79%), Telangana and Kerala (69%), and Bihar (66%) have the highest number of legislators with criminal records.
  • Among the accused are 54 MLAs charged with murder, 226 with attempted murder, and 127 with crimes against women, including 13 with rape charges.
  • 23% of women legislators also face criminal allegations, indicating the pervasive nature of the issue across gender lines.
  • A significant number of legislators with serious cases are also high net-worth individuals, particularly from Andhra Pradesh and Telangana, showing a concerning link between money power and political success.

Underlying Causes

Several structural and political factors contribute to the criminalization of India's electoral system:

  • Inadequate Legal Provisions: Individuals are permitted to contest elections until conviction, as reaffirmed in the Public Interest Foundation vs. Union of India (2018) judgment.
  • Judicial Delays: The absence of speedy trials enables accused politicians to continue in office without legal resolution.
  • Political Utility of Strongmen: In regions with weak law enforcement, candidates with criminal backgrounds are perceived as effective enforcers or community protectors.
  • Party Prioritization of Winnability: Political parties often ignore criminal records when nominating candidates who are likely to win.
  • Influence of Money and Muscle Power: Many such candidates possess substantial financial and coercive clout, which aids their electoral prospects.
  • Limited Voter Awareness: Despite the mandatory disclosure of criminal cases, there is insufficient public engagement with this information.

Impact on Governance and Democracy

The influence of criminal elements in politics has multiple adverse consequences:

  • It undermines democratic legitimacy and weakens public faith in elected institutions.
  • Policy-making is compromised, as legislators with vested interests may act contrary to public welfare.
  • The dominance of such individuals fosters a culture of impunity, worsening governance and law and order.
  • Ethical standards decline, discouraging professionals and clean candidates from entering public life.

Judicial and Institutional Measures

Key interventions include:

  • In Lily Thomas vs. Union of India (2013), the Supreme Court ruled that convicted legislators receiving a sentence of two years or more must be disqualified immediately.
  • In 2020, the apex court mandated political parties to publicly explain why candidates with criminal records were chosen.

Reform Measures

To counter this trend, a multi-pronged approach is required:

  • Amend election laws to bar candidates with serious charges from contesting, especially if charges are framed by a court.
  • Set up fast-track courts for time-bound trials of political candidates, as recommended by the Supreme Court.
  • Implement state funding of elections to curb the role of black money, as advised by the Indrajit Gupta Committee.
  • Enhance voter literacy through outreach campaigns and digital platforms.
  • Strengthen accountability of political parties by enforcing penalties for repeated nomination of tainted candidates.
  • Empower the Election Commission to refuse recognition or symbols to non-compliant parties.

Conclusion

The entrenchment of criminal elements in politics is a serious challenge to India's democratic aspirations. Addressing it requires urgent legal reforms, institutional vigilance, political responsibility, and an informed electorate. Only through collective effort can the ideals of clean and ethical governance be restored.

Electoral Reforms in India

  • 19 Mar 2025

In News:

The Election Commission of India (ECI) has initiated discussions with political parties to address growing concerns over the integrity of India’s electoral process. Allegations regarding the manipulation of electoral rolls, duplicate voter IDs, and issues with the conduct of elections have prompted the need for reforms to ensure transparency and fairness.

Legal Framework Governing Elections

The Constitution of India and several key legislative acts outline the processes and authority for conducting elections:

  • Article 324 of the Constitution gives the Election Commission the authority to supervise electoral rolls and conduct elections.
  • Representation of the People Act, 1950 and 1951 establish the legal framework for elections and the preparation of electoral rolls.
  • Registration of Electors Rules, 1960 govern the procedures for the inclusion, correction, and deletion of names in the electoral rolls.
  • Delimitation Act, 2002 ensures the redrawing of constituency boundaries based on the latest census data.

The evolution of voting methods in India has progressed from paper ballots to Electronic Voting Machines (EVMs) with Voter Verifiable Paper Audit Trail (VVPAT) since 2004, enhancing the credibility of the process.

Challenges in the Electoral Process

Several concerns have emerged over the years:

  • EVM and VVPAT Concerns: Opposition parties have raised fears of EVM tampering, demanding a return to paper ballots. The Supreme Court has dismissed such demands, requiring a sample check of VVPAT-EVM matching in a limited number of machines per constituency.
  • Electoral Roll Manipulation: Allegations of fake voters and duplicate voter IDs were raised, particularly in Maharashtra and Delhi. The EC has attributed these discrepancies to the earlier decentralized system of issuing voter IDs, which has now been streamlined through the ERONET platform.
  • Campaign Issues: Star campaigners have often violated the Model Code of Conduct (MCC) by making inflammatory and divisive remarks. Moreover, political parties overspend on campaigns, exceeding legal limits, which undermines electoral integrity. The criminalization of politics is another critical issue, with 46% of elected MPs in 2024 facing criminal charges, including serious offenses.

Proposed Reforms

To address these challenges, several reforms are needed:

  • Voting and Counting Reforms:
    • VVPAT Verification: A scientific approach to VVPAT-EVM matching should be implemented. Full manual verification should be triggered if discrepancies are found in any region.
    • Totaliser Machines: The EC’s proposal to use totaliser machines to aggregate votes from multiple EVMs before results are disclosed should be adopted to protect voter anonymity.
    • Addressing Duplicate EPICs: Linking Aadhaar with EPIC IDs could help eliminate duplicate voter IDs, provided privacy concerns are addressed.
  • Campaign and Electoral Reforms:
    • Stronger Enforcement of the MCC: The EC should be empowered to revoke a party's “Star Campaigner” status for serious violations, depriving them of expenditure relief.
    • Election Expenditure Regulation: The law should be amended to set limits on political party expenditure, which currently remains unrestricted.
    • Criminalization of Politics: The Supreme Court’s directive for candidates to disclose their criminal records should be strictly enforced, requiring such declarations in widely circulated media.

Committee Recommendations

  • Vohra Committee (1993): Recommended tracking criminal-politician links and addressing the role of black money in elections.
  • Law Commission (2014): Suggested disqualifying politicians charged with serious offenses and increasing penalties for false affidavits.
  • 2nd Administrative Reforms Commission: Advocated for state funding of elections to reduce the influence of illicit money.

Way Forward

To strengthen the electoral process, the Election Commission should be granted greater powers to verify criminal records and financial disclosures of candidates. Fast-track courts should be established to expedite cases involving elected officials facing serious charges. Transparency should be increased by mandating real-time disclosure of political funding and expenditures. Furthermore, voter awareness and civil society engagement should be promoted to enhance accountability in the electoral process.

Public Health Education in India

  • 18 Mar 2025

In News:

India’s public health education sector stands at a critical juncture. Despite rapid academic expansion—with over 100 institutions now offering Master of Public Health (MPH) and related programs—the sector faces mounting challenges related to employment, quality, and funding. While international aid has declined, domestic investment remains limited, exacerbating systemic issues in workforce development.

Public Health: Constitutional and Strategic Significance

Article 47 of the Indian Constitution mandates the State to improve public health. A well-trained public health workforce is essential to achieve health equity, manage non-communicable diseases, address pandemics like COVID-19, and ensure effective delivery of health services at all levels.

Evolution and Growth of Public Health Education

Public health education in India has roots in colonial institutions, notably the All India Institute of Hygiene and Public Health, Kolkata (1932). Post-independence, community medicine was integrated into medical curricula. However, it was the launch of the National Rural Health Mission (2005) that marked a turning point, creating space for non-medical professionals in public health. Since then, MPH programs have proliferated—from just one institution in 2000 to over 100 today.

Government Initiatives

Key government efforts to strengthen public health education and training include:

  • National Health Mission (NHM): Enhances public health systems and skill development.
  • PM Swasthya Suraksha Yojana (PMSSY): Expands infrastructure and education through AIIMS-like institutions.
  • Fellowship in Public Health Management (FPHM): Builds leadership capacities.
  • National Programme for Prevention and Control of Non-Communicable Diseases (NP-NCD) and Integrated Disease Surveillance Programme (IDSP): Promote epidemiology and disease control training.

Persistent Challenges

  • Employment Mismatch: A surge in MPH graduates has not been matched by job creation. Entry-level roles receive thousands of applications, and dedicated public health cadres in states remain underdeveloped.
  • Lack of Regulation and Standardization: No central regulatory body ensures consistent curricula or quality standards. MPH programs are not under the purview of the NMC or UGC.
  • Faculty Shortages and Weak Practical Training: Institutions often lack experienced faculty and real-world training integration, leaving graduates underprepared.
  • Uneven Institutional Spread: States like Assam, Bihar, and Jharkhand have few or no public health colleges, deepening regional disparities.
  • Funding Deficits: India's public health education receives minimal investment. For instance, the Data Protection Board was allocated just ?2 crore—reflecting systemic underfunding. International aid cuts, such as those from USAID, further strain the sector.
  • Low Private Sector Absorption: Private hospitals prefer management professionals over MPH graduates. Development sector roles, heavily reliant on foreign grants, offer limited stability.

Way Forward

  • Establish Public Health Cadres: States must create dedicated employment frameworks at all administrative levels.
  • Regulate Education Quality: A Public Health Education Council under UGC/NMC should standardize curricula, faculty norms, and institutional benchmarks.
  • Expand Institutional Capacity: Encourage public-private partnerships to open MPH colleges in underserved regions.
  • Promote Experiential Learning: Mandate field training through internships in NHM, IDSP, and WHO-linked programs.
  • Encourage Private Sector Hiring: Offer incentives for hiring MPH graduates in corporate and hospital settings.
  • Increase Domestic Investment: Boost government funding for public health education and research, reducing reliance on foreign donors.

Conclusion

India’s public health education must transition from fragmented expansion to structured, quality-driven growth. Strengthening regulation, employment pathways, and training infrastructure is crucial for building a resilient health system and fulfilling the constitutional promise of health for all.

India–New Zealand Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Negotiations

  • 17 Mar 2025

In News:

India and New Zealand have officially resumed negotiations for a Comprehensive Economic Cooperation Agreement (CECA) after a prolonged hiatus since 2015. This strategic move aims to enhance bilateral trade, deepen economic interdependence, and strengthen regional cooperation in the Indo-Pacific.

Background and Significance

The FTA talks, first initiated in 2010, were stalled due to differences, particularly over India’s high tariffs on New Zealand’s dairy and agricultural exports. The revival of discussions during New Zealand Prime Minister Christopher Luxon's official visit to India in 2025 signals a renewed commitment towards building a balanced, ambitious, and mutually beneficial trade framework.

The bilateral trade relationship, though modest, has shown robust growth. In 2023–24, India exported goods worth $538 million to New Zealand and imported $335 million, generating a trade surplus of $203 million. By December 2024, exports rose by 21.49%, and imports surged by 78.72%, narrowing the trade surplus to $33 million.

Key Objectives of the India–New Zealand FTA

  • Enhance supply chain integration.
  • Improve market access for goods, services, and investments.
  • Strengthen economic resilience and bilateral commercial ties.
  • Facilitate trade through the Authorized Economic Operators Mutual Recognition Arrangement (AEO-MRA).

India’s major exports to New Zealand include pharmaceuticals, machinery, textiles, and precious stones, while imports largely consist of wool, aluminum, fruits, and steel products.

Strategic and Geopolitical Dimensions

Beyond economics, the agreement holds strategic significance:

  • A defense cooperation MoU was signed to institutionalize military engagements and promote maritime collaboration.
  • New Zealand expressed intent to join India’s Indo-Pacific Oceans Initiative (IPOI).
  • Both nations pledged support for a free, open, inclusive Indo-Pacific, aligning with the UNCLOS-based rules-based international order.
  • New Zealand reiterated support for India’s permanent membership in the reformed UNSC and entry into the Nuclear Suppliers Group (NSG).

 

Sectoral Cooperation and Emerging Areas

  • Climate Change and Sustainability:
    • New Zealand joined India-led initiatives like the International Solar Alliance (ISA) and Coalition for Disaster Resilient Infrastructure (CDRI).
    • Both countries committed to joint action under the Paris Agreement and Sendai Framework.
  • Education and Skill Development:
    • A renewed Education Cooperation Arrangement was signed to boost academic partnerships, student mobility, and vocational training.
    • Plans are underway to commemorate 100 years of sports relations in 2026, coupled with a new MoU on sports cooperation.
  • Diaspora and People-to-People Ties:
    • The Indian diaspora forms 6% of New Zealand’s population, playing a pivotal role in cultural and economic relations.
    • India raised concerns regarding pro-Khalistan activities, and New Zealand assured cooperation in addressing such issues.

Opportunities and Complementarities

India’s Strategic Importance to New Zealand:

  • Large market with a growing middle class and rising demand for dairy, meat, and high-value agricultural exports.
  • Largest source of skilled migrants and second-largest source of international students.
  • Booming digital economy offers collaboration potential in fintech, AI, and digital services.

New Zealand’s Relevance to India:

  • Expertise in sustainable farming and dairy technology supports India’s agricultural reforms.
  • Recognized climate tech sector aligns with India’s clean energy transition.
  • Potential buyer of India’s defense equipment and surveillance systems, enhancing maritime security amid Indo-Pacific tensions.

Challenges in Bilateral Relations

  • Stalled FTA negotiations due to tariff sensitivities, particularly in the dairy sector.
  • Non-tariff barriers (NTBs) affecting Indian exports like fruits and vegetables.
  • Low trade volumes and limited awareness of New Zealand’s economic strengths among Indian businesses.
  • Divergences in geopolitical alignments, with New Zealand’s reliance on China creating potential strategic friction.

Way Forward

  • Conclude FTA negotiations through dialogue and sectoral agreements in pharmaceuticals, technology, and horticulture.
  • Consider an interim Early Harvest Agreement, akin to India–Australia ECTA, to fast-track gains.
  • Enhance market access by reducing NTBs, fast-tracking Mutual Recognition Arrangements (MRAs), and organizing trade expos and B2B interactions.
  • Leverage climate and renewable energy cooperation, strengthen defense collaboration, and institutionalize maritime security mechanisms.

Conclusion

The renewed India–New Zealand FTA negotiations mark a pivotal step in recalibrating bilateral economic and strategic relations. Anchored in democratic values and shared Indo-Pacific interests, the partnership is poised to evolve into a multi-dimensional engagement encompassing trade, technology, climate resilience, and defense cooperation. The agreement, if concluded, could serve as a model for equitable North–South economic partnerships in a multipolar world order.

Battling India’s Infodemic

  • 16 Mar 2025

In News:

India, with over 95.04 crore internet users, faces a growing crisis of misinformation and disinformation. The spread of fake news has surged, particularly during the COVID-19 pandemic, where misinformation increased by 214%, making India responsible for one in six pieces of global fake news related to the pandemic. This infodemic is fueled by unregulated social media platforms, AI-driven disinformation, and weak legal frameworks. As digital platforms become the primary source of news, addressing the spread of fake news is critical for maintaining public trust and democratic integrity.

Factors Driving the Infodemic

1. Unregulated Social Media: Platforms like WhatsApp, Facebook, and YouTube are major conduits for misinformation. The viral nature of content on these platforms often leads to false information reaching millions before fact-checking can occur. For instance, during the COVID-19 crisis, false cures and misleading health information spread rapidly on WhatsApp, creating public panic.

2. AI and Deepfakes: AI-powered tools have enabled the creation of deepfake content, including videos, audio, and images that mimic real people. During the 2024 Lok Sabha elections, deepfakes reinforced political biases, influencing voter sentiment. Similarly, AI-generated propaganda has played a role in amplifying social divides, as seen in global elections.

3. Political Manipulation: Fake news has become a political weapon, particularly during election cycles. In India’s 2024 elections, AI-generated speeches and content contributed to voter polarization. The use of algorithmic echo chambers exacerbates this by curating content that reinforces biases, thereby fostering ideological divides.

4. Weak Legal and Fact-Checking Mechanisms: India lacks a comprehensive legal framework to counter fake news. Existing laws, such as the Information Technology Act, 2000 and the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita, address certain aspects of disinformation but fail to tackle the broader, evolving issue. The Election Commission of India (ECI) is under-resourced to handle the volume of misinformation during elections, further complicating efforts.

Challenges in Countering the Infodemic

1. Legal Gaps: Current laws are insufficient to address the modern challenges posed by fake news, particularly with the rise of AI-generated content. The Digital Personal Data Protection Act (DPDP), 2023, while a step forward, faces implementation challenges, and ad hoc measures like internet shutdowns only offer temporary solutions.

2. Sluggish Response by Tech Platforms: Social media giants like Meta, X, and YouTube have been criticized for their slow response in removing fake news. For instance, X’s "Community Notes" program has struggled to counter misinformation in real-time, allowing malicious actors to exploit the system before action is taken.

3. Lack of Awareness and Digital Literacy: Many users in India struggle to distinguish between credible and fake news, especially in rural areas where digital literacy is limited. This lack of awareness has led to tragic consequences, such as mob lynchings triggered by fake news spread on platforms like WhatsApp.

International Models and the Way Forward

1. Strong Legal Framework: Countries like Singapore and Germany have enacted robust laws to combat fake news. Singapore’s Protection from Online Falsehoods and Manipulation Act imposes severe penalties for spreading deliberate misinformation. Similarly, Germany’s NetzDG Law mandates that social media platforms remove fake news within 24 hours or face heavy fines. India could draw lessons from these models, ensuring any new law balances freedom of speech with the need to curb harmful misinformation.

2. AI Regulation and Transparency: India must enforce strict regulations on AI-generated content, including mandatory labeling of deepfakes and AI-driven media. The EU's AI Act and Finland's digital literacy initiatives provide useful frameworks for promoting transparency and user awareness.

3. Strengthening the Election Commission: The ECI needs enhanced resources and clear guidelines for countering misinformation, particularly during elections. Collaborating with fact-checkers and media outlets can improve response times and effectiveness.

4. Digital Literacy Campaigns: A nationwide initiative, similar to Finland’s digital literacy program, is essential to educate the public on identifying fake news. Empowering citizens with the tools to critically evaluate information will reduce the spread and impact of misinformation.

Conclusion

India’s battle against fake news requires urgent legal intervention, especially as deepfakes and AI-driven misinformation continue to evolve. A comprehensive framework—one that protects free speech while holding platforms accountable for the spread of disinformation—is essential to preserve the integrity of democratic processes. The introduction of strict regulations, coupled with initiatives to boost digital literacy, will help safeguard public trust and social harmony in the digital age.

India–Mauritius Enhanced Strategic Partnership

  • 15 Mar 2025

In News:

India and Mauritius have elevated their bilateral relationship to an Enhanced Strategic Partnership, underscoring deep-rooted historical ties, shared cultural linkages, and growing strategic alignment in the Indian Ocean Region (IOR). This elevation came during Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s visit to Mauritius in March 2025, marking a new phase in India’s engagement with the Global South through the unveiling of the MAHASAGAR Vision—Mutual and Holistic Advancement for Security and Growth Across Regions.

Key Agreements and Strategic Cooperation

A total of eight bilateral agreements were signed, focusing on trade, defense, maritime security, financial crimes, and developmental cooperation. A landmark agreement was the signing of India’s first-ever rupee-denominated Line of Credit to Mauritius, worth ?487.6 crore, aimed at upgrading the island’s water supply system. This also complements a broader move toward trade settlement in local currencies, reducing dependence on foreign exchange and enhancing resilience in bilateral commerce.

In the realm of maritime security, the partnership now includes expanded white shipping information sharing, enhanced joint maritime surveillance, and greater utilization of strategic facilities on Agalega Island, developed with Indian assistance. India reaffirmed its commitment to safeguarding Mauritius’s Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ) and supporting the establishment of a police academy and a national maritime information-sharing centre.

India also extended support to Mauritius’s claim over the Chagos Archipelago, opposing colonial remnants and reinforcing its consistent stance on sovereignty and decolonization in global forums.

MAHASAGAR Vision and Global South Outreach

The newly unveiled MAHASAGAR initiative builds upon India’s earlier SAGAR doctrine, broadening the framework to include developmental cooperation, technology transfer, capacity building, concessional finance, and joint security across the Global South. It strengthens India’s position as a net security provider and first responder in the IOR, evident from its assistance during Cyclone Chido and the Wakashio oil spill.

The visit also witnessed the inauguration of the Atal Bihari Vajpayee Institute of Public Service and Innovation, a health centre, and 20 community projects built with Indian grants. Further, India announced its support for constructing a new Parliament building in Mauritius, symbolizing democratic solidarity.

Cultural and Economic Pillars

Mauritius hosts a large Indian diaspora (around 70% of its population), maintaining strong cultural, religious, and linguistic ties with India. Historical bonds, such as Mahatma Gandhi’s 1901 visit, continue to influence people-to-people relations. Economically, Mauritius serves as a gateway to Africa, benefiting from India’s rising trade and investment footprint, particularly through the African Continental Free Trade Area (AfCFTA).

India is one of Mauritius’s top trading partners and a major source of Foreign Direct Investment (FDI), with Mauritius being the second-largest source of FDI into India in FY 2023–24.

Conclusion

The India–Mauritius partnership exemplifies a holistic model of South-South cooperation, driven by shared values, strategic convergence, and mutual development. In the evolving Indo-Pacific framework, it reinforces India's Act East and Extended Neighbourhood policies while bolstering regional stability and economic integration.

NBFC Stress and Systemic Risks in India’s Financial System

  • 14 Mar 2025

In News:

The International Monetary Fund (IMF), in its report titled India Financial System Stability Assessment, has flagged significant vulnerabilities in India’s financial architecture, particularly arising from the Non-Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs) sector. Despite overall resilience post-pandemic, the increasing interconnectedness and exposure of NBFCs pose emerging systemic risks.

A major concern highlighted is the concentration of NBFC lending to the power sector. In FY 2024, 63% of power sector loans were provided by just three large Infrastructure Financing NBFCs—an increase from 55% in FY 2020. This overexposure, particularly by state-owned NBFCs such as IREDA, raises red flags given the inherent risks in infrastructure financing, including delays, cost overruns, and revenue shortfalls. The report notes that 56% of NBFC lending was financed by market instruments like corporate bonds and mutual funds, heightening the risk of contagion in case of financial distress.

NBFCs differ structurally from banks. They cannot accept demand deposits, lack deposit insurance coverage, and have no direct access to Reserve Bank of India (RBI) liquidity windows. Consequently, any shock in their repayment capacity can lead to asset-liability mismatches, potentially spilling over into banks, mutual funds, and bond markets, amplifying systemic risks.

The IMF also examined stress scenarios such as stagflation—a situation characterized by slow economic growth and high inflation. In such cases, public sector banks (PSBs) are particularly vulnerable. The Capital Adequacy Ratio (CAR) of PSBs could fall to the regulatory minimum of 9% under stress, threatening their ability to absorb losses. This is concerning, as the RBI mandates a minimum CAR of 12% for PSBs. The IMF recommends that PSBs retain earnings instead of paying dividends to strengthen their capital buffers and support credit flow during downturns.

While banks and NBFCs have shown broad resilience, ‘weak tails’ exist—non-systemic NBFCs and urban cooperative banks with below-minimum or even negative capital. This underscores the need for strengthened regulatory oversight, especially over state-owned NBFCs, which currently enjoy relaxed prudential norms. The IMF calls for uniform regulation across public and private NBFCs to ensure a level playing field and greater financial stability.

The report also emphasizes the need for improved data sharing and systemic risk monitoring, especially related to NBFC exposures, household credit, and climate-linked financial risks. Physical and transition risks remain moderate but are notable in monsoon-dependent agriculture and carbon-intensive industries like thermal power.

Recommendations include:

  • Extending the cybersecurity risk framework to major NBFCs.
  • Implementing IFRS-9 based credit risk assessments and countercyclical capital buffers.
  • Improving insolvency and bankruptcy resolution mechanisms to reduce recovery time and enhance credit discipline.

India’s financial system is becoming more diverse and inclusive, with rising digital financial access and market participation. However, to sustain growth and resilience, proactive reforms in NBFC regulation, capital adequacy, and systemic risk management are essential.

Is Artificial Intelligence affecting Critical Thinking Skills?

  • 13 Mar 2025

Context:

The growing integration of Artificial Intelligence (AI) in educational spaces has sparked a global debate on its impact on students' critical thinking. With AI tools like ChatGPT and Copilot becoming ubiquitous, concerns have emerged about their potential to replace the intellectual rigor traditionally expected of learners.

AI in Classrooms: An Inevitable Shift

AI is no longer a futuristic concept but an entrenched part of everyday life, including education. In India, over 61% of educators reportedly use AI tools, and globally, a majority of students now rely on generative AI for academic work. This shift raises the fundamental question: Is AI eroding students’ ability to think independently?

Experts argue that banning AI from classrooms is neither feasible nor productive. AI’s integration into platforms like Microsoft Word and Adobe Reader means its use is often passive and unavoidable. Instead, the focus should be on responsible and ethical integration aligned with course objectives.

Impact on Critical Thinking

While some educators worry that AI might lead to intellectual passivity, others assert that it depends on the pedagogy. Courses aiming to cultivate analytical thinking—like humanities—should limit AI use, whereas technical subjects such as coding might benefit from it. The evolving skillset now values the ability to validate and critique AI-generated outputs over traditional rote learning.

Yet, over-dependence is a valid concern. Students may begin accepting AI responses without questioning their validity. To address this, a shift in educational design is necessary—moving from information recall to critical engagement with AI-generated content.

AI as Infrastructure in Education

AI is increasingly being seen as critical infrastructure in academic institutions. Reports like the World Economic Forum’s Future of Jobs Report (2025) emphasize the importance of analytical thinking, adaptability, and AI-related competencies. However, there is a need for robust digital literacy training to inform users about the risks—especially data privacy and algorithmic biases.

The adoption of AI in schools and universities must be accompanied by risk audits, including assessments of embedded biases, training data integrity, and transparency in design.

Need for Regulation and Institutional Policies

India currently lacks a comprehensive regulatory framework for AI in education. In the interim, individual institutions must step in to develop internal policies guiding ethical AI use. This includes declaring course-specific AI policies and fostering dialogues among students and faculty. Global universities offer useful templates, with general guidelines complemented by course-specific rules.

Conclusion: Regulate, Don't Resist

AI’s presence in education is irreversible. Rather than resisting its use, educational institutions must adapt by promoting informed, critical engagement with AI. While AI can assist in learning, it should not substitute the cognitive processes that education aims to cultivate. The future lies in developing a balanced model, where AI complements human intelligence rather than undermining it.

UN Women’s Report 2025

  • 12 Mar 2025

Context:
Marking the 30th anniversary of the Beijing Declaration and Platform for Action (1995)—a landmark global framework for achieving gender equality—the UN Women’s Report 2025 presents a sobering assessment of the status of women’s rights worldwide. Released ahead of International Women’s Day 2025, the report reflects a disturbing pattern: while there has been measurable progress, recent years have witnessed an alarming backlash against gender equality in many parts of the world.

Key Findings

  • Backsliding of Women’s Rights: Nearly one in four countries reported a backlash against women’s rights, often linked to democratic erosion and rise of authoritarian or conservative forces. The report warns of "anti-rights actors" systematically working to undermine legal and policy gains made over decades.
  • Escalation in Gender-Based Violence

The world continues to grapple with high levels of violence against women:

    • A woman or girl is killed every 10 minutes by an intimate partner or family member.
    • Conflict-related sexual violence has risen 50% since 2022, with 95% of victims being women and girls.

These trends point to both persistent patriarchal norms and the failure of protective systems, especially in conflict and humanitarian settings.

  • Legal and Political Disempowerment

Despite notable legislative progress:

  • Women globally have only 64% of the legal rights enjoyed by men.
  • Only 87 countries have ever had a female head of state.
  • Women occupy just 26% of parliamentary seats, even though this figure has doubled since 1995.

These gaps reflect the structural barriers and gender biases embedded in political systems and governance.

  • Economic and Health Inequities
    • 10% of women and girls live in extreme poverty.
    • Young women (ages 15–24) face limited access to family planning, impacting health and autonomy.
    • Maternal mortality has remained stagnant since 2015, reflecting uneven healthcare access.

Positive Developments

Despite the challenges, there are signs of progress:

  • 88% of countries now have laws against violence towards women.
  • Most countries have banned workplace discrimination.
  • 44% of countries are working to improve education and training for women.
  • Female legislative representation has more than doubled since 1995.

UN Women’s Roadmap for Gender Equality (2030)

To address setbacks and accelerate progress, the report outlines a five-pronged strategy:

  • Digital Inclusion – Ensure equitable access to digital technologies.
  • Social Protection – Invest in universal healthcare, education, and safety nets.
  • Zero Gender-Based Violence – Strengthen laws, services, and public awareness.
  • Equal Decision-Making – Promote women's leadership in all sectors.
  • Gender-Sensitive Crisis Response – Integrate gender priorities in humanitarian aid.

Conclusion

The UN Women’s Report 2025 underscores a critical paradox: legal and policy advancements coexist with deep-rooted inequalities and growing resistance to gender justice. As UN Secretary-General António Guterres aptly noted, “Instead of mainstreaming equal rights, we’re seeing the mainstreaming of misogyny.” Achieving SDG 5 (Gender Equality) by 2030 demands sustained political will, democratic resilience, and transformative reforms. For India and the global community, this is both a warning and an opportunity—to reaffirm their commitment to gender justice and inclusive development.

USAID Funding in India

  • 11 Mar 2025

In News:

The United States Agency for International Development (USAID) has been a major development partner for India, contributing over $2.8 billion in Official Development Assistance (ODA) since 2001. While initial assistance focused on food aid, recent decades saw a shift toward public health, environmental sustainability, digital infrastructure, and institutional capacity building.

Between 2022 and 2024, India received substantial aid from USAID — $228 million in 2022, $175 million in 2023, and $151 million in 2024 (as of December). A significant portion of this funding targeted health and population programs, including polio eradication, maternal and child health, tuberculosis (TB), HIV/AIDS, and Covid-19 response.

In 2022 alone, $120 million was allocated to Covid-19 control, alongside support for healthcare infrastructure and awareness campaigns.

USAID also supported India’s environmental goals, providing funds for air pollution control, clean water initiatives, and climate resilience, with $17.12 million allocated in 2024. Additionally, USAID backed India's technological advancement by exploring secure 5G Open Radio Access Network (O-RAN) systems, aligning with the U.S. Indo-Pacific strategy aimed at countering China’s influence.

However, the January 20, 2025 Executive Order by the U.S. administration directed a halt to foreign aid and restructuring of USAID. Although initially stayed by a U.S. Federal Court in February, the Supreme Court’s March 5 verdict upheld the aid cuts, jeopardizing thousands of ongoing development projects globally, including in India.

This decision critically affects India’s public health landscape. For instance, the ‘Breaking the Barriers’ TB awareness program in Karnataka, Bihar, Telangana, and Assam — funded with $7 million between 2022–23 — is being discontinued. The President’s Emergency Plan for AIDS Relief (PEPFAR), another major source of HIV/AIDS support, also faces disruption, risking higher infection and mortality rates. The cuts particularly threaten NGOs like Karnataka Health Promotion Trust (KHPT), which relied on USAID for operational continuity.

Beyond health, the withdrawal of USAID support may create a strategic vacuum in South Asia, enabling greater Chinese geopolitical and economic influence. Legal uncertainty around development aid has also raised concerns about the stability of global health and environmental partnerships.

Way Forward for India

  • Diversify donor engagement: India must strengthen development ties with consistent partners like Japan ($2.97B in 2022), the EU ($383.5M), and Germany ($235M).
  • Increase domestic investments in public health, sanitation, and clean energy to reduce dependence on external aid.
  • Boost private sector and philanthropic partnerships to ensure continuity of key health and environmental programs.
  • Strengthen indigenous R&D capacity, especially in digital infrastructure and vaccine development.
  • Diplomatic dialogue with U.S. policymakers can explore possibilities for reinstating targeted support.

Conclusion

The scaling back of USAID poses significant challenges to India's public health, environmental sustainability, and strategic autonomy. However, it also presents an opportunity for India to reinforce its developmental sovereignty through diversified funding, innovation, and international cooperation.

Over-Centralisation and Federal Health Governance in India

  • 10 Mar 2025

Introduction

India’s health governance follows a quasi-federal structure where health is constitutionally a State subject. However, increasing centralisation, particularly in medical education and national health schemes, is raising concerns over States’ autonomy and the effectiveness of federal health policies.

Judicial Push Towards Centralisation

The recent Supreme Court ruling in Dr. Tanvi Behl vs Shrey Goyal (2025) declared domicile-based reservations in post-graduate (PG) medical admissions unconstitutional, citing Article 14 and the principle of meritocracy. This decision, however, overlooks the critical link between State investments in medical education and their ability to retain specialists within local health systems. Domicile quotas served as a strategic tool to ensure a stable, locally adapted healthcare workforce, especially amid chronic specialist shortages.

Striking down such quotas may discourage States from investing in medical institutions if their graduates are siphoned off to other regions. Unlike central institutions like AIIMS or PGIMER, which enjoy selection autonomy, State medical colleges now face limited control over admissions, weakening their role as pillars of regional health systems.

Centralisation Through Policy and Institutions

Beyond judiciary-led centralisation, several national initiatives have expanded the Centre's role:

  • National Health Mission (NHM): While implemented by States, funding and guidelines remain Centre-dominated.
  • Ayushman Bharat (2018) and AB Digital Mission: These schemes shifted healthcare financing and data control towards the Centre, reducing the relevance of State-run insurance programs.
  • National Medical Commission Act (2019): Replacing the MCI, this law enhanced the Centre's control over medical education regulation.
  • Epidemic and Disaster Management Acts: Empower the Centre during health emergencies, as witnessed during COVID-19.

Consequences of Over-Centralisation

Excessive centralisation undermines India’s diverse health needs and local governance:

  • Limited Responsiveness to Local Needs: Uniform policies ignore State-specific demographics. For instance, Kerala requires elderly care, while Bihar and UP demand maternal and child health focus.
  • Reduced Decision-Making Power: States lose flexibility in tailoring central schemes, as seen with Ayushman Bharat PM-JAY.
  • Bureaucratic Inefficiencies: Delays in fund disbursal under centrally sponsored schemes hinder timely execution.
  • Weakening of Local Health Systems: Panchayats and municipal bodies—crucial to grassroots delivery—are often bypassed in favour of top-down mechanisms.

Meritocracy vs Social Equity

The rigid focus on merit in PG admissions disregards structural inequalities. As seen in recent NEET-PG cutoffs being lowered to zero percentile to fill seats, the current meritocratic model is flawed. Regional representation and public service outcomes should be considered in defining ‘merit’, aligning medical education with societal needs.

Way Forward

  • Restore State Autonomy in Admissions: States should be empowered to design admissions aligned with local healthcare priorities.
  • Fiscal and Functional Decentralisation: Grant flexibility in using central funds and reduce bureaucratic controls.
  • Strengthen Cooperative Federalism: Institutionalise Centre-State coordination in health planning and policy-making.
  • Invest in Local Systems: Enhance capacities of State health departments and grassroots governance bodies.

Conclusion

While central guidance is essential for national health objectives, excessive centralisation risks weakening India’s federal health architecture. A balanced approach rooted in cooperative federalism is vital to create an inclusive, efficient, and resilient healthcare system for all.

AI and the Justice System: A Tool for Reform in India

  • 09 Mar 2025

In News:

Artificial Intelligence (AI) is reshaping governance globally, with nations like the United States and China making significant investments in AI-led legal and policing reforms. The U.S. government’s $100 billion Stargate AI Initiative and China’s development of cost-effective large language models (LLMs) like QWQ and DeepSeek highlight the competitive race for technological dominance. For India, grappling with over 50 million pending cases, AI offers a transformative opportunity to enhance efficiency, transparency, and trust in its criminal justice system.

AI in Law Enforcement and Crime Prevention

India’s SMART policing initiative—Strategic, Meticulous, Adaptable, Reliable, Transparent—can be significantly enhanced through AI integration. AI tools such as Automated FIR registration (e.g., Mumbai Police’s AI-assisted e-FIR system) reduce administrative burdens and accelerate complaint processing. Predictive policing, using crime mapping and data analysis like that piloted by Delhi Police, helps identify crime hotspots. AI-enabled facial recognition systems, like the Automated Facial Recognition System (AFRS) of NCRB, assist in criminal identification.

Cybersecurity also benefits from AI. Organizations like CERT-In deploy AI to counter phishing, ransomware, and deepfake threats. Banks and law enforcement utilize AI-based fraud detection systems, such as those powered by RBI’s CRILC, to flag suspicious transactions. AI tools are increasingly used to detect deepfakes and synthetic media, enhancing digital forensics.

Moreover, AI can assist in real-time crime analysis. Field-level policing data—such as offender patterns and patrol routes—can feed AI models to guide proactive interventions. Supervisory efficiency improves through AI-powered collation and analysis of data at the district level, allowing redeployment of personnel from administrative roles to core policing duties.

AI in the Judicial System

In courts, AI supports the e-Courts Project by digitizing case files, reducing delays in documentation and improving record management. Tools like SUPACE (Supreme Court Portal for Assistance in Court Efficiency) assist judges in legal research, precedent identification, and judgment writing. AI-driven real-time transcription systems, being piloted in the U.S., can improve transparency and reduce dependence on manual record-keeping.

AI also plays a role in bail and sentencing decisions. For instance, the Delhi High Court is exploring AI-based risk assessment tools to promote consistency. Additionally, AI tools can detect anomalies in legal documents, preventing delays due to forged or inaccurate filings.

Challenges and the Way Forward

The integration of AI into justice faces several challenges. AI models trained on biased data, as seen in the U.S. tool COMPAS, can perpetuate systemic inequities. Privacy concerns are also paramount and must align with India’s Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023. Implementation gaps include the lack of AI literacy among legal and police personnel and the absence of a comprehensive regulatory framework, as highlighted by the B.N. Srikrishna Committee.

To overcome these, India must establish a central AI Justice Task Force, expand AI usage in high courts, formulate ethical AI standards aligned with NITI Aayog’s AI strategy, and invest in AI training programs for judicial and law enforcement staff.

Conclusion

AI offers a critical path to revitalizing India’s overstretched justice system. If implemented responsibly, it can streamline policing, reduce judicial delays, and enhance public trust. A technology-first approach, combined with ethical safeguards, will be key to ensuring that justice in India becomes not only swift but also fair and inclusive.

India’s Textile Industry

  • 08 Mar 2025

Context:

India’s textile and apparel industry is one of the largest globally, contributing significantly to the economy through employment, exports, and industrial output. It accounts for 2.3% of India’s GDP (projected to rise to 5% by 2030), 13% of industrial production, and 12% of total exports. Employing over 4.5 crore people, it is second only to agriculture in job creation. Yet, despite its scale, India lags behind competitors like China, Vietnam, and Bangladesh in global exports.

Current Status and Strengths

India is the world’s second-largest producer of cotton and man-made fibres (MMFs) such as polyester and viscose. Cotton alone engages over 60 lakh farmers, mainly in Gujarat, Maharashtra, and Telangana. The country is also a global leader in jute and technical textiles. The textile and apparel market is projected to reach USD 350 billion by 2030.

FY24 exports stood at USD 35.9 billion, a marginal increase from USD 33.4 billion in FY20. Key destinations include the US, EU, and UAE. Yet, apparel exports have declined from USD 15.5 billion in FY20 to USD 14.5 billion in FY24. While cotton textile exports rose to USD 12.3 billion, growth has remained modest.

Challenges Holding Back the Sector

  • Fragmented Supply Chains: India’s textile value chain is highly fragmented, concentrated in MSME clusters with regional specializations (e.g., Tiruppur for knitwear, Surat for polyester). This hampers integration and increases logistics costs. In contrast, competitors operate vertically integrated “fibre-to-fashion” hubs.
  • High Raw Material Costs: Quality Control Orders (QCOs) on polyester and viscose restrict cheaper imports. As a result, domestic fibres are significantly costlier—polyester by 33–36% and viscose by 14–16% compared to China.
  • Lack of FTAs: Unlike Vietnam and Bangladesh, India lacks preferential trade agreements with major markets like the EU and the US. This undermines price competitiveness and limits market access.
  • Regulatory Burden: Complex customs and compliance procedures increase operational costs, particularly for small exporters. In contrast, simplified systems in competing nations reduce red tape.
  • Sustainability Pressures: Global markets now demand higher environmental compliance—renewable energy use, water recycling, and traceability. EU regulations (2021–2024) affect 20% of India’s textile exports. MSMEs find it difficult to adapt without financial support.
  • Low Per Capita Fibre Consumption: Despite being a major producer, India’s fibre consumption is just 5.5 kg per capita—half the global average.

Way Forward

  • Supply Chain Integration: Develop MITRA textile parks and “fibre-to-fashion” hubs to reduce costs and improve efficiency.
  • Raw Material Reforms: Reassess QCOs to allow controlled imports and reduce input prices.
  • Trade Policy: Secure FTAs with key markets to enhance export competitiveness.
  • Labour Productivity: Set up housing near textile clusters (as in China) to improve worker efficiency and reduce attrition.
  • Boost MMF Usage: Promote domestic MMF consumption through targeted incentives.
  • Green Transition: Provide financial and technical support to MSMEs to adopt sustainable practices and enter the recycled textile market, projected to reach USD 400 million in India.

With structural reforms and global alignment, India’s textile industry holds immense potential to emerge as a global leader while promoting sustainable, inclusive growth.

India-Qatar Relations

  • 07 Mar 2025

In News:

India and Qatar have significantly deepened their bilateral relationship, particularly with the recent state visit of Qatar’s Amir, Sheikh Tamim Bin Hamad Al-Thani, to India. This visit marked a pivotal moment, as both countries elevated their ties to a "strategic partnership," exploring avenues for collaboration in energy, trade, and diplomacy.

Evolution of India-Qatar Relations

India's relationship with the Gulf region is multifaceted, encompassing economic, cultural, and people-to-people ties. Qatar holds a special place in India’s foreign policy due to its strategic position in the Middle East, its influence in the LNG market, and its robust ties with both Western powers and regional players such as Israel and Afghanistan. As one of the largest suppliers of LNG to India, Qatar’s energy significance is paramount.

India has consistently prioritized relations with the Gulf, with the Prime Minister placing special emphasis on strengthening ties. The recent visits by India’s External Affairs Minister to Qatar underscore the diplomatic importance of this relationship.

Key Outcomes of the Amir’s Visit

The visit of Sheikh Tamim Bin Hamad Al-Thani resulted in several key agreements and developments:

  • Strategic Partnership:India and Qatar upgraded their relationship to a "strategic partnership," signaling enhanced cooperation across various domains such as energy security, trade, and investment. This move aligns Qatar with India’s other strategic Gulf partners like the UAE, Saudi Arabia, and Oman, reinforcing regional cooperation under the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC).
  • Economic and Trade Cooperation:The two countries committed to doubling bilateral trade from $14 billion to $28 billion over the next five years. Qatar also pledged $10 billion in new investments in India, particularly in the infrastructure, energy, and technology sectors. Several agreements on economic cooperation, youth affairs, and double taxation avoidance were also signed, aimed at facilitating business activities.
  • Energy Cooperation:A landmark agreement between QatarEnergy and India’s Petronet LNG extended their LNG supply deal for 20 years, marking the largest-ever LNG agreement. This deal secures India’s long-term energy needs and diversifies its energy sources, ensuring stable pricing for LNG imports.
  • Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Possibilities:Discussions were held on a potential India-Qatar Free Trade Agreement (FTA) to boost trade relations. While Qatar has existing FTAs with countries like China, a similar agreement with India could further enhance trade and investment flows. However, India must ensure safeguards to prevent the dumping of third-party goods through Qatar.
  • Resolution of Diplomatic Setback:Bilateral relations were strained in 2022 following the arrest of eight Indian Navy personnel in Qatar on espionage charges. The Amir’s decision to pardon these individuals removed a significant diplomatic roadblock, improving goodwill between the two countries.

Challenges and the Way Forward

Despite the positive developments, challenges persist:

  • Economic and Trade Barriers:Non-tariff barriers and bureaucratic hurdles remain significant obstacles to smoother business transactions. Moreover, Qatar’s investments in India are still limited compared to other Gulf nations, despite its substantial sovereign wealth fund. India must encourage greater Qatari participation in sectors like infrastructure, startups, and energy exploration.
  • Political and Security Risks:The volatile security situation in the Middle East, particularly tensions between Iran and Israel, poses risks to India’s energy supply chains. Any diplomatic tensions between Qatar and its Gulf neighbors could indirectly affect India’s trade interests.
  • Labor and Migration Issues:India must continue to advocate for better working conditions and legal protections for Indian workers in Qatar. Ensuring the welfare of Indian expatriates, including seamless remittance flows and social security benefits, is essential for strengthening bilateral ties.

Conclusion

The elevation of India-Qatar relations to a strategic partnership marks a new chapter in their ties, positioning Qatar as a critical partner in India’s energy security and trade. As India’s influence in the Middle East and global energy markets grows, its relationship with Qatar will play an increasingly important role in shaping the region’s geopolitical landscape. The continued focus on economic cooperation, energy security, and labor welfare will be vital to sustaining and expanding this crucial partnership.

Centring Care in India’s Economic Policy

  • 06 Mar 2025

In News:

The Union Budget 2025 has seen a significant increase in the allocation for gender-responsive fiscal policies, with a record ?4,49,028.68 crore allocated to the Gender Budget (GB). This represents a 37.3% increase from the previous year, marking 8.86% of the total Budget. However, this increase is largely attributed to the inclusion of PM Garib Kalyan Anna Yojana, which constitutes 24% of the GB, rather than substantial investments in care infrastructure or gender-responsive schemes. This highlights the persistent underestimation of unpaid care and domestic work (UCDW) in India’s economic planning.

The Care Work Crisis: An Overlooked Economic Reality

Globally, women bear the brunt of unpaid care work (UCDW), spending an average of 17.8% of their time on such tasks. In India, this burden is particularly severe. Indian women spend 40% more time on UCDW compared to women in South Africa and China. As per the International LabourOrganisation (ILO), 53% of Indian women remain outside the labour force due to caregiving responsibilities, while only 1.1% of men face similar barriers. This deep-rooted gender inequality reinforces women’s economic disempowerment.

For marginalized women in low-income households, the burden is exacerbated. Many women juggle 17–19 hours of daily labour, balancing paid work with domestic duties, resulting in severe time poverty and poor health. Feminist economists from the Global South emphasize that in India, unpaid work extends beyond household care to include tasks such as family farming, water collection, and fuel gathering. Women often spend up to 73% of their time on these tasks due to limited infrastructure in basic services such as water, sanitation, and clean energy.

Missed Opportunities in the 2025 Budget

Despite the record increase in the Gender Budget, the 2025 Union Budgetmisses critical opportunities to address the care work crisis. The Economic Survey 2023-24 recognized care infrastructure as pivotal for women’s empowerment, yet the budget failed to translate this into significant fiscal commitments. The Jal Jeevan Mission (JJM), which aims to provide 100% potable water coverage by 2028, is a positive step but suffers from funding delays and implementation gaps. While the JJM budget increased by 195% over Revised Estimates, it saw a decline of 4.51% from last year’s Budget Estimates, underscoring allocation and spending mismatches.

Policy Recommendations: The Three R Framework

To address these systemic issues, the Economic Survey 2023-24 suggests that public investment of 2% of GDP in care infrastructure could generate 11 million jobs and reduce the care burden on women. The Three R frameworkRecognise, Reduce, Redistribute, and Represent — provides a holistic approach to creating a more inclusive economy:

  • Recognise: The first step is acknowledging the full extent of UCDW. India’s 2019 Time Use Survey revealed that women spend an average of seven hours daily on unpaid care tasks. Regular surveys, integrated into existing household surveys, can inform more effective policy-making.
  • Reduce: The second step involves reducing the care burden by investing in time-saving technologies and affordable care infrastructure. Expanding childcare centres, eldercare support, and assistive technologies can facilitate women’s workforce participation. The Urban Challenge Fund announced in the 2025 Budget, with ?10,000 crore allocated for FY 2025-26, can finance urban redevelopment projects that integrate care infrastructure, inspired by successful models like Bogotá’s Care Blocks.
  • Redistribute: Care responsibilities must be shifted from the household to the State and society. The Smart Cities Mission and the Urban Challenge Fund present opportunities to scale up care infrastructure in urban areas. This redistribution of care work can significantly ease the burden on women and encourage more equitable labor force participation.
  • Represent: Women’s representation in decision-making is crucial for creating gender-transformative policies. Policies designed with women’s input are shown to be six to seven times more effective in achieving gender-equitable outcomes. Therefore, promoting female leadership in governance is essential for the success of gender-responsive policies.

Conclusion:

The Union Budget 2025 has made strides in gender-responsive fiscal policies but falls short in addressing the care economy. India has a significant opportunity to set a global example by recognizing unpaid care work, investing in care infrastructure, and redistributing caregiving responsibilities. A gender-sensitive economy, with women’s participation in decision-making, will not only uplift women but also ensure more inclusive growth for the country. The current budget highlights the need for a more deliberate, well-funded strategy to treat care work as a central pillar of India’s economic development.

India Philanthropy Report 2025

  • 05 Mar 2025

In News:

The India Philanthropy Report 2025, a joint publication by Bain & Company and Dasra, presents an insightful overview of the evolving landscape of philanthropic giving in India. With private philanthropic funding projected to grow annually by 10–12% over the next five years, the report underlines the increasing role of family philanthropy and corporate social responsibility (CSR) in complementing public sector expenditure on social development.

Growth of Social Sector Funding

India's total social sector funding reached approximately ?25 lakh crore ($300 billion) in FY24, accounting for 8.3% of the GDP. Public funding continues to dominate, constituting 95% of the total with allocations towards flagship welfare schemes like MGNREGS and the Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana. Private philanthropy, however, is steadily gaining ground, contributing ?1.3 lakh crore ($16 billion) in FY24, and is expected to grow significantly by FY29.

Despite this growth, a considerable funding gap persists—estimated at ?14 lakh crore in FY24 and projected to widen to ?16 lakh crore by FY29. Bridging this deficit is critical for meeting India's Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) and the vision of Viksit Bharat@2047.

Rise of Family Philanthropy

Family philanthropy has emerged as a key driver of private social funding, accounting for around 40% of total private contributions. It spans diverse sectors including education, healthcare, gender equity, diversity and inclusion (GEDI), climate action, and social justice. Notably, 55% of family philanthropic initiatives are women-led, and around one-third involve next-generation leadership, indicating a shift towards more inclusive and innovative giving.

Structured philanthropy is becoming more prominent, with nearly 65% of family-run initiatives now managed by professional teams. The report projects that by building robust advisory infrastructure and tapping into family offices, India can unlock an additional ?50,000–55,000 crore ($6–$7 billion) in family philanthropy over the next five years.

Corporate Social Responsibility: Compliance and Concentration

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) spending, mandated under the Companies Act, is another critical pillar. CSR expenditure is growing at a projected 10–12% per annum, driven by increased compliance and strategic integration into corporate goals. The number of CSR-compliant firms rose from 12,000 in FY22 to around 15,000 in FY23.

Family-owned businesses contribute nearly 65%–70% of total private CSR spending, with major conglomerates like Tata, Adani, Birla, and Ambani alone accounting for ?800–1,000 crore each annually. However, the sector remains top-heavy: just 2% of family-owned firms are responsible for over half of all CSR contributions.

HNIs, UHNIs, and the Philanthropic Disparity

Despite the promising trends, Indian High-Net-Worth Individuals (HNIs) and Ultra-High-Net-Worth Individuals (UHNIs) still contribute a relatively small fraction of their wealth towards philanthropy. Indian UHNIs donate only 0.1%–0.15% of their wealth, compared to 1.2%–2.5% in the US, 0.5%–1.8% in the UK, and 0.5%–1.4% in China.

In FY24, average annual philanthropic contributions from UHNIs (net worth ?1,000 crore and above) hovered around ?5 crore, while HNIs (?200–1,000 crore) contributed ?0.4–?5 crore. This indicates a large untapped potential that can significantly bolster India's development financing.

Institutionalization and Diaspora Potential

The number of family offices—dedicated institutions managing family wealth and philanthropy—has increased from 45 in 2018 to 300 in 2024, with projections to cross 500 by 2029. Institutions like Dasra, Sattva, and Bridgespan have been instrumental in supporting structured and high-impact philanthropy.

India’s diaspora, growing from 18 million in 2019 to 35 million in 2024, also presents a significant but underutilized opportunity. While diaspora philanthropy is estimated at $130 billion currently, better awareness, simplified compliance norms, and digital platforms could enhance its impact and push the potential closer to $200 billion.

Challenges and the Way Forward

Despite the optimistic outlook, several challenges hinder the full realization of philanthropic potential in India:

  • Persistent funding gaps in critical sectors like healthcare, education, and climate change.
  • Regulatory and compliance barriers, especially affecting foreign and diaspora contributions.
  • Fragmented infrastructure, with limited advisory services and high transaction costs.
  • Short-term funding models, with only 23% of family philanthropies combining grants with direct program implementation, undermining sustainable impact.

To address these, the report suggests:

  • Promoting long-term funding mechanisms, including multi-year grants.
  • Professionalizing philanthropy through structured advisory services and capacity building.
  • Unlocking diaspora contributions via simplified regulations and dedicated philanthropic platforms.
  • Enhancing collaboration across stakeholders to amplify social impact and innovation.

Conclusion

The India Philanthropy Report 2025 underscores the transformative potential of private giving, particularly through family philanthropy and CSR. While public funding remains the bedrock of India’s social development agenda, strengthening the philanthropic ecosystem—by leveraging wealth, institutions, and global networks—is vital to achieving equitable growth and meeting national development goals.

India’s Roadmap to High-Income Status by 2047

  • 04 Mar 2025

In News:

India, currently classified as a lower-middle-income economy with a Gross National Income (GNI) per capita of USD 2,540 (2023), aspires to achieve high-income status by 2047, coinciding with the centenary of its independence. A recent World Bank report titled “Becoming a High-Income Economy in a Generation” outlines the necessary reforms, challenges, and growth scenarios India must navigate to meet this ambitious target.

Growth Imperatives and Economic Targets

To transition into a high-income economy, India must sustain an average real GDP growth rate of 7.8% annually until 2047, raising its GNI per capita nearly eightfold. Historically, India grew at 6.3% (2000–2024) and has become the world’s fifth-largest economy, doubling its global share to 3.4%. However, "business-as-usual" growth (6.6%) will fall short, and only accelerated reforms can enable a successful transition—something achieved by few countries like Chile and Poland.

Key Policy Areas for Reform

  • Boosting Investment and Capital Formation:
    • Increase total investment from 33.5% to 40% of GDP by 2035 through public-private synergy.
    • Address infrastructure deficits, streamline land acquisition, and liberalize FDI norms.
    • Improve financial markets to support long-term infrastructure and SME financing.
  • Enhancing Labor Force Participation:
    • Raise overall labor force participation from 56.4% to 65%.
    • Increase female workforce participation from 35.6% to 50% by addressing socio-economic barriers and improving childcare and safety infrastructure.
    • Target job-rich sectors like manufacturing, logistics, hospitality, and care economy to generate employment.
  • Structural Transformation and Trade Integration:
    • Shift labor from agriculture (currently employing 45% of workforce) towards manufacturing and services.
    • Boost India's Global Value Chain (GVC) participation by reducing high tariffs and non-tariff barriers, particularly on intermediate and capital goods.
    • Simplify customs, improve regulatory clarity, and promote technological adoption across sectors.
  • Promoting Balanced Regional Growth:
    • Support low-income states in developing healthcare, education, and infrastructure.
    • Deepen industrial reforms and trade competitiveness in developed states through federal programs like the Urban Challenge Fund.
  • Strengthening Human Capital and Innovation:
    • Expand vocational training and R&D investments in emerging areas such as AI, biotechnology, and clean energy.
    • Encourage entrepreneurship and formalization to reduce the high informal employment rate (73%).

Challenges on the Path

India faces slowing investment rates (down from 35.8% in 2008 to 27.5% in 2024), low FDI inflows (just 1.6% of GDP), and declining trade openness (exports and imports fell from 56% of GDP in 2012 to 46% in 2023). Regulatory unpredictability and complex business processes hinder private investment.

Conclusion

India’s vision to become a high-income economy by 2047 is ambitious yet attainable, contingent on sustained growth, robust reforms, and inclusive development. Strategic policy execution in trade, labor, investment, and federal cooperation will be critical to transforming India's economic trajectory and positioning it as a global leader by its centenary year.

Growth and Challenges of India’s Private Space Sector

  • 03 Mar 2025

Introduction

India’s space sector has experienced remarkable growth, especially with the advent of the Space Sector Reforms of 2020. These reforms have opened the door for greater private sector participation, spurring innovation, investment, and commercial growth. The Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) remains at the forefront of technological advancements, while a burgeoning ecosystem of space tech startups is positioning India as a key player in the global space economy.

Private Participation in India’s Space Industry

  • Emerging Startups: Over 200 space startups have emerged, leveraging ISRO’s infrastructure such as testing, launch, and ground station facilities.
  • Regulatory and Financial Support: The Indian National Space Promotion and Authorization Center (IN-SPACe) was created to facilitate private participation in space activities. It also launched a ?1,000 crore Venture Capital Fund to accelerate innovation within the sector.
  • Commercial Arm of ISRO: Antrix Corporation, ISRO’s commercial arm, plays a crucial role in facilitating satellite launches and technology transfers, thus enhancing private capabilities.
  • Growth in Payloads: The PSLV Orbital Experimental Module (POEM) program has increased startup payloads significantly, from 6 in 2022 to 24 in 2024.

Private Investment and Startup Innovations

  • Venture Capital Investment: Private funding, particularly from MountTech Growth Fund – Kavachh (MGF-Kavachh), has been instrumental in driving growth. Over ?2,500 crore have been invested in space startups over the past three years.
  • Startup Innovations:
    • GalaxEye integrated Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR) with optical imagery, a world-first achievement in rapid data compression.
    • Pixxel is developing Firefly, the world’s most advanced hyperspectral satellite constellation.
    • InspeCity (IIT Bombay) is working on innovative in-orbit satellite repair and refueling technologies.
    • Skyroot and Agnikul are pioneering cost-effective private launch vehicles for satellite deployment.

Space Sector Reforms of 2020

The Space Sector Reforms of 2020 have been transformative in enabling greater private sector involvement across the entire spectrum of space activities, from satellite design to launch vehicle manufacturing:

  • Expansion of Private Roles: The reforms allow private companies to engage in activities such as satellite design, launch vehicle manufacturing, and ground station services.
  • Establishment of IN-SPACe: IN-SPACe was created as a regulatory body to facilitate the engagement of private entities in space activities, empowering them to operate independently from ISRO.
  • Technology Transfer: The reforms have encouraged ISRO to transfer technology to private players through NewSpace India Limited (NSIL), enabling commercialization of indigenous space technologies.

Challenges Facing India’s Space Industry

  • Funding Gaps: While venture capital interest is rising, early-stage funding remains limited, making it difficult for startups to scale effectively.
  • Talent Shortage: There is a shortage of specialized educational institutions focused on space technology. Currently, India only has one Indian Institute of Space Technology (IIST), underscoring the need for more educational institutions and industry-academia collaborations.
  • Global Competition: India faces stiff competition from countries like the US, China, and Russia, which have advanced space programs and capabilities such as reusable spacecraft and space tourism.
  • Dependence on Foreign Launch Vehicles: Despite progress in domestic launch capabilities, many startups still depend on foreign rockets like SpaceX’s Falcon-9 due to cost and scheduling constraints.

Strategic Way Forward

  • Boosting R&D and Infrastructure:
    • Expand the domestic manufacturing of satellite components through the Production Linked Incentive scheme for space-grade components.
    • Establish more space-focused educational institutions and create a dedicated space industrial corridor to boost satellite and launch vehicle manufacturing.
  • Global Collaboration:
    • Strengthen bilateral agreements with leading space agencies (NASA, ESA, Roscosmos) to foster collaboration in research and development.
    • Promote rideshare missions to reduce satellite launch costs, benefiting startups.
  • Technology Transfer and Commercialization:
    • Enhance ISRO’s technology transfer initiatives to allow startups to commercialize homegrown innovations, driving economic growth in space-related industries.

Conclusion

India’s private space sector is undergoing a transformative shift, with increasing private sector participation, supportive reforms, and growing venture capital investment. While challenges such as funding gaps, talent shortages, and global competition remain, strategic measures to enhance R&D, infrastructure, and global collaborations can position India as a leading player in the global space economy. This growth aligns with India’s broader goals of technological advancement and economic development, while also contributing to global space exploration and sustainability.

Farmers’ Share in Consumer Prices for Rabi Crops

  • 02 Mar 2025

In News:

The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) conducted a comprehensive pan-India survey during May–July 2024 to assess the farmers’ share in consumer prices for 12 major rabi crops. The survey spanned mandis and villages across 86 centres in 18 states, and included detailed inputs from farmers, traders, and retailers, with over 10,699 respondents.

Key Findings:

  • Farmers’ Share in Consumer Prices:
    • Ranged between 40% and 67% across rabi crops.
    • Wheat farmers received the highest share (67%), attributed to its status as a notified commodity under the public procurement system; about 25% of wheat farmers sold at Minimum Support Price (MSP).
    • Rice farmers received 52%, a figure consistent over previous surveys (49% in 2018, 45% in 2022), indicating stability.
    • In pulses, lentil (masoor) farmers earned 66%, and gram (chana) farmers earned 60% of the retail price.
    • In oilseeds, mustard farmers received 52%, slightly lower than the 55% found in a 2021 study.
  • Perishables vs Non-Perishables:
    • Fruits and vegetables showed lower farmer share (40–63%), due to their perishability, seasonal production, and logistical challenges.
    • The combined markup of traders and retailers exceeded 50% in most perishable crops (except tomatoes).
    • Perishables face higher post-harvest losses, quality variation, and price volatility due to climate dependency and demand-supply fluctuations.

Supply Chain and Payments:

  • The agriculture supply chain remains unorganized, especially for fruits and vegetables, with multiple intermediaries reducing transparency in pricing, logistics, and fund flows.
  • Retailer markups were typically higher than those of traders. An empirical analysis showed that:
    • Higher transaction costs (e.g., transport, labour) reduce retailer markups.
    • High post-harvest losses in perishables allow markups to be passed on to consumers.

Digital Transactions:Though cash transactions still dominate, the adoption of electronic payments saw a significant rise in 2024 across all stakeholders compared to previous surveys in 2018 and 2022.

Policy Implications:

  • A higher farmers’ share is essential to:
    • Enhance farm incomes
    • Incentivise crop diversification, particularly from cereals to pulses and oilseeds
    • Improve transparency in the agri-supply chain
  • Strengthening public procurement, digital infrastructure, and organised logistics are vital for ensuring fair price realisation by farmers.

India-EU Strategic Partnership

  • 01 Mar 2025

In News:

The recent visit of European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen to India, marked a significant recalibration in India-EU relations. Amid global geopolitical flux—characterized by U.S.-Europe divergences, China’s assertiveness, and disrupted supply chains—India and the EU are deepening cooperation in trade, technology, climate, and security. This partnership is crucial for regional stability and shaping a multipolar, rules-based global order.

Strategic and Economic Dimensions

  • Trade and Investment:The EU is India’s largest trading partner, accounting for 12.2% of India’s total trade in 2023. Bilateral goods trade reached $135 billion (FY 2023–24), and services trade stood at $53 billion. The EU is the second-largest source of FDI into India ($117.4 billion since 2000), while Indian FDI to the EU was $40 billion. Free Trade Agreement (FTA) talks, revived in 2021, aim to resolve tariff and regulatory barriers in sectors like automobiles, dairy, pharma, and IT services.
  • Technology and Digital Cooperation:The India-EU Trade and Technology Council (TTC), launched in 2022, promotes collaboration in semiconductors, AI, clean energy, and resilient supply chains. Key developments include MoUs on semiconductor R&D and high-performance computing. Challenges remain, particularly around EU data adequacy under GDPR, which affects Indian digital exporters.
  • Green Transition and Energy Security:The EU-India Clean Energy and Climate Partnership focuses on renewable energy, smart grids, and sustainable cities. A €1 billion European Investment Bank fund supports green hydrogen projects. India’s participation in European Hydrogen Week 2024 signals growing collaboration in clean energy. Initiatives like SWITCH-Asia promote sustainable consumption and circular economy practices.
  • Maritime and Defense Cooperation:Under the ESIWA framework, India and the EU are expanding maritime security ties. The EU has stationed a liaison officer at India’s Information Fusion Centre (Gurugram), and the first joint naval exercise in the Gulf of Guinea (2023) emphasized Indo-Pacific cooperation. However, defense ties remain limited due to India's stronger military relationships with Russia and the U.S.

Institutional and Societal Ties

India-EU relations date back to 1962 and were elevated to a Strategic Partnership in 2004. The Roadmap to 2025, adopted in 2020, prioritizes digital transformation, climate action, and multilateralism. The TTC’s recent meetings reaffirm commitment to tech and trade collaboration.

People-to-people ties are strengthening. Indians received over 20% of EU Blue Cards (2023–24). Over 6,000 Indian students have benefitted from Erasmus scholarships, and 2,700 researchers from Marie Sk?odowska-Curie Actions.

Key Challenges

  • Stalled FTA Talks over tariffs and market access.
  • Regulatory barriers under SPS and TBT norms.
  • Data governance divergence due to lack of EU data adequacy for India.
  • Foreign policy misalignments, especially over Russia-Ukraine.
  • Fragmented defense engagement due to EU’s limited commitment.

Way Forward

India and the EU must resolve FTA hurdles, negotiate a data-sharing framework, align Indo-Pacific strategies, and invest in alternative supply chains via IMEC. Enhanced cooperation in green tech, cybersecurity, and digital infrastructure is key. India must also reform its regulatory landscape to attract EU tech and manufacturing investments.

Conclusion

India-EU ties are entering a transformative phase. Anchored in shared democratic values and strategic interests, the partnership can promote multipolarity, sustainable development, and a resilient global governance architecture.

Environmental Impacts of Artificial Intelligence

  • 28 Feb 2025

Introduction
Artificial Intelligence (AI), encompassing technologies that simulate human thinking and decision-making, has become integral to contemporary life, influencing how we work, live, and conduct business. While AI’s foundational concepts date back to the 1950s, recent advances in computing power and data availability have fueled rapid growth. The global AI market, currently valued at $200 billion, is projected to contribute up to $15.7 trillion to the world economy by 2030. Major developments, such as the U.S.’s $500 billion Stargate Project and India's plans to build the world’s largest data centre in Jamnagar with Nvidia, highlight AI’s economic potential. However, this transformative technology also poses significant environmental challenges across its value chain.

Environmental Impact Across the AI Value Chain

The environmental footprint of AI emerges at multiple stages — from hardware production and model development to deployment and maintenance:

  • Energy Consumption and Carbon Emissions:Data centres, the backbone of AI infrastructure, consume vast amounts of electricity, accounting for approximately 1% of global greenhouse gas emissions, a figure expected to double by 2026 (IEA). Advanced models like GPT-3 emit up to 552 tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent during training, comparable to the annual emissions of dozens of cars. A single ChatGPT request consumes roughly ten times the energy of a standard Google search.
  • E-Waste Generation and Resource Depletion:The rapid expansion of AI data centres exacerbates the e-waste crisis, with obsolete hardware often discarded irresponsibly. Manufacturing essential components like microchips demands rare earth minerals, mined through environmentally destructive processes.
  • Water Usage:Data centres require millions of litres of water for cooling operations. Alarmingly, AI-related data centres are projected to consume six times more water than Denmark’s total usage, straining water resources, especially in regions already facing scarcity.

Global Awareness and Regulatory Efforts

Recognising the growing environmental burden, international organisations and governments have initiated efforts toward greener AI practices:

  • At COP29, the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) underscored the urgent need for sustainable AI development.
  • Regions like the European Union and the United States have introduced laws to mitigate AI’s environmental impact.
  • However, despite over 190 countries adopting non-binding ethical AI guidelines, sustainability concerns remain largely absent from most national AI strategies.

Way Forward

To harmonise AI innovation with environmental responsibility, a multi-pronged approach is necessary:

  • Clean Energy Adoption:Shifting to renewable energy sources for powering data centres and purchasing carbon credits are critical steps. Locating centres in regions rich in renewables can further lower carbon footprints.
  • Efficiency in Hardware and Algorithms:Developing energy-efficient hardware and maintaining it regularly can substantially reduce emissions. Smaller, domain-specific models should be promoted to lessen computational demands.
  • Optimisation of AI Systems:Studies by Google and the University of California, Berkeley, suggest that through optimised algorithms, specialised hardware, and efficient cloud data centres, the carbon footprint of large language models (LLMs) can be reduced by a factor of 100 to 1,000.
  • Reusing Pre-trained Models:Businesses should prioritise fine-tuning existing models for new tasks over training fresh models from scratch, significantly saving energy.
  • Measurement, Disclosure, and Accountability:Establishing global standards for tracking, measuring, and publicly disclosing the environmental impacts of AI systems is essential for fostering transparency and industry-wide accountability.
  • Leveraging AI for Sustainability:AI itself can aid sustainability efforts, such as through projects like Google's DeepMind, which improves wind power forecasting, enabling better integration of renewable energy sources into national grids.

Conclusion
While AI holds immense promise for economic growth and societal advancement, it simultaneously presents critical environmental challenges. Integrating sustainability into the very design of the AI ecosystem is imperative. By embedding environmental responsibility at every stage—from model development to deployment—governments, businesses, and researchers can ensure that AI’s transformative potential is realised without compromising the planet’s future.

Reducing India's Dependence on Imported Fertilisers

  • 27 Feb 2025

Context

The Indian government is strategizing to cap or reduce the consumption of high-analysis fertilizers—Urea, Di-Ammonium Phosphate (DAP), and Muriate of Potash (MOP)—due to their heavy import dependence, rising economic burden, and adverse environmental impacts. This shift is crucial for ensuring nutrient balance, reducing foreign exchange outflows, and promoting sustainable agriculture.

India’s Dependence on Imported Fertilisers

  • MOP: India is fully dependent on imports from countries like Canada, Russia, Jordan, Israel, Turkmenistan, and Belarus, as it has no mineable potash reserves.
  • Urea: While over 85% of urea demand is met domestically, production relies on imported liquefied natural gas (LNG) from Qatar, the US, UAE, and Angola.
  • DAP: Imported both as finished fertiliser and raw materials (rock phosphate, sulphur, phosphoric acid, ammonia) mainly from Saudi Arabia, Morocco, Jordan, China, and others.

The Need to Limit High-Analysis Fertiliser Usage

Economic Concerns

  • The rupee's depreciation increases fertiliser import costs.
  • India spent ?1.75 lakh crore on fertiliser subsidies in 2023-24.
  • Subsidised urea is sold at rates far below cost, draining government resources and encouraging overuse.
  • DAP's landed price stands at ?55,150 per tonne, with production costs exceeding ?65,000 per tonne, while the government-fixed retail price remains ?27,000 per tonne, necessitating large subsidies.

Environmental Concerns

  • Excessive application of urea and DAP depletes organic carbon in soils, reduces microbial diversity, and causes groundwater contamination through nitrate leaching.
  • Soil health degradation ultimately reduces crop productivity and ecological resilience.

Governance Challenges

  • High subsidies encourage black marketing and non-agricultural diversion.
  • Lack of strict nutrient management regulations leads to soil nutrient imbalances.

The Shift Towards Balanced Fertilisation

High-analysis fertilisers like urea (46% nitrogen), DAP (46% phosphorus + 18% nitrogen), and MOP (60% potash) often lead to over-application and inefficiency. Crops instead require a balanced supply of:

  • Macronutrients (N, P, K),
  • Secondary nutrients (sulphur, calcium, magnesium),
  • Micronutrients (zinc, iron, copper, boron, manganese, molybdenum).

Balanced fertilisation ensures efficient nutrient uptake, enhances yields, preserves soil health, and optimises resource use.

Emerging Alternatives

Ammonium Phosphate Sulphate (APS – 20:20:0:13)

  • Contains 20% N, 20% P, and 13% S, but no K.
  • Sulphur-rich, making it ideal for oilseeds, pulses, maize, cotton, onion, and chilli.
  • APS manufacturing is more economical, requiring less costly phosphoric acid compared to DAP.
  • Sales surged 32.4%, from 4.9 million tonnes (2022-23) to 6.5 million tonnes (2023-24), making APS the third-most consumed fertiliser after urea and DAP.
  • Leading APS producers include Coromandel International, Paradeep Phosphates, and Mangalore Chemicals & Fertilizers.

Single Super Phosphate (SSP – 16% P, 11% S)

  • A low-cost, sulphur-rich fertiliser ideal for oilseeds and vegetable cultivation.

Nano Urea and Nano DAP

  • Developed by Indian Farmers Fertiliser Cooperative (IFFCO).
  • Enhance nutrient use efficiency by 15–20%, require lower application rates, and reduce overall fertiliser consumption.

NPKS Complex Fertilisers

  • Formulations like 10:26:26:0, 12:32:16:0, 15:15:15:0, and 14:35:14:0 provide balanced nutrients.
  • Help integrate potash application into complexes, reducing direct MOP use.
  • NPKS fertiliser sales are projected to reach 14 million tonnes in 2024-25, up from 7.3 million tonnes in 2013-14.

Biofertilisers and Organic Manure

  • Promote sustainable farming by improving soil health and reducing chemical fertiliser dependence.
  • Supported by government initiatives like the PM-PRANAM scheme.

Effectiveness of Substitutes

  • Reduces Import Costs: APS and Nano Urea reduce foreign exchange outflows.
  • Enhances Soil Health: Balanced fertilisers prevent soil degradation and restore fertility.
  • Improves Crop Yields: Trials demonstrate better nutrient absorption and yield improvements.
  • Promotes Sustainability: Encourages ecological farming practices.

Policy Support and The Way Forward

Government Initiatives

  • PM-PRANAM Scheme: Promotes alternative fertilisers.
  • Nutrient-Based Subsidy (NBS): Encourages balanced fertiliser use.
  • Soil Health Card Campaign: Educates farmers about soil-specific nutrient needs.

Strategic Recommendations

  • Subsidy Reforms: Focus subsidies on APS, Nano Urea, and complex fertilisers rather than high-analysis fertilisers.
  • Technology Adoption: Use AI-based tools like Microsoft FarmVibes AI for precision fertiliser application.
  • Domestic R&D Investment: Strengthen indigenous production of fertilisers and biofertilisers.
  • Policy Alignment: Integrate fertiliser policy with climate change and agricultural sustainability strategies.

Conclusion

India’s high dependence on imported urea, DAP, and MOP is economically unsustainable and environmentally detrimental. Transitioning towards balanced fertilisers like APS, Nano Urea, and organic alternatives is critical for ensuring long-term agricultural sustainability, reducing subsidy burdens, conserving foreign exchange, and preserving soil health. This shift requires concerted efforts through government policy, farmer education, and technological innovation.

Lokpal

  • 26 Feb 2025

Context:
In February 2025, the Supreme Court of India stayed a controversial order issued by the Lokpal, which had attempted to bring High Court judges within its jurisdiction by categorizing them as "public servants" under the Lokpal and Lokayuktas Act, 2013. The apex court termed the Lokpal’s interpretation as “very disturbing” and in contradiction with settled constitutional principles.

Understanding the Lokpal and Its Jurisdiction

Origin and Legal Framework:

  • Concept Origin: The term "Lokpal" was coined by Dr. L.M. Singhvi in 1963. The concept was originally inspired by the Swedish institution of the Ombudsman (1809).
  • Legislative Foundation: The Lokpal and Lokayuktas Act, 2013 was passed following public pressure during the Anna Hazare-led India Against Corruption movement.
  • Purpose: To act as an independent anti-corruption body with jurisdiction over high-ranking public officials.

Structure and Jurisdiction:

  • Composition:Lokpal comprises a Chairperson and up to 8 members (50% must be judicial).
  • Selection Committee: Includes the Prime Minister, Speaker of Lok Sabha, Leader of Opposition, Chief Justice of India, and an eminent jurist.
  • Jurisdiction (Section 14):
    • Prime Minister (with exceptions related to national security, international relations, etc.)
    • Union Ministers and Members of Parliament
    • Government servants (Group A-D)
    • Chairpersons, officers of public entities, and NGOs receiving foreign contributions over ?10 lakh annually

The Controversy: Inclusion of High Court Judges

The Lokpal recently issued an order stating that High Court judges qualify as public servants under the Lokpal Act. The reasoning was based on historical foundations:

  • Lokpal’s Argument:
    • High Courts were established under British-era laws like the Indian High Courts Act, 1861.
    • Article 214 of the Constitution merely recognizes these courts rather than creating them.
    • Therefore, High Court judges should fall under Lokpal’s purview, unlike Supreme Court judges who are appointed under Article 124.

Supreme Court’s Response and Constitutional Position

The Supreme Court overruled Lokpal’s interpretation, citing constitutional provisions and established legal precedent:

  • Appointment under the Constitution:
    • High Court judges are appointed under Article 217 of the Constitution.
    • Supreme Court judges are appointed under Article 124.
    • Both are constitutional functionaries and hence outside the jurisdiction of Lokpal, which is a statutory body.
  • 1991 K. Veeraswami Judgment (Five-Judge Bench):
    • Unanimously held that judges are public servants, but no criminal case can be registered against them without prior consultation with the Chief Justice of India (CJI).
    • Even if the CJI is the accused, the consultation must occur with other senior SC judges.
    • Emphasized judicial independence and the need for protection against frivolous or motivated inquiries.
  • Judicial Integrity vs Public Scrutiny:
    • While corruption among judges is not immune to scrutiny, the procedure must ensure judicial independence, prevent erosion of public trust, and protect honest judges from harassment.

Critical Analysis: Lokpal's Overreach and Constitutional Boundaries

  • Violation of Doctrine of Separation of Powers:The Lokpal's attempt to extend its reach to constitutional judges infringes on the independence of the judiciary, a basic feature of the Constitution.
  • Constitutional Supremacy vs Statutory Authority:The Lokpal, being a creation of Parliament, cannot override the constitutional safeguards provided to judges under Articles 124 and 217.
  • Judicial Precedent Binding on Statutory Bodies:Ignoring the K. Veeraswami judgment not only undermines legal precedent but also reflects a lack of institutional discipline.

Conclusion

The recent conflict between the Lokpal and the Supreme Court over jurisdictional boundaries highlights the delicate balance between ensuring accountability and preserving judicial independence. While combating corruption remains vital, procedural safeguards and constitutional norms must guide such actions. The episode reiterates the importance of institutional clarity, inter-agency respect, and adherence to constitutional principles in India's democratic framework.

Glacier Melting and Climate Change

  • 25 Feb 2025

Context:
The world’s glaciers are melting at an alarming rate due to anthropogenic climate change, making them one of the leading contributors to global sea-level rise. Recent studies have revealed that more than 7 trillion tonnes of ice have been lost since 2000, with 2023 marking the worst year on record.

Key Data and Trends

  • Between 2000 and 2023, glaciers lost 6.54–7 trillion tonnes of ice, contributing approximately 18 mm to global sea levels.
  • The rate of glacier melt increased by 36% over the past decade:
    • 2000–2011: 255 billion tonnes lost annually
    • 2011–2023: 346 billion tonnes annually
    • 2023 alone: 604 billion tonnes lost — the highest annual loss recorded
  • Globally, glaciers have lost 5% of their ice, with regional losses ranging from 2% to 39%.
  • Alaska is the fastest-melting region, losing 67 billion tonnes per year (22% of global glacier mass loss).
  • The Canadian Arctic (20%), Greenland periphery (13%), and Southern Andes (10%) are also major contributors.
  • Central European glaciers are shrinking the fastest in relative terms, having lost 39% of their volume since 2000.

Causes of Glacier Meltdown

  • Rising global temperatures due to greenhouse gas emissions from fossil fuel combustion.
  • Extreme heatwaves and record summer temperatures, especially in vulnerable regions like the Alps and Andes.
  • Reduced snowfall, leading to insufficient accumulation to balance seasonal melting.
  • Human-induced climate change, confirmed as the primary driver of accelerated glacier loss.

Impacts of Glacier Melting

  • Sea Level Rise
    • Glacier melt contributes more to sea-level rise than ice loss from Greenland and Antarctica.
    • Currently accounts for 0.75 mm/year of sea-level rise; projected to increase further.
  • Water Resources & Scarcity: Melting glaciers provide short-term water surpluses but pose a long-term threat of freshwater scarcity, especially for regions dependent on glacier-fed rivers (e.g., Central Asia, Central Andes).
  • Geohazards & Natural Disasters: Glacier retreat increases the risk of glacial lake outburst floods (GLOFs), landslides, and downstream flooding.
  • Biodiversity Loss: Shrinking glaciers affect freshwater ecosystems and species reliant on glacial water.
  • Economic Disruptions: Sectors like agriculture and tourism are adversely impacted due to changes in water availability and scenic landscape loss.

Scientific Insights and Global Assessments

  • The Glacier Mass Balance Intercomparison Exercise (GlaMBIE) led by international experts used unified satellite and field data to provide the most accurate glacier loss estimates to date.
  • Glaciers are now recognized as apolitical indicators of climate change, painting an unbiased picture of global warming trends.
  • The IPCC stresses that without rapid cuts in emissions, glacier melt will continue or accelerate throughout the century, worsening its contribution to sea-level rise and regional climate vulnerabilities.
  • Glaciers contribute 20% to observed global sea-level rise (2003–2016), behind only thermal expansion (33%), and more than the Greenland Ice Sheet (17%).

Conclusion

Glaciers are not just scenic features; they are critical to Earth’s hydrological and climatic systems. Their rapid melting signals an urgent planetary emergency that demands intensified climate action, focused on mitigation, adaptation, and international cooperation. For India, where Himalayan glaciers are vital for river systems and agriculture, this global trend holds serious implications for water security, disaster risk management, and sustainable development.

India–Sri Lanka Fishing Dispute

  • 24 Feb 2025

Context:

The recurring arrests of Indian fishermen by the Sri Lankan Navy in the Palk Bay region underscore a complex and unresolved bilateral issue, rooted in historical practices, ecological concerns, and geopolitical sensitivities. The most recent incidents in early 2025 have intensified the diplomatic and political discourse between the two neighbours.

Background and Origin of the Dispute

The core of the India–Sri Lanka fishing dispute lies in the contested fishing rights in the Palk Bay, a narrow strip of sea separating Tamil Nadu from northern Sri Lanka. The 1974 and 1976 maritime boundary agreements, particularly the ceding of Katchatheevu Island to Sri Lanka, formalized the International Maritime Boundary Line (IMBL). While Indian fishermen were permitted traditional access to the island for specific purposes, the agreements curtailed their fishing activities across the newly delineated boundary.

However, Tamil Nadu fishermen have historically fished in these waters, and the IMBL has not fully erased traditional patterns. The situation is worsened by ecological pressures on Indian fishing grounds, pushing fishermen into Sri Lankan waters.

Key Issues Involved

  • Violation of IMBL and Traditional Rights:Indian fishermen often assert customary fishing rights across the IMBL, which clashes with Sri Lanka’s assertion of sovereignty over its territorial waters. Many crossings occur unintentionally due to poor navigation, engine failures, or inclement weather.
  • Bottom Trawling and Environmental Concerns:The use of bottom trawlers by Indian fishermen is a major point of contention. This method, which scrapes the seabed, damages marine ecosystems and depletes resources, affecting both nations' long-term fisheries sustainability. Sri Lanka has banned bottom trawling and views it as ecological exploitation and illegal fishing.
  • Security and Sovereignty Sensitivities:Sri Lanka perceives these incursions not only as violations of maritime boundaries but also as potential national security threats, recalling past concerns over Tamil militant movements operating from the sea.
  • Recurrent Arrests and Humanitarian Concerns:The frequent arrests, imprisonment, and imposition of heavy fines on Indian fishermen have humanitarian and political implications. Often, fishing boats are not returned even after the release of the crew, causing further livelihood losses.

Efforts at Resolution

  • Diplomatic Engagement:The issue has prompted high-level political intervention, with the Tamil Nadu government urging the Union Government for effective measures and the convening of a Joint Working Group (JWG) to address the issue diplomatically.
  • Livelihood-Based Approaches:Both countries have discussed alternatives to resolve the crisis humanely, including exploring sustainable fishing practices, alternate employment, and deep-sea fishing training.
  • Technological Interventions:Use of GPS-based tracking systems and awareness programs aim to prevent inadvertent border crossings and encourage responsible fishing.
  • People-to-People Dialogues:Calls for direct interaction between fishermen communities from both nations have been made, suggesting that grassroots engagement may ease tensions and promote mutual understanding.

International Legal Framework

  • UNCLOS (1982):Provides legal clarity on maritime boundaries and responsibilities, but emphasizes mutual respect for sovereign rights and sustainable resource use.
  • UN Fish Stocks Agreement (1995):Encourages cooperation in conserving transboundary fish stocks, suggesting the role of Regional Fisheries Management Organizations (RFMOs) in managing shared marine resources.

Conclusion

The India–Sri Lanka fishing dispute in the Palk Bay is not merely a bilateral maritime boundary issue; it is a convergence of historical rights, ecological degradation, livelihood dependence, and strategic concerns. While both countries have taken steps towards conflict management, a long-term solution lies in cooperative marine resource governance, joint monitoring, and community-centric diplomacy. Resolving this issue through dialogue, sustainable practices, and mutual sensitivity is essential to safeguard both bilateral relations and the rights and livelihoods of coastal communities.

Regulation of OTT Content in India: Code of Ethics and Legal Framework

  • 23 Feb 2025

In News:

The proliferation of Over-The-Top (OTT) platforms in India has transformed content consumption. However, rising concerns over obscene, vulgar, and explicit content have prompted the Ministry of Information & Broadcasting (I&B) to issue a fresh advisory urging adherence to the Code of Ethics under the Information Technology (Intermediary Guidelines and Digital Media Ethics Code) Rules, 2021 (IT Rules, 2021).

OTT platforms are digital streaming services that deliver content over the internet, bypassing traditional broadcasting. Their growing influence on public discourse, especially among youth, necessitates regulation.

Key Features of the Advisory

The advisory mandates strict compliance with the Code of Ethics under IT Rules, 2021:

  • Prohibition of unlawful and obscene content.
  • Age-based content classification and access control for ‘A’-rated content.
  • A three-tier grievance redressal mechanism:
    • Level I: Self-regulation by publishers.
    • Level II: Oversight by self-regulatory bodies.
    • Level III: Government oversight via I&B Ministry.

OTT platforms must also comply with:

  • Indecent Representation of Women (Prohibition) Act, 1986
  • Protection of Children from Sexual Offences (POCSO) Act, 2012
  • Information Technology Act, 2000
  • Bhartiya Nyay Sanhita, 2023

Recent Trigger: ‘India’s Got Latent’ Controversy

The advisory follows public outrage over vulgar remarks made by podcaster Ranveer Allahbadia on the YouTube show ‘India’s Got Latent’. The Supreme Court criticized the Centre for inadequate oversight of digital content and demanded legal action. The Parliamentary panel also sought a review of existing laws and possible amendments to strengthen content regulation.

Rationale for a Code of Ethics

  • Protecting Minors: Shields children from harmful or explicit material.
  • Preserving Public Decency: Prevents normalization of obscene content.
  • Fostering Trust: Builds accountability and transparency in content curation.

Global Best Practices

  • Ofcom (UK): Advocates age-verification, content classification, and proactive monitoring.
  • European Audiovisual Observatory: Emphasizes transparency, regular audits, and self-regulation.

Implementation Challenges

  • Enforcement gaps and inconsistent compliance across platforms.
  • Vague definitions in the rules create interpretational ambiguities.
  • Technological limitations in age verification and filtering mechanisms.
  • Creative resistance from platforms fearing curbs on artistic freedom.

Way Forward

  • Establish an independent content regulatory body for continuous oversight.
  • Foster collaboration between government, platforms, and global agencies.
  • Mandate regular content audits and public awareness campaigns.
  • Incentivize ethical compliance through certifications and recognition.

Conclusion

While digital freedom is essential, unchecked content dissemination can erode societal values. The recent advisory underscores the need for a balanced regulatory approach—one that safeguards minors and public decency while respecting creative freedoms. A robust and dynamic Code of Ethics, coupled with technological upgrades and civic awareness, is key to building a safe and responsible digital media ecosystem in India.

'Rarest of Rare' Doctrine

  • 22 Feb 2025

In News:

The application of the death penalty in India continues to evoke debate, particularly in light of contrasting verdicts such as those in the 2024 R.G. Kar Medical College case and the Sharon Raj murder case. These cases highlighted the inconsistent application of the 'rarest of rare' doctrine, a judicial principle guiding capital punishment in the country.

Evolution of the 'Rarest of Rare' Doctrine

The debate surrounding the constitutionality and application of the death penalty began with Jagmohan Singh vs. State of Uttar Pradesh (1972). The Supreme Court upheld the death penalty’s constitutionality under Article 21 (Right to Life), ruling that it did not violate Articles 14 (equality before law) or 19 (freedom of speech and expression), despite concerns over lack of sentencing guidelines.

A definitive framework emerged in Bachan Singh vs. State of Punjab (1980), where the apex court held that the death penalty should only be awarded in the 'rarest of rare' cases. However, the Court did not precisely define what constituted "rarest of rare," leaving the interpretation to judicial discretion.

To bring clarity, the Supreme Court in Machhi Singh vs. State of Punjab (1983) outlined five guiding criteria to determine such cases:

  1. Manner of the Crime – Exceptionally brutal, grotesque, or shocking to the community.
  2. Motive of the Crime – Exhibiting extreme depravity or sadistic intent.
  3. Socially Abhorrent Nature – Offenses targeting marginalized individuals or groups.
  4. Magnitude of Crime – Cases involving multiple murders or large-scale violence.
  5. Victim’s Vulnerability – When victims are children, women, elderly, or otherwise helpless.

Further, in Mithu vs. State of Punjab (1983), the Court struck down Section 303 of the IPC, which mandated the death penalty for life convicts committing murder. The judgment reaffirmed that capital punishment must remain discretionary, emphasizing judicial evaluation of aggravating and mitigating circumstances.

Case Studies: A Reflection of Judicial Discretion

  • In the R.G. Kar Medical College case, a female medical trainee was raped and murdered. Despite the brutality, the court ruled that the case did not meet the threshold of 'rarest of rare' and awarded life imprisonment to the convict.
  • Conversely, in the Sharon Raj case, a young man was poisoned by his partner in a premeditated act. The court termed it one of the 'rarest of rare' cases and awarded the death penalty, citing the calculated nature and moral depravity of the crime.

These differing verdicts underscore the subjective application of the doctrine, with considerable weight placed on judicial interpretation.

Contemporary Concerns and Legal Developments

While the doctrine aims to preserve the sanctity of life by making the death penalty an exception, its lack of statutory definition and variability in interpretation has invited criticism. In 2022, the Supreme Court referred the issue to a Constitution Bench to explore how sentencing procedures could better accommodate mitigating factors and ensure a "meaningful, real and effective" hearing before sentencing.

Conclusion

The 'rarest of rare' doctrine represents a critical balancing act between justice and retribution in India's legal system. Although it seeks to restrict capital punishment to the most egregious crimes, its ambiguous parameters and judicial discretion often lead to inconsistent outcomes. Going forward, a more standardized and transparent sentencing framework could strengthen judicial credibility and uphold constitutional morality.

Sovereign Green Bonds in India

  • 20 Feb 2025

Context:

India has adopted sovereign green bonds (SGrBs) as a key strategy to finance its transition to a low-carbon economy. However, these bonds have faced muted demand from investors, limiting the effectiveness of this funding source. Despite efforts to ease participation rules and attract foreign investors, the expected "greenium" (lower borrowing costs) remains weak, leading to funding shortfalls for vital green projects.

What are Sovereign Green Bonds?

Sovereign Green Bonds are issued by the government to raise capital for environmentally sustainable projects such as renewable energy, energy efficiency, and climate resilience. In India, the government established a framework for issuing these bonds in 2022. Since their introduction, India has raised nearly Rs 53,000 crore through eight issuances, with funds primarily allocated to projects like energy-efficient locomotives and metro developments.

Weak Investor Demand

Despite the government's efforts, India's SGrBs have struggled to attract investor interest. A significant issue is the limited greenium, which in India has only reached 2–3 basis points, far below the global average of 7–8 basis points. This lack of financial incentive makes these bonds less attractive compared to regular bonds. Additionally, small issue sizes and limited secondary market trading further discourage investors. Many bonds are held to maturity, stifling liquidity and market participation.

Impact on Green Initiatives

The weak demand for SGrBs has directly impacted the funding for critical green projects. Initially, India planned to raise Rs 32,061 crore from SGrB proceeds in 2024-25. However, after weak investor response, the revised estimate was reduced to Rs 25,298 crore, resulting in significant cuts to funding for projects such as grid-scale solar energy. The budget for grid-scale solar projects was slashed from Rs 10,000 crore to just Rs 1,300 crore. As a result, India is increasingly relying on general revenue to fill the funding gap.

Key Areas Affected by Funding Cuts

  • Electric Locomotive Manufacturing: Rs 12,600 crore
  • Metro Projects: Rs 8,000 crore
  • Renewable Energy (including National Green Hydrogen Mission): Rs 4,607 crore
  • Afforestation (National Mission for a Green India): Rs 124 crore

Challenges Contributing to Weak Demand

  • Lack of Social Impact Funds: India lacks a robust ecosystem of social impact funds and responsible investment mandates, which are present in other markets and drive demand for green bonds.
  • Liquidity Issues: Small bond issues and a lack of secondary market trading have made SGrBs less liquid and attractive to investors.
  • Higher Yields in Other Investment Avenues: Investors are reluctant to accept the relatively low yields of SGrBs, as they offer little financial advantage over regular bonds.

Way Forward

To improve the attractiveness of SGrBs, India could explore the issuance of sustainability bonds, which fund both green and social projects, attracting a broader base of investors. Additionally, post-issuance transparency is crucial, with detailed allocation and impact reports needed to build investor confidence. The government can also collaborate with multilateral development banks like the World Bank to back its green bonds, enhancing their credibility and attracting investment.

Furthermore, enhancing liquidity and developing a more robust market for green finance are essential steps to ensure that India can achieve its climate goals. With proper strategy and structural changes, India can enhance investor confidence and ensure sustainable funding for its green initiatives.

India's Horticulture Sector

  • 19 Feb 2025

In News:

India’s horticulture sector is crucial to its agricultural economy, encompassing the cultivation, production, processing, and marketing of fruits, vegetables, and ornamental plants. The sector includes sub-sectors like pomology (fruit cultivation), olericulture (vegetable cultivation), floriculture (flower cultivation), and arboriculture (cultivation of trees). India stands as the second-largest producer of fruits and vegetables globally, trailing only China.

In 2023-24, India’s horticultural production was estimated at 355 million tonnes, surpassing food grain production. The sector contributes 33% to the agricultural Gross Value Added (GVA), growing at an annual rate of 4-5%, outpacing cereal production.

Despite its size and importance, India’s horticulture sector faces several challenges. Post-harvest losses are significant, with about 8.1% for fruits and 7.3% for vegetables, translating into a loss of ?1.53 trillion annually. These losses are primarily due to inadequate cold storage and processing infrastructure, as well as fragmented value chains, where middlemen dominate, resulting in low farmer incomes. Farmers typically receive only 30% of the final consumer price for their produce.

Challenges in India’s Horticulture Sector

  • Infrastructure Deficit: The absence of efficient logistics, cold storage, and warehousing facilities contributes to delays and wastage of perishable horticultural crops. The cold storage capacity is concentrated in just a few states, limiting access for farmers across the country.
  • Small Operational Landholdings: Many farmers operate on small plots, limiting their ability to adopt sustainable practices and crop rotation, leading to reduced yields and soil degradation.
  • Limited Value Addition: Only 10% of India’s fruits and vegetables are processed, compared to 60-70% in developed countries, leading to distress sales and low earnings for farmers.
  • Market Linkages and Export Challenges: Indian farmers have limited access to direct markets, and the country’s export share in horticultural produce is low. Non-tariff barriers such as Sanitary and Phytosanitary (SPS) standards also hinder India's export growth.

Government Initiatives for Horticulture

Several initiatives have been launched to address these challenges:

  • Mission for Integrated Development of Horticulture (2014) aims to foster holistic growth through cluster approaches and better linkages.
  • Operation Greens, initially focused on specific crops like tomatoes, onions, and potatoes, has been extended to all horticultural crops to address price volatility.
  • The Farmer Producer Organisation (FPO) model is being promoted to help farmers collectively bargain for better prices. As of August 2024, 8,875 FPOs have been established with a target of 10,000 by 2027.
  • The Agriculture Infrastructure Fund (AIF) provides financial support for cold chains, warehouses, and processing units.

Case Study: Sahyadri FPO

A notable example of FPO success is the Sahyadri Farmer Producer Company Ltd (SFPCL) in Maharashtra, which started with 10 farmers in 2004 and has grown to include 26,500 farmers across 252 villages. With an annual turnover of ?1,549 crore (2023-24), SFPCL has become the largest grape exporter, with 90% of exports going to the EU and UAE. Farmers involved in the FPO receive 55% of the final export price, significantly higher than the typical 30% in traditional markets. This model demonstrates the potential of cooperative farming in enhancing farmers' incomes.

Way Forward: Scaling Up the Amul Model

To replicate the success of AMUL in the dairy sector, India’s horticulture sector must focus on:

  • Strengthening FPOs: Support should be provided for working capital, infrastructure, and digital integration. Leveraging platforms like the Open Network for Digital Commerce (ONDC) can enhance market access for FPOs.
  • Expanding Processing and Storage Infrastructure: Financial allocation for cold storage, processing facilities, and logistics must be increased under schemes like Operation Greens.
  • Public-Private Partnerships (PPP): Encourage collaborations between the government and private sectors to enhance food processing, distribution, and retail linkages.
  • Technology Integration: Adoption of technologies like blockchain for traceability and AI-driven price prediction models can improve market transparency and reduce distress sales.

By expanding successful models like Sahyadri FPO, India can transform its horticulture sector, enhance farmer incomes, ensure food security, and increase agri-export earnings. This approach could play a pivotal role in rural development and poverty alleviation, benefiting both farmers and consumers.

India’s Sovereign Green Bonds: Challenges and Prospects

  • 18 Feb 2025

Context:

India’s Sovereign Green Bonds (SGrBs) are a key instrument to mobilize resources for climate-resilient infrastructure and sustainable development. However, despite their potential, the bonds have struggled to attract robust investor interest, thereby limiting the government’s ability to secure a meaningful greenium—a lower cost of borrowing that typically incentivizes green finance globally.

What are Sovereign Green Bonds?

SGrBs are debt instruments issued by the Government of India to raise capital for projects that contribute to environmental sustainability and low-carbon development. They are part of India’s broader green financing strategy to meet its Net Zero target by 2070. These bonds are issued by the Ministry of Finance, under the oversight of the Department of Economic Affairs (DEA), and are guided by India’s Green Finance Framework, aligned with global green bond principles.

Application of Funds:

The proceeds from SGrBs are earmarked exclusively for green projects, ensuring transparency and impact-based investment. Key sectors financed include:

  • Electric Locomotive Manufacturing (largest beneficiary through the Ministry of Railways)
  • Urban Mobility: Metro rail and public transport systems
  • Renewable Energy: Solar, wind, and the National Green Hydrogen Mission
  • Afforestation: Under the National Mission for a Green India
  • Grid-Scale Solar Projects, though allocations here have been curtailed due to fiscal constraints

Performance and Allocation Trends:

India raised ?16,000 crore through SGrBs in FY 2022–23 and ?20,000 crore in FY 2023–24. For FY 2024–25, ?16,697 crore has been raised so far. However, due to muted investor demand, the revised fundraising estimate has been reduced from ?32,061 crore to ?25,298 crore. A fiscal gap of ?3,600 crore will be met through general revenue, reflecting limited success in expanding green finance.

Challenges:

  • Weak Greenium: Indian SGrBs offer little to no financial advantage over conventional bonds, with greenium as low as 2–3 basis points. Globally, it averages 7–8 basis points, still modest but relatively attractive.
  • Low Investor Demand: Several bond auctions witnessed under-subscription. For instance, ?7,443 crore worth of bonds were devolved to primary dealers in recent auctions due to high yield expectations from investors.
  • Illiquid Secondary Market: Small issuance sizes and a trend of holding bonds till maturity restrict active trading, deterring market participants.
  • Underdeveloped Sustainable Finance Ecosystem: India lacks dedicated ESG funds, responsible investment mandates, or regulatory incentives for green bond investments.

Recommendations:

  • Enhance Credit Guarantees: Collaborate with multilateral institutions like the World Bank or IFC to back green bonds, enhancing their creditworthiness.
  • Expand Domestic Green Investment Base: Promote ESG-focused mutual funds, offer tax incentives, and establish a regulatory framework to attract long-term green capital.
  • Improve Market Liquidity: Increase bond issuance sizes and introduce market-making mechanisms to deepen secondary market activity.
  • Leverage Public-Private Partnerships: Engage private players in project implementation to diversify and scale up green investment opportunities.

Conclusion:

India’s Sovereign Green Bonds symbolize a strategic shift toward sustainable development financing. While challenges persist, especially in market participation and pricing incentives, strengthening domestic financial ecosystems and leveraging global support can make green bonds a cornerstone of India’s climate financing roadmap.

USAID Freeze and Its Global Implications

  • 17 Feb 2025

Context:
On January 20, U.S. President Donald Trump, upon beginning his second term, issued an executive order imposing a 90-day freeze on foreign assistance. The directive aimed to reassess the efficiency and alignment of U.S. foreign development programs with its foreign policy priorities. This decision led to an immediate halt in operations of the United States Agency for International Development (USAID), with the majority of its 10,000 personnel placed on administrative leave and project funding suspended worldwide.

What is USAID?

  • Established in 1961 under President John F. Kennedy through an Act of Congress, the United States Agency for International Development (USAID) functions as an independent agency responsible for administering civilian foreign aid and development assistance.
  • Its core mission is to promote democratic values, global peace, and prosperity while advancing American national security and economic interests.
  • USAID operates in over 100 countries, partnering with governments, NGOs, private firms, and international organizations.
  • It offers financial support, technical assistance, and capacity-building across key sectors such as health, education, food security, economic development, humanitarian relief, environmental sustainability, and governance.
  • Prominent initiatives include:
    • PEPFAR: A flagship HIV/AIDS prevention and treatment program.
    • Feed the Future: Focused on combating hunger and improving food security.
    • Power Africa: Aimed at expanding electricity access across Africa.
    • Water for the World Act: Enhancing water, sanitation, and hygiene infrastructure.
  • In 2024, USAID disbursed $44.2 billion globally, which accounted for approximately 0.4% of the U.S. federal budget. Notably, the agency contributed to around 42% of all humanitarian aid tracked by the United Nations that year.

Rationale and Political Overtones

The Trump administration justified the freeze as a review for improving programmatic efficiency and ensuring alignment with U.S. strategic interests. However, critics argue the move is politically motivated, targeting Biden-era programs. Elon Musk, heading the Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE), labeled USAID a "criminal organization," while Secretary of State Marco Rubio indicated a broader plan for restructuring.

Global Impact of the Freeze

The abrupt suspension of USAID operations threatens development and humanitarian efforts across numerous vulnerable regions. Top recipients like Ukraine, Ethiopia, Somalia, Syria, and Yemen face the sudden withdrawal of critical support in health, food security, disaster relief, and infrastructure.

The United Nations has warned that halting support for HIV/AIDS programs alone could result in over six million deaths within four years. In several African and Middle Eastern nations, the absence of aid could derail long-term projects aimed at poverty alleviation, maternal and child health, vaccination drives, and crisis response mechanisms.

Moreover, the withdrawal risks diminishing the U.S.’s diplomatic influence in the Global South, potentially creating a vacuum for geopolitical competitors such as China, which may expand its presence through initiatives like the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI).

Impact on India

USAID's involvement in India dates back to 1951, when President Truman signed the India Emergency Food Aid Act. Over the decades, it evolved from providing food aid to supporting economic reforms, infrastructure, and public health initiatives. However, India’s dependency on USAID has significantly declined in recent years.

In 2024, USAID allocated approximately $79.3 million to India, primarily focused on healthcare, including HIV/AIDS, tuberculosis, maternal and child health, and immunization programs. This constituted only about 0.2% to 0.4% of USAID’s global disbursement.

While the immediate impact on India may be limited due to reduced reliance and growing self-sufficiency, some ongoing health and sanitation projects could face temporary disruptions. The Indian government and implementing agencies have been directed to suspend USAID-funded operations, raising concerns about the continuity of services for vulnerable populations.

Conclusion and the Way Forward

The freeze on USAID funding reflects a shift in U.S. foreign aid philosophy and signals potential isolationist tendencies. While India may be resilient, many developing nations in Africa, the Middle East, and Asia could witness significant humanitarian and developmental setbacks.

To mitigate the impact, affected countries must:

  • Enhance domestic resource mobilization to sustain critical development programs.
  • Deepen partnerships with multilateral institutions like the UN, World Bank, and WHO.
  • Encourage private sector participation through Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) initiatives.
  • Foster South-South cooperation to promote shared growth models.

The episode underscores the urgent need for the Global South to diversify funding sources and build internal capacities to safeguard developmental progress from geopolitical uncertainties.

Passive Euthanasia for Rabies Patients: SC to Hear Plea

  • 16 Feb 2025

In News:

The Supreme Court of India has recently agreed to hear a plea seeking the right to passive euthanasia for rabies patients, citing the exceptional nature of the disease and the absence of a cure. The matter, listed for hearing after two weeks, is poised to test the scope and application of the 2018 passive euthanasia ruling under Article 21 of the Constitution.

Background of the Case

  • The petition was filed by the NGO All Creatures Great and Small in 2019, challenging a Delhi High Court order (July 2019) which refused to classify rabies as an exceptional case warranting "death with dignity".
  • The Supreme Court issued notice in January 2020 to the Centre and other stakeholders, seeking their response.
  • On February 10, 2025, a bench of Justices B.R. Gavai and K. Vinod Chandran agreed to hear the matter after two weeks.

Grounds for the Plea

The NGO has urged the Court to lay down a specific protocol enabling terminally ill rabies patients or their guardians to opt for passive euthanasia under medical supervision. Key arguments include:

  • Rabies has a 100% fatality rate once symptoms appear.
  • The disease often leads to violent neurological symptoms, requiring patients to be tied or shackled to beds, stripping them of dignity and personal freedom.
  • The intense suffering and irreversible nature of rabies, coupled with the lack of any effective treatment, makes it distinct from other terminal conditions.
  • The plea seeks the creation of an exceptional legal category for rabies within the framework of the 2018 Supreme Court judgment.

Understanding Euthanasia in India

Definitions:

  • Euthanasia literally means “good death” and refers to hastening death to relieve pain and suffering.
  • Active Euthanasia involves deliberate acts to cause death (e.g., lethal injection) and remains illegal in India.
  • Passive Euthanasia involves withholding or withdrawing life support from terminally ill patients and was legalised in 2018.

Legal Milestone:

  • In the Common Cause v. Union of India (2018) case, a five-judge Constitution Bench ruled that the right to die with dignity is a part of the fundamental right to life under Article 21.
  • The verdict permitted passive euthanasia and the creation of a “living will”—a legal document allowing patients to refuse life support if in a terminal or vegetative state.

Ethical and Constitutional Dimensions

  • The plea raises significant questions about human dignity, bodily autonomy, and the limits of state intervention in end-of-life decisions.
  • It also brings focus to judicial responsibility in expanding fundamental rights, especially in the context of terminal, untreatable illnesses.

Conclusion

The outcome of this case could have far-reaching implications on medical jurisprudence and the ethics of end-of-life care in India. If the Court recognizes rabies as an exception, it may set a precedent for disease-specific passive euthanasia protocols, expanding the practical application of the 2018 ruling.

La Niña 2024–25

  • 15 Feb 2025

In News:

Despite the expected cooling influence of La Niña, January 2025 became the hottest January on record, with global average surface air temperatures 1.75°C above pre-industrial levels (1850–1900), according to the Copernicus Climate Change Service (C3S). This marked the 18th out of the last 19 months that global temperatures exceeded the 1.5°C threshold. The inability of La Niña to curb this warming trend underscores the intensifying impact of anthropogenic climate change.

Understanding La Niña and the ENSO Cycle

La Niña, meaning "The Little Girl" in Spanish, is the cool phase of the El Niño Southern Oscillation (ENSO)—a recurring climate phenomenon involving variations in oceanic and atmospheric conditions in the central and eastern tropical Pacific Ocean.

  • Phases of ENSO:
    • El Niño (warm phase): Warmer ocean temperatures in the eastern Pacific, weakening trade winds and reducing rainfall in the western Pacific.
    • La Niña (cool phase): Colder sea surface temperatures in the eastern Pacific, strengthening trade winds and enhancing rainfall in the western Pacific.
    • Neutral phase: Sea surface temperatures are near average with no dominant anomalies.
  • Mechanism: During La Niña, strengthened trade winds push warm surface waters westward, causing cold waters to upwell in the eastern Pacific. This typically results in global cooling.
  • ENSO Cycle: These phases occur every 2 to 7 years and influence weather patterns globally. The ENSO cycle leads to sea surface temperature variations between ±1°C to ±3°C from the long-term average.

The 2024–25 La Niña: A Weakened Climate Driver

  • Emergence: The current La Niña phase began in December 2024, later than anticipated. Forecasts had expected it around September 2024, giving it insufficient time to strengthen before its typical peak in the Northern Hemisphere winter.
  • Intensity: It is projected to be a mild La Niña, reducing its capacity to significantly influence global temperatures.
  • Past Events: The most recent La Niña cycle lasted from 2020 to 2023, followed by a strong El Niño through mid-2023.
  • Delayed Cooling Effect: The weaker-than-usual La Niña failed to produce the anticipated cooling, surprising scientists. As Julien Nicolas from Copernicus observed, the expected “temporary brake” on global temperatures did not materialize.

Why January 2025 Remained Hot Despite La Niña

  • Global Ocean Warming: Oceans have retained higher-than-usual warmth due to long-term climate change, diluting La Niña’s cooling influence.
  • Weak La Niña Onset: A late and weak phase meant less disruption to the prevailing warming trend. According to NOAA, La Niña events need more time and intensity to impact temperatures effectively.
  • Persistent GHG Emissions: The concentration of greenhouse gases reached record highs in 2024, adding to the Earth's heat burden. Typically, La Niña-induced rains spur vegetation growth and carbon absorption, but weaker rains in this cycle limited that effect.
  • Reduced Aerosols: Declines in atmospheric aerosols—due to cleaner air policies—lessened their usual cooling impact. Aerosols scatter solar radiation and influence cloud dynamics, contributing to temperature moderation.

Global and Regional Climatic Impacts of La Niña

Despite its weak intensity, La Niña still shaped regional weather in varied ways:

Asia

  • India: Higher monsoon rainfall (July–September) is expected. This boosts rice production but may reduce pulse output in the Indo-Gangetic Plain.
  • Southeast Asia: Nations like Indonesia, Malaysia, and the Philippines face increased rainfall—raising flood risks but aiding rice and palm oil yields.

South America

  • Southern Brazil, Uruguay, northern Argentina, and southern Bolivia face drought due to reduced rainfall, affecting soybean and maize crops.
  • Northern Brazil, Colombia, Venezuela, and parts of Ecuador and Peru receive excess rain, risking floods.

Africa

  • East Africa: Experiences dry conditions in December–January, hampering harvests in February–March.
  • Southern Africa: Receives above-average rainfall, benefitting crops like maize, wheat, sorghum, and soybeans.

Oceania

  • Australia: Faces heavy rain and possible flooding in its northern and eastern regions.

North America

  • Southern US: Experiences dry conditions.
  • Northern US, Canada, and Alaska face wetter, stormier weather.

Significance for India

  1. Agriculture: Enhanced monsoon rains improve farm productivity, especially rice.
  2. Water Resources: Better reservoir levels alleviate water stress.
  3. Energy: Increases hydropower potential.
  4. Heat Mitigation: Reduces severity of heatwaves compared to El Niño years.

Monitoring & Prediction

  • Oceanic Niño Index (ONI): Tracks 3-month average SST anomalies. Values below –0.5°C indicate La Niña.
  • Nino-3.4 Index: Confirms ENSO thresholds. Anomalies of ±0.5°C signal event onset; ±1.5°C indicates strong events.
  • Tools Used: Satellite data, trade wind strength, and ocean buoys support forecasts. La Niña can be predicted up to two years in advance if preceded by a strong El Niño.

Conclusion:

The 2024–25 La Niña's inability to cool global temperatures highlights a worrisome trend—the diminishing moderating influence of natural climate phenomena. With greenhouse gas emissions continuing to rise and natural cooling cycles weakening, urgent global action is needed to reduce emissions and mitigate climate change impacts.

Reforming Banking Regulations for a $7 Trillion Indian Economy

  • 14 Feb 2025

In News:

India’s GDP is projected to nearly double from $3.7 trillion in 2023–24 to $7 trillion by 2030–31, driven by strong digital infrastructure, financial inclusion, and supportive fiscal policies. However, to sustain this growth, robust capital formation and increased credit flow are essential.

The current banking regulatory architecture—comprising Statutory Liquidity Ratio (SLR), Cash Reserve Ratio (CRR), Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR), andPriority Sector Lending (PSL)while ensuring stability, also constrains banks’ lending capacity, particularly for the private sector and MSMEs.

Investment Needs and Private Sector Slowdown

India needs $2.5 trillion in investments, demanding an investment-to-GDP ratio of 34%. Public investment alone is insufficient due to fiscal deficit constraints, necessitating greater reliance on private capital and household savings. However, the investment-to-operating cash flow ratio for the private sector has declined from 114% in 2008–09 to 56% in 2023–24, reflecting weakening investment appetite.

Challenges in Financial Intermediation

Banks’ share in household financial savings has declined from 50% to 40%, as savers turn to higher-yield options like mutual funds. Simultaneously, banks face high regulatory pre-emptions, holding nearly 30% of deposits as non-lendable reserves, including:

  • SLR (~26%), exceeding the mandated 18% due to LCR constraints,
  • CRR (4%), which earns no interest.

These requirements reduce lendable resources, raise borrowing costs, and constrain credit growth, especially for MSMEs. Further, upcoming LCR norms for digital deposits could require banks to allocate 2–2.5% more to liquid assets, limiting credit availability further.

Need to Rationalize Regulations

Globally, LCR is the standard liquidity norm, but India uniquely mandates both SLR and LCR, leading to excessive capital retention in low-yield instruments. Additionally, India’s exclusion of CRR from High-Quality Liquid Assets (HQLA) reduces bank profitability. While Basel III emphasizes flexible, institution-specific liquidity planning, the RBI’s rigid mandates hinder optimal resource deployment.

Liquidity Access and MSME Credit Gap

Large corporates can access capital via equity and bond markets, but MSMEs remain dependent on bank credit, facing persistent shortages. PSL norms, which account for over 60% of bank lending, can distort credit risk pricing and misallocate capital. A revision is needed to align PSL with India’s changing economic structure.

Credit Growth and Exchange Rate Management

India’s credit growth lags nominal GDP growth, signaling underinvestment and risks to financial stability. Revisiting the credit-to-deposit (CD) ratio can help banks raise capital more efficiently. Meanwhile, defending the rupee against a strong dollar has drained liquidity without addressing currency overvaluation, which continues to hurt export competitiveness.

Way Forward

  • Rationalize SLR and LCR mandates to unlock liquidity and lower interest rates.
  • Revise PSL norms to reflect new growth priorities.
  • Stimulate private investment through policy stability and ease of doing business.
  • Deepen bond markets to diversify capital sources.
  • Align digital banking fees with global norms for viability.

Conclusion

India stands at a critical juncture in its economic transformation. Reforms in banking regulation, better financial intermediation, and improved credit access are pivotal to achieving the vision of a $7 trillion economy. A forward-looking regulatory framework will empower banks to act as true engines of inclusive and sustained growth.

India-France AI Summit and Strategic Partnership

  • 13 Feb 2025

In News:

India and France, bound by a deep-rooted strategic partnership since 1998, have expanded cooperation across defence, nuclear energy, space, trade, and culture. In a significant move reflecting shared values and mutual respect, Prime Minister Narendra Modi was invited by French President Emmanuel Macron to co-chair the Artificial Intelligence (AI) Action Summit in Paris in 2024—marking a pivotal moment in global AI governance and Indo-French relations.

Enduring Strategic Relations

India-France relations are anchored in the principles of strategic autonomy and reciprocal respect. France has consistently stood by India in challenging times—refusing sanctions post-Pokhran-II nuclear tests in 1998 and maintaining diplomatic engagement during the Emergency in 1976. President Macron’s participation in India’s 2024 Republic Day celebrations underscores the warmth in bilateral ties.

Robust Defence and Technological Cooperation

Defence cooperation forms the backbone of the relationship. Key initiatives include:

  • Rafale Fighter Jets: Procurement of 36 Rafales and discussions on 26 Rafale-M jets for the Indian Navy.
  • P-75 Scorpene Submarines: Expansion plans include three additional submarines.
  • Next-gen Jet Engine Development and a dedicated DRDO office in Paris (2023) to bolster technology collaboration. France’s unique support for Make in India and technology transfer sets it apart, coupled with training programs for Indian personnel.

Expanding Frontiers: AI and Innovation

The Paris AI Summit marked a strategic milestone, with India’s role highlighting its growing global influence in emerging technologies. India presented its flagship IndiaAI Mission—a ?10,371 crore initiative focused on “Making AI in India and Making AI for India,” promoting equitable AI access and innovation.

The Summit, following the UK (2023) and South Korea (2024) AI summits, focused on:

  • Public Interest AI
  • Future of Work
  • Innovation & Culture
  • Trust in AI
  • Global AI Governance

India advocated responsible AI, inclusive governance, and greater representation of the Global South, emphasizing AI's role in sustainable development and reducing the global AI divide.

Multilateral Engagement and Global Cooperation

India co-chairs the Global Partnership on Artificial Intelligence (GPAI) for 2024, reinforcing its commitment to ethical and collaborative AI development. Through the Paris Summit, India contributed to the Leaders' Statement, participated in steering committees, and called for AI democratization aligned with Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).

Beyond AI: Economic and Cultural Synergies

Bilateral trade surpassed $15 billion in 2023–24, with Indian exports at $7.14 billion and imports at $7.97 billion. Key developments:

  • India-France CEOs Forum: Focus on defence, renewable energy, pharma, and startups.
  • India-France Innovation Year 2026 and inauguration of a new Indian consulate in Marseille.
  • Triangular Development Cooperation Initiative: Joint projects in the Indo-Pacific focused on climate and SDG targets.
  • Joint visit to the ITER fusion energy project, reflecting shared aspirations for clean energy.

Conclusion

The India-France partnership has matured into a multifaceted global alliance—from defence and climate action to AI leadership and sustainable development. The co-chairing of the AI Summit symbolizes India's rising stature in tech diplomacy and affirms the enduring strategic trust between two democratic powers. For UPSC aspirants, this partnership exemplifies strategic depth, technological collaboration, and global engagement driven by shared values and autonomy.

Article 22 of the Indian Constitution

  • 12 Feb 2025

In News:

Article 22 of the Indian Constitution, enshrined in Part III under Fundamental Rights, provides critical safeguards to individuals against arbitrary arrest and detention. It ensures that liberty is not curtailed without adherence to due process. These rights are applicable to all individuals—citizens and non-citizens—except enemy aliens and those under preventive detention laws.

Key Provisions of Article 22:

  • Article 22(1): No person who is arrested shall be detained without being informed of the grounds for such arrest. The arrestee has the right to consult and be defended by a legal practitioner of their choice.
  • Article 22(2): The arrested person must be produced before the nearest magistrate within 24 hours of arrest (excluding travel time). Further detention without magistrate’s approval is unconstitutional.
  • Article 22(3): The above protections do not apply to:
    • Enemy aliens.
    • Persons detained under preventive detention laws.
  • Article 22(4): Preventive detention cannot exceed three months unless approved by an Advisory Board comprising judges of a High Court.
  • Article 22(5): The detained individual must be informed of the grounds of detention and given a chance to make a representation against it.
  • Article 22(6): Authorities may withhold facts if disclosure is deemed against public interest.
  • Article 22(7): Parliament may prescribe:
    • Circumstances under which detention can extend beyond three months without Advisory Board opinion.
    • Maximum period of detention.
    • Advisory Board procedure.

Supreme Court Ruling: Mandatory Compliance with Article 22(1)

In a recent landmark judgment, the Supreme Court reaffirmed that non-disclosure of grounds of arrest violates Articles 22(1) and 21, rendering such arrests illegal.

A bench comprising Justices A.S. Oka and N.K. Singh ruled that the obligation to inform an arrested person of the grounds of arrest is not a mere formality but a constitutional mandate. Failure to do so deprives the individual of liberty without due process, violating the fundamental rights under Article 21 (Right to Life and Liberty) as well.

Key observations of the Court:

  • Communication of Arrest Grounds: The arrested individual must be informed “as soon as may be” after arrest in a language and manner understandable to them. Merely mentioning grounds in the remand report or charge sheet does not satisfy Article 22(1).
  • Written Communication Preferred: While not mandatory, providing the grounds of arrest in writing is encouraged to avoid controversy and ensure clarity (as suggested earlier in Pankaj Bansal v. Union of India).
  • Duty of Magistrate: At the time of remand, the magistrate must verify if Article 22(1) compliance has occurred. If not, remand is unconstitutional, and the arrest stands vitiated.
  • Burden of Proof: If the accused alleges non-compliance, the Investigating Officer bears the burden to prove that Article 22(1) was followed.
  • Ground for Bail: Violation of Article 22(1) can itself be a ground for granting bail, even in cases where statutory restrictions exist.
  • Communication to Relatives (CrPC Section 50A): Justice Singh emphasized that the grounds of arrest should also be conveyed to friends, relatives, or nominated persons of the arrestee. This facilitates immediate legal recourse to secure release, reinforcing the right to liberty under Article 21.

Conclusion:
The Supreme Court’s judgment marks a crucial reaffirmation of constitutional liberties. It ensures that procedural safeguards under Articles 21 and 22 are not diluted by executive convenience and establishes a higher standard of accountability in the process of arrest and detention in India.

M23 Rebellion

  • 11 Feb 2025

In News:

The Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC) has once again become the epicenter of a severe humanitarian and geopolitical crisis. In early 2025, the M23 militia, a Tutsi-led rebel group allegedly backed by Rwanda, captured Goma, the capital of North Kivu province.

This strategic and mineral-rich city lies on the eastern border with Rwanda and has historically been a flashpoint in the region. The recent offensive has escalated the violence, displacing over 7,00,000 people, killing more than 2,900, and risking a wider regional conflict.

Historical Roots of the Conflict

The current instability can be traced back to colonial and post-independence ethnic tensions in the Great Lakes region. Under German and Belgian colonial rule, power structures in Rwanda favored the minority Tutsi population, generating long-standing resentment among the Hutus. Following Rwanda’s independence in 1962, a Hutu-majority government took power, culminating in the 1994 Rwandan Genocide, where nearly 800,000 Tutsis and moderate Hutus were killed.

Post-genocide, around 2 million Hutus, including militia members responsible for the killings, fled into eastern Congo (then Zaire), leading to the formation of over 120 armed groups, including the Democratic Forces for the Liberation of Rwanda (FDLR), a Hutu militia. Rwanda intervened in Congo in 1996 and 1998, triggering the First and Second Congo Wars, which resulted in millions of deaths and regional destabilization.

Emergence and Role of M23

The M23 (March 23 Movement) was formed in 2012 by former fighters of the Tutsi-led National Congress for the Defence of the People (CNDP), who rebelled after accusing the DRC government of violating a 2009 peace deal meant to integrate them into the national army. Led by SultaniMakenga, M23 initially captured Goma in 2012 but retreated after international pressure.

Resurfacing in 2022, M23 cited non-implementation of the agreement and vowed to protect Tutsi interests against groups like the FDLR. Since then, they have gained control of key mining regions, particularly Rubaya, rich in coltan, a critical mineral used in electronic devices. The UN estimates that M23 earns $800,000 per month from coltan production taxes, indicating that economic motives are as significant as ethnic ones.

The 2025 Escalation

On January 27, 2025, M23 rebels entered Goma and seized control of the airport by the following evening. By January 30, they had captured the city despite sporadic resistance from government forces and allied militias. The group then began advancing southward towards Bukavu, the capital of South Kivu province. The UN has confirmed reports of Rwandan troop incursions into South Kivu, while Burundian forces have joined Congolese troops in resisting the offensive.

Regional Dynamics and Rwanda’s Involvement

The Congolese government, along with the UN and Western powers, accuses Rwanda of backing M23 militarily and logistically. A 2022 UN expert report provided "solid evidence" of Rwandan troops fighting alongside M23, though Rwanda continues to deny these allegations. President Paul Kagame justifies his government's position as defensive, blaming the DRC for its alliance with the FDLR, which threatens Tutsis across the region.

Neighboring Burundi, led by President ÉvaristeNdayishimiye, has warned that Rwanda’s ambitions could spark a wider war, even threatening Burundi’s sovereignty. Uganda, meanwhile, plays a balancing role—supporting Congolese efforts against Islamic State-linked militants, while allegedly allowing M23 safe haven, as per UN reports.

Strategic and Economic Importance of Goma

Goma is not just a city; it is a strategic trade and transport hub at the heart of the DRC’s mineral wealth, particularly coltan, of which the DRC supplies nearly 40% of the world’s demand. The region is crucial for smartphone and electronics manufacturing due to coltan’s utility in capacitors.

Thus, the control of Goma and surrounding territories represents not only a military advantage but also a significant economic resource for M23 and its alleged sponsors.

Humanitarian Impact and Global Concerns

The humanitarian toll of the conflict is staggering. With over a million people displaced since M23’s resurgence, the DRC’s fragile state apparatus is further strained. Corpses reportedly lay unburied in Goma after the assault, reflecting a deep crisis of governance, security, and human rights.

Given the ethnic complexities, resource conflicts, and regional rivalries, there are growing fears of the conflict escalating into a full-fledged regional war, drawing in Rwanda, Burundi, and Uganda.

India and the Middle East

  • 10 Feb 2025

In News:

India's foreign policy has undergone a strategic shift towards West Asia, driven by imperatives of energy security, economic integration, and geopolitical balance.

The launch of theIndia-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor (IMEC)at the G20 Summit 2023 marks a key initiative aimed at reshaping global trade while deepening India’s engagement with the Middle East and Europe.

Importance of the Middle East for India

  • Energy Security:The Middle East supplies over 53% of India’s crude oil (as of January 2025). Long-term energy agreements, such as the LNG deal with Qatar (until 2048) and India-UAE green hydrogen MoUs, ensure stable energy flows. Strategic ties mitigate disruptions due to OPEC+ cuts and geopolitical tensions.
  • Trade and Economic Ties: India’s trade with the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) reached USD 161.59 billion in FY 2023–24. The UAE is India’s third-largest trading partner, with exports worth USD 35.6 billion. A proposed India-GCC Free Trade Agreement and operationalization of IMEC can enhance regional integration.
  • Diaspora and Remittances:Over 66% of India’s 1.34 crore NRIs live in Gulf nations. India was the world’s top remittance recipient in 2022, with USD 111 billion, a major share from the Middle East. Labor reforms in the region (e.g., Saudi Arabia’s Nitaqat) influence migrant welfare.
  • Geopolitical and Strategic Autonomy: India balances relations across regional fault lines — Iran-Saudi and Israel-Arab states — while maintaining strategic autonomy. Defense cooperation includes naval exercises (e.g., Al-Mohed Al-Hindi with Saudi Arabia) and connectivity via Chabahar Port in Iran.
  • Food and Maritime Security: The Gulf is a major destination for Indian agricultural exports (e.g., UAE imports worth USD 1.9 billion in FY 2022–23). Strategic waterways like the Red Sea and Arabian Sea are crucial for trade, though increasingly vulnerable to piracy and regional conflict.

IMEC: A Strategic Connectivity Corridor

  • IMECenvisions linking India to Europe through the Middle East via multimodal transport and digital-energy corridors, bypassing the Suez Canal. It aims to counter China’s Belt and Road Initiative (BRI).
  • Key stakeholders include India, UAE, Saudi Arabia, Jordan, Israel, and the EU. The Intergovernmental Framework Agreement (2024) lays the foundation for implementation, targeting USD 600 billion in infrastructure investment by 2027.
  • Objectives include trade facilitation, supply chain diversification, digital connectivity, and green energy collaboration. However, the Israel-Gaza conflict and regional instability have delayed execution.

Challenges

  • Energy volatility due to OPEC+ decisions and Red Sea disruptions.
  • Geopolitical unrest in Yemen, Gaza, and Iran-Israel tensions.
  • Maritime insecurity, with piracy and Houthi attacks raising shipping costs.
  • Labor rights issues, including migrant exploitation.
  • Strategic competition from China, with over USD 273 billion invested in the region since 2005.

Policy Recommendations

  • Co-develop energy infrastructure (e.g., Saudi Aramco’s stake in Indian refineries).
  • Diversify trade via an India-GCC FTA and sectoral cooperation (IT, defense, fintech).
  • Enhance maritime and digital connectivity through IMEC and joint port development.
  • Secure labor migration with skill pacts and expanded protection schemes.
  • Strengthen counter-terrorism and defense cooperation, including intelligence sharing.

Conclusion

India’s West Asia strategy is multifaceted—balancing energy diplomacy, trade, diaspora ties, and strategic connectivity. IMEC offers a transformative opportunity to position India as a central link in global supply chains, but its success depends on stable regional geopolitics and coordinated implementation.

Genome India Project

  • 14 Jan 2025

In News:

The Genome India Project is an ambitious national initiative aimed at decoding the genetic diversity of India’s population. Launched in January 2020 by the Department of Biotechnology (DBT), the project seeks to create a comprehensive map of India’s genetic variations, offering insights that can revolutionize public health, medicine, and our understanding of human genetics.

What is Genome Sequencing?

Genome sequencing is the process of determining the complete DNA sequence of an organism’s genome. The human genome, composed of about 3 billion base pairs of DNA, contains all the genetic instructions necessary for the growth, development, and functioning of the human body. The process involves extracting DNA from a sample (often blood), breaking it into smaller fragments, and using a sequencer to decode these fragments. The data is then reassembled to reconstruct the full genome.

Key Aims and Objectives

The Genome India Project aims to address several crucial scientific and healthcare challenges:

  • Create an Exhaustive Catalog of Genetic Variations: This includes common, low-frequency, rare, and structural variations (such as Single Nucleotide Polymorphisms or SNPs).
  • Establish a Reference Haplotype Structure: This reference panel will be used for imputing missing genetic variations in future genetic studies.
  • Design Affordable Genome-wide Arrays: These arrays will be useful for research and diagnostics at a lower cost, making genetic analysis accessible.
  • Create a Biobank for Future Research: The collected DNA and plasma will be preserved for future studies to facilitate ongoing genetic research.

Genome India Project: Phase 1 and Key Findings

The project’s Phase 1 focused on sequencing the genomes of 10,074 individuals from 99 ethnic groups across India. This initiative provides a critical baseline for studying the country’s genetic diversity. Some of the key findings include:

  • 459 plant species have been identified as part of genetic diversity studies.
  • 135 million genetic variations have been uncovered, including 7 million that are unique to India, not found in global databases.
  • The project has revealed several genetic risks specific to Indian populations, such as the MYBPC3 mutation (linked to cardiac arrest) and the LAMB3 mutation (associated with a lethal skin condition), which are not commonly seen in global datasets.

This database will serve as a vital resource for researchers, contributing to the development of precision medicine, better disease diagnosis, and more personalized treatments.

Second Phase: Expanding the Scope

The second phase of the Genome India Project will focus on sequencing the genomes of individuals suffering from specific diseases. This will enable researchers to:

  • Compare the genomes of healthy individuals with those having diseases, helping identify genetic mutations responsible for conditions like cancer, diabetes, and neurodegenerative diseases.
  • Investigate rare diseases specific to Indian populations and develop therapies tailored to these conditions.

By sequencing the genomes of individuals with various conditions, the project aims to pinpoint genetic factors that contribute to the pre-disposition or causation of diseases.

Data Sharing and Security

To ensure data security and privacy, the genetic information will be made available only through managed access. Researchers interested in using the data will need to submit a proposal and collaborate with the Department of Biotechnology. The data will be stored securely at the Indian Biological Data Centre (IBDC) in Faridabad, Haryana, and anonymized to maintain confidentiality.

Why Does India Need Its Own Genetic Database?

India is home to a highly diverse population, with over 4,600 distinct ethnic groups and varying genetic backgrounds. The country’s genetic diversity, shaped by its geographical, cultural, and historical context, cannot be fully understood through datasets derived from other countries. The Genome India Project helps:

  • Identify Genetic Risk Factors: For various diseases, paving the way for developing targeted diagnostic tools and therapies.
  • Uncover Unique Variants: Some genetic mutations found in India, such as the Vaishya community’s resistance to anaesthetics, are absent in global databases.
  • Address Population-specific Health Issues: Genetic mapping enables the identification of prevalent diseases and health conditions specific to Indian populations.

Global Context and Comparison

India’s genome sequencing effort is part of a larger global movement in genomics:

  • Human Genome Project (2003): The first international effort to decode the human genome.
  • 1,000 Genome Project (2012): Published 1,092 human genome sequences.
  • UK 100,000 Genome Project (2018): Sequenced 100,000 genomes for health research.
  • European Genome Project: Aims to sequence over 1 million genomes across 24 countries.

The Genome India Project fills a crucial gap by focusing on the genetic diversity of Indian populations, which differs significantly from the genetic profiles studied in Western or European genomes.

Applications of Genome India Project

The Genome India Project has the potential to impact multiple areas:

  • Advancements in Medicine: Understanding genetic variations can lead to the development of personalized medicine, where treatments are tailored to individual genetic profiles.
  • Genetic and Infectious Disease Control: The project helps identify genetic resistance to diseases, and aids in understanding how certain populations may respond differently to drugs or vaccines.
  • Public Health Policies: Data from the project can inform health policies, especially in tackling diseases prevalent in specific regions or communities.
  • International Research Collaboration: The project aims to foster collaboration with global research communities, enhancing India’s presence in the field of genomics.

Conclusion:

The Genome India Project is a landmark initiative for India’s scientific community, enabling better understanding of the country’s genetic diversity and paving the way for breakthroughs in medicine, healthcare, and disease prevention. The ability to analyze genetic variations on such a large scale provides immense opportunities for precision medicine and personalized treatments.

Selection Process for Chief Election Commissioner (CEC)

  • 12 Jan 2025

In News:

The Chief Election Commissioner and Other Election Commissioners (Appointment, Conditions of Service and Term of Office) Act, 2023 represents a significant shift in the process of selecting the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and other Election Commissioners (ECs) in India. Traditionally, the senior-most Election Commissioner automatically ascended to the position of CEC. However, the new law introduced in December 2023 widens the scope for selection, allowing for a more transparent process with an expanded pool of candidates.

Key Features of the Act:

  • Election Commission Structure: The Election Commission of India is constituted by the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and two other Election Commissioners (ECs). The President of India appoints these members, with the number of ECs fixed periodically.
  • Appointment Process: The Act mandates that the CEC and ECs are appointed by the President based on recommendations from a Selection Committee. This committee comprises:
    • The Prime Minister (Chairperson),
    • The Leader of the Opposition in the Lok Sabha (or leader of the largest opposition party),
    • A Union Cabinet Minister appointed by the Prime Minister.
  • Search Committee: A Search Committee, chaired by the Minister of Law and Justice, prepares a panel of five candidates. The Selection Committee may choose from this panel or opt for someone outside of it.
  • Eligibility Criteria:
    • Candidates must have integrity and experience in election management.
    • They should be or have been Secretary-level officers or equivalent.
  • Term and Reappointment:
    • The term of CEC and ECs is six years or until they turn 65 years.
    • They cannot be re-appointed after their term.
  • Salary and Pension: The salary, allowances, and conditions of service of CEC and ECs are equivalent to those of a Cabinet Secretary.
  • Removal Process:
    • The CEC can be removed in the same manner as a Supreme Court Judge.
    • ECs can be removed only on the recommendation of the CEC.

Departure from Tradition:

Traditionally, the next CEC was the senior-most Election Commissioner. However, the new law opens the process, allowing the Search Committee to consider candidates outside the current pool of Election Commissioners. This widens the net and may lead to a more transparent and inclusive selection.

Concerns and Criticisms: While the Act aims to improve the selection process, it has faced scrutiny and concerns, particularly about the independence of the Election Commission:

  • Government Influence: The inclusion of the Leader of Opposition in the Selection Committee is a positive step, but critics argue that the final decision may still be influenced by the government. The government’s dominance in the Selection Committee could potentially affect the neutrality of the Commission.
  • Exclusion of the Chief Justice of India (CJI): The Supreme Court's 2023 ruling had recommended including the CJI in the committee, but the new Act excludes the CJI. This has raised concerns about the balance of power and the credibility of the Election Commission.
  • Risk of Partisanship: Former CEC O.P. Rawat expressed concerns that political changes might influence decisions, leading to a compromised credibility of the Election Commission.

Legal Challenges: Petitions challenging the exclusion of the CJI from the Selection Committee are currently pending before the Supreme Court, which is expected to address them in February 2025.

Historical Context and Legal Backdrop:

  • Article 324 of the Indian Constitution provides for the appointment of CEC and ECs by the President, but this is subject to laws passed by Parliament.
  • In 2023, the Supreme Court intervened in response to the growing concerns over the executive's unilateral control over these appointments. The Court's ruling in the Anoop Baranwal v. Union of India case led to the formation of a committee comprising the Prime Minister, Leader of Opposition, and CJI until Parliament could enact a law. This resulted in the Chief Election Commissioner and Other Election Commissioners Act, 2023, which was aligned with the Court's directions.

Implications and Way Forward:

  • Potential Government Influence: While the law aims to reduce executive control, the dominant role of the Prime Minister and the Leader of the Opposition could still allow the government to influence appointments, especially in contentious times.
  • Suggestions for Reform: The Law Commission had recommended a broader selection committee, including the CJI, to ensure a balanced and impartial selection process. The National Commission to Review the Working of the Constitution (NCRWC) also suggested a committee comprising key political figures, including the Leader of Opposition in the Rajya Sabha and the Speaker of Lok Sabha.
  • Integrity of the Election Commission: The credibility and impartiality of the Election Commission are vital for ensuring free and fair elections. It is crucial to ensure that the appointment process not only appears fair but is also free from political interference.

Conclusion:

The Chief Election Commissioner and Other Election Commissioners (Appointment, Conditions of Service and Term of Office) Act, 2023 introduces a reformed approach to the selection of the Election Commission members. While the law aims for greater transparency, it also raises concerns regarding government influence and independence. The Supreme Court’s review of the exclusion of the CJI from the Selection Committee will be pivotal in determining the future trajectory of the Election Commission’s appointment process. The evolving legal and institutional dynamics will play a significant role in shaping the electoral reforms in India.

Why Farmers Deserve Price Security

  • 11 Jan 2025

Introduction:

The future of Indian agriculture is at a crossroads. With the shrinking of the agricultural workforce and the diversion of fertile farmlands for urbanization, ensuring the sustainability of farming is a strategic imperative. Among the various support mechanisms for farmers, the Minimum Support Price (MSP) remains a central point of debate. Should there be a legal guarantee for MSP? This question has gained prominence, especially with the rising challenges in agriculture, from unpredictable climate patterns to volatile market prices.

The Decline of Agriculture and Its Impact

India’s agricultural sector faces a dual crisis: loss of both land and human resources. Prime agricultural lands across river basins, such as the Ganga-Yamuna Doab or the Krishna-Godavari delta, are being repurposed for real estate, infrastructure, and industrial projects. Additionally, the number of "serious farmers" – those deriving at least half of their income from agriculture – is dwindling. The number of operational holdings may be 146.5 million, but only a small fraction of these farmers remains committed to agriculture.

This decline threatens the future of India’s food security, as the country will need to feed a population of 1.7 billion by the 2060s. To sustain farming and ensure long-term food security, we must secure farmers' livelihoods. Price security, particularly through MSP, plays a crucial role in this context.

The Role of MSP in Securing Farmers

MSP is the government-mandated price at which it guarantees the purchase of crops if market prices fall below a certain threshold. It provides a safety net for farmers against price volatility. The process of fixing MSP involves recommendations by the Commission for Agricultural Costs and Prices (CACP), which takes into account factors such as the cost of production and market trends. Once approved by the Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs (CCEA), MSP is set for various crops, including rice, wheat, and sugarcane.

For farmers to stay in business, there must be a balance between production costs and returns. Farming is a risky business – yield losses can occur due to weather anomalies, pest attacks, or other natural factors. However, price risks can be mitigated with a guaranteed MSP. This would encourage farmers to invest in their land and adopt modern farming technologies, which would boost productivity and reduce costs.

Arguments for and Against Legal MSP Guarantee

Supporters of a legal MSP guarantee argue that it would provide financial security to farmers, protecting them from unpredictable market conditions. It would also promote crop diversification, encourage farmers to shift from water-intensive crops to those less dependent on irrigation, and inject resources into rural economies, thus addressing distress in rural areas.

However, critics highlight several challenges with a legal guarantee for MSP. The most significant concern is the fiscal burden it would impose on the government, potentially reaching Rs. 5 trillion. Furthermore, such a system could distort market dynamics, discouraging private traders and leading to a situation where the government becomes the primary buyer of agricultural produce. This could be economically unsustainable, especially for crops with low yields. Additionally, legal MSP guarantees could violate World Trade Organization (WTO) subsidy principles, adversely impacting India’s agricultural exports.

The Way Forward: A Balanced Approach

Given the challenges associated with a legal MSP guarantee, alternative measures should be explored. Price Deficiency Payment (PDP) schemes, such as those implemented in Madhya Pradesh and Haryana, could be expanded at the national level. These schemes compensate farmers for the difference between market prices and MSP, ensuring price security without the fiscal burden of procurement.

Additionally, the government can focus on improving agricultural infrastructure, such as cold storage facilities, to help farmers better access markets and increase price realization. Supporting Farmer Producer Organizations (FPOs) could also help farmers by enhancing collective bargaining power and ensuring better prices for their produce. Moreover, gradual expansion of MSP coverage to include a wider range of crops would encourage diversification, reducing the dominance of rice and wheat.

Implications of China’s Mega-Dam Project on the Brahmaputra River Basin

  • 07 Jan 2025

Introduction:

China has approved the construction of the Yarlung Tsangpo hydropower project, the world's largest hydropower project, with a capacity of 60,000 MW, on the Brahmaputra River in Tibet. This mega-dam, located at the Great Bend in Medog county, has significant geopolitical, environmental, and socio-economic implications for India, Bhutan, and Bangladesh, the downstream riparian countries.

Geographical and Geopolitical Context:

  • The Brahmaputra is a transboundary river system flowing through China, India, Bhutan, and Bangladesh.
  • China, located at the river’s source in Tibet, is the uppermost riparian nation, controlling water flow into India and Bangladesh.
  • All riparian countries, including China, India, Bhutan, and Bangladesh, have proposed major water infrastructure projects in the river basin, which has become a site for geopolitical rivalry, with mega-dams symbolizing sovereignty.

China’s Hydropower Ambitions:

  • The Yarlung Tsangpo project is part of China’s 14th Five-Year Plan (2021-2025) and aims to address the country's energy needs while moving towards net carbon neutrality by 2060.
  • The river's steep descent from Tibet provides an ideal location for hydroelectricity generation.
  • China’s previous mega-projects, like the Three Gorges Dam, highlight the scale of these ambitions but also raise concerns about environmental and social consequences, including ecosystem disruption, displacement, and seismic risks.

Impact on Downstream Communities:

  • Water Flow and Agriculture: China’s mega-dam may significantly alter water flow to India, particularly affecting agriculture and water availability in the northeastern regions. India, reliant on the Brahmaputra for irrigation and drinking water, could face disruptions.
  • Silt and Biodiversity: The blocking of silt essential for agriculture could degrade soil quality and damage biodiversity in the river basin.
  • Seismic Risks: The region’s seismic activity, coupled with the construction of large dams, heightens the risk of catastrophic events such as landslides and Glacial Lake Outburst Floods (GLOFs), which have previously caused devastation in the Himalayas.

Hydropower Competition Between China and India:

  • Both China and India are competing to harness the Brahmaputra's potential for hydropower, with India planning its own large project at Upper Siang.
  • Bhutan has also proposed several medium-sized dams, raising concerns in downstream countries about cumulative impacts.
  • No comprehensive bilateral treaty exists between India and China to regulate shared transboundary rivers, though they have mechanisms for data sharing and discussions on river issues.

Environmental and Regional Concerns:

  • The Brahmaputra river basin is an ecologically sensitive region. The construction of large dams threatens the fragile ecosystem, including agro-pastoral communities, biodiversity, and wetlands.
  • Tibet’s river systems are vital for the global cryosphere, affecting climate systems, including monsoon patterns. Disruption to these systems could have broader implications for regional and global climate stability.

Challenges in Bilateral Cooperation:

  • India and China have struggled with effective coordination on river management. China has shown reluctance to share critical hydrological data, a concern amplified by the lack of a binding agreement.
  • The ongoing geopolitical tensions between the two countries, particularly over the border dispute, further complicate cooperation on transboundary water issues.

Recommendations for India:

  • Enhanced Cooperation: India should push for renewed agreements and mechanisms for real-time data exchange with China to prevent ecological and socio-economic damage.
  • Public Challenges: India needs to challenge China’s claims that its hydropower projects will have minimal downstream impact, ensuring that India's concerns are addressed in international forums.
  • Diplomatic Engagement: Water issues should be prioritized in India’s diplomatic engagement with China, emphasizing the importance of transparency and cooperation to ensure mutual benefit and regional stability.

Conclusion:

The Yarlung Tsangpo mega-dam project poses significant risks to the entire Brahmaputra river basin. A collaborative approach, involving transparent dialogue and cooperation among riparian countries, is essential to mitigate the potential adverse impacts on downstream communities and the fragile Himalayan ecosystem.

NITI Aayog Celebrates 10 Years

  • 06 Jan 2025

In News:

  • NITI Aayog, the National Institution for Transforming India, completed its 10th anniversary on January 1, 2025.
  • Established to replace the Planning Commission, NITI Aayog was designed to address contemporary challenges such as sustainable development, innovation, and decentralization in a dynamic, market-driven economy.

About NITI Aayog

Establishment and Mandate

  • Formation: Created through a Union Cabinet resolution in 2015.
  • Primary Mandates:
    • Overseeing the adoption and monitoring of the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).
    • Promoting competitive and cooperative federalism between States and Union Territories.

Composition

  • Chairperson: Prime Minister of India.
  • Governing Council: Includes Chief Ministers (CMs) of all States and UTs, Lt. Governors, the Vice Chairperson, full-time members, and special invitees.
  • CEO: Appointed by the PM for a fixed tenure.

Key Achievements

Policy Advisory and Decentralized Governance

  • Shifted focus from financial allocation to policy advisory roles.
  • Promoted decentralized governance through data-driven initiatives like the SDG India Index and the Composite Water Management Index.

Innovative Initiatives

  • Aspirational Blocks Programme (2023): Focused on 500 underdeveloped blocks for 100% coverage of government schemes.
  • Atal Innovation Mission (AIM): Trained over 1 crore students through Atal Tinkering Labs and incubation centres.
  • Initiatives like e-Mobility, Green Hydrogen, and the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme were conceptualized to drive innovation and sustainability.

Role and Functions of NITI Aayog

Strategic Advice and Federal Cooperation

  • Provides policy formulation and strategic advice to both central and state governments.
  • Fosters cooperative federalism by encouraging collaboration between the central and state governments.

Monitoring and Evaluation

  • Plays a crucial role in monitoring and evaluating policies and programs to ensure alignment with long-term goals.

Promoting Innovation and SDGs

  • NITI Aayog contributes to aligning national development programs with the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), focusing on innovation, research, and technology in critical sectors.

Key Differences Between Planning Commission and NITI Aayog

Aspect                                            Planning Commission                                                                                                              NITI Aayog

Purpose                                         Centralized planning and resource allocation.                                                Focus on cooperative federalism and policy research.

Structure                                       Led by the PM, with Deputy Chairman and full-time members.                   Led by the PM, with Vice-Chairperson, CEO, and Governing Council.

Approach                                      Top-down, centralized.                                                                                   Bottom-up, encouraging state participation.

Role in Governance                     Executive authority over policies.                                                                  Advisory body without enforcement power.

Five-Year Plans                            Formulated and implemented.                                                                        Focus on long-term development, no Five-Year Plans.

Challenges Faced by NITI Aayog

  • Limited Executive Power: Lacks authority to enforce its recommendations, restricting its influence.
  • Coordination Issues: Achieving effective collaboration between central and state governments remains challenging.
  • Data Gaps: Inconsistent state-level data hampers accurate policymaking and evaluation.
  • Resource Constraints: Limited resources hinder full implementation of initiatives.
  • Resistance to Change: Some states resist NITI Aayog's initiatives due to concerns over autonomy and alignment with local needs.

Future Vision and Planning

  • Agenda for 2030: Focus on achieving the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) in areas like poverty alleviation, education, healthcare, clean energy, and gender equality.
  • Vision for 2035: NITI Aayog's 15-year vision document aims for sustainable, inclusive growth, with an emphasis on economic growth, social equity, and environmental sustainability.
  • Innovation and Digitalization: Promotes digitalization and innovation through data-driven policymaking and regional focus on tribal and hilly areas.

Conclusion: Reflections on the First Decade

  • Despite significant achievements, NITI Aayog’s influence remains limited by its advisory role and resource constraints.
  • The shift away from centralized planning, evident since the dissolution of the Planning Commission, has sparked debate about the effectiveness of such a model in ensuring long-term development and inclusive growth.

Unified District Information System for Education Plus (UDISE+) 2023-24 Report

  • 04 Jan 2025

In News:

The UDISE+ report for 2023-24, released by the Ministry of Education, presents key insights into India’s school education system. UDISE+ serves as a comprehensive database, tracking student enrolment, school infrastructure, and other educational parameters, enabling efficient policy implementation and gap identification.

Key Findings:

  • Decline in School Enrolment: Enrolment figures in Indian schools have witnessed a significant decline for the first time in recent years. The total enrolment dropped from 26.36 crore (2018-22 average) to 25.17 crore in 2022-23 and further to 24.8 crore in 2023-24, marking a fall of 1.55 crore students or nearly 6%. This drop is attributed to the improved data collection methods which helped eliminate duplicate entries, especially students enrolled in both government and private schools.
  • Gender and School Type-wise Trends: The enrolment drop was observed across both government and private schools. Government schools saw a decline of 5.59%, whereas private schools experienced a 3.67% reduction. Gender-wise, the enrolment of boys decreased by 6.04%, while girls’ enrolment dropped by 5.76%, compared to the 2018-22 average.
  • State-wise Data: The enrolment drop was not uniform across states. Bihar recorded the largest decline, with a loss of 35.65 lakh students, followed by Uttar Pradesh (28.26 lakh) and Maharashtra (18.55 lakh). In contrast, states like Andhra Pradesh, Delhi, Jammu & Kashmir, and Telangana saw an increase in enrolment during the same period.
  • Level-wise Trends: The most significant declines were recorded at the primary (Classes 1-5), upper primary (Classes 6-8), and secondary (Classes 9-10) levels. However, enrolment in pre-primary and higher secondary (Classes 11-12) levels showed an increase in 2023-24 compared to the previous average.
  • Impact of Data Refinement: The implementation of Aadhaar-linked student data collection has enhanced the accuracy of enrolment figures. The de-duplication process helped remove cases of students being enrolled in both government and private schools. This revision is expected to provide more accurate data for targeted educational schemes and improve the effectiveness of government programs like Samagra Shiksha and PM POSHAN.

Challenges in Education

Despite the improvements in data collection, several systemic issues persist:

  • Access and Retention: High dropout rates, especially at the secondary level, remain a challenge for sustained student retention.
  • Disparities among Marginalized Groups: Enrolment among SC, ST, OBC, and minority communities showed a notable decline, reflecting existing inequities in the education system.
  • Infrastructure and Teacher Training: Uneven distribution of resources and insufficient teacher training continue to hamper educational outcomes, affecting quality and student engagement.

Way Forward

To address these challenges, the following steps are critical:

  • Strengthening NEP 2020: The National Education Policy aims for universal Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) by 2030, with a focus on skill-based learning and inclusive education.
  • Teacher Capacity Building: There is a need for targeted interventions to improve teacher quality and address gaps in the student-teacher ratio.
  • Infrastructure Optimization: Schools should optimize their resources based on enrolment trends to improve access and address disparities.
  • Data-Driven Monitoring: Continuous monitoring using student-specific data will help identify dropouts and allocate resources efficiently.

Government Extends Special Subsidy on DAP

  • 03 Jan 2025

In News:

The Indian government has decided to extend the special subsidy on Di-Ammonium Phosphate (DAP) fertilizer for another year, a decision aimed at stabilizing farmgate prices and addressing the challenges posed by the depreciation of the Indian rupee.

Key Government Decision

  • Extension of Subsidy: The Centre has extended the Rs 3,500 per tonne special subsidy on DAP from January 1, 2025 to December 31, 2025.
  • Objective: This extension aims to contain farmgate price surges of DAP, India’s second most-consumed fertilizer, which is being impacted by the fall in the rupee's value against the US dollar.

Fertilizer Price Dynamics and Impact

  • MRP Caps on Fertilizers: Despite the decontrol of non-urea fertilizers, the government has frozen the maximum retail price (MRP) for these products.
    • Current MRPs:
      • DAP: Rs 1,350 per 50-kg bag
      • Complex fertilizers: Rs 1,300 to Rs 1,600 per 50-kg bag depending on composition.
  • Subsidy on DAP: The subsidy includes Rs 21,911 per tonne on DAP, plus the Rs 3,500 one-time special package.
  • Impact of Currency Depreciation:
    • The rupee's depreciation has made imported fertilizers significantly more expensive.
      • The landed price of DAP has increased from Rs 52,960 per tonne to Rs 54,160 due to the rupee falling from Rs 83.8 to Rs 85.7 against the dollar.
      • Including additional costs (customs, port handling, insurance, etc.), the total cost of imported DAP is now Rs 65,000 per tonne, making imports unviable without further subsidy or MRP adjustments.

Industry Concerns and Viability Issues

  • Import Viability:
    • Fertilizer companies face significant cost pressures due to rising import prices and the current MRP caps.
    • Without an increase in government subsidies or approval to revise MRPs upwards, imports will be unviable.
    • Even with the extended subsidy, companies estimate a Rs 1,500 per tonne shortfall due to currency depreciation.
  • Stock Levels and Supply Challenges:
    • Current stock levels for DAP (9.2 lakh tonnes) and complex fertilizers (23.7 lakh tonnes) are below last year's levels.
    • With inadequate imports, there are concerns about fertilizer supply for the upcoming kharif season (June-July 2025).

Government’s Strategy and Fiscal Implications

  • Compensation for Imports:
    • In September 2024, the government approved compensation for DAP imports above a benchmark price of $559.71 per tonne, based on an exchange rate of Rs 83.23 to the dollar.
    • With the rupee falling below Rs 85.7, these previous compensation calculations have become outdated.
  • Fiscal Impact:
    • The extended subsidy will cost the government an additional Rs 6,475 crore. Despite this, political implications of raising the MRP are minimal, as only non-major agricultural states are facing elections in 2025.

Future Outlook and Priorities

  • Immediate Priority: The government’s primary concern is securing adequate fertilizer stocks for the kharif season, focusing on ensuring sufficient imports of both finished fertilizers and raw materials.
  • Balancing Factors: The government will need to navigate the complex balance of maintaining fertilizer affordability for farmers, ensuring the viability of fertilizer companies, and managing fiscal constraints.

As the subsidy extension is implemented, all eyes will be on the government's ability to ensure a stable supply of fertilizers while safeguarding both farmer interests and economic sustainability in the face of an increasingly challenging exchange rate environment.

Caste-Based Discrimination in Prisons

  • 02 Jan 2025

In News:

The Union Ministry of Home Affairs has recently introduced significant revisions to the Model Prison Manual, 2016, and the Model Prisons and Correctional Services Act, 2023. These changes aim to eliminate caste-based discrimination in Indian prisons and establish a standardized approach to defining and treating habitual offenders across the country.

Background

In October 2024, the Supreme Court of India expressed concerns over the persistence of caste-based discrimination within prisons and the lack of consistency in how habitual offenders are classified. In response, the Court instructed the government to amend prison regulations to promote equality and fairness. The newly introduced reforms are in line with the Court's directives and focus on aligning prison practices with constitutional principles.

Addressing Caste-Based Discrimination in Prisons

The recent amendments take specific steps to combat caste-based discrimination within correctional facilities:

  • Ban on Discrimination: Prison authorities are now mandated to ensure there is no caste-based segregation or bias. All work assignments and duties will be distributed impartially among inmates.
  • Legal Provision Against Discrimination: A new clause, Section 55(A), titled "Prohibition of Caste-Based Discrimination in Prisons and Correctional Institutions", has been added to the Model Act, establishing a formal legal framework to address caste discrimination.
  • Manual Scavenging Ban: The amendments extend the provisions of the Prohibition of Employment as Manual Scavengers and their Rehabilitation Act, 2013 to include prisons, prohibiting the degrading practice of manual scavenging or any hazardous cleaning within correctional facilities.

Redefining Habitual Offenders

The updated amendments also standardize the classification and treatment of habitual offenders, in accordance with the Supreme Court’s directions:

  • Uniform Definition: A habitual offender is now officially defined as an individual convicted and sentenced to imprisonment for two or more separate offences within a continuous five-year period, provided the sentences were not overturned on appeal or review. Importantly, time spent in jail under sentence is excluded from this five-year period.
  • National Consistency: States that do not have specific Habitual Offender Acts must amend their laws within three months to ensure consistency with the new national framework.

Importance of the Reforms

  • Promoting Equality: These amendments seek to uphold the constitutional rights of prisoners, ensuring that all individuals, regardless of caste or background, are treated equally and with dignity.
  • Eliminating Degrading Practices: The extension of the manual scavenging prohibition to prisons is a vital step in eliminating degrading and inhumane practices, ensuring a more humane environment for prisoners.
  • Uniform Framework: The establishment of a standardized definition of habitual offenders ensures a consistent approach in handling repeat offenders across all states, reducing the possibility of arbitrary classifications.

Conclusion

The reforms introduced by the Union Home Ministry mark a significant milestone in India’s prison reform journey. By addressing caste-based discrimination and standardizing the classification of habitual offenders, these amendments reaffirm the country’s commitment to human rights and the rule of law. These changes not only improve the conditions within prisons but also set the stage for future reforms aimed at creating a fairer and more equitable correctional system.

Introduction to Dr. Manmohan Singh's Economic Reforms

  • 31 Dec 2024

In News:

Dr. Manmohan Singh, a distinguished economist, played a crucial role in shaping India’s economic trajectory. His leadership, as Finance Minister (1991–96) and Prime Minister (2004–14), is particularly noted for the economic liberalization and reform policies that transformed India’s economy.

India’s Economic Crisis of 1991

  • Economic Collapse: India faced a severe balance of payments crisis, with dwindling foreign reserves and rising inflation.
  • Key Challenges: Fiscal deficit, industrial stagnation, and trade imbalances worsened by the collapse of the Soviet Union.
  • Urgent Measures: Dr. Singh was appointed Finance Minister during this crisis and initiated bold reforms to stabilize and grow the economy.

Key Reforms in 1991

  • Devaluation of the Rupee
    • Aimed at making Indian exports competitive in global markets.
    • Reduced import tariffs and liberalized foreign trade.
  • Industrial Policy Reforms
    • Abolition of Licence Raj: Deregulated the industrial sector, promoting private enterprises.
    • Reduced state control and encouraged foreign investment, leading to industrial growth.
  • Banking and Financial Reforms
    • Reduced the statutory liquidity ratio (SLR) and cash reserve ratio (CRR).
    • Allowed for more credit flow, fostering economic expansion and banking sector efficiency.
  • Global Integration
    • Introduced economic liberalization policies, integrating India with the global economy and attracting foreign investments.

Economic Growth and Social Welfare Initiatives

  • Poverty Reduction: Reforms helped lift millions out of poverty by fostering job creation and industrial growth.
  • Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA): Launched in 2005, providing 100 days of wage employment to rural households.
  • Right to Information (RTI) and Right to Education (RTE)
    • Empowered citizens by ensuring transparency and access to government information.
    • RTE guaranteed free and compulsory education for children aged 6-14.
  • Financial Inclusion: Aadhar project introduced to facilitate welfare delivery and financial inclusion.

Legacy of Economic Liberalization and Growth

  • Economic Growth: Under his leadership, India’s GDP grew at an average rate of 8%, establishing India as one of the fastest-growing economies.
  • Shift to a Market-Driven Economy: Reforms dismantled socialist controls, facilitating the rise of the private sector.
  • Attracting Foreign Investment: Economic liberalization and policy reforms made India an attractive destination for foreign capital.

Leadership During Political and Economic Challenges

  • Reluctant Prime Minister
    • In 2004, Singh became Prime Minister despite initial reluctance, emerging as a unifying figure during coalition politics.
    • His tenure saw India’s rise as a global economic power, particularly from 2004–2009.
  • Challenges
    • Singh’s second term was marred by allegations of corruption and policy paralysis, leading to criticism of his administration.
    • However, his personal integrity remained intact, and he maintained focus on governance.
  • Historic India-US Nuclear Deal (2008)
    • The deal marked a significant shift in India’s foreign relations and energy policies, enabling civilian nuclear trade.

Conclusion

Dr. Manmohan Singh’s economic policies are central to India's modern economic framework. His vision transformed India from a closed, socialist economy to a vibrant, globalized economy, promoting inclusive growth and institutional reforms. Despite facing challenges and criticisms, his legacy remains a testament to strategic policymaking that continues to influence India’s economic landscape.

 

Sustainable Groundwater Management in India’s Agriculture

  • 30 Dec 2024

Introduction: Groundwater Crisis and Agriculture

  • India's Agricultural Dependence on Groundwater: India is a leading producer of water-intensive crops like rice, wheat, and pulses. The country’s agricultural sector heavily depends on groundwater for irrigation, especially for paddy cultivation.
  • Over-exploitation of Groundwater: Groundwater extraction for irrigation is increasingly unsustainable, threatening agricultural sustainability in the long term.

Rising Groundwater Usage and Its Implications

  • Population Growth and Groundwater Use: Between 2016 and 2024, global population grew from 7.56 billion to 8.2 billion, and India’s population rose from 1.29 billion to 1.45 billion. Concurrently, groundwater used for irrigation increased from 38% in 2016-17 to 52% in 2023-24, exacerbating the water crisis.
  • Over-extraction in Major Paddy-Producing States: States like Rajasthan, Punjab, and Haryana have witnessed severe over-exploitation of groundwater for irrigation.
    • Rajasthan: Highest groundwater salinisation (22%) despite receiving the highest average rainfall (608 mm) among these states.
    • Punjab and Haryana: Lesser groundwater salinity due to canal irrigation and micro-irrigation systems.

Impact of Excessive Fertilizer Use on Groundwater Quality

  • Soil Salinity and Groundwater Contamination: Excessive use of fertilizers, particularly for paddy cultivation, increases soil salinity and contributes to groundwater contamination.
  • Toxic Chemicals in Groundwater: Nitrate contamination, caused by nitrogen-based fertilizers, and uranium contamination due to phosphate fertilizers are key concerns in states like Maharashtra, Telangana, Andhra Pradesh, and Tamil Nadu.
  • Health Risks: Contaminated groundwater poses health risks such as thyroid disorders, cancer, and dental fluorosis, along with reduced agricultural productivity.

Projected Impact on Future Groundwater Availability

  • Unsustainable Groundwater Levels: The Central Groundwater Board (CGWB) reports that if current practices continue, over half of the districts in Punjab could face groundwater depletion. Similarly, 21-23% of districts in Haryana and Rajasthan may experience a similar crisis.
  • Population Growth and Water Scarcity: With India’s population expected to reach 1.52 billion by 2036, the need for sustainable groundwater management becomes even more critical.

Government Initiatives for Groundwater Management

  • National Mission for Sustainable Agriculture (2014): Promotes sustainable practices like zero tillage, cover cropping, and micro-irrigation for efficient water and chemical use.
  • Pradhan Mantri Krishi Sinchai Yojana (2015): Aims to boost irrigation efficiency through drip and sprinkler irrigation methods.
  • Atal Bhujal Yojana (2019): Targets efficient groundwater management in water-stressed states like Gujarat, Haryana, Rajasthan, Maharashtra, and Uttar Pradesh.
  • Success of Government Initiatives: CGWB data shows that the percentage of districts with unsustainable groundwater levels dropped from 23% in 2016-17 to 19% in 2023-24.

Role of State Governments in Groundwater Management

  • State-Level Initiatives: States with unsustainable groundwater levels must take proactive measures to manage water resources efficiently.
    • Example - Odisha: Odisha's Integrated Irrigation Project for Climate Resilient Agriculture emphasizes irrigation efficiency and climate-smart practices, supported by World Bank funding.
  • Encouraging Resource-Efficient Agriculture: States with safe groundwater levels, like Chhattisgarh, Bihar, Jharkhand, Telangana, and Odisha, should adopt water-efficient practices to protect groundwater resources.

Conclusion: Ensuring Agricultural Sustainability and Water Security

  • Need for Urgent Action: Scaling up efforts to improve irrigation practices and groundwater management is crucial to securing India’s agricultural future.
  • Global Food Security: Protecting groundwater resources will not only ensure water security within India but also contribute to global food security amid climate challenges.
  • Blueprint for Sustainable Agriculture: States like Odisha are providing a model for sustainable water management, which can be replicated across water-stressed regions in India.

 

Surge in E-Waste Generation in India

  • 29 Dec 2024

In News:

India has seen a significant increase in electronic waste (e-waste) generation, rising by 72.54% from 1.01 million metric tonnes (MT) in 2019-20 to 1.751 million MT in 2023-24. The sharpest rise occurred between 2019-20 and 2020-21, driven by increased electronic consumption due to the COVID-19 pandemic's work-from-home and remote learning arrangements.

Environmental and Health Concerns

E-waste contains hazardous substances like arsenic, cadmium, lead, and mercury. If not properly managed, these materials can severely impact human health and the environment, contaminating soil and water sources.

Government Efforts: E-Waste Management Rules, 2022

  • Introduction of Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR): The government introduced the E-Waste (Management) Rules, 2022, effective from April 1, 2023. These rules focus on making producers responsible for the recycling of e-waste. Producers are assigned recycling targets based on the quantity of e-waste generated or products sold and must purchase EPR certificates from authorized recyclers to meet these targets.
  • Integration of Bulk Consumers: Public institutions and government offices, categorized as bulk consumers, are mandated to dispose of e-waste only through registered recyclers or refurbishers, ensuring proper treatment and recycling of the waste.
  • Expansion of E-Waste Coverage: The updated rules expanded the scope to include 106 Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) items from FY 2023-24, up from 21 items previously covered under the 2016 E-Waste Rules.

Challenges in E-Waste Recycling and Disposal

  • Low Recycling Rates: Although the share of e-waste recycled in India has increased from 22% in 2019-20 to 43% in 2023-24, a significant 57% of e-waste remains unprocessed annually. Informal sector practices, which dominate e-waste handling, often lack the necessary environmental safeguards, leading to improper disposal and environmental contamination.
  • Lack of Infrastructure and Awareness: India faces challenges in building adequate infrastructure for e-waste collection and recycling, resulting in improper disposal in landfills. Furthermore, a lack of public awareness regarding proper disposal methods exacerbates the problem.

Global Context and India’s Position

  • India ranks as the third-largest e-waste generator globally, following China and the United States. With an increasing rate of e-waste generation, the country faces an urgent need to improve recycling efficiency and adopt sustainable disposal methods.

International and National Conventions on E-Waste

  • India is a signatory to several international conventions that govern hazardous waste management, including the Basel Convention, which regulates the transboundary movement of hazardous wastes, and the Minamata Convention, which focuses on mercury. At the national level, India has established the E-Waste (Management) Rules, 2022, and other frameworks to manage and reduce e-waste effectively.

Strategic Recommendations for Effective E-Waste Management

  • Harnessing the Informal Sector: India’s informal sector, which handles a significant portion of e-waste, must be integrated into the formal recycling systems. This can be achieved through training and financial support to ensure safe and environmentally responsible recycling practices.
  • Technological Innovations: Encouraging research into advanced recycling technologies, such as AI and IoT-based solutions for efficient e-waste collection and tracking, will be crucial for improving the e-waste management system.
  • Learning from Global Practices: Countries like the European Union (EU) and Japan have set strong examples. The EU’s Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive and Japan’s Home Appliance Recycling Law emphasize Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) and provide models for India to adapt.

Conclusion

To address the growing e-waste challenge, India must improve its recycling infrastructure, integrate the informal sector, and adopt best practices from international models. With sustainable and effective strategies, India can mitigate the environmental and health risks posed by e-waste while promoting a circular economy.

Glass Ceiling Cracks: Women's Rising Role in the 2024 Lok Sabha Elections

  • 28 Dec 2024

Introduction:

The 2024 Lok Sabha elections marked a significant step forward for women’s participation in Indian politics. With 800 women candidates contesting across 390 constituencies, this was the highest ever since the 1957 general elections. This surge in women candidates has been a positive reflection of the evolving role of women in India's democratic processes.

Increase in Women Candidates:

  • A total of 800 women candidates participated in the 2024 elections, up from 726 in 2019.
  • The number of constituencies with no female candidate dropped to a historic low of 152, from 171 in 2019.
  • However, despite the rise in participation, only 74 women won, while 629 forfeited their deposits.

Regional Variations:

  • The highest number of women candidates were from Maharashtra (111), followed by Uttar Pradesh (80) and Tamil Nadu (77).
  • Some constituencies, like Baramati, Secunderabad, and Warangal, saw the highest participation of women, with eight candidates each.

Voter Turnout and Gender Dynamics:

  • Women voters surpassed men in voter turnout for the second consecutive time, with 65.78% women casting their vote in 2024, compared to 65.55% of men.
  • Assam’s Dhubri recorded the highest female voter turnout at 92.17%, reflecting increased female engagement in the electoral process.

Electoral Data and Gender Insights:

  • In 2024, there were 47.63 crore female electors out of 97.97 crore total voters, making up 48.62% of the electorate, a slight increase from 2019.
  • The number of female electors per 1,000 male voters reached 946, up from 926 in 2019, showing growing electoral inclusivity.

Challenges and Progress:

  • Despite the gains in women’s representation, there remain several constituencies without any female candidates, notably in states like Uttar Pradesh (30 constituencies), Bihar (15), and Gujarat (14).
  • Though women's participation has risen, the number of women who win remains disproportionately low, reflecting the challenges they face in a patriarchal political landscape.

Inclusion and Diversity:

  • The 2024 elections also saw greater inclusivity, with a rise in third-gender electors, which increased by 23.5% to 48,272.
  • Voter turnout among transgender voters nearly doubled, reaching 27.09% compared to 14.64% in 2019.
  • Additionally, the number of persons with disabilities (PwD) electors increased to 90.28 lakh, showcasing broader electoral inclusivity.

Conclusion:

The 2024 Lok Sabha elections witnessed a remarkable increase in women’s participation, both as voters and candidates. While the journey toward full gender parity in politics continues, the trends from these elections indicate a growing shift toward more inclusive electoral processes. The data released by the Election Commission further underlines this progress, showing the increasing role of women in shaping India’s democratic future.

 

Free Movement Regime

  • 27 Dec 2024

In News:

The Indian government, through the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA), has recently issued new guidelines to regulate the movement of people between India and Myanmar, especially along the border regions. These guidelines come after the suspension of the Free Movement Regime (FMR), which had previously allowed residents within a specified range of the border to move freely. The new protocol aims to enhance internal security and address concerns related to demographic shifts in India's northeastern states.

Background of the Free Movement Regime (FMR)

What is FMR?

The Free Movement Regime (FMR) is a bilateral arrangement between India and Myanmar that permits residents living in border areas to cross the international boundary without a visa. This agreement was established in 1968 to facilitate familial, cultural, and economic exchanges between people living on either side of the border.

Territorial Limits and Evolution

Initially, the FMR allowed free movement within a 40 km radius from the border. However, in 2004, this limit was reduced to 16 km, and additional regulations were introduced in 2016. The most recent development sees the limit further reduced to 10 km, with stricter regulations implemented to regulate the movement.

Recent Developments and New Guidelines

Suspension of FMR

In February 2023, Union Home Minister Amit Shah announced the suspension of the FMR along the India-Myanmar border, citing concerns about internal security and demographic changes, particularly in India's northeastern states. This decision came in the context of growing ethnic violence and political pressures, especially from states like Manipur.

Despite the announcement, the formal scrapping of the FMR is yet to be officially notified by the Ministry of External Affairs (MEA). However, the MHA has issued new guidelines to regulate cross-border movement, focusing on enhancing security without completely discontinuing the regime.

Key Features of the New Guidelines

The updated protocols issued by the MHA include several measures aimed at improving the security and regulation of movement across the border:

  • Reduced Movement Limit: The new guidelines reduce the free movement limit from 16 km to 10 km from the border on both sides.
  • Border Pass System: Residents wishing to cross into Myanmar or return to India must obtain a "border pass" from the Assam Rifles. This pass allows a stay of up to seven days in the neighboring country.
  • Document and Health Checks: Upon entry into India, individuals will undergo a document inspection by the Assam Rifles, followed by security and health checks conducted by state police and health authorities. Biometrics and photographs will be collected, and a QR code-enabled border pass will be issued for verification.
  • Designated Entry Points: There will be 43 designated entry and exit points across the border, with biometric verification and health screening required at all points.
  • Monitoring and Enforcement: The Assam Rifles will oversee the movement, ensuring that individuals comply with the new regulations. Violations of the movement protocol will result in legal action.

Infrastructure and Technology Implementation

The government plans to establish infrastructure, such as biometric machines and software for border pass issuance. Pilot entry and exit points will be operational soon, with a phased implementation for the remaining points.

Political Reactions and Opposition

Regional Concerns and Opposition

The suspension of the FMR has been a contentious issue in India's northeastern states. The governments of Nagaland and Mizoram have raised objections to the scrapping of the regime, citing the cultural and familial ties of border communities. The Nagaland Assembly passed a resolution opposing the government's decision, while political leaders in Manipur argued that the unregulated movement of people had contributed to ethnic violence in the region.

Specific Concerns in Manipur

The chief minister of Manipur, N. Biren Singh, attributed ongoing ethnic conflicts in the state to the unchecked movement of people across the border. This was particularly evident in the violent ethnic clashes that broke out in 2023. As a result, Singh urged the Home Ministry to cancel the FMR along the India-Myanmar border, and the new guidelines reflect the state's concerns.

Conclusion

The suspension of the Free Movement Regime along the India-Myanmar border, followed by the introduction of stricter guidelines, marks a significant shift in India's border management policy. While the formal scrapping of FMR is yet to occur, the new protocols aim to balance security concerns with the region's long-standing cultural ties. The implementation of biometric checks and designated entry points signifies the government’s focus on modernizing border control while addressing regional concerns. The outcome of this policy shift will have important implications for internal security, demographic dynamics, and bilateral relations between India and Myanmar.

Suposhit Gram Panchayat Abhiyan

  • 26 Dec 2024

In News:

On December 26, 2024, Prime Minister Narendra Modi presided over the Veer Bal Diwas celebrations at the Bharat Mandap in New Delhi. This annual event commemorates the martyrdom of the sons of Sri Guru Gobind Singh Ji and highlights the importance of nurturing the next generation. During the occasion, PM Modi also launched the ‘Suposhit Gram Panchayat Abhiyan,’ an initiative aimed at improving nutrition and well-being in rural India.

Veer Bal Diwas: Commemorating Sacrifice and Courage

Veer Bal Diwas was declared on January 9, 2022, by PM Modi to honor the sacrifices made by the young sons of Guru Gobind Singh Ji — Sahibzada Baba Zorawar Singh and Baba Fateh Singh — who were martyred in 1704. During the Mughal-Sikh battles, these two brave boys were captured and offered safety if they converted to Islam, which they refused. Their refusal to abandon their faith led to their brutal martyrdom by being bricked alive in the walls of a fort in Sirhind (Punjab). This act of resilience and unwavering faith is a cornerstone of Sikh history and culture.

Veer Bal Diwas not only commemorates their sacrifice but also serves as a reminder of the strength, faith, and courage demonstrated by all four of Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s sons. It underscores the Sikh ideals of sacrifice, courage, and dedication to faith.

Suposhit Gram Panchayat Abhiyan: Addressing Malnutrition in Rural Areas

On the same day, PM Modi launched the 'Suposhit Gram Panchayat Abhiyan', a nationwide mission focused on improving nutritional outcomes in rural areas. The initiative aims to enhance nutrition-related infrastructure and promote active community participation in tackling malnutrition. By encouraging village-level involvement, the program seeks to ensure that nutrition becomes a community-driven effort.

Key Objectives

  • Malnutrition Eradication: The initiative focuses on combating malnutrition in rural communities by improving access to better nutrition.
  • Healthy Competition: Encourages competition among villages to adopt best practices for nutrition and overall health.
  • Sustainable Development: Promotes long-term, sustainable health practices that align with India's broader goals, such as the Poshan Abhiyan and the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).

The program aims to make rural populations active participants in improving their own well-being, strengthening community-driven initiatives for better nutritional outcomes.

Engaging Children and Fostering Patriotism

In line with Veer Bal Diwas, various events were organized to engage young minds across the nation. These initiatives not only raised awareness about the significance of the day but also fostered a culture of courage, dedication, and patriotism.

  • Online Competitions: Interactive quizzes were conducted through platforms like MyGov and MyBharat to encourage participation and understanding of Veer Bal Diwas.
  • Creative Activities: Schools, Child Care Institutions, and Anganwadi centers organized storytelling, creative writing, and poster-making contests to engage children and promote nationalistic values.

Honoring Young Achievers: PMRBP Awardees

The event also saw the presence of the recipients of the Pradhan Mantri Rashtriya Bal Puraskar (PMRBP), which recognizes children who have demonstrated exceptional abilities in various fields. The awardees, 17 in total, were presented with medals, certificates, and citation booklets by President Droupadi Murmu. These young achievers served as a source of inspiration, reinforcing the theme of celebrating youth potential on Veer Bal Diwas.

Conclusion: Strengthening the Foundation of India’s Future

The celebrations of Veer Bal Diwas and the launch of the Suposhit Gram Panchayat Abhiyan highlight the government’s commitment to nurturing India’s future by investing in its children and rural communities. By honoring historical sacrifices and fostering community-driven health and nutrition initiatives, these efforts contribute to building a resilient, prosperous India that can meet global challenges head-on. The twin focus on children’s development and rural well-being underscores India’s vision of a healthier, more inclusive society, aligned with national and global development goals.

Bank Credit to Women Self-Help Groups (SHGs)

  • 21 Dec 2024

Introduction

The Deendayal Antyodaya Yojana – National Rural Livelihoods Mission (DAY-NRLM) is a flagship program by the Ministry of Rural Development (MoRD) that aims to reduce poverty by empowering women, especially through Self-Help Groups (SHGs). These SHGs have been instrumental in improving financial inclusion, providing access to credit, and enhancing the economic and social status of women across India. The program has made significant strides in mobilizing women, improving their access to financial services, and facilitating entrepreneurial ventures in rural areas.

Key Features and Initiatives of DAY-NRLM

  • Self-Help Groups (SHGs):
    • Formation: DAY-NRLM supports the creation and strengthening of SHGs, primarily focusing on rural women from economically disadvantaged backgrounds.
    • Mobilization: As of 2024, over 10.05 crore women have been mobilized into 90.87 lakh SHGs across India.
    • Objective: The main goal is to reduce poverty through empowerment by providing access to financial services and sustainable livelihoods.
  • Start-up Village Entrepreneurship Programme (SVEP):
    • Support for Rural Enterprises: SVEP, a sub-scheme under DAY-NRLM, encourages SHG women and their families to set up small-scale businesses.
    • Impact: As of October 2024, 3.13 lakh rural enterprises have been supported under this initiative.
    • State-wise Distribution: The program has supported enterprises across various states, with notable contributions from Andhra Pradesh (27,651 enterprises), Kerala (34,569), and Uttar Pradesh (28,904).
  • Banking Correspondent Sakhis:
    • Role: Women in SHGs are trained as Banking Correspondent Sakhis to enhance access to banking services such as deposits, credit, remittances, pensions, and insurance in rural areas.
    • Current Deployment: 1,35,127 Sakhis have been deployed under DAY-NRLM, empowering women to be financial intermediaries in their communities.
  • Financial Support for SHGs:
    • Revolving Fund: SHGs receive funds ranging from Rs. 20,000 to Rs. 30,000 to boost their operations and financial stability.
    • Community Investment Fund: SHGs can avail of up to Rs. 2.50 lakh under the Community Investment Fund to strengthen their financial position.
    • Interest Subvention: To make bank loans more affordable, DAY-NRLM provides interest subvention to SHGs, reducing their overall credit costs.
  • Online Marketing Platform:
    • www.esaras.in: This online platform allows SHGs to market their products, improving their access to broader markets and enhancing their income-generating potential.

Impact of DAY-NRLM and SHGs

  • Financial Inclusion: SHGs play a vital role in financial inclusion by providing access to banking services, loans, and insurance to women, especially in rural and remote areas.
  • Credit Mobilization: As of November 2024, SHGs have leveraged Rs. 9.71 lakh crore in bank credit, thanks to the capitalization support provided by DAY-NRLM, including Revolving Funds and Community Investment Funds.
  • Empowerment of Women: SHGs have significantly contributed to the empowerment of women, providing them with financial independence, social support, and the ability to make decisions in their households and communities.

Challenges Faced by SHGs

  • Beneficiary Identification: Ensuring that the most marginalized individuals are included in SHGs can be challenging.
  • Training Gaps: There is a lack of quality training programs and expert trainers to build the capacity of SHG members.
  • Financial Literacy: Many SHG members have limited knowledge of formal financial services, hindering effective financial management.
  • Market Linkages: Poor integration with markets limits the growth potential of SHGs, especially in terms of product sales and business expansion.
  • Community Support: Insufficient business environment support and value chain linkages pose challenges to SHG sustainability and growth.

Government Initiatives Supporting SHGs

  • SHG-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP): Launched by NABARD in 1992, this initiative aims to link SHGs with formal banking institutions, facilitating financial inclusion.
  • Mission for Financial Inclusion (MFI): A broader initiative to ensure that rural populations have access to affordable financial services such as savings, credit, insurance, and pensions.
  • Lakhpati Didi Initiative: Launched in 2023, this initiative empowers SHG women to adopt sustainable livelihood practices and aim for an annual household income exceeding Rs. 1 lakh.

Role of SHGs in Rural Development

  • Women Empowerment: SHGs have emerged as a powerful tool for empowering women through financial independence, social security, and the ability to make informed decisions.
  • Economic Growth: SHGs foster small-scale entrepreneurship, thereby creating local businesses that contribute to rural economic growth.
  • Social Cohesion: By promoting collective action, SHGs provide a social support system that helps in addressing common issues faced by their members, such as health, education, and safety.

Future Prospects and Way Forward

  • Technological Integration: SHGs should leverage advanced digital platforms for transaction management, record-keeping, and communication, enhancing efficiency and accessibility.
  • Reducing Informal Borrowing: Linking SHGs with formal financial institutions will reduce reliance on informal lenders, promoting financial inclusion.
  • Inclusive Approach: SHGs should adopt an inclusive model to ensure that members from diverse socio-economic backgrounds are fairly represented and benefit equally.
  • Training and Capacity Building: There is a need for more Community Resource Persons (CRPs) who can guide SHGs in beneficiary identification, financial management, and scaling their activities.

Supreme Court Directs Policy for Sacred Groves Protection

  • 20 Dec 2024

In News:

Recently, the Supreme Court of India issued a significant judgment directing the Union Government to formulate a comprehensive policy for the protection and management of sacred groves across the country. These natural spaces, traditionally safeguarded by local communities, play a crucial role in preserving both ecological diversity and cultural heritage.

What are Sacred Groves?

Sacred Groves are patches of virgin forests that are protected by local communities due to their religious and cultural significance. They represent remnants of what were once dominant ecosystems and serve as key habitats for flora and fauna. Typically, sacred groves are not just ecological reserves, but also form an integral part of local traditions, often protected due to spiritual beliefs.

Key Features of Sacred Groves:

  • Ecological Value: Sacred groves contribute significantly to biodiversity conservation.
  • Cultural Significance: These groves are revered in various religious practices and are central to local traditions.
  • Geographical Presence: Sacred groves are found in regions like Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Karnataka, Maharashtra, and parts of Rajasthan.

Supreme Court's Directive

The court's judgment was based on a plea highlighting the decline of sacred groves in Rajasthan, particularly those being lost due to deforestation and illegal land-use changes. While the Wildlife (Protection) Act of 1972 empowers state governments to declare community lands as reserves, the court recognized the need for a unified national policy to protect sacred groves as cultural reserves.

Recommendations:

  • Nationwide Survey: The Ministry of Environment, Forest, and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) was instructed to conduct a nationwide survey to map and assess sacred groves, identifying their size and extent.
  • Legal Protection: Sacred groves should be recognized as community reserves and protected under the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972.
  • State-Specific Measures: The Rajasthan government was specifically directed to carry out detailed mapping (both on-ground and satellite) of sacred groves within the state, ensuring that the groves are recognized for their ecological and cultural significance.

The Role of Sacred Groves in Conservation

Sacred groves play a pivotal role in the conservation of biodiversity. They serve as refuges for various plant and animal species, and the traditional practices associated with these groves, such as tree worship, discourage destructive activities like logging and hunting.

Ecological and Cultural Importance:

  • Sacred groves often act as critical biodiversity hotspots, preserving rare and indigenous species.
  • They help maintain clean water ecosystems and act as carbon sinks, contributing to climate mitigation.
  • Practices of non-interference with these areas have allowed flora and fauna to thrive over centuries.

Cultural Significance Across India

The importance of sacred groves is deeply embedded in India's diverse cultural heritage. They are considered the abode of deities, and various regions have unique names and rituals associated with these groves.

Examples of Sacred Groves in India:

  • Himachal Pradesh: Devban
  • Karnataka: Devarakadu
  • Kerala: Kavu
  • Rajasthan: Oran
  • Maharashtra: Devrai

Piplantri Village Model

A key example highlighted in the judgment was the Piplantri village in Rajasthan, where the community undertook a remarkable transformation of barren land into flourishing groves. The initiative, driven by local leadership, involves planting 111 trees for every girl child born, which has led to several environmental and social benefits.

Impact of Piplantri's Community Efforts:

  • Over 40 lakh trees have been planted, which has recharged the water table by 800-900 feet and lowered the local climate by 3-4°C.
  • The initiative has contributed to the reduction of female foeticide and empowered women's self-help groups.
  • The village now enjoys economic growth, better education opportunities, and increased local income.

Legal and Statutory Framework

Sacred groves are already recognized under existing Indian laws, notably the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, which allows states to declare sacred groves as community reserves. Additionally, the National Forest Policy of 1988 encourages the involvement of local communities in the conservation of forest areas, a principle supported by the Godavarman Case of 1996.

Key Legal Provisions:

  • Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972: Empowers state governments to declare sacred groves as community reserves.
  • National Forest Policy, 1988: Encourages community involvement in the conservation and protection of forests, including sacred groves.
  • Scheduled Tribes and Other Traditional Forest Dwellers (Recognition of Forest Rights) Act, 2006: Suggests empowering traditional communities as custodians of sacred groves.

Looking Ahead: The Need for Action

The Supreme Court has scheduled further hearings to assess the progress of the survey and mapping efforts by Rajasthan. The court also stressed the importance of empowering traditional communities to continue their role as custodians of sacred groves, ensuring their sustainable protection for future generations.

By recognizing the ecological and cultural significance of sacred groves and encouraging community-driven conservation efforts, the Supreme Court’s ruling sets a precedent for more inclusive environmental policies in India. This could also inspire similar initiatives in other parts of the world, promoting the protection of sacred natural spaces for their critical role in maintaining biodiversity and fostering sustainable communities.

The Costly Push for 100% Electrification of Indian Railways

  • 19 Dec 2024

Introduction

RITES Ltd., the consultancy arm of the Indian Railways, has secured two contracts to repurpose six broad gauge diesel-electric locomotives for export to African railways. These locomotives, originally designed for India’s broad gauge of 1,676 mm, will be modified for use on railways with the narrower Cape Gauge of 1,067 mm. While this is a commendable re-engineering effort, it also highlights a larger issue within Indian Railways: the unnecessary redundancy of functional diesel locomotives, leading to significant wastage of resources.

The Growing Problem of Idle Diesel Locomotives

As of March 2023, there were 585 diesel locomotives idling across the Indian Railways network due to electrification. This number has now reportedly grown to 760 locomotives, many of which still have more than 15 years of serviceable life. The root cause of this redundancy lies in the government’s mission to electrify the entire broad gauge network at an accelerated pace. This electrification push has resulted in the premature retirement of locomotives that could still serve the network for years, raising questions about the economic and environmental logic behind this decision.

The Justification for Electrification: Foreign Exchange and Environmental Concerns

The Indian government’s electrification drive is often justified on two primary grounds: saving foreign exchange by reducing the import of crude oil and reducing environmental pollution. Additionally, electrification is framed as a step toward a “green railway” powered by renewable energy sources like solar and wind. However, the reality of these claims is more complicated.

Foreign Exchange Savings: A Small Impact on National Diesel Consumption

While electrification may reduce India’s diesel consumption, the impact on national fuel use is minimal. Railways account for just 2% of the country’s total diesel consumption. A report by AC Nielsen in 2014 indicated that the transport sector consumed 70% of the total diesel, with railways accounting for only 3.24%. Even with 100% electrification, the savings in foreign exchange would have little impact on the country’s overall diesel consumption, leaving other sectors like trucking and agriculture as the main contributors.

Environmental Concerns: Shifting Pollution, Not Reducing It

The environmental argument for electrification is also flawed. Electricity in India is still largely generated from coal-fired power plants, with nearly 50% of the country’s electricity coming from coal. Since the Indian Railways is heavily involved in transporting coal, switching from diesel to electric locomotives simply shifts pollution from the tracks to the power plants. This means that the transition to electric traction will not result in a cleaner environment unless the country significantly reduces its reliance on coal. Without a substantial increase in renewable energy generation, the push for a “green railway” remains unrealistic.

The Dilemma of Retaining Diesel Locomotives for Strategic Purposes

Despite the goal of 100% electrification, a significant number of diesel locomotives will remain in service. Reports indicate that 2,500 locomotives will be kept for “disaster management” and “strategic purposes,” although it is unclear why such a large fleet is necessary for these purposes. Additionally, about 1,000 locomotives will continue to operate for several more years to meet traffic commitments. This suggests that even with a fully electrified network, Indian Railways will continue to rely on thousands of diesel locomotives, many of which have substantial residual service life left.

Financial Sustainability and Coal Dependency

The financial sustainability of this transition remains a concern. Currently, the Indian Railways generates a significant portion of its freight revenue from transporting coal—40% of its total freight earnings in 2023-24. If the railways become fully electrified, it will need to find alternative revenue sources, as coal is a primary contributor. Until non-coal freight options can replace this income, the financial health of the railways may be at risk.

Conclusion: Wasted Resources and Unmet Goals

The mission to electrify the Indian Railways, while ambitious, is an example of how vanity projects can lead to colossal waste. Thousands of diesel locomotives are being discarded prematurely, despite their potential to continue serving the network. The environmental and financial justifications for 100% electrification, while appealing in theory, fail to account for the complexities of India’s energy landscape. As a result, the drive to create a “green railway” is likely to fall short, leaving behind a legacy of wasted taxpayer money and unfinished goals.

Arctic Tundra: From Carbon Sink to Carbon Source

  • 18 Dec 2024

In News:

The Arctic tundra, a frozen, treeless biome, has historically been a vital carbon sink, absorbing vast amounts of carbon dioxide (CO?) and other greenhouse gases (GHGs). However, recent findings suggest that, for the first time in millennia, this ecosystem is emitting more carbon than it absorbs, a change that could have significant global consequences. This alarming shift was highlighted in the 2024 Arctic Report Card published by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).

The Arctic Tundra’s Role as a Carbon Sink

The Arctic tundra plays a crucial role in regulating the Earth's climate. In typical ecosystems, plants absorb CO? through photosynthesis, and when they die, carbon is either consumed by decomposers or released back into the atmosphere. In contrast, the tundra’s cold environment significantly slows the decomposition process, trapping organic carbon in permafrost—the permanently frozen ground that underpins much of the region.

Over thousands of years, this accumulation of organic matter has resulted in the Arctic storing an estimated 1.6 trillion metric tonnes of carbon. This figure is roughly double the amount of carbon in the entire atmosphere. As such, the tundra has served as a critical carbon sink, helping to mitigate global warming by trapping vast quantities of CO?.

Shifting Dynamics: Emission of Greenhouse Gases

Recent reports indicate a dramatic shift in the Arctic tundra’s role in the carbon cycle. Rising temperatures and increasing wildfire activity have disrupted the tundra’s balance, leading it to transition from a carbon sink to a carbon source.

Impact of Rising Temperatures

The Arctic region is warming at a rate approximately four times faster than the global average. In 2024, Arctic surface air temperatures were recorded as the second-warmest on record since 1900. This rapid warming is causing permafrost to thaw, which in turn activates microbes that break down trapped organic material. As this decomposition accelerates, carbon in the form of CO? and methane (CH?)—a more potent greenhouse gas—are released into the atmosphere.

The experts, explained the process by comparing thawing permafrost to meat left out of the freezer. Similarly, thawing permafrost accelerates the breakdown of trapped carbon.

The Role of Wildfires

In addition to warming temperatures, the Arctic has experienced a surge in wildfires in recent years. 2024 marked the second-highest wildfire season on record in the region, releasing significant amounts of GHGs into the atmosphere. Wildfires exacerbate the thawing of permafrost, creating a feedback loop where increased carbon emissions contribute further to warming, which, in turn, leads to more emissions.

Between 2001 and 2020, these combined factors caused the Arctic tundra to release more carbon than it absorbed, likely for the first time in millennia.

The Global Consequences of Emission

The transition of the Arctic tundra from a carbon sink to a carbon source is alarming, as it represents a significant amplification of global climate change. The release of additional CO? and CH? into the atmosphere further accelerates the greenhouse effect, leading to higher global temperatures. This warming is already having visible consequences around the world, from extreme weather events to rising sea levels.

If the Arctic tundra continues to emit more carbon than it absorbs, it could significantly exacerbate the climate crisis. The report underscores the urgency of addressing global emissions, as reducing greenhouse gases remains the most effective way to prevent further destabilization of this sensitive ecosystem.

Mitigating the Impact: The Path Forward

Despite the alarming trends, the Arctic Report Card suggests that it is still possible to reverse this process. By reducing global GHG emissions, it may be possible to slow the thawing of permafrost and allow the Arctic tundra to regain its role as a carbon sink. Scientists emphasize that mitigating climate change on a global scale is essential to prevent further emissions from the Arctic ecosystem.

Scientists, stressed the importance of emission reductions, stating, “With lower levels of climate change, you get lower levels of emissions from permafrost… That should motivate us all to work towards more aggressive emissions reductions.”

However, current trends suggest that achieving this goal may be challenging. A recent report from the Global Carbon Project indicates that fossil fuel emissions are likely to rise in 2024, with total CO? emissions projected to reach 41.6 billion tonnes, up from 40.6 billion tonnes in 2023.

Commitment to Eradicating Naxalism in Chhattisgarh by 2026

  • 17 Dec 2024

Overview

Union Home Minister Amit Shah has reiterated India's commitment to eliminate Naxalism in Chhattisgarh by March 31, 2026. He emphasized the progress made in the fight against Naxalism, highlighting key successes and outlining the strategy for the coming years.

Key Pointers

  • Government Commitment: Amit Shah emphasized the joint commitment of the Government of India and the Chhattisgarh state leadership to rid the state of Naxalism by 2026.
  • Security Forces’ Success: Over the past year, Chhattisgarh police neutralized 287 Naxalites, arrested around 1,000, and saw 837 surrenders.
  • Top Naxal Cadres Neutralized: The state forces successfully neutralized 14 high-ranking Naxal cadres.
  • President’s Police Colour Award: Chhattisgarh Police received the President's insignia within 25 years, a significant achievement for the state.

The Three-Pronged Strategy for Eliminating Maoist Insurgency

  1. Security Measures (Force)

Deployment of Security Forces

  • Enhanced Presence: Increased deployment of Central and State police forces in Left-Wing Extremism (LWE) areas.
  • Joint Operations: Coordinated operations between state and central forces, including CRPF and COBRA units.
  • Upgraded Technology: Incorporation of UAVs, solar lights, and mobile towers to enhance operational efficiency.

Operation SAMADHAN

  • Key Elements:
    • Smart Leadership: Leading with innovative strategies.
    • Aggressive Strategy: Swift, decisive action against insurgents.
    • Motivation and Training: Strengthening the capabilities of forces.
    • Actionable Intelligence: Real-time intelligence for effective operations.
    • Harnessing Technology: Using modern tech for strategic advantage.

2. Development Initiatives

Focused Development Schemes

  • PMGSY: Rural road connectivity under the Pradhan Mantri Gram Sadak Yojana.
  • Aspirational Districts Program: Improving infrastructure in Naxal-affected areas.
  • Skill Development: Targeted schemes in 47 LWE-affected districts to reduce unemployment.

Infrastructure Development

  • Special Infrastructure Schemes: Building schools, roads, and bridges in remote areas to integrate them into the mainstream economy.
  • Rehabilitation: Focus on providing rehabilitation for former Naxals through education and vocational training.

3. Empowerment (Winning Hearts and Minds)

Public Engagement

  • Tribal Empowerment: Strengthening communication with tribal communities to reduce alienation and mistrust.
  • Rehabilitation Policies: Surrender schemes offering incentives like education and financial aid to reintegrate former insurgents into society.

Maoism: Ideology and Background

What is Maoism?

  • Origin: A form of communism developed by Mao Tse Tung, focusing on armed insurgency to capture state power.
  • Core Beliefs: Maoists believe in violence and insurrection as legitimate means to overthrow the state and establish a People’s Democratic Republic.
  • Indian Maoism: The Communist Party of India (Maoist), formed in 2004, leads the largest Maoist insurgency in India.

Recent Achievements in Combatting Maoist Insurgency

Key Successes in 2023

  • Maoist-Free Villages: Villages in Dantewada declared "Maoist-free," a significant victory for the state.
  • Reduction in Security Forces’ Casualties: 14 deaths in 2024, a dramatic decrease from 198 deaths in 2007.
  • Infrastructure and Logistical Support: Enhanced use of helicopters and fortified police stations.

Government’s Commitment to Rebuilding

  • Rehabilitation and Welfare: The government is implementing policies to improve the living standards of affected families, including 15,000 houses for Naxal-affected regions.
  • Economic Development: Focus on building infrastructure and providing employment through skills training programs.

Challenges in Eliminating Naxalism

Socio-Economic Issues

  • Exploitation of Tribals: Marginalization of tribals due to displacement for mining and forestry.
  • Lack of Infrastructure: Basic amenities like roads, schools, and healthcare are absent in many areas.
  • Centralized Naxal Command: The CPI (Maoist) retains a strong leadership, despite fragmentation of its forces.

Governance and Trust Issues

  • Alienation of Local Populations: Ineffective governance and poor implementation of welfare schemes fuel local support for Naxal groups.
  • Resource Conflict: The Naxals exploit rich mineral resources in the region to fund their insurgency.

Way Forward

Governance and Economic Reforms

  • Tribal Empowerment: Form Tribal Advisory Councils as per the Fifth Schedule for better resource management.
  • Land Redistribution: Enforce the Land Ceiling Act to reduce inequality.
  • Livelihood Programs: Offer alternative livelihoods to reduce dependency on illegal activities.

Security Measures

  • Paramilitary Deployment: Specialized forces to secure tribal areas and enable local governance.
  • Resource Management: Ensure sustainable exploitation of natural resources, involving tribal communities in the decision-making process.

Peace Dialogues

  • Inclusive Policies: Engage in dialogue with Naxals to facilitate their reintegration into mainstream society.

Conclusion

Naxalism in India, particularly in Chhattisgarh, is a complex issue rooted in socio-economic inequalities, lack of development, and historical alienation of tribal communities. The government's approach, encapsulated in the SAMADHAN strategy, combines security operations with developmental initiatives and a focus on empowerment to tackle the problem. With a clear commitment to eliminate Naxalism by 2026, the Indian government is making significant strides in reducing violence, improving governance, and integrating affected communities into the mainstream.

How would a carbon market function?

  • 16 Dec 2024

In News:

COP29, the ongoing climate conference in Azerbaijan’s capital Baku, has given a fillip to the idea of using carbon markets to curb carbon emissions by approving standards that can help in the setting up of an international carbon market as soon as the coming year.

Introduction to Carbon Markets

  • Carbon markets allow the buying and selling of the right to emit carbon dioxide (CO2) into the atmosphere.
  • Governments issue certificates known as carbon credits, each representing the right to emit 1,000 kilograms of CO2.
  • The total number of credits issued is capped to control carbon emissions. Companies and individuals who don’t have credits cannot emit CO2.

Trading of Carbon Credits

  • Carbon Credit Trading: Companies holding more carbon credits than needed can sell them to others who need more, with the price determined by market forces.
  • Carbon Offsets: Businesses can also purchase carbon offsets, often provided by environmental NGOs, which promise to reduce emissions (e.g., by planting trees). These offsets counterbalance the firm’s carbon emissions.
  • The trading of both credits and offsets is designed to create financial incentives for companies to reduce their carbon footprint.

Advantages of Carbon Markets

  • Addressing Externalities: Carbon emissions are a classic example of an economic externality, where the costs of pollution are not reflected in market prices.
  • Market Efficiency: By allowing firms to buy and sell carbon credits, the system internalizes the cost of carbon emissions, encouraging businesses to reduce emissions to avoid higher costs.
  • Incentive for Emission Reduction: Carbon markets aim to create a financial reason for companies to lower their emissions, thus helping mitigate climate change.

Voluntary vs. Government-Mandated Carbon Markets

  • Voluntary Carbon Reporting: Many corporations prefer voluntary systems like the Carbon Disclosure Project (CDP) for reporting their emissions, fearing government-imposed restrictions.
  • Market Flexibility: Corporations like ExxonMobil and General Motors argue that carbon markets with freely traded credits allocate carbon allowances more efficiently than government-imposed limits. This allows firms to purchase credits from others, optimizing resource allocation without restricting output.
  • Corporate Resistance to Government Intervention: Firms are often reluctant to accept strict government budgets for carbon emissions, fearing increased operational costs and production limitations due to diverse supply chains.

Issues and Criticisms of Carbon Markets

  • Government Manipulation of Credit Supply: Governments may increase the number of carbon credits issued, leading to lower prices and reduced incentives for emission reductions.
  • Lack of Accountability in Carbon Offsets: Critics argue that some companies buy carbon offsets as a form of virtue signalling, without genuine concern for their environmental impact. This undermines the effectiveness of the offsets.
  • Government Mismanagement: Political decision-making may lead to the over-restriction of carbon credits, potentially slowing economic growth by limiting available emissions allowances. The ability of governments to accurately determine the optimal supply of carbon credits is a contentious issue.

The Concept of Carbon Credits and Their History

  • Introduction of Carbon Credits: Carbon credits were first introduced in the 1990s in the U.S., specifically through a cap-and-trade model designed to control sulfur dioxide emissions. This approach later expanded to include carbon emissions.
  • Role of Carbon Markets: In essence, these markets aim to create a financial mechanism where firms can trade the right to pollute, ensuring a balance between economic growth and environmental protection.

Criticism of Carbon Offsets

  • Effectiveness of Offsets: Experts are critical of carbon offsets, arguing that they do not always lead to meaningful reductions in emissions. For example, some companies may purchase offsets without ensuring that the projects are genuinely offsetting their emissions.
  • Moral Hazard: Critics suggest that offset programs may lead to firms simply paying for the right to pollute, rather than actually reducing emissions in their operations.

Conclusion

  • Carbon Markets as a Tool for Emission Reduction: Despite the criticisms, carbon markets remain a promising tool for mitigating climate change, provided they are carefully regulated and implemented.
  • The Future of Carbon Trading: As discussions at COP29 evolve, the development of international standards for carbon trading could potentially enhance the effectiveness of these markets, offering a viable path to global emission reductions.

Agrarian Crisis in India

  • 15 Dec 2024

Introduction

  • Supreme Court Committee Report: A high-level committee, appointed by the Supreme Court in September 2024, submitted its interim report on November 21, 2024, highlighting the severe distress in India's agricultural sector.
  • Key Focus Areas:
    • Income crisis faced by farmers
    • Rising debt burden
    • Farmer suicides
    • Stagnation in agricultural growth
    • Impact of climate change

Key Findings of the Supreme Court Committee Report

Income Crisis in Indian Agriculture

  • Daily Earnings: Farmers earn an average of just Rs 27 per day from agricultural activities, a meager income that makes it impossible to sustain a decent standard of living.
  • Average Household Income: Agricultural households have an average monthly income of Rs 10,218, far below the basic threshold for a decent life.

Escalating Debt Burden

  • Institutional Debt: In 2022-23, Punjab's institutional debt was Rs 73,673 crore, and Haryana's was Rs 76,630 crore.
  • Non-Institutional Debt: This burden is further exacerbated by non-institutional debt, contributing 21.3% of total debt in Punjab and 32% in Haryana.

Farmer Suicides

  • High Suicide Rates: Over 400,000 farmers and agricultural workers have committed suicide since 1995, primarily due to escalating debt and financial despair.
  • Survey Findings: In Punjab, a survey found 16,606 suicides among farmers and farm workers between 2000 and 2015.

Stagnation in Agricultural Growth

  • Growth Rates: Between 2014-15 to 2022-23, Punjab's agricultural growth was a mere 2% per year, and Haryana’s was 3.38%, far below the national average.

Disproportionate Employment

  • Workforce Participation: 46% of India’s workforce is employed in agriculture, but it contributes only 15% to national income. Many farmers face disguised unemployment and underemployment.

Impact of Climate Change

  • Environmental Degradation: Climate change, water depletion, erratic rainfall, and soil degradation are further destabilizing the agricultural sector and threatening food security.

Challenges Faced by the Agricultural Sector

1. Limited Access to Credit and Finance

  • Small Farmers: 86% of Indian farmers are small and marginal, struggling to access institutional credit, which limits their ability to invest in modern agricultural inputs.

2. Fragmented Landholdings

  • Small Landholdings: The average landholding is 1.08 hectares, insufficient for large-scale, efficient farming, limiting the adoption of modern agricultural techniques.

3. Outdated Farming Practices

  • Traditional Methods: Many farmers continue using traditional, inefficient farming practices due to limited access to modern technology.

4. Water Scarcity and Irrigation Issues

  • Dependence on Monsoons: 60% of cropped area is rainfed, and only 52% of gross sown area is irrigated, exacerbating vulnerability to droughts and erratic rainfall.

5. Soil Degradation and Erosion

  • Degraded Land: 30% of India's agricultural land is affected by soil degradation, leading to lower productivity and reduced resilience to pests.

6. Inadequate Agricultural Infrastructure

  • Post-Harvest Losses: Insufficient storage, cold chain, and rural infrastructure result in 15-20% post-harvest losses, further reducing farmers' income.

Government Schemes for Farmers' Welfare

  • PM Kisan Samman Nidhi Yojana: Direct income support for farmers.
  • PM Fasal Bima Yojana (PMFBY): Crop insurance scheme.
  • PM Krishi Sinchai Yojana (PMKSY): Irrigation schemes to enhance water availability.
  • e-NAM: National electronic market for better price realization.
  • Agriculture Infrastructure Fund: Financial support for infrastructure development.
  • Promotion of Farmer Producer Organizations (FPOs): Empowering farmers through collective marketing and production.

Recommendations for Addressing the Crisis

1. Loan Waivers and Debt Relief

  • Debt Alleviation: Immediate measures to reduce the crushing debt burden through loan waivers, a key factor behind farmer suicides.

2. Legal Recognition of Minimum Support Price (MSP)

  • MSP Protection: Granting legal backing to MSP to ensure farmers receive a fair price for their produce, reducing price volatility and income insecurity.

3. Promotion of Sustainable Farming

  • Organic Farming: Encouraging organic farming and crop diversification to improve soil health and reduce dependency on a few staple crops.
  • Climate-Resilient Agriculture: Adopting water-efficient practices, drought-resistant crops, and sustainable farming techniques.

4. Agricultural Marketing Reforms

  • Market Efficiency: Improving the agricultural marketing system by establishing farmer-friendly markets and reducing intermediaries to ensure better price realization.

5. Rural Employment Generation

  • Diversification: Creating non-agricultural employment opportunities in rural areas through skill development and promoting agro-based industries.

6. Climate Adaptation Measures

  • Water Management: Enhancing water management systems and promoting rainwater harvesting.
  • Resilience to Climate Change: Investing in climate-resilient infrastructure and farming technologies.

Implications of the Findings

Economic Impact

  • Agricultural Decline: Continued neglect of the agricultural sector poses a risk to India's economy, potentially leading to long-term economic instability and increased rural-urban migration.

Food Security

  • Threat to National Food Security: Declining agricultural productivity, exacerbated by climate change and inadequate reforms, threatens the country’s ability to meet food demands.

Social Stability

  • Farmer Suicides and Unrest: The ongoing crisis, marked by widespread suicides and growing despair, risks social instability and unrest, particularly in rural regions.

Conclusion: Urgent Need for Reform

The committee’s report underscores the critical need for comprehensive reforms in India’s agricultural sector to alleviate the crisis. Immediate action is required to address the debt burden, improve incomes, and ensure sustainable agricultural practices. Legal reforms like MSP recognition and debt relief, along with investments in infrastructure and climate resilience, are key to securing a stable future for Indian agriculture.

Artificial Solar Eclipse: Why Are Satellites Trying to Block the Sun?

  • 14 Dec 2024

Introduction

The European Space Agency (ESA) has launched Proba-3, a mission that will create an artificial solar eclipse to study the Sun's atmosphere, known as the corona. This mission aims to demonstrate new technology and address unresolved questions about the Sun's outer layers.

What is an Artificial Solar Eclipse?

  • Definition: An artificial solar eclipse mimics the natural phenomenon where the moon blocks sunlight, allowing detailed observation of the Sun’s corona.
  • Created By: The eclipse is created by two satellites, which align to block the Sun's light and generate a controlled shadow for scientific study.
  • Purpose: The goal is to study the Sun’s corona, particularly to understand why it is significantly hotter than the Sun’s surface.

How Does the Proba-3 Create an Eclipse?

Launch and Spacecraft

Proba-3 was launched on December 5 from the Satish Dhawan Space Centre in India. The mission uses two satellites:

  • Coronagraph Spacecraft (CSC): This spacecraft guides the other satellite.
  • Occulter Spacecraft (OSC): This satellite has a disk that creates a controlled shadow onto the CSC.

Formation Flying

Using Precise Formation Flying (PFF) technology, the two spacecraft maintain a precise distance of 150 meters (492 feet) apart, aligning perfectly with the Sun. This alignment mimics the effect of a solar eclipse.

Precision Requirements

The eclipse will need to maintain millimetre-level accuracy for up to six hours per orbit to provide scientists with stable observational conditions.

Mission Goals

  • Demonstrating PFF Technology: One of the primary objectives of the Proba-3 mission is to demonstrate PFF technology. This involves using GPS and inter-satellite radio links for positioning, as well as maintaining a precise distance between the two spacecraft.
  • Studying the Sun’s Corona: Another goal is to understand why the corona is hotter than the Sun's surface. The onboard instruments, including a coronagraph, will help with this research. The coronagraph will block out the Sun’s bright light, enabling clearer observations of the corona.
  • ASPICCS Coronagraph: The Proba-3 coronagraph, named the Association of Spacecraft for Polarimetric and Imaging Investigation of the Corona of the Sun (ASPICCS), is designed to observe the corona in high detail, mimicking the observational conditions of a total solar eclipse.

Why Is This Such a Big Deal?

  • Revealing the Sun’s Corona: The Sun’s corona is typically invisible because it is much less bright than the Sun’s surface. It can only be seen during a solar eclipse when the Moon blocks the Sun's light.
  • Predicting Space Weather: Studying the corona helps scientists predict space weather and geomagnetic storms, which can disrupt satellites and other systems on Earth.
  • Extended Observations: Unlike natural solar eclipses, which last only a few minutes, Proba-3 can provide six hours of observation time in each orbit (approximately 19 hours and 36 minutes), allowing for continuous study of the corona.

What is Precise Formation Flying (PFF) Technology?

  • Definition: PFF technology allows satellites to maintain exact positions and orientations relative to each other in orbit.
  • Mechanism: The technology uses GPS, inter-satellite radio links, and automated control systems to ensure alignment.
  • Implementation in Proba-3: In the Proba-3 mission, the Coronagraph and Occulter spacecraft stay 150 meters apart, using PFF to maintain millimetre-level precision, which is crucial for simulating a solar eclipse.
  • Benefits: PFF enhances mission accuracy and provides a platform for advanced observational techniques that will enable more detailed studies of the Sun's corona.

Conclusion

Proba-3 is a groundbreaking mission that will offer unprecedented insights into the Sun’s corona by simulating solar eclipses using advanced satellite technology. By studying the Sun’s outer layers, scientists aim to improve our understanding of space weather and the mysterious temperature anomaly of the corona.

India-Bhutan Relations

  • 13 Dec 2024

In News:

The December 2023 visit of Bhutan’s King and Queen to India highlights the enduring and strategic partnership between the two nations. Amidst growing Chinese influence and Bhutan’s domestic challenges, the visit holds significant geopolitical relevance, reinforcing India-Bhutan relations and underscoring Bhutan's critical role in India’s regional security.

Reaffirmation of India-Bhutan Relations

The visit reaffirmed the strong, time-tested partnership between India and Bhutan, rooted in mutual trust and cooperation. India reiterated its commitment to Bhutan's socio-economic development, increasing its financial aid for the 2024-2029 period from ?5,000 crore to ?10,000 crore. Notably, Bhutan’s flagship Gelephu Mindfulness City Project, championed by King Jigme Khesar, received strong Indian backing, reflecting India’s willingness to align with Bhutan’s developmental priorities.

Strategic Areas of Cooperation

Clean Energy and Hydropower

Bhutan remains central to India’s renewable energy strategy, particularly in hydropower, a vital part of Bhutan's economy. Bhutan exports the majority of its hydropower to India, reinforcing bilateral ties in the energy sector. This cooperation aligns with India’s regional energy security goals, with both nations seeking to strengthen clean energy initiatives.

Infrastructure Development

The visit also emphasized infrastructure projects, vital for enhancing Bhutan's connectivity. These projects are strategically significant, considering Bhutan's geostrategic importance in the Himalayas. Infrastructure development further strengthens the ties between the two nations, with a focus on mutual benefits and regional stability.

Geopolitical Context: China’s Growing Influence

China-Bhutan Border Disputes

The border issue with China has been ongoing since 1984. In 2023, Bhutan and China signed an agreement to expedite the settlement and demarcation of their borders. China’s push for resolution is part of its broader strategy to reduce India’s influence in Bhutan. The disputed areas, particularly those near India’s Siliguri Corridor, hold strategic importance for New Delhi. Any territorial adjustments could undermine India’s access to its Northeastern states.

Chinese Influence and Economic Engagement

China has been constructing villages along disputed border areas, altering ground realities and establishing civilian hubs that could serve as military outposts. Additionally, China is offering economic incentives to Bhutan, including promoting tourism and investing in Bhutan’s telecom sector, seeking to draw the country into closer economic and diplomatic alignment.

India’s Role in Bhutan’s Security and Sovereignty

Strategic Dependence on India

Bhutan's small military relies heavily on Indian support for training and defense. The 2017 Doklam standoff, where Indian forces intervened to prevent China from constructing a road in disputed territory, underscored India's crucial role in safeguarding Bhutan’s territorial integrity.

Friendship Treaty

The India-Bhutan Friendship Treaty is the cornerstone of their bilateral relations, ensuring Bhutan's sovereignty while reinforcing India's role in Bhutan’s foreign and defense policies. India's increased financial support aims to counter China’s economic influence in Bhutan.

Challenges for Bhutan

Balancing India and China

Bhutan is navigating a delicate balance between preserving its historical ties with India and engaging with China, which offers economic benefits. However, Bhutan’s sovereignty concerns limit its ability to make independent diplomatic decisions.

Domestic Issues

Bhutan faces challenges such as youth migration and limited economic diversification. Over-reliance on hydropower and a lack of industrial development make it vulnerable to external pressures, particularly from China.

The Strategic Importance of Bhutan to India

Geopolitical Buffer

Bhutan's location is vital for India’s security, especially in relation to the Siliguri Corridor, a narrow land link connecting India’s Northeast. Any Chinese presence in Bhutan’s disputed regions could disrupt access to this crucial corridor.

Hydropower Collaboration

Bhutan’s hydropower exports are central to India’s renewable energy strategy, and their cooperation in this area ensures mutual benefits.

Way Forward

India must continue to prioritize Bhutan’s development needs, ensuring robust financial and infrastructural support. Proactive engagement is necessary to address Bhutan’s concerns, particularly in light of China’s growing influence. Additionally, India should support Bhutan’s economic diversification to reduce reliance on external actors.

 

Impeachment of Judges

  • 12 Dec 2024

In News:

The recent controversy surrounding remarks made by Justice Shekhar Kumar Yadav of the Allahabad High Court has prompted calls for his impeachment. During an event organized by the Vishwa Hindu Parishad (VHP), Justice Yadav made statements that were perceived as communal, leading to concerns over judicial impartiality. This incident has reignited discussions about the impeachment process for judges in India, highlighting the delicate balance between judicial independence and accountability.

Impeachment Process for Judges in India

In India, the impeachment process for judges, although not explicitly mentioned in the Constitution, serves as a mechanism to ensure judicial accountability while safeguarding judicial independence. The process is outlined under Articles 124 and 218 of the Indian Constitution, which govern the removal of Supreme Court and High Court judges, respectively.

Grounds for Impeachment

Judges in India can be removed on two grounds:

  • Proved Misbehavior: Conduct that breaches the ethical standards of the judiciary.
  • Incapacity: A judge’s inability to perform judicial duties due to physical or mental infirmity.

These grounds are clearly specified to prevent arbitrary removal, ensuring that the process remains fair and just.

Steps in the Impeachment Process

  • Initiation of Motion: The process begins when a motion for impeachment is introduced in Parliament, either in the Lok Sabha or Rajya Sabha. The motion must be supported by at least 100 members of the Lok Sabha or 50 members of the Rajya Sabha. This ensures significant parliamentary backing before the motion proceeds.
  • Formation of an Inquiry Committee: If the motion is admitted, a three-member inquiry committee is constituted. This includes a Supreme Court judge, the Chief Justice of a High Court, and a distinguished jurist. The committee conducts a thorough investigation into the allegations.
  • Committee Report and Parliamentary Debate: Following the investigation, the committee submits its findings. If the judge is found guilty, the report is debated in Parliament. Both Houses must approve the motion by a special majority, which requires a two-thirds majority of members present and voting, as well as a majority of the total membership.
  • Final Removal by the President: Once the motion is passed in both Houses, it is presented to the President, who issues the removal order.

Safeguards Against Misuse

The impeachment process includes several safeguards to prevent misuse:

  • High Threshold for Initiation: The requirement for significant support from Parliament ensures that the process cannot be initiated frivolously.
  • Objective Inquiry: The inquiry committee, comprising legal experts, guarantees an impartial investigation.
  • Parliamentary Scrutiny: Both Houses of Parliament are involved, ensuring that the process undergoes democratic scrutiny.

Challenges and Precedents

Despite the rigorous process, no Supreme Court judge has been successfully impeached to date. Past attempts, such as those against Justice V. Ramaswami (1993) and Chief Justice Dipak Misra (2018), were unsuccessful. These instances demonstrate the complexities involved in the impeachment process.

Guidelines for Judges’ Public Statements

Judges in India are entitled to freedom of speech, but they are expected to exercise caution in public statements to maintain the dignity of their office. The Bangalore Principles of Judicial Conduct (2002) and the Restatement of Values of Judicial Life (1997) outline key principles for judicial conduct, including:

  • Non-Interference in Political Matters: Judges should refrain from commenting on political issues to avoid any perception of bias.
  • Impartiality: Judges must avoid statements that could prejudice ongoing cases or align them with specific ideologies.

Upholding Judicial Impartiality in a Diverse Society

To maintain impartiality, judges must interpret laws based on constitutional values of justice, equality, and secularism. Furthermore, the judiciary must ensure representation from diverse backgrounds to foster inclusivity and reduce systemic biases. Training programs focused on cultural competence and social diversity are essential to ensure that judges are sensitive to the needs of marginalized communities.

Conclusion

The impeachment process, while stringent, plays a critical role in maintaining judicial accountability in India. As seen in the case of Justice Yadav, judicial conduct, particularly public statements, must be carefully scrutinized to preserve the integrity of the judiciary. Upholding impartiality and adhering to constitutional values are paramount in ensuring that the judiciary continues to function as a neutral arbiter in India’s democracy.

Analysis of Female Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR) Trends in India: 2017-2023

  • 11 Dec 2024

In News:

The Economic Advisory Council to the Prime Minister (EAC-PM) recently released a working paper revealing critical insights into the trends of female Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR) in India from 2017-18 to 2022-23. The report highlights an overall increase in female LFPR, with rural areas experiencing more significant growth compared to urban areas. This article delves into the key findings, regional disparities, influencing factors, and government initiatives aimed at promoting female workforce participation.

Key Findings on Female LFPR

The period between 2017-18 and 2022-23 witnessed a notable rise in female LFPR, both in rural and urban regions, though rural areas saw higher gains.

Rural female LFPR surged by approximately 69%, from 24.6% to 41.5%, while urban female LFPR increased from 20.4% to 25.4%. This consistent growth was observed even after excluding unpaid family workers or household helpers, reinforcing the long-term trend of increased female workforce participation across India.

However, a significant point of discussion in the report was the regional variations in female LFPR. States like Bihar, Punjab, and Haryana have consistently reported low female LFPR, which is noteworthy considering that Punjab and Haryana are among India's wealthiest states, while Bihar is the poorest. This regional disparity suggests that economic prosperity does not automatically translate into higher female labour force participation, highlighting deeper socio-cultural and structural barriers.

Regional Disparities in Female LFPR

The report emphasizes the persistent challenges in northern and eastern India. Punjab and Haryana, despite their affluence, have struggled with low female LFPR. Cultural and societal norms in these regions may contribute to the underrepresentation of women in the workforce, particularly in rural areas where traditional gender roles are more entrenched.

On the other hand, Bihar, the poorest state in India, had the lowest female LFPR in the country, particularly in rural areas. However, there has been a significant improvement in recent years, especially among rural married women. This indicates a slow but positive shift in attitudes towards female employment in these states.

In contrast, northeastern states such as Nagaland and Arunachal Pradesh have shown significant improvements in female LFPR, particularly in rural areas. These states have demonstrated that regional and cultural factors can also create conducive environments for female workforce participation.

Demographic Factors Affecting Female LFPR

Several demographic patterns influence female LFPR, including marital status and age. The report notes that married men consistently exhibit higher LFPR compared to women. Marriage, however, has a detrimental impact on female LFPR, particularly in urban areas, where women often face greater familial and societal pressures to prioritize domestic responsibilities over formal employment.

Age dynamics also play a crucial role in female LFPR trends. The data reveals a bell-shaped curve for female participation, peaking around the age of 30-40 years and sharply declining thereafter. This is in stark contrast to male LFPR, which remains almost universally high between the ages of 30-50 before gradually declining. These trends underscore the challenges women face in sustaining their participation in the workforce due to familial responsibilities, especially after marriage and childbirth.

Government Initiatives and the Rise in Female LFPR

The government's focus on women-led development is evident through various schemes aimed at increasing female workforce participation. Programs like Mudra Loans, the Drone Didi Scheme, and the Deendayal Antyodaya Yojana have been particularly instrumental in empowering women, especially in rural areas. These initiatives provide women with access to financial resources, skill development opportunities, and avenues for entrepreneurship, all of which contribute to the rise in female LFPR.

The EAC-PM's analysis acknowledges the positive impact of these government schemes, but it also stresses the need for further research to evaluate their long-term effectiveness. While the descriptive analysis highlights a substantial increase in female LFPR between 2017-18 and 2022-23, especially in rural areas, there remains a need for continuous monitoring and assessment of these schemes to ensure their sustained impact.

Conclusion: A Positive Shift, but Challenges Remain

The increase in female LFPR across India from 2017-18 to 2022-23 signals a positive shift in employment trends, particularly in rural areas. However, regional disparities, societal norms, and demographic factors continue to pose challenges. The rise in female LFPR is encouraging, but it is essential to understand the deeper socio-economic factors that shape women's participation in the workforce.

Government schemes have contributed to this growth, but future research is necessary to gauge their long-term effects and ensure that women’s participation in the workforce is not just a short-term trend. It is crucial that the government continues to refine policies that support women in overcoming socio-cultural and economic barriers, especially in less prosperous states like Bihar, Punjab, and Haryana. Sustained efforts, including education, skill development, and gender-sensitive policies, will be key to ensuring that the rise in female LFPR is both inclusive and long-lasting.

The analysis by the EAC-PM provides an essential framework for policymakers to design more targeted interventions to address regional disparities and create a more inclusive labor market for women in India.

No-Confidence Motion Against Rajya Sabha Chairman

  • 10 Dec 2024

In News:

In December 2024, around 60 opposition MPs from the INDIA (Indian National Developmental, Inclusive Alliance) bloc submitted a notice to the Rajya Sabha Secretariat, seeking the removal of Vice President Jagdeep Dhankhar from his position as the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha. This unprecedented move has sparked significant political debate, with the opposition accusing Dhankhar of partisanship and bias in the conduct of parliamentary proceedings.

The Charges Against Jagdeep Dhankhar

Allegations of Bias and Partisanship

The opposition has raised several allegations against Dhankhar since his appointment as the Rajya Sabha Chairman in August 2022. These include:

  • Partiality towards the ruling government: The opposition claims that Dhankhar has shown bias in favor of the BJP, with accusations of repeatedly denying the Leader of the Opposition, Mallikarjun Kharge, the opportunity to respond to statements made by Prime Minister Narendra Modi and BJP President J.P. Nadda.
  • Interference in Parliamentary Debates: Opposition MPs have accused Dhankhar of disrupting their speeches and allowing ruling party members to dominate parliamentary discussions.
  • Unbecoming Remarks: The notice also refers to comments made by Dhankhar, including praising the Rashtriya Swayamsevak Sangh (RSS) and recalling his association with "so-called cultural organizations." These actions, according to the opposition, violate the non-partisan nature expected of the Chairman.

The Constitutional Framework for Removal of the Vice-President

Legal Provisions for Impeachment

The Vice-President of India, who also serves as the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha, is elected for a five-year term. Article 67 of the Indian Constitution outlines the procedure for his removal:

  • Notice Requirement: A motion for the removal of the Vice-President must be introduced in the Rajya Sabha with a prior 14-day notice.
  • Approval Process: The resolution must be passed by a majority in the Rajya Sabha and then approved by the Lok Sabha.
  • Grounds for Removal: The Vice-President can only be removed through a resolution that is supported by a majority in both Houses of Parliament.

Opposition’s Plan and Challenges

Despite lacking the necessary numbers in the Rajya Sabha to succeed in the impeachment motion, the opposition's move is aimed at sending a political message to the BJP, expressing dissatisfaction with the functioning of the Parliament under Dhankhar’s leadership.

The current session of Parliament is scheduled to end on December 20, 2024, leaving little time for the motion to gain traction. The opposition also does not have the numbers needed for a majority in the Rajya Sabha, which complicates the chances of success for the motion.

Historical Precedents for Similar Resolutions

The last notable attempt to remove a parliamentary officer occurred in 2020 when the opposition moved a no-confidence motion against Rajya Sabha Deputy Chairman Harivansh. This motion was prompted by his decision to extend the session during the contentious farm Bills debate. Although the motion was discussed, it did not result in any significant change.

Similarly, there have been instances where motions to remove Lok Sabha Speakers have been moved but not passed, such as against G.V. Mavalankar in 1951, Sardar Hukam Singh in 1966, and Balram Jakhar in 1987.

Role and Significance of the Vice-President in India

Constitutional Role

The Vice-President of India holds the second-highest constitutional office, primarily functioning as the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabha. His duties include:

  • Presiding over Rajya Sabha Sessions: The Vice-President ensures the smooth functioning of the Rajya Sabha and maintains order during debates. He does not typically vote except in the case of a tie.
  • Acting President: In the absence, resignation, or death of the President, the Vice-President assumes the role of the Acting President.

Removal Process Under Article 67

  • Article 67(b) of the Constitution specifies the process for the removal of the Vice-President, requiring a 14-day notice and approval from both Houses of Parliament. This provision ensures that any such resolution receives due consideration and is not moved hastily.

Implications for Parliamentary Democracy

  • Risks to Parliamentary Integrity: Opposition leaders have expressed concern that the current political environment is eroding the integrity of India’s parliamentary system. They argue that by misusing constitutional offices for partisan ends, the ruling government risks undermining the democratic foundations of the country.

Significance of the Move

  • Although the opposition may not succeed in removing Dhankhar, the notice serves as a powerful symbol of resistance. The move underscores the opposition’s commitment to defending the principles of parliamentary democracy and the need for impartiality in the conduct of parliamentary affairs.

Conclusion

The opposition’s push to remove Vice-President Jagdeep Dhankhar from his position as the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha highlights the growing political tensions in India’s Parliament. While the move may not succeed due to the lack of numerical support, it brings to the forefront critical issues regarding the independence of constitutional offices and the functioning of parliamentary democracy in India. The developments around this notice will continue to be a significant point of discussion as the winter session of Parliament draws to a close.

How Minilateralism is Reshaping Global Order

  • 09 Dec 2024

Introduction

Minilateralism refers to the growing trend of smaller, more focused international groupings of countries that cooperate on specific issues or regional challenges. It contrasts with the traditional multilateral frameworks, which are often large, slow-moving, and bogged down by lengthy debates and consensus-building. Today, minilateral platforms are increasingly driving global decision-making and shaping the future of international relations.

Rise of Minilateralism

Failure of Multilateralism

  • Multilateralism's Decline: Traditional multilateral institutions like the United Nations (UN) are increasingly seen as ineffective due to their bureaucratic nature and the challenges in building consensus among a large number of diverse nations.
  • Global Challenges: Emerging global issues, such as climate change, terrorism, and cybersecurity, require faster and more effective responses. The inability of multilateral platforms to address these challenges efficiently has led to a preference for smaller, more agile groupings.

Emergence of New Powers

  • Multipolar World: The rise of new powers such as China, India, and Brazil has contributed to the formation of minilateral groupings. These rising powers desire a greater role in global governance but may not yet have the ability or desire to reshape the international order through large, cumbersome institutions.
  • Minilateralism as "Multipolarity Lite": Minilateralism allows these countries to assert themselves as regional or global poles without the need for the complexities of full-scale multilateralism.

India's Role in Minilateralism

Strategic Positioning

  • Geopolitical Context: India’s strategic location in South Asia, its status as part of the Global South, and its proximity to a rising China have all influenced its approach to minilateralism. India’s multi-aligned approach reflects its desire for flexibility in navigating the complex and shifting global geopolitical landscape.
  • Diverse Partnerships: India is a key player in various minilateral arrangements, balancing its relationships with both traditional Western powers and rising Eastern nations, often serving as a bridge between competing geopolitical interests.

Minilateralism as a Solution

  • Diversification Over Alignment: India's preference for minilateralism stems from the desire to avoid over-reliance on any single bloc or country. By engaging in multiple minilateral platforms, India seeks to hedge its interests, balancing its strategic objectives between competing global forces.

The Role of Minilateral Forums

Decision-making and Action

  • Faster Action: Minilateral groupings facilitate quicker decision-making by bringing together like-minded countries to focus on specific issues, allowing for more decisive action than traditional multilateral bodies.
  • Conflict Resolution: While minilateral platforms may not directly resolve conflicts, they offer indirect pathways for addressing geopolitical tensions by fostering dialogue and cooperation among countries with divergent interests.

Examples of Minilateral Groupings

  • BRICS: The grouping of Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South Africa is an example of a minilateral arrangement where emerging powers cooperate on shared economic and political interests.
  • Quad: The Quadrilateral Security Dialogue (comprising the United States, India, Japan, and Australia) is a prominent example of minilateralism focused on regional security, particularly in the Indo-Pacific region.
  • Other Regional Groupings: Minilateralism also manifests in regional arrangements such as the ASEAN-led East Asia Summit or the India-Japan-Australia trilateral forum, each addressing specific regional and global concerns.

Conclusion

Shaping the Future of Global Order

Minilateralism is reshaping the international order by fostering closer, more flexible cooperation between countries on a wide range of issues. As multilateralism faces growing challenges, smaller, more focused partnerships offer a faster and more efficient means of addressing global problems. India's pivotal role in these groupings reflects its desire to navigate a complex geopolitical landscape while maintaining strategic autonomy. The rise of minilateralism marks a significant shift in global governance, one that could define the future of international relations.

Beware of Digital Wedding Invites

  • 08 Dec 2024

In News:

In the peak wedding season, cyber fraudsters are increasingly exploiting digital wedding invitations to hack into mobile phones. These fraudulent invites, often disguised as PDF wedding cards shared on WhatsApp, contain embedded malware that allows cybercriminals to gain full access to the victim's phone. This includes access to sensitive financial data, making individuals vulnerable to fraud. The Lucknow Police Cyber Cell has issued a public warning, urging citizens to be cautious and avoid opening suspicious files.

How the Scam Works

The scam involves cybercriminals sending out malware-laden wedding invitations. Once the recipient opens the file, the malware infects their phone, enabling the fraudsters to remotely control the device. From there, they can access sensitive information, including bank account details, and may even transfer funds without the victim’s consent.

Preventive Measures and Cyber Hygiene

To protect against such scams, individuals should follow these preventive steps:

  • Avoid Suspicious Files: Do not open files from unknown senders, particularly those with extensions like APK, PIF, or VBS. It is crucial to verify the sender's number—legitimate Indian numbers typically begin with +91.
  • Turn Off Auto-Download: Disabling automatic downloads on platforms like WhatsApp can prevent files from being opened unknowingly.
  • Enable Two-Step Verification: Strengthen security by activating two-step verification on your digital accounts and setting strong passwords.
  • Report Fraud Immediately: In case of suspicious activity, contact the cybercrime helpline at 1930 or file a complaint on the official cybercrime portal (www.cybercrime.gov.in).

The Lucknow Police’s “Cyber Pathshala” campaign aims to raise awareness and educate the public on digital scams, particularly during the wedding season when these frauds are at their peak.

Cybersecurity Challenges in India

This emerging digital threat is part of a broader trend of sophisticated cybercrimes in India. Cyber fraudsters are increasingly using manipulative tactics, such as phishing, fake digital arrests, and malware attacks. In 2024, India witnessed a significant rise in ransomware attacks, frauds targeting financial institutions, and supply chain vulnerabilities.

India's legislative and institutional frameworks are evolving to address these challenges. Key measures include:

  • The Information Technology Act, 2000, which lays the foundation for tackling cybercrimes.
  • The Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023, which focuses on protecting personal data.
  • The Indian Computer Emergency Response Team (CERT-In), which coordinates national responses to cyber incidents.

Additionally, new frameworks like the National Cyber Security Policy, 2013, and initiatives such as Cyber Surakshit Bharat and the Indian Cyber Crime Coordination Centre (I4C), aim to fortify India's digital landscape and promote cybersecurity.

Emerging Cyber Threats

As India becomes more digitally connected, the threat landscape continues to evolve:

  • Digital Arrest Scams: Fraudsters impersonate law enforcement to extort money from victims, claiming they are under investigation for fictitious crimes.
  • Ransomware: Attacks on critical infrastructure, such as financial institutions and healthcare systems, have led to operational disruptions and financial losses.
  • Deepfake Technology: The rise of AI-generated deepfakes poses significant risks, including misinformation and financial fraud.
  • Internet of Things (IoT) Vulnerabilities: The rapid adoption of IoT devices has created new security challenges, with many devices lacking adequate protection.

Strategic Recommendations for Enhancing Cybersecurity

To counter these evolving threats, India must focus on several strategic areas:

  • Digital Literacy Campaigns: Nationwide efforts to improve digital literacy, particularly targeting vulnerable groups such as rural populations and senior citizens.
  • Stronger IoT Security Protocols: Mandating secure design and certification for IoT devices.
  • AI-Driven Threat Intelligence: Implementing AI-based tools for early threat detection and response in critical sectors.
  • Mandatory Cybersecurity Audits: Regular audits of critical infrastructure, especially in sectors like healthcare, banking, and utilities.
  • Public-Private Collaboration: Strengthening partnerships to address challenges such as cryptocurrency fraud, ransomware, and dark web-enabled crimes.

Conclusion

The rise of digital fraud, including the manipulation of wedding invitations for malicious purposes, highlights the need for enhanced cybersecurity measures in India. By improving public awareness, investing in technological solutions, and reinforcing legal and institutional frameworks, India can better protect its citizens from the growing threat of cybercrime. A proactive and informed approach is essential to secure the digital future of the nation.

Building on the Revival of the Manufacturing Sector

  • 07 Dec 2024

In News:

India’s manufacturing sector has shown remarkable signs of recovery and growth, thanks to strategic policy initiatives like the Production Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme. To fully capitalize on this momentum and become a global manufacturing hub, however, deeper reforms are needed.

The Success of the PLI Scheme: A Catalyst for Growth

The government’s PLI scheme has been instrumental in revitalizing key sectors like electronics, pharmaceuticals, automobiles, and textiles. It has not only boosted production but also increased exports and job creation. According to the Annual Survey of Industries (ASI) 2022-23, manufacturing output grew by an impressive 21.5%, while gross value added (GVA) increased by 7.3%. Sectors such as basic metals, refined petroleum products, food products, and motor vehicles, which are beneficiaries of the PLI scheme, contributed 58% of total manufacturing output, registering growth of 24.5%.

This success underlines the potential of India’s manufacturing sector, with the PLI scheme acting as a key enabler. However, while the recovery is promising, there are significant challenges to overcome to sustain long-term growth.

Expanding PLI Incentives to New Sectors

The PLI scheme has largely benefitted traditional industries like electronics and automotive manufacturing. To further accelerate growth, the scope of the scheme must be extended to labour-intensive sectors such as apparel, footwear, and furniture, which hold immense potential for job creation. Additionally, emerging sectors like aerospace, space technology, and maintenance, repair, and overhaul (MRO) services offer new avenues for growth. By diversifying the incentive structure to these sectors, India could establish a more robust and resilient manufacturing ecosystem.

In sectors like capital goods, where India is heavily import-dependent, the potential for reducing supply chain vulnerabilities is significant. Moreover, promoting green manufacturing and advanced technologies could further bolster India’s competitiveness in global markets.

Addressing the Divergence Between Output and Value Addition

Despite a surge in production, India’s gross value added (GVA) has not kept pace with output growth. The ASI data shows that input prices soared by 24.4% in 2022-23, indicating that while production volumes are up, industries are grappling with high input costs. A more streamlined import regime could mitigate these costs. Simplifying tariffs into a three-tier system (for raw materials, intermediates, and finished goods) would reduce input costs, enhance competitiveness, and improve integration into global value chains.

Regional Imbalance: A Barrier to Inclusive Growth

The manufacturing sector’s growth is heavily concentrated in a few states such as Maharashtra, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, and Uttar Pradesh, which account for over 54% of manufacturing GVA. This concentration not only restricts equitable development but also hampers the overall growth potential of the sector. To address this, it is crucial that states actively participate in India's manufacturing growth story by implementing market reforms in land, labour, and power. Additionally, infrastructure development and investment promotion in less industrialized regions could help balance growth and ensure that the benefits of manufacturing reach all corners of the country.

Fostering MSME Growth and Enhancing Female Workforce Participation

Micro, small, and medium enterprises (MSMEs) contribute about 45% of India’s manufacturing GDP and employ around 60 million people. To scale these businesses and integrate them into global value chains, PLIs should be tailored to accommodate their needs, such as lowering capital investment thresholds and reducing production targets.

Equally important is the enhancement of female workforce participation. Studies suggest that India’s manufacturing output could increase by 9% if more women enter the workforce. The development of supportive infrastructure, such as hostels and childcare facilities, can play a pivotal role in enabling women’s participation, thus driving inclusive growth.

Conclusion: The Path Forward

To transform into a developed economy by 2047, India must continue to focus on strengthening its manufacturing sector. According to industry estimates, manufacturing’s share in Gross Value Added (GVA) can rise from 17% to 25% by 2030 and further to 27% by 2047. Achieving this will require sustained efforts to enhance competitiveness through business reforms, cost reduction, and policy support. India is well-positioned to harness its manufacturing potential, but timely and focused interventions are necessary to turn this vision into reality.

Reflections on Baku’s ‘NCQG Outcome’ at COP29

  • 06 Dec 2024

In News:

The recently concluded COP29 in Baku, Azerbaijan, has brought the spotlight back to climate finance, particularly in relation to the New Collective Quantified Goal (NCQG). As the global community grapples with the escalating climate crisis, the discussions and outcomes from the COP29 summit are pivotal in shaping future climate action. However, the agreed-upon financial targets, which were expected to be a step towards transformative climate justice, have sparked significant concern, particularly among developing nations.

The Need for Climate Finance: A Global Responsibility

Climate finance is essential for supporting developing countries, which bear the brunt of climate change despite contributing minimally to global emissions. The Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) has stressed the need to limit global warming to 1.5°C above pre-industrial levels, yet current policies could lead to a rise of up to 3.1°C. To counter this, developing nations require financial assistance to transition to green energy, adapt to climate impacts, and implement their Nationally Determined Contributions (NDCs).

The upfront costs of green technologies, such as renewable energy, are high, and while they offer long-term savings, their initial investments remain a significant barrier. Additionally, many developing countries face fiscal constraints, making it even more difficult to adopt climate-friendly technologies without external financial support.

The Role of NCQG in Addressing Climate Finance Gaps

The NCQG, an evolution of the 2010 $100 billion annual commitment, aims to provide clarity and accountability in climate financing. Established as a framework to ensure financial resources for climate action, the NCQG should ideally focus on the evolving needs of the Global South. However, at COP29, the target agreed upon was a mere $300 billion annually by 2035, far from the $1.3 trillion that developing countries had requested. This amount falls drastically short of what is necessary to meet the ambitious climate goals and fails to represent a transformative shift in financial flows.

Key Challenges and Discontent with the Outcome

Several challenges have been raised regarding the COP29 outcome:

  • Equity and Responsibility: Developed nations are expected to bear a larger share of the financial burden, in line with the principle of 'Common but Differentiated Responsibilities' (CBDR). However, the NCQG outcome bypasses this principle, offering insufficient funds for climate action in developing countries.
  • Types of Finance: There is debate over whether private finance should count towards the goal. Developing countries have stressed the importance of public finance over loans, which add to their debt burdens.
  • Insufficient Commitment: While the $300 billion annual pledge is a step forward, it is far from adequate. The global climate finance needs, estimated at $5 trillion to $7 trillion by 2030, require bolder commitments from developed nations.

India's Position and Domestic Efforts

At COP29, India emphasized the need for developed countries to fulfill their financial commitments, advocating for at least $1.3 trillion annually until 2030. India, despite being a developing country, has also made significant strides in climate action through domestic policies. The 2024-25 Union Budget allocated substantial funds to renewable energy projects, including ?19,100 crore for the Ministry of New and Renewable Energy. These efforts demonstrate India’s commitment to climate goals, though the financial flow remains insufficient.

Conclusion: The Road Ahead

The NCQG outcome at COP29 highlights the ongoing disparities in global climate finance commitments. While the $300 billion annual target is a step forward, it does not align with the urgency or scale required to tackle the climate crisis. To achieve a just and equitable transition to a sustainable future, future climate finance discussions must prioritize transparency, accountability, and fairness, ensuring that developed nations shoulder their fair share of the responsibility. The path forward requires unwavering international cooperation to ensure that developing countries receive the necessary support to mitigate and adapt to the impacts of climate change.

Scrapping of Windfall Gains Tax

  • 05 Dec 2024

Introduction

On December 2, 2024, the Indian government withdrew the windfall gains tax on domestic crude oil production and fuel exports (diesel, petrol, and aviation turbine fuel - ATF). This tax, initially imposed in July 2022, was introduced in response to the surge in global oil prices following Russia's invasion of Ukraine. Its removal reflects the current global oil market stability and the improved fuel supply situation in India.

What is Windfall Gains Tax?

Definition

A windfall tax is a levy imposed on unexpected profits that result from extraordinary events, such as geopolitical crises or market disruptions. In the case of India, the tax was applied to the super-normal profits of oil producers and fuel exporters due to the global energy turmoil.

Key Features

  • Domestic Crude Oil: The Special Additional Excise Duty (SAED) was imposed on domestic crude oil production.
  • Fuel Exports: A combination of SAED and Road and Infrastructure Cess (RIC) was levied on diesel, petrol, and ATF exports.

Rationale Behind the Windfall Gains Tax

Immediate Context

The tax was introduced during a period of soaring global crude oil prices, driven by the Russia-Ukraine conflict. India, which imports over 85% of its oil, faced concerns about the availability of fuels and the impact of rising prices on domestic consumption. The tax was seen as a way to:

  • Ensure Domestic Fuel Supply: By discouraging excessive fuel exports during a period of global supply chain disruptions.
  • Increase Government Revenue: The tax aimed to capture windfall profits and offset the duty cuts on domestic fuel sales.

Global Context

Other countries also implemented similar windfall taxes during this period, as energy companies saw record profits due to the price surge.

Decline in Windfall Gains Tax Revenue

Revenue Collection

The windfall gains tax initially raised significant revenue, but the amount has decreased over time due to falling global oil prices:

  • FY 2022-23: Rs 25,000 crore
  • FY 2023-24: Rs 13,000 crore
  • FY 2024-25 (so far): Rs 6,000 crore

This decline, combined with reduced oil prices, led to the tax being effectively inactive before its formal withdrawal.

Withdrawal of the Windfall Gains Tax

Reasons for the Withdrawal

  • Global Stabilization: Crude oil prices, which had exceeded $100 per barrel, have now stabilized under $75 per barrel, with no immediate signs of a significant price surge.
  • Domestic Fuel Availability: There is now a robust fuel supply in the domestic market, making the tax less necessary.
  • Declining Revenues: With the tax generating diminishing returns, it was no longer economically viable for the government to maintain it.

Impact of the Scrapping

The government's move to scrap the windfall gains tax is seen as a signal of stability and predictability in the taxation regime. It assures the oil industry that the government is confident in the stability of global oil prices and supply chains.

Criticism of the Windfall Tax

Industry Opposition

The windfall tax faced opposition from the oil industry, which argued that it:

  • Reduced Profitability: The tax limited the profits of publicly listed companies like ONGC and Reliance Industries.
  • Discouraged Oil Production: By making the taxation environment unpredictable, it deterred investment in oil exploration and production in a country that is heavily dependent on oil imports.
  • Created Uncertainty: Frequent revisions of the tax led to an unstable business environment.

Conclusion

The scrapping of the windfall gains tax is a significant policy shift. It not only provides relief to oil companies but also signals a more predictable and stable taxation regime. By withdrawing the tax, the government is fostering a conducive environment for future investments in domestic oil production and signaling its confidence in the stability of global oil prices. This move is a crucial step in ensuring that India’s energy policies remain adaptable and aligned with the evolving global market conditions.

Current Representation of Women in CAPFs

  • 04 Dec 2024

In News:

The Central Armed Police Forces (CAPFs) of India, comprising forces like CRPF, BSF, CISF, and others, play a crucial role in maintaining internal security. Women’s participation in these forces has been historically limited, but recent efforts have focused on increasing their representation. As of 2024, women constitute only 4.4% of the total personnel in CAPFs, highlighting the slow progress despite various initiatives.

Current Representation and Changes Over Time

  • Overall Representation: Women make up 4.4% of the 9.48 lakh-strong CAPFs. Within this, the Central Industrial Security Force (CISF) has the highest representation at 7.02%, followed by the Sashastra Seema Bal (SSB) at 4.43%, Border Security Force (BSF) at 4.41%, Indo-Tibetan Border Police (ITBP) at 4.05%, Assam Rifles at 4.01%, and Central Reserve Police Force (CRPF) at 3.38%.
  • Growth of Women Personnel: From 15,499 women in 2014, the number has tripled to 42,190 in 2024, reflecting a steady increase in recruitment. However, the percentage remains low despite these gains.
  • Recruitment Trends: In 2024, 835 women were recruited, with 5,469 more in the process. In 2025, 4,138 women are expected to be recruited.

Government Efforts and Parliamentary Committee Recommendations

  • Policy Measures: The government has introduced several steps to encourage women’s participation in CAPFs, such as reservations in constable-level positions: one-third for CRPF and CISF, and 14-15% for border forces like BSF, SSB, and ITBP.
  • Challenges in Recruitment: Despite these policies, recruitment has not kept pace with the targets. The 2022 Parliamentary Committee on Home Affairs expressed disappointment over the “abysmally low” number of women in CAPFs, noting that women made up only 3.68% of the forces at that time.
  • Recommendations by Parliamentary Committees:
    • The Home Affairs Committee recommended fast-tracking phase-wise recruitment of women, particularly in CISF and CRPF.
    • The Standing Committee on Personnel (2023) suggested “soft postings” for women to avoid difficult working conditions, especially in remote or strenuous terrains. It also called for reservations for transgender individuals.
    • In 2024, further steps like fee waivers, relaxed physical standards, and provisions for maternity and child care leave were introduced to make the work environment more inclusive.

Reasons Behind Low Representation

  • Cultural Barriers: Traditional gender roles and societal expectations deter many women from pursuing careers in security forces.
  • Work Environment: The demanding nature of the job, which includes postings in remote areas and high-risk operations, makes it less appealing, especially for women with family responsibilities.
  • Infrastructure Issues: Lack of adequate accommodation, sanitation facilities, and safety measures for women are deterrents to joining and retaining female personnel.

Conclusion and Future Outlook

Although the representation of women in CAPFs has seen improvement, it remains below expectations due to persistent challenges. The government’s continuous focus on recruitment reforms, better working conditions, and policy incentives will be crucial to achieve gender parity in these forces. As societal attitudes evolve and the infrastructure improves, more women may be encouraged to serve in these vital security roles. Future efforts must include targeted recruitment drives and creating a more inclusive and supportive environment to enhance women’s participation in CAPFs.

India's Gig Economy: Growth and Impact on Employment

  • 03 Dec 2024

Introduction

India’s gig economy is experiencing rapid growth, with projections indicating it will significantly contribute to the national economy and employment generation. A recent report by the Forum for Progressive Gig Workers estimates the gig economy could reach $455 billion by the end of 2024, growing at a 17% compounded annual growth rate (CAGR). By 2030, it may add 1.25% to India’s GDP and create 90 million jobs.

What is the Gig Economy?

  • Definition: The gig economy refers to a labor market based on short-term, flexible jobs, typically facilitated by digital platforms. Gig workers, also called freelancers or independent contractors, are compensated for each task they complete.
  • Key Features:
    • Flexibility in work schedule and location.
    • Task-based employment through digital platforms.
    • Common sectors: e-commerce, transportation, delivery services, and freelance work.

Status of the Gig Economy in India

  • Market Growth:
    • In 2020-21, India had 7.7 million gig workers, which is expected to grow to 23.5 million by 2029-30.
    • Key sectors contributing to growth include e-commerce, transportation, and delivery services.
  • Driving Factors:
    • Digital Penetration: With over 936 million internet subscribers and 650 million smartphone users, digital infrastructure is a key enabler of the gig economy.
    • Startup and E-commerce Growth: The rise of startups and e-commerce platforms has increased demand for flexible labor.
    • Changing Work Preferences: Younger generations seek work-life balance, opting for flexible gig work.

Gig Economy and Employment Generation

  • Contribution to GDP: The gig economy is expected to contribute 1.25% to India’s GDP by 2030.
  • Job Creation:
    • The gig economy could create up to 90 million jobs by 2030.
    • It is estimated that by 2030, gig workers will comprise 4.1% of India’s total workforce.
  • Benefits:
    • Women’s Empowerment: Gig work provides financial independence and flexibility, especially benefiting women in the workforce.
    • Regional Growth: Tier-II and Tier-III cities are seeing accelerated growth in gig work opportunities.

Challenges Faced by Gig Workers

  • Job Insecurity: Many gig workers experience instability in their employment, especially in low-skilled jobs.
  • Income Volatility: Earnings are unpredictable, and workers face difficulty in financial planning.
  • Regulatory Gaps: There is no comprehensive legal framework to protect gig workers’ rights and ensure fair working conditions.
  • Delayed Payments: A significant number of workers face delayed payments, affecting their financial well-being.
  • Skill Development: Many workers report a lack of opportunities for career advancement and skill development.

Government Initiatives for Gig Workers

  • Code on Social Security, 2020: Recognizes gig workers and aims to extend social security benefits, though it lacks comprehensive coverage.
  • e-Shram Portal & Welfare Schemes: Initiatives like Pradhan Mantri Shram Yogi Maandhan Yojana and PMJJBY aim to provide financial security to gig workers.
  • State-level Initiatives:
    • Rajasthan’s Platform-Based Gig Workers Act (2023) focuses on registration and welfare.
    • Karnataka’s bill mandates formal registration and grievance mechanisms.

The Way Forward

  • Legal Reforms: India can draw from international models like California and the Netherlands, where gig workers are reclassified as employees to ensure protections such as minimum wages and regulated working hours.
  • Portable Benefits System: Implementing a system where gig workers can access benefits like healthcare and retirement plans regardless of their employer.
  • Skill Development: Strengthening collaborations with vocational institutions to enhance skills and improve earning potential.
  • Technological Solutions: Establishing robust feedback mechanisms for workers to report exploitation and ensure fairness within the gig economy.

Conclusion

The gig economy in India is poised to become a significant driver of economic growth and job creation. However, addressing challenges such as income volatility, job insecurity, and regulatory gaps is crucial to ensuring sustainable growth.

NITI Aayog’s Framework for Future Pandemic Preparedness

  • 02 Dec 2024

Introduction

In response to the evolving threat of pandemics, NITI Aayog has released an Expert Group report titled "Future Pandemic Preparedness and Emergency Response — A Framework for Action." The report offers a strategic blueprint for India to enhance its pandemic preparedness, drawing from the lessons learned during the COVID-19 crisis and global best practices. This framework aims to create a rapid, well-coordinated response system for future public health emergencies.

Rationale Behind the Expert Group

The COVID-19 pandemic underscored the vulnerability of global and national health systems to emerging infectious diseases. As future pandemics are inevitable, especially with increasing zoonotic threats, India has taken a proactive step in planning for such eventualities. The WHO has warned that 75% of future pandemics may be zoonotic, caused by pathogens transmitted from animals to humans.

Key Findings from COVID-19 Response

India's response to COVID-19 highlighted several strengths and weaknesses in the public health system. Key efforts included developing vaccines, enhancing research and development frameworks, and deploying digital tools for data management across its 1.4 billion population. However, gaps were identified in governance, data management, and cross-sectoral coordination. These lessons have been integrated into the expert group’s framework for future preparedness.

The 100-Day Response Framework

A crucial aspect of the report is the emphasis on the first 100 days of a pandemic. The expert group argues that a rapid response within this period is essential for minimizing the impact of any outbreak. The framework outlines a detailed roadmap for preparedness, which includes tracking, testing, treating, and managing outbreaks efficiently. A robust system for quick deployment of countermeasures, including vaccines and treatments, is pivotal during these critical days.

Four Pillars of Pandemic Preparedness

The report's recommendations are organized around four pillars:

  • Governance, Legislation, Finance, and Management:
    • Proposes a new Public Health Emergency Management Act (PHEMA) to address modern pandemic needs.
    • Creation of an empowered group of secretaries (EGoS) for rapid decision-making and coordination.
  • Data Management, Surveillance, and Predictive Tools:
    • Calls for a unified data platform to aggregate and analyze data for timely decision-making.
    • Emphasizes strengthening genomic surveillance and establishing a national biosecurity network.
  • Research, Innovation, and Infrastructure:
    • Recommends a high-risk innovation fund to support research on diagnostics, vaccines, and therapeutics.
    • Suggests enhancing manufacturing capacity and building biosafety containment facilities.
  • Partnerships and Community Engagement:
    • Stresses the importance of private sector involvement and community engagement in managing pandemics.
    • Proposes a risk communication unit at the National Centre for Disease Control (NCDC) to manage public information and prevent misinformation.

International and National Collaboration

The report underscores the need for cross-border collaboration, aligning India’s efforts with international frameworks such as the WHO’s revised International Health Regulations and the Pandemic Accord negotiations. Collaboration with global institutions, academia, and the private sector is essential for sharing data, technology, and expertise during health crises.

Lessons from Past Epidemics

The report draws lessons from several past epidemics, including SARS, H1N1, and Ebola, which revealed the importance of timely diagnostics, coordinated surveillance, and rapid response. These lessons highlight the need for stronger international regulations, integrated data systems, and enhanced public-private partnerships in tackling future pandemics.

Conclusion and Recommendations

The framework offers actionable recommendations to strengthen India’s pandemic preparedness. From institutionalizing governance structures and creating a dedicated pandemic fund to enhancing surveillance and fostering innovation, these steps are designed to ensure rapid response and minimize the impact of future health crises. By focusing on governance, data management, research, and community partnerships, India aims to build a resilient health system capable of facing future challenges effectively.

Digital Arrests

  • 01 Dec 2024

In News:

In 2024, India has witnessed an alarming rise in cybercrime, particularly a new scam called "digital arrests." This type of fraud involves criminals impersonating law enforcement officials to extort money from victims. With more than 92,000 people targeted and ?2,141 crore defrauded from victims, these scams are rapidly becoming a significant concern for the public and law enforcement.

Nature of ‘Digital Arrests’

The modus operandi of digital arrest scams is sophisticated and emotionally manipulative. Cybercriminals contact victims through video calls, often using fake police officers' profiles and official documents to build credibility. They accuse victims of serious crimes such as money laundering or drug trafficking, claiming urgent action is needed to avoid arrest. The scammers create a false atmosphere of fear and urgency, convincing the victim to transfer large sums of money under the pretext of settling legal dues.

A notable example involves Ruchi Garg, who was targeted by scammers posing as police officers, falsely claiming her son was involved in a major scam. She was coerced into transferring ?80,000 before realizing it was a scam. Similar cases have affected hundreds, with perpetrators using AI-generated voices and fake visuals to amplify the deception.

The Growth of Cybercrime in India

Digital arrest scams are part of a broader increase in cybercrime in India. The Indian Cyber Crime Coordination Centre (I4C) has reported a rise in cyber fraud, with financial losses exceeding ?27,900 crore between 2021 and 2024. The most significant sources of these losses include stock trading scams, Ponzi schemes, and digital arrest frauds. As criminals adapt to emerging technologies and use social engineering tactics, the scale and complexity of scams are growing.

The surge in cybercrimes is fueled by vulnerabilities in India's digital landscape. With over 95 crore Internet users, many people, particularly the elderly or less tech-savvy, remain susceptible to such fraud. Cybercriminals often exploit this lack of awareness, combining fear and confusion to manipulate victims.

International Scope and Challenges

One of the challenges in combating digital arrests is the transnational nature of cybercrime. Scams often originate from countries like China, Cambodia, and Myanmar, where "scam compounds" run operations to train individuals in fraudulent techniques. These groups use virtual private networks (VPNs) and encrypted apps to conceal their identities and locations, making it difficult for Indian authorities to trace them.

Moreover, the involvement of mule bank accounts to launder defrauded money complicates investigations. Thousands of such accounts are identified and blocked regularly, but the flow of money continues through multiple channels, including cryptocurrencies.

Government Efforts and Preventive Measures

To address the growing menace of digital frauds, the Indian government has initiated several measures. The I4C, launched in 2020, aims to strengthen the response to cybercrimes by coordinating with various law enforcement agencies. The National Cyber Crime Reporting Portal allows citizens to report cyber fraud, while real-time alerts are sent to banks to prevent financial losses.

Additionally, the Cyber Crime Coordination Centre and other initiatives like Cyber Surakshit Bharat and CERT-In are working to enhance cybersecurity awareness and support victims. The Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023, also aims to regulate data security, which can reduce the sale of personal data on the dark web, a key enabler of these scams.

Conclusion

‘Digital arrests’ exemplify the evolving nature of cybercrimes in India. As digital threats become more complex and widespread, it is essential for citizens to remain vigilant and informed. Effective law enforcement, technological innovations, and public awareness are critical to reducing the impact of these scams and safeguarding the digital economy.

Biomedical Waste Regulations

  • 30 Nov 2024

The Emergence of HIV and Global Panic

In 1983, scientists Luc Montagnier and Robert Gallo independently identified the virus responsible for AIDS. By the mid-1980s, HIV/AIDS was perceived as a biological death sentence, with the virus primarily attacking immune cells, making medical intervention difficult. The epidemic quickly became associated with fear, ignorance, and stigma, as it was often linked to marginalized groups.

The "Syringe Tide" Incident and Public Outrage

In August 1987, the U.S. faced a public health crisis when discarded medical waste, including syringes and blood vials, washed up on beaches along the Atlantic coast. Known as the "Syringe Tide," this incident shocked the public and fueled anxiety, especially when children were seen playing with syringes. Traced to improper waste disposal in New York City, the event highlighted the hazardous nature of medical waste, which had been previously underestimated. Combined with the HIV/AIDS epidemic, this incident amplified public fear and economic losses of up to $7.7 billion due to the decline in tourism.

U.S. Response: Medical Waste Tracking Act of 1988

The widespread outrage led to the U.S. government passing the Medical Waste Tracking Act in 1988. This was the first law to formally categorize hospital waste as hazardous. The Act introduced stringent guidelines for the handling, transportation, and disposal of medical waste, establishing systemic regulation and oversight. It marked a significant turning point in both public health and environmental safety, changing how medical waste was managed in the healthcare sector.

India’s Journey in Biomedical Waste Management

Initial Steps and Delays

While the U.S. responded swiftly to the crisis, India’s approach to managing biomedical waste was slower. In 1986, India enacted the Environmental Protection Act, which marked the country’s first significant step towards environmental conservation. That same year, India identified its first HIV case. However, biomedical waste was not yet recognized as hazardous, and the Hazardous Waste (Management and Handling) Rules of 1989 failed to address the issue. As a result, local bodies were left to manage waste disposal, leading to inefficiencies.

Judicial Intervention and Legislative Action

In the 1990s, as pollution levels rose, particularly in urban areas like Delhi, the inadequacies of the system became apparent. In the landmark case Dr. B.L. Wadehra vs. Union of India (1996), the Supreme Court criticized Delhi’s waste management system, calling the city an "open garbage dump." This judgment led to a nationwide conversation on waste management and resulted in the Biomedical Waste (Management and Handling) Rules of 1998, marking the formal recognition of hospital waste as hazardous. The rules empowered the Central and State Pollution Control Boards to regulate waste disposal, ensuring accountability.

The Link Between HIV and Biomedical Waste Regulations

The HIV crisis highlighted the need for safe disposal practices to protect the environment and healthcare workers. While India charted its own course, the global response to HIV, particularly the U.S. model, influenced India’s approach to biomedical waste management. Over the years, India has made significant progress, with amendments to the rules in 2016 and 2020 to improve waste management technology and ensure safe disposal.

Current Challenges and Progress

  • Ongoing Issues in Biomedical Waste Management: Despite significant progress, challenges remain, especially in rural and resource-limited areas. Mishandling of biomedical waste continues to pose risks, and healthcare professionals still face occupational hazards. Gaps in compliance and awareness persist, but the system’s progress is undeniable.

Conclusion

The HIV/AIDS epidemic, while tragic, indirectly led to significant improvements in healthcare waste management. As the crisis highlighted the dangers of improper waste disposal, it spurred legislative and systemic changes that have contributed to safer healthcare environments. The progress in biomedical waste management demonstrates that crises can often lead to long-term improvements.

National Mission on Natural Farming (NMNF)

  • 29 Nov 2024

In News:

The Union Cabinet recently approved the launch of the National Mission on Natural Farming (NMNF), marking a significant shift in the government's approach to agriculture. This initiative, a standalone Centrally Sponsored Scheme under the Ministry of Agriculture & Farmers' Welfare, aims to promote natural farming across India, focusing on reducing dependence on chemical fertilizers and promoting environmentally sustainable practices.

What is Natural Farming?

Natural farming, as defined by the Ministry of Agriculture, is a chemical-free agricultural method that relies on inputs derived from livestock and plant resources. The goal is to encourage farmers to adopt practices that rejuvenate soil health, improve water use efficiency, and enhance biodiversity, while reducing the harmful effects of fertilizers and pesticides on human health and the environment. The NMNF will initially target regions with high fertilizer consumption, focusing on areas where the need for sustainable farming practices is most urgent.

Evolution of Natural Farming Initiatives

The NMNF is not an entirely new concept but a scaled-up version of the Bhartiya Prakritik Krishi Paddhti (BPKP) introduced during the NDA government's second term (2019-24). The BPKP was part of the larger Paramparagat Krishi Vikas Yojna (PKVY) umbrella scheme, and natural farming was also promoted along the Ganga River under the NamamiGange initiative in 2022-23. With the renewed focus on natural farming following the 2024 elections, the government aims to extend the lessons learned from BPKP into a comprehensive mission mode, setting a clear direction for sustainable agriculture.

In Budget speech for 2024-25, it was announced a plan to initiate one crore farmers into natural farming over the next two years. The mission will be implemented through scientific institutions and willing gram panchayats, with the establishment of 10,000 bio-input resource centers (BRCs) to ensure easy access to the necessary inputs for natural farming.

Key Objectives

The NMNF aims to bring about a paradigm shift in agricultural practices by:

  • Expanding Coverage: The mission plans to bring an additional 7.5 lakh hectares of land under natural farming within the next two years. This will be achieved through the establishment of 15,000 clusters in gram panchayats, benefiting 1 crore farmers.
  • Training and Awareness: The mission will establish around 2,000 model demonstration farms at Krishi Vigyan Kendras (KVKs), Agricultural Universities (AUs), and farmers' fields. These farms will serve as hubs for training farmers in natural farming techniques and input preparation, such as Jeevamrit and Beejamrit, using locally available resources.
  • Incentivizing Local Inputs: The creation of 10,000 bio-input resource centers will provide farmers with easy access to bio-fertilizers and other natural farming inputs. The mission emphasizes the use of locally sourced inputs to reduce costs and improve the sustainability of farming practices.
  • Farmer Empowerment: 30,000 Krishi Sakhis (community resource persons) will be deployed to assist in mobilizing and guiding farmers. These trained individuals will play a key role in generating awareness and providing on-ground support to the farmers practicing natural farming.
  • Certifications and Branding: A major aspect of the mission is to establish scientific standards for natural farming produce, along with a national certification system. This will help in creating a market for organically grown produce and encourage more farmers to adopt sustainable practices.

Targeting High Fertilizer Consumption Areas

The Ministry of Agriculture has identified 228 districts in 16 states, including Uttar Pradesh, Punjab, Maharashtra, and West Bengal, where fertilizer consumption is above the national average. These districts will be prioritized for the NMNF rollout, as they have high fertilizer usage but low adoption of natural farming practices. By focusing on these areas, the mission seeks to reduce the over-dependence on chemical fertilizers and foster a transition to more sustainable farming practices.

Benefits of Natural Farming

The NMNF aims to deliver multiple benefits to farmers and the environment:

  • Cost Reduction: Natural farming practices can significantly reduce input costs by decreasing the need for costly chemical fertilizers and pesticides.
  • Soil Health and Fertility: By rejuvenating the soil through organic inputs, natural farming improves soil structure, fertility, and microbial activity, leading to long-term agricultural sustainability.
  • Climate Resilience: Natural farming enhances resilience to climate-induced challenges such as drought, floods, and waterlogging.
  • Healthier Produce: Reduced use of chemicals results in safer, healthier food, benefitting both farmers and consumers.
  • Environmental Conservation: The promotion of biodiversity, water conservation, and carbon sequestration in soil leads to a healthier environment for future generations.

Conclusion

The launch of the National Mission on Natural Farming represents a critical step toward transforming India's agricultural practices into a more sustainable and environmentally friendly model. By targeting regions with high fertilizer usage, providing farmers with the tools and knowledge for natural farming, and creating a system for certification and branding, the government hopes to make natural farming a mainstream practice. As India continues to grapple with the challenges of climate change, soil degradation, and health risks from chemical inputs, the NMNF provides a promising framework for sustainable agriculture that benefits farmers, consumers, and the environment alike.

India’s Urban Infrastructure

  • 28 Nov 2024

Introduction

India’s urban population is projected to double from 400 million to 800 million by 2050. This demographic shift presents both challenges and opportunities for transforming the country’s urban infrastructure. To meet the growing needs of urban areas, India will require an investment of approximately ?70 lakh crore by 2036, a figure significantly higher than current spending levels.

Financial Challenges in Urban Infrastructure

  • Investment Gap
    • The current annual investment in urban infrastructure stands at ?1.3 lakh crore, which is only 28% of the ?4.6 lakh crore needed annually.
    • A large portion of the existing investment, around 50%, is directed towards basic urban services, with the remainder allocated to urban transport.
  • Municipal Finances
    • Municipal finances have remained stagnant at 1% of GDP since 2002.
    • Despite increased transfers from the central and state governments, municipal bodies face financial strain.
    • The contribution of municipal own-revenue has decreased from 51% to 43%, indicating a reduced financial independence.
  • Revenue Collection Inefficiencies
    • Urban local bodies (ULBs) are collecting only a small fraction of their potential revenues, with property tax collections representing just 0.15% of GDP.
    • Cost recovery for essential services like water supply and waste management ranges between 20% and 50%, pointing to a significant funding gap.
  • Underutilization of Resources
    • Cities like Hyderabad and Chennai utilized only 50% of their capital expenditure budgets in 2018-19.
    • Central schemes such as AMRUT and the Smart Cities Mission also showed suboptimal fund utilization, with utilization rates of 80% and 70%, respectively.
  • Decline in Public-Private Partnerships (PPPs)
    • Investments through PPPs in urban infrastructure have seen a sharp decline, from ?8,353 crore in 2012 to ?467 crore in 2018.
    • This drop is attributed to limited project-specific revenues and inadequate funding mechanisms.

Structural and Administrative Challenges

  • Weak Governance and Fragmented Management
    • Fragmented governance and limited administrative autonomy hinder effective urban planning and resource allocation.
    • Municipal bodies often lack the ability to undertake long-term planning and project execution due to these governance challenges.
  • Climate Vulnerability and Sustainability: Urban areas are increasingly vulnerable to climate risks like floods and heatwaves. However, many urban infrastructure projects fail to incorporate climate resilience in their planning, exacerbating the long-term vulnerability of investments.
  • Inadequate Land Management
    • There is poor coordination between land use planning and infrastructure development, resulting in urban sprawl and inefficient transportation systems.
    • Opportunities to capitalize on the land value generated by metro and rail projects remain underutilized.

Measures for Transforming Urban Infrastructure

  • Streamline Revenue Collection: Leverage technology to improve property tax collection systems and enhance cost recovery in essential services.
  • Enhance Fund Utilization: Strengthen municipal capacities for effective project planning and incentivize the timely use of allocated grants.
  • Scale Public-Private Partnership (PPP) Investments: Develop a pipeline of bankable projects and create risk-sharing mechanisms to attract private sector investments.
  • Decouple Project Preparation from Funding: Ensure that infrastructure projects are thoroughly prepared for financial, social, and environmental sustainability before seeking funding.
  • Promote Urban Innovation: Establish urban innovation labs and encourage public-private-academic collaborations to foster the adoption of advanced technologies.
  • Empower Municipalities: Grant municipalities greater financial autonomy, enabling them to raise capital through municipal bonds and other debt mechanisms.
  • Integrated Urban Planning: Align infrastructure development with land use, transport, and housing requirements, while integrating climate resilience into planning.
  • Capacity Building: Invest in the training of municipal staff to improve governance and financial management capabilities.

Conclusion

India’s expanding urban population presents a major opportunity for economic growth. However, addressing the financial and structural challenges in urban infrastructure is crucial for harnessing this potential. By adopting a combination of short-term actions, medium-term strategies, and long-term reforms, India can create sustainable, resilient urban infrastructure that meets the growing needs of its cities, fostering inclusive development and long-term prosperity.

The Controversy around the Sambhal Mosque

  • 27 Nov 2024

Introduction

The Shahi Jama Masjid in Sambhal, Uttar Pradesh, has become a flashpoint in a larger religious and legal dispute after a petition was filed questioning its historical origins. Alleging that the mosque was built on the site of an ancient Hindu temple, the case has triggered both legal challenges and violent clashes, raising concerns about communal harmony and the protection of religious sites.

Background of the Dispute

On November 19, 2024, a petition was filed in the Sambhal district court, claiming that the 16th-century Jama Masjid was constructed over the site of an ancient Hari Har Mandir. This claim mirrors similar petitions filed in other parts of India, including Varanasi, Mathura, and Dhar, where Hindu groups have sought to alter the religious character of mosques they believe were built on temple sites. The petitioners in the Sambhal case include advocate Hari Shanker Jain, a key figure in the Gyanvapi and Mathura disputes.

Survey and Clashes

The Sambhal court ordered a survey of the mosque on November 19, 2024, to investigate the historical claims. The initial phase of the survey, conducted peacefully, involved mosque authorities and local police. However, a second survey on November 24 escalated tensions, as it was accompanied by a procession led by a local priest chanting Hindu slogans. Protests soon turned violent, leading to stone-pelting, police firing, and at least five deaths, including two teenagers. Locals accused the police of excessive force, while the police denied allegations of shooting.

The Mosque’s Historical Context

The Shahi Jama Masjid was built by Mughal Emperor Babur's general, Mir Hindu Beg, around 1528. It is one of the three mosques constructed during Babur's reign, the other two being in Panipat and Ayodhya. Architectural studies suggest it was constructed using stone masonry with plaster, and while some historians believe it was built on a pre-existing structure, the mosque’s historical context is complex. Local Hindu tradition holds that the site was originally a Vishnu temple, with the belief that Kalki, the tenth avatar of Vishnu, will arrive there.

Legal Implications: The Places of Worship Act, 1991

The dispute touches upon the Places of Worship Act, 1991, which mandates the preservation of the religious character of all places of worship as they existed on August 15, 1947. The Act was designed to prevent further disputes over religious sites, except for the Babri Masjid case, which was already under litigation at the time. The petitioners in the Sambhal case argue that the religious character of the mosque should be altered, contradicting the Act’s provisions.

Challenges to the Places of Worship Act

The Places of Worship Act has been criticized for barring judicial review and preventing any changes to the religious status of sites that existed before India’s independence. Some legal experts suggest that while an inquiry into the religious nature of a place might be permissible, changing that character would violate the Act. The ongoing legal challenges in the Supreme Court, including cases from Varanasi, Mathura, and now Sambhal, highlight the complexities of reconciling India’s legal framework with communal sensitivities.

Conclusion

The Sambhal mosque dispute underscores the challenges in balancing India’s legal framework with religious and communal dynamics. While the Places of Worship Act aims to preserve the status quo, petitions challenging it have revived contentious debates over historical monuments and their religious significance. As the legal proceedings continue, the case will likely have far-reaching implications for India’s secular fabric and the preservation of communal harmony.

29th UN Climate Change Conference (COP29)

  • 26 Nov 2024

In News:

The 29th UN Climate Change Conference (COP29), held in Baku, Azerbaijan, focused on enhancing climate finance, adaptation measures, and global cooperation.

Key Outcomes of COP29:

  • Climate Finance: A new goal was set to triple climate finance for developing countries to USD 300 billion annually by 2035. The total climate finance target aims for USD 1.3 trillion annually by 2035.
  • Carbon Markets: The conference operationalized Article 6 of the Paris Agreement, which establishes frameworks for carbon credit trading between countries. It also launched the Paris Agreement Crediting Mechanism, ensuring safeguards for human rights and the environment.
  • Transparency and Adaptation: COP29 saw 13 countries submit their Biennial Transparency Reports, promoting greater accountability. The Baku Adaptation Roadmap was launched to speed up National Adaptation Plans (NAPs) in Least Developed Countries (LDCs).
  • Gender and Inclusivity: A new Gender Action Plan was developed, and the Lima Work Programme on Gender was extended for another 10 years. Over 55,000 people, including civil society, Indigenous peoples, and youth, participated.
  • Global Climate Action: The 2024 Yearbook of Global Climate Action highlighted the role of non-Party stakeholders like businesses and sub-national actors in combating climate change.

India’s Role at COP29: India played an active role in highlighting resilient infrastructure initiatives like the Coalition for Disaster Resilient Infrastructure (CDRI) and advocated for financial resources to support Small Island Developing States (SIDS). India also pushed for solar energy adoption through the International Solar Alliance (ISA) and promoted gender-inclusive climate policies. India co-hosted the LeadIT summit with Sweden, focusing on industrial decarbonization.

Challenges at COP29:

  • Inadequate Finance: Despite ambitious targets, many countries felt the financial commitments were insufficient and distant.
  • Private Sector Dependency: The reliance on private sector contributions raised concerns about the reliability of funding.
  • Emission Reduction Gaps: There was a lack of sufficient pledges to meet the 1.5°C global warming target, with rising emissions.
  • Geopolitical Conflicts: Disputes over issues like the Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM) hindered progress.

India’s Carbon Credit Framework:

India introduced the Energy Conservation (Amendment) Act, 2022, establishing a domestic carbon market and setting a legislative framework for carbon credit trading. This aligns with India’s NDCs and aims to support sustainable growth while reducing emissions. However, concerns about the integrity of carbon credits and potential "greenwashing" need to be addressed through rigorous verification systems.

Conclusion:

COP29 marked progress in scaling up climate finance, carbon markets, and adaptation efforts, but significant challenges remain, especially in finance, emission reductions, and geopolitical cooperation. India's initiatives in carbon credit frameworks and resilience are steps toward a sustainable future. Moving forward, a collaborative, transparent, and adaptive approach is crucial to meet global climate goals.

Challenges in Municipal Financing

  • 25 Nov 2024

Introduction

Municipal corporations (MCs) in India are essential service providers in urban areas, but they face severe financial constraints, which hinder their ability to provide quality services. While urban India contributes almost 60% of the nation's economic output, MCs are heavily reliant on state and central government transfers, limiting their financial autonomy and operational capacity.

Key Issues in Municipal Financing

  • Limited Revenue Generation
    • Low Property Tax Revenues: Property tax, the main source of municipal revenue, contributes only 0.12% of GDP, a figure that reflects poor tax collection mechanisms and outdated property valuation systems.
    • Revenue Concentration: Over 58% of municipal revenue comes from the top 10 cities, highlighting fiscal disparity between urban areas.
    • Dependence on Government Transfers: Municipalities rely significantly on state and central transfers, constituting a large portion of their revenue. This reduces their ability to plan and execute long-term projects independently.
  • Inefficiency in Tax and Fee Collection
    • Ineffective Property Tax Systems: Existing tax formulas do not reflect actual property valuations, leading to under-taxation and revenue loss.
    • Inadequate User Charges: Fees for essential services like water supply, sanitation, and waste management are not regularly adjusted, impacting cost recovery and service quality.

Strategies for Strengthening Urban Local Bodies (ULBs)

  • Enhancing Revenue Sources
    • Property Tax Reforms: Implementing GIS-based property tax mapping and linking tax rates to actual property valuations can improve tax compliance and revenue generation.
    • Rationalising User Charges: Regular adjustments to service fees for water, sanitation, and waste management can ensure cost recovery and better service delivery.
  • Reducing Dependence on Transfers
    • State and Central Transfers: A rule-based framework for government transfers, accounting for inflation and city growth, can ensure predictability and adequate compensation for MCs.
    • Boosting Non-Tax Revenues: MCs can increase income from user fees (e.g., for urban transport and waste management) and explore public-private partnerships (PPPs) to enhance service delivery.
  • Leveraging Technology for Efficiency
    • Digitalisation and Automation: Streamlining processes through technology can reduce inefficiencies, cut down on waste, and free up resources for capital expenditure.
    • Monitoring Systems: Improved monitoring and reporting can reduce pilferage, enhance revenue collection, and ensure accountability.

Fiscal Management and Innovative Financing

  • Municipal Bonds and Innovative Financing
    • Larger MCs are already using municipal bonds to fund infrastructure projects. Smaller cities can adopt similar financing instruments to diversify funding sources and attract private investment.
    • Public-Private Partnerships (PPPs): Fostering partnerships in sectors like urban transport and waste management can attract private investment and reduce the financial burden on MCs.
  • Resource Pooling for Infrastructure Projects
    • MCs can collaborate to pool resources for large-scale projects, such as renewable energy or urban transport initiatives, overcoming fiscal constraints that individual corporations face.

Government Initiatives for Urban Governance

  • Citizen-Centric Programs
    • Swachh Sarvekshan (2017) promotes citizen participation to improve urban cleanliness.
    • Swachh Bharat Idea Book empowers citizens to propose innovative solutions to urban challenges.
  • Performance-Based Indices
    • Ease of Living Index (2017) and the Municipal Performance Index (2019) assess urban quality of life, service delivery, and governance, encouraging better performance in ULBs.

Conclusion

Empowering urban local bodies is crucial for effective urban governance and development. By improving revenue generation through reforms, reducing dependence on transfers, and adopting innovative financing mechanisms, municipal corporations can enhance their capacity to meet the growing demands of urbanization. Collaborative efforts between the government, civil society, and academia are essential to ensure sustainable urban development and better living conditions for urban residents.

The Fight for Accessibility and Dignity in Indian Prisons

  • 24 Nov 2024

Introduction

Prisons in India face numerous systemic issues, with overcrowding, abuse, and neglect being prevalent. For prisoners with disabilities, these challenges are magnified, as they struggle with basic needs and lack necessary accommodations. This issue is not only a human rights violation but also a failure in the implementation of legal protections.

Prison Conditions and Accessibility Issues for Disabled Inmates

  • Challenges Faced by Disabled Prisoners: Disabled prisoners, such as Professor G.N. Saibaba, who spent a decade in prison before being exonerated, face severe challenges in performing everyday tasks like using toilets or taking baths. His experience of being physically lifted by fellow inmates due to the lack of wheelchair accessibility highlights the systemic neglect.
  • Exclusion and Abuse: Prisoners with disabilities are particularly vulnerable to abuse, as their specific needs are ignored. The government does not track the number or conditions of disabled prisoners, which leads to neglect and mistreatment. Notably, Father Stan Swamy, who had Parkinson's disease, was denied essential items like a straw, affecting his ability to eat and drink.

Legal Framework and International Obligations

  • Constitutional Protections: The Indian Constitution guarantees rights to prisoners, including protection from torture (Article 21) and the right to fair legal processes (Article 22). The Supreme Court has reinforced the need for humane treatment in prisons through various judgments.
  • International Commitments: India has committed to international conventions such as the United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities and the Nelson Mandela Rules, which require reasonable accommodations for disabled prisoners. Despite these commitments, the practical enforcement of such rights remains minimal.
  • Domestic Legislation: The Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act, 2016, mandates the protection of disabled individuals from abuse and exploitation. However, violations like the denial of basic assistive devices to prisoners show a gap in enforcement. The Ministry of Home Affairs has issued guidelines for prison accessibility, but they have yet to be widely implemented.

Systemic Failures and Lack of Political Will

  • Overcrowding and Inadequate Infrastructure: Indian prisons house over 5.73 lakh prisoners, far exceeding their capacity. This overcrowding exacerbates the challenges faced by disabled prisoners, as the infrastructure is inadequate to meet their needs. A 2018 audit of Delhi’s prisons revealed significant accessibility gaps, such as inaccessible cells and toilets, making daily life for disabled prisoners even more difficult.
  • Political Apathy and Public Indifference: Many believe that prisoners deserve their suffering, fueling a lack of urgency in addressing prison reforms. However, the state is responsible for ensuring the rights and dignity of all prisoners, including those with disabilities. There is a need for a shift in societal attitudes to ensure that these rights are upheld.

Reforms and the Way Forward

  • Infrastructure and Accessibility: Prisons must implement universal design principles, ensuring that infrastructures are accessible to all, especially prisoners with disabilities. This includes accessible cells, toilets, and common areas, as well as functional wheelchairs.
  • Judicial and Legal Reforms: The judicial system must expedite trials, especially for undertrials, and ensure that all prisoners have access to legal representation. This would help alleviate the overcrowding crisis and improve the overall functioning of the prison system.
  • Comprehensive Rehabilitation and Welfare Programs: Prison systems need to focus on rehabilitation rather than mere punishment. Programs for skill development, education, and mental health support should be integrated into prison routines, providing prisoners with opportunities for personal growth and reintegration into society.
  • Strengthening Oversight Mechanisms: There must be greater transparency in prison management through independent oversight bodies and regular audits. A whistleblower mechanism can help report violations of prisoner rights, ensuring greater accountability.

India’s Agricultural Sector

  • 23 Nov 2024

In News:

India’s agricultural sector, which employs 42.3% of the population, is crucial to the nation’s economy. However, it faces a range of challenges that need to be addressed to ensure long-term stability, food security, and sustainable growth.

Current Performance of India’s Agricultural Sector

  • Key Agricultural Metrics and Growth
    • Foodgrain Production: India produced 330.5 million metric tonnes (MT) of foodgrains in 2022-23, maintaining its position as the world’s second-largest producer.
    • Horticulture Production: A record high of 351.92 million tonnes in horticultural production was achieved, marking a 1.37% increase from the previous year.
  • Market Outlook
    • India’s agricultural market is projected to reach USD 24 billion by 2025.
    • The food and grocery retail sector is ranked as the sixth-largest globally, with 70% of its sales generated from retail.
  • Investment and Export Trends
    • FDI in Agriculture: From April 2000 to March 2024, the agricultural services sector attracted USD 3.08 billion in foreign direct investment, while the food processing industry garnered USD 12.58 billion.
    • Agricultural Exports: India’s agricultural and processed food exports reached USD 4.34 billion in 2024-25, including products like marine products, rice, and spices.

Key Challenges Confronting India’s Agriculture

  • Climate Change and Environmental Impact:Extreme weather events, such as heatwaves and erratic rainfall, continue to impact agricultural productivity. In 2023, India experienced its second-warmest year on record, contributing to crop damage and rising food prices.
  • Water Stress and Irrigation Inefficiency: Agriculture consumes the majority of India’s water resources, but irrigation efficiency is still low. The country relies heavily on flood irrigation, which leads to significant water wastage. Only 11% of agricultural land is under micro-irrigation, far below global standards.
  • Land Fragmentation and Declining Farm Sizes: The average size of agricultural farms has decreased from 1.08 hectares in 2016-17 to 0.74 hectares in 2021-22, hindering the adoption of modern farming practices and mechanization.
  • Market Access and Price Realization: Farmers continue to face challenges in accessing fair market prices due to the dominance of intermediaries and inadequate market infrastructure. Despite reforms like e-NAM, price gaps between farm-gate and retail prices persist, leaving farmers with a smaller share of the final price.
  • Technology Adoption and Digital Divide: Although agritech is growing in India, only 30% of farmers use digital tools in agriculture, and rural digital literacy is just 25%, which limits the widespread adoption of modern farming solutions.

Addressing Structural Issues in Indian Agriculture

  • Soil Health and Sustainability:The excessive use of chemical fertilizers and mono-cropping practices has led to soil degradation. Approximately 30% of agricultural land in India is experiencing degradation, impacting productivity and sustainability. Stubble burning further exacerbates this issue, worsening air quality and soil health.
  • Crop Diversification Challenges:Many farmers are locked into the wheat-rice cycle due to Minimum Support Price (MSP) guarantees, limiting the cultivation of other crops like pulses and oilseeds. Although India is the largest producer of pulses, the domestic production is insufficient to meet the growing demand.
  • Feminisation of Agriculture:Women make up 63% of agricultural workers but own only 11-13% of the operational land, limiting their access to resources and decision-making power. This gender disparity hampers their economic security and limits their participation in agricultural development.

Conclusion

India’s agricultural sector holds immense potential but is facing significant structural challenges that must be addressed to ensure its long-term growth and sustainability. Urgent reforms are needed to address issues like climate vulnerability, inefficient irrigation, land fragmentation, and limited market access. Additionally, fostering technology adoption, improving infrastructure, and addressing gender disparities will be crucial for improving the sector's performance and securing India’s food security needs.

Janaagraha’s Report on Urban Local Bodies

  • 22 Nov 2024

In News:

46% of councillors in urban local bodies are women, says a report by Janaagraha, a not-for-profit organisation working to strengthen systems of governance in India’s cities.

Overview: Gender Representation in Urban Local Bodies

  • Women Councillors in India: Around 46% of councillors in urban local bodies (ULBs) are women, according to a recent report by Janaagraha, a non-profit organization focused on strengthening urban governance systems.
  • Capital Cities: In 19 out of 21 capital cities with active ULBs (such as Patna, Shimla, Ranchi, and Bhubaneswar), women councillors exceed 60% of the total councillor count.

Top States for Women Councillors

  • Tamil Nadu stands out with the highest number of women councillors in the country, according to the "Roadmap for India’s City Systems Reforms" report by Janaagraha.
  • Other States in the Top 10:
    • Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra, Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka, Uttar Pradesh, Kerala, Bihar, and Chhattisgarh.

Women’s Reservation and Empowerment

  • 50% Reservation: 17 states have legislated 50% women’s reservation in urban local bodies, surpassing the constitutional minimum of 33%.

Pathways for Urban Transformation

  • Three Key Recommendations:
    • Place-Based Governance: Advocates for governance focused on regional economies and local governments rather than sector-driven policies.
    • Decentralised Participatory Governance: Emphasizes the need to strengthen urban local governments and increase citizen participation through the 74th constitutional amendment.
    • Building State Capacities: Calls for a more effective role of the Ministry of Housing and Urban Affairs and state urban departments focused on local self-government.

Rural-Urban Transition and Policy Reforms

  • Urbanization of Villages: The report highlights that about 1,000 villages have already transitioned into urban areas since the 2011 Census, urging the need for a rural-urban transition policy.
  • Reimagine Urban Ministries: Recommends restructuring urban ministries to focus on regional economies and the strengthening of local governance institutions.

Key Challenges in Urban Governance

  • Delays in Elections: 61% of ULGs in 15 states have delayed council elections.
  • Disempowered Local Bodies: Mayors and ULGs often lack autonomy, with control over only four out of 18 functions.
  • Citizen Participation Gaps: There is a lack of formal platforms for citizen involvement in governance.

Skilling and Capacity Building

  • Certification-Based Training: Proposes skilling programs for ULG staff, with a focus on improving municipal efficiency and project implementation.
  • Shared Service Centres: Recommends creating municipal service centres to benefit smaller cities and enhance urban management.

Conclusion: Need for Place-Based Governance

  • Strategic Shift: Srikanth Viswanathan, CEO of Janaagraha, emphasized the need to shift away from a sector-based governance model to a place-based governance approach, better suited to the urban challenges of modern India.

Earning Instead of Burning

  • 21 Nov 2024

In News:

Paddy straw burning, prevalent in Punjab, Haryana, and Uttar Pradesh, contributes to severe air pollution, especially during the post-harvest period in October and November. Despite various government measures and subsidies to reduce stubble burning, it continues due to economic and operational constraints faced by farmers. To address this issue, innovative technologies for the productive use of paddy straw need to be explored.

Stubble Burning: Causes and Consequences

Reasons for Stubble Burning

  • Short Crop Cycles: The narrow window between paddy harvest and wheat sowing forces farmers to burn straw to prepare fields quickly.
  • Economic Constraints: High costs of alternative residue management methods.
  • Lack of Awareness: Farmers are often unaware of sustainable alternatives.
  • Limited Mechanization: Availability of crop residue management machinery is inadequate.
  • Policy Gaps: Ineffective enforcement of regulations and insufficient incentives.

Consequences of Stubble Burning

  • Air Pollution: Emission of harmful pollutants like PM2.5, CO2, and CO contributes to air quality degradation.
  • Health Hazards: Increased respiratory illnesses due to the inhalation of toxic fumes.
  • Soil Degradation: Loss of essential nutrients and organic matter.
  • Climate Change: Stubble burning releases greenhouse gases into the atmosphere.
  • Economic Costs: Increased health care costs and loss of soil fertility.

Technologies for Paddy Straw Utilization

Large-Scale Technologies

  • Direct Combustion:Burns rice straw under controlled conditions to generate heat for cooking and industrial uses. While its calorific value is lower than that of petrol and diesel, it is still viable for local energy generation.
  • Pyrolysis and Gasification:
    • Pyrolysis: Converts rice straw into bio-oil through heating at 200-760°C in the absence of oxygen.
    • Gasification: Converts rice straw into syngas at higher temperatures (480-1,650°C) with limited oxygen. Challenges include low gas production and tar accumulation.
  • Biochar Production:Rice straw is incinerated at lower temperatures to produce biochar, which is used as a soil conditioner to improve fertility, water retention, and reduce greenhouse gas emissions.
  • Power Generation:Biomass-based power plants use rice straw to generate electricity, providing a sustainable energy source, especially for rural areas. States like Punjab, Haryana, and Uttar Pradesh are scaling up such plants.
  • Pellet Production:Rice straw is compressed into compact pellets, improving its density, transportability, and combustion efficiency. These pellets can partially replace coal in power plants, offering an alternative use for crop residue.
  • Biofuels:Conversion of rice straw into biofuels like ethanol and biogas helps reduce dependency on fossil fuels and supports the renewable energy transition.
  • Paper Production:Rice straw, with its high cellulose content, is used as an eco-friendly alternative to wood in the paper and pulp industry, reducing environmental impact.

Small-Scale Technologies

  • Composting:Rice straw can be composted to produce organic fertilizer, enhancing soil health. Vermicomposting is another effective method, though awareness among farmers remains low.
  • Mushroom Cultivation:Rice straw serves as an ideal substrate for growing mushrooms, particularly species like Volvariellavolvacea. This practice provides an additional income source for farmers.
  • Silica Extraction:Rice straw contains high silica content, which can be extracted for industrial applications like construction and electronics.
  • Fodder for Ruminants:Though rice straw is low in digestibility due to high silica content, it can be used as animal feed after pre-treatment, such as drying, grinding, or chemical processes to enhance its nutritional value.
  • Adsorbent for Pollution Control:Rice straw can be used to remove heavy metals and toxins from contaminated water, showing promise in environmental cleanup efforts.
  • Soil Incorporation:Instead of burning, rice straw can be incorporated directly into the soil to improve fertility, moisture retention, and crop yield. This practice is already being adopted in regions like Punjab and Haryana.

Conclusion: Path Forward

Stubble burning continues to be a significant environmental challenge, but the development and adoption of technologies for utilizing paddy straw can offer viable solutions. Both large- and small-scale technologies can convert rice straw into valuable products like biofuels, power, and fertilizers. To ensure widespread implementation, efforts must be made to increase awareness among farmers and stakeholders, coupled with strong policy support and infrastructural investment. A collaborative approach involving the government, industries, and farmers is essential for sustainable management of rice straw, benefiting both the environment and the economy.

Reimagining Governance with AI: The Promise of GovAI

  • 20 Nov 2024

In News:

India's rapid digital transformation, coupled with the advancements in Artificial Intelligence (AI), presents a unique opportunity to reimagine governance. The concept of GovAI—using AI to enhance public administration—holds the potential to revolutionize governance, improve efficiency, and create more responsive and inclusive public systems.

Digital Transformation in Governance

  • Evolution of Digital Public Infrastructure (DPI)
    • Over the past decade, India has made significant strides in digital governance through the development of Digital Public Infrastructure (DPI). DPI has reduced inefficiencies, enhanced transparency, and improved service delivery, transforming India's governance landscape.
  • Impact of AI on Governance
    • As AI becomes a critical enabler in various sectors, its application to governance promises to deliver more efficient, inclusive, and responsive government services. The potential of AI lies in its ability to provide more with less, driving innovation across key public services.

Key Trends Driving GovAI

  • Rapid Digitalization of India
    • Currently, 90 crore Indians are connected to the Internet, with projections indicating 120 crore by 2026, positioning India as the most connected country globally.
    • Digitalization serves as the backbone for AI-driven governance, enabling efficient data collection, analysis, and informed policy-making.
  • Data as a Valuable Resource
    • The rapid digitalization of India has led to the generation of vast amounts of data. This data serves as the fuel for AI models, which can be used to enhance governance.
    • Programs like the IndiaDatasetsProgramme aim to harness government datasets for AI development while safeguarding data privacy through legislation.
  • Demand for Efficient Governance
    • The post-COVID world has underscored the need for governments to deliver better outcomes with fewer resources. AI has the potential to optimize the use of public resources, enabling more efficient and targeted governance.

India’s Leadership in AI-Driven Governance

  • Positioning India as a Global Leader
    • India’s digital governance initiatives have placed it at the forefront of AI adoption in the public sector. Through GovAI, India can solidify its position as a global leader in using technology for public good.
    • As the Chair of the Global Partnership on AI (GPAI), India is advocating for the inclusive development of AI to ensure that it benefits all nations, not just a select few.
  • Role of Innovation Ecosystem
    • India’s innovation ecosystem, comprising startups, entrepreneurs, and tech hubs, can play a crucial role in driving the development of AI models, platforms, and apps for governance.
    • A strong partnership between the government and private sector is essential to successfully deploy AI solutions across various sectors of governance.

Potential Benefits of GovAI

  • Enhanced Efficiency and Service Delivery
    • AI-powered tools, such as chatbots, can provide citizens with 24/7 assistance, streamlining public service delivery and reducing waiting times.
    • AI can help in automating processes and improving the overall efficiency of government operations.
  • Data-Driven Decision-Making
    • AI can analyze large datasets to make informed policy decisions and design targeted interventions in sectors like healthcare, education, and social welfare.
    • Data-driven insights can enhance the effectiveness of welfare schemes, improving outcomes for marginalized communities.
  • Increased Transparency and Accountability
    • AI can enhance transparency in governance by minimizing human intervention in processes, thus reducing corruption and ensuring efficient use of public resources.
    • Predictive analytics and real-time data monitoring can enable proactive governance, preventing issues before they escalate.

Challenges and Drawbacks of GovAI

  • Privacy Concerns
    • The use of AI in governance requires the collection and analysis of vast amounts of personal data, raising concerns about data privacy and surveillance.
    • Robust data protection laws must be enforced to ensure citizens' data is handled responsibly.
  • Accountability and Bias
    • AI systems may produce biased outcomes depending on the data they are trained on. Ensuring accountability for decisions made by AI systems remains a challenge, particularly when errors or biases occur.
    • Transparent mechanisms must be established to hold AI systems accountable for their actions.
  • Increased State Control and Surveillance
    • The integration of AI in governance could lead to increased state control, potentially compromising individual freedoms. Ensuring that AI is used responsibly to balance power between the government and citizens is critical.
  • Digital Divide
    • The benefits of AI in governance may not be evenly distributed across the population, exacerbating the digital divide.
    • Efforts must be made to ensure that marginalized communities, without access to digital technologies or skills, are not left behind.

Conclusion

  • Balancing Benefits and Risks
    • The integration of AI into governance systems presents significant benefits, including enhanced efficiency, transparency, and proactive governance. However, there are challenges related to privacy, accountability, and state control.
    • To ensure AI serves the public good, India must implement strong regulatory frameworks, promote transparency, and develop ethical AI systems that respect citizens’ rights and freedoms.
  • Moving Toward Maximum Governance
    • AI can help realize the vision of maximum governance, enabling more effective and targeted interventions across sectors like healthcare, security, education, and disaster management.
    • The success of GovAI will depend on a trusted partnership between the government, private sector, and innovation ecosystem, ensuring that AI technology serves the larger public interest.

Sustainable Path to Net-Zero for India

  • 19 Nov 2024

In News:

India's commitment to achieving net-zero carbon emissions by 2070 presents a significant challenge, with only 45 years remaining to reach this ambitious target. The path to net-zero requires a balancing act between economic development, energy security, and climate adaptation. India’s efforts to meet its climate goals will be shaped by multiple factors, including resource constraints, land use, and financial limitations.

Why Net-Zero at All?

  • Scientific Consensus on Climate Change
    • Climate change is a growing concern, with the global temperature rise already reaching 1.1°C above pre-industrial levels.
    • To avoid catastrophic impacts, the world needs to limit the temperature rise to 1.5°C. The remaining global carbon budget for this target is around 400-500 billion tonnes of CO?.
  • Necessity of Sharp Emission Reductions
    • Countries must drastically reduce emissions to stay within the carbon budget. Achieving net-zero emissions is essential for maintaining global climate stability.

Equity in Net-Zero Transitions

  • Developed vs. Developing Countries
    • Developed nations, historically responsible for a large share of emissions, are expected to lead the transition. However, they have not met the financial and technological support commitments for developing countries.
    • Developing nations like India, with low per capita emissions, are under pressure to balance climate action with economic development.
  • Climate Justice
    • India’s per capita emissions are among the lowest globally, but the richest 10% of Indians contribute significantly to national emissions, exacerbating inequality.
    • The impacts of climate change disproportionately affect the economically weaker sections, making the transition to net-zero not only an environmental challenge but a social justice issue as well.

The Challenge of Balancing Development and Sustainability

  • Limits of India’s Resources
    • India faces resource constraints, including land, water, and biodiversity, which limit the feasible expansion of renewable energy capacity.
    • Meeting energy demands while ensuring food security, forest cover, and biodiversity preservation becomes increasingly challenging as energy requirements rise.
  • Sustainable Consumption vs. Aspirational Lifestyles
    • India’s aspiration to emulate the developed world’s lifestyle is unsustainable due to limited resources, which could lead to severe consequences like groundwater depletion, heat stress, and biodiversity loss.
    • The focus should be on sufficiency consumption corridors, ensuring that consumption meets developmental goals without exceeding sustainable limits.

Projected Power Demand and Renewable Energy Targets

  • Rising Power Demand
    • India’s power demand could increase nine to ten-fold by 2070. Meeting this demand entirely via renewable energy requires significant expansion in energy generation capacity:
      1. 5,500 GW of solar energy
      2. 1,500 GW of wind energy
  • Land Use Constraints
    • To meet these targets, India must address land-use trade-offs. Expanding beyond 3,500 GW of solar and 900 GW of wind would require significant compromises in land availability for other uses, including agriculture and conservation.

Strategic Pathways to Net-Zero: Demand and Supply Measures

  • Demand-Side Measures
    • Energy-efficient construction: Use of better materials and passive designs to reduce cooling energy demand.
    • Urban transport: Shift to public and non-motorized transport to reduce energy consumption in cities.
    • Dietary choices: Promoting sustainable dietary practices to reduce the carbon footprint of food systems.
    • Electrification: Focus on alternative fuels and energy-efficient appliances.
  • Supply-Side Measures
    • Decentralization of Energy Production: Expanding rooftop solar panels and solar pumps for agriculture.
    • Nuclear Power Expansion: Increase nuclear energy to provide a low-carbon baseload and complement renewable sources like solar and wind, which are intermittent.

The Role of International Cooperation and Financial Support

  • Global Cooperation
    • Global climate action requires alignment between national interests, which may not always coincide, as seen in the context of the U.S. presidential election potentially influencing global climate policy.
    • India’s path to net-zero depends heavily on international climate financing, technology transfer, and collaborative efforts to address climate justice.
  • Equitable Financing for Developing Countries
    • Developed countries are expected to provide financial support to developing nations like India to achieve climate goals. However, this support has been insufficient to date.

Conclusion: India’s Balancing Act

India faces a challenging balancing act as it seeks to provide quality of life for its growing population while achieving its climate adaptation and mitigation goals. The path to net-zero will require careful management of economic growth, energy production, and resource conservation. India must focus on demand-side strategies to reduce energy consumption and increase efficiency while expanding renewable energy infrastructure in a sustainable manner. Additionally, international cooperation and financial support will be crucial in ensuring that India’s transition to net-zero is equitable, efficient, and aligned with its developmental priorities.

Andhra Pradesh's Natural Farming Model

  • 18 Nov 2024

In News:

Andhra Pradesh's (AP) natural farming model presents a transformative opportunity to reshape the state’s agricultural landscape by 2050. An analysis by the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO), in collaboration with the AP government, reveals how scaling natural farming could employ more farmers, increase incomes, and foster sustainable agricultural practices, potentially surpassing the benefits of conventional industrial agriculture.

AgroEco2050: Exploring Two Agricultural Futures

The AgroEco2050 initiative aimed to envision two possible futures for Andhra Pradesh’s agricultural systems by 2050:

  • Industrial Agriculture Path: Focusing on intensification of conventional farming, relying heavily on chemicals, machinery, and monocultures.
  • Natural Farming Path: Expanding agroecological practices, relying on regenerative, chemical-free farming methods to create more jobs, better livelihoods, and improve the environment.

The study compared these pathways, analyzing their impacts on employment, income, food production, biodiversity, and land use.

Key Findings: Natural Farming’s Impact on Employment and Income

  • Employment Growth
    • By 2050, natural farming would employ twice as many farmers as industrial agriculture: 10 million compared to 5 million.
    • Unemployment in natural farming would decrease to 7%, in stark contrast to a projected 30% unemployment rate in the industrial agriculture scenario.
  • Farmer Income
    • Natural farming is expected to be more profitable for farmers due to lower input costs (seeds, fertilizers, machinery) and higher market prices for high-quality produce.
    • The income gap between farmers and non-farmers, which stood at 62% in 2019, would decrease to 22% under natural farming by 2050, a sharp improvement compared to the 47% gap predicted under industrial agriculture.

What is Natural Farming?

Natural farming is an ecological, chemical-free farming system that emphasizes the use of locally available resources. Key practices include:

  • Biodiversity-based pest management
  • On-farm biomass recycling (e.g., mulching)
  • Indigenous techniques like using cow dung and urine for soil fertility.

Globally recognized as a form of regenerative agriculture, it offers a sustainable alternative to industrial agriculture by sequestering carbon and restoring soil health.

Global Adoption

States like Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka, Himachal Pradesh, and others are already adopting natural farming. While still evolving, its acceptance among farmers is steadily growing.

Zero Budget Natural Farming (ZBNF) in Andhra Pradesh

Origin and Growth

  • In 2016, Andhra Pradesh launched the Zero Budget Natural Farming (ZBNF) initiative to offer a sustainable alternative to capital-intensive agriculture.
  • This program, implemented by RythuSadhikaraSamstha, targets covering 6 million farmers across 6 million hectares.

National Recognition

The ZBNF approach gained national attention when it was featured in the 2019 Union Budget, aimed at doubling farmers' incomes by 2022. The central government now promotes this model under the Paramparagat Krishi Vikas Yojana (PKVY).

Challenges in Scaling Natural Farming

  • Farmer Training and Support
    • Farmers need ongoing education and support to transition effectively to natural farming. Current training systems often fail to address the full scope of their needs.
  • Certification Barriers
    • The certification process for organic farming, including Participatory Guarantee Systems (PGS) and third-party certifications, is complex and costly, presenting a barrier for small-scale farmers.
  • Marketing and Procurement Challenges
    • There is a lack of effective marketing systems for organic products, which hampers the ability of farmers to sell their produce at fair prices.
    • Without strong procurement or buy-back systems, farmers may struggle to find markets for their products.
  • Policy and Funding Gaps
    • Organic and natural farming programs still receive minimal funding compared to subsidies for chemical fertilizers, impeding large-scale adoption.
    • Slow state-level implementation and a continued reliance on chemical inputs also delay the widespread shift to natural farming.

Moving Forward

  • Scientific Research on Yields
    • To address concerns about lower yields for staple crops, more scientific research is needed to assess the long-term viability of natural farming, especially for crops like wheat and rice, which are crucial for India’s food security.
  • Localized Adoption
    • Natural farming may be best suited for non-staple crops or localized farming, balancing sustainability with the need for food security.
  • Risk Mitigation for Food Security
    • Careful evaluation of natural farming’s impact on staple crop yields is necessary to avoid the food security risks witnessed in countries like Sri Lanka, where a sudden shift to organic farming led to reduced yields and increased prices.

Conclusion

The Andhra Pradesh natural farming model offers a promising alternative to industrial agriculture, with the potential to create jobs, improve farmers' incomes, and promote environmental sustainability. However, for this vision to become a reality, significant efforts must be made to address challenges related to training, certification, marketing, and funding. With continued research, policy support, and community involvement, natural farming can play a crucial role in feeding the future and promoting a more sustainable agricultural system.

Khap Panchayats: Evolving Towards Modern Governance and Justice

  • 17 Nov 2024

Why in the News?

Khap Panchayats have attracted attention due to their evolving role in addressing key socio-economic issues like unemployment, education, and rural development. Modernization efforts are underway to regulate these traditional councils, integrating them into formal Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) systems for better governance, accountability, and social justice.

What are Khap Panchayats?

Definition and Origin:

Khap Panchayats are community-based councils primarily found in North India, particularly in Haryana, Uttar Pradesh, and parts of Rajasthan. These informal bodies, composed of elders from kinship groups (Khaps), have historically served as local governance bodies that resolve disputes within their communities. Their origins trace back centuries and they function alongside formal legal systems, often prioritizing customary norms over constitutional law.

Historical Role:

Historically, Khap Panchayats have maintained social order in rural areas, acting as forums for dispute resolution related to marriage, property, and community matters. While their decisions were respected within their communities, they operated parallel to formal courts, and their influence was often seen as a stabilizing force in rural society. However, their structure has also contributed to the perpetuation of patriarchal practices and social exclusion.

Issues with Khap Panchayats

  • Patriarchal Practices:Khap Panchayats have often been associated with gender inequality. They enforce rigid social norms that limit women's autonomy, particularly in matrimonial matters, inheritance rights, and personal freedoms. This has led to criticism for their role in suppressing women's rights.
  • Honor Killings and Social Conservatism:Khap Panchayats are notorious for opposing inter-caste and same-gotra marriages, at times even endorsing honor killings to preserve social order. Such practices are violations of fundamental rights and personal freedoms guaranteed by the Indian Constitution.
  • Legality Concerns:The decisions of Khap Panchayats often clash with constitutional values such as equality, personal liberty, and dignity. Their informal judgments lack legal validity and frequently violate the rule of law, raising significant concerns about their adherence to India’s legal framework.
  • Caste-based Discrimination:Khap Panchayats have been criticized for reinforcing caste hierarchies, which leads to discrimination and exclusion of marginalized communities. Their focus on preserving traditional caste structures often results in the oppression of the vulnerable, particularly lower-caste groups.

Gender Dynamics and Evolving Roles of Khap Panchayats

In recent years, some Khap Panchayats have started to show more progressive and inclusive stances, particularly in promoting gender justice:

  • Support for Women Athletes:Khap Panchayats have begun to recognize and celebrate the achievements of women, particularly in sports. Several Khap bodies have felicitated women sportspersons, contributing to a growing culture of sports among rural women. This marks a shift from their traditionally patriarchal stance.
  • Promoting Gender Justice:Notably, the MehamChaubisiKhap in Haryana has played a significant role in advocating for women’s rights and gender equality. It was involved in supporting the 2023 wrestlers' protest against sexual harassment, demonstrating a shift towards gender-related activism and social reform.

Supreme Court Ruling on Khap Panchayats:

In the landmark Shakti Vahini v. Union of India case (2018), the Supreme Court of India addressed the issue of honor killings and inter-caste marriages. The Court emphasized that honor killings violate fundamental rights and called for strict measures to prevent such crimes. The Court further directed state governments to establish special protection cells for couples facing threats from their families and communities. This ruling underscored the importance of personal liberty and freedom of choice, regardless of community or caste.

What is Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR)?

Definition and Importance:

Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) refers to methods of resolving disputes without resorting to formal litigation. These methods include mediation, arbitration, and conciliation, all of which encourage cooperative problem-solving and mutually agreeable solutions. ADR is particularly important in India due to the overburdened judicial system, which faces a backlog of cases and delays.

ADR offers several advantages, including:

  • Cost-effectiveness
  • Confidentiality
  • Flexibility
  • Improved relationships between parties involved

Types of ADR Mechanisms:

  • Arbitration: A formal process where an arbitrator resolves disputes and their decision is legally binding.
  • Conciliation: A third-party neutral assists the parties in reaching an agreement, and the recommendations can be accepted or rejected.
  • Mediation: A mediator facilitates communication between disputing parties, helping them reach a voluntary and mutually agreeable resolution.
  • Negotiation: A direct negotiation between the parties without third-party involvement, aiming for a mutually acceptable settlement.

Integrating Khap Panchayats into the Formal ADR System

Given the potential of Khap Panchayats as community-based governance bodies, integrating them into the formal ADR framework can significantly enhance their role in dispute resolution. Here are some strategies for modernizing Khap Panchayats:

  • Legal Recognition of ADR Role:Khap Panchayats can be legally recognized within the ADR framework, formalizing their role in mediation and dispute resolution, ensuring their decisions align with constitutional norms and human rights.
  • Training and Capacity Building:Khap leaders can undergo training in ADR techniques such as mediation and arbitration, equipping them with skills to resolve conflicts impartially and in line with legal standards. This would help transition Khaps from informal bodies to more structured and legally compliant dispute resolution mechanisms.
  • Legal Regulation and Oversight:Regulations can be put in place to define the scope and limitations of Khap Panchayats' authority, ensuring their decisions do not violate human rights or the constitution. Oversight mechanisms should be established to monitor their actions and prevent practices like honor killings or forced marriages.
  • Shift Towards Developmental Roles:Some Khap Panchayats are already advocating for progressive reforms in areas like unemployment, education, and rural development. By focusing on these issues, Khap Panchayats can serve as agents of social change and contribute to community development.
  • Awareness and Accountability:Awareness campaigns can educate rural communities about constitutional rights and the legal system, emphasizing the importance of formal legal frameworks and human rights. At the same time, Khap Panchayats should be held accountable for actions that undermine justice or equality.
  • Collaboration with Formal Institutions:Khap Panchayats can collaborate with local governance bodies and judicial institutions, ensuring that their decisions align with the rule of law and contribute to social justice. This would enhance their role in inclusive decision-making and legally sound governance.

Conclusion

Khap Panchayats, with their deep-rooted history and influence, have the potential to evolve into modern governance institutions. By integrating them into the formal ADR framework, aligning their practices with constitutional values, and focusing on community development, they can contribute positively to dispute resolution and social reform in rural India. This transformation will require legal regulation, training, oversight, and awareness to ensure that Khap Panchayats function as effective, equitable bodies that respect the fundamental rights of all individuals.

Net Borrowing Ceiling

  • 16 Nov 2024

In News:

  • In 2023, the central government imposed a Net Borrowing Ceiling (NBC) on Kerala, limiting its borrowing capacity to 3% of the projected Gross State Domestic Product (GSDP) for the fiscal year 2023-24.
  • Impact on Kerala’s Finances: This ceiling has significantly impacted Kerala’s ability to meet its expenditure needs and fund developmental activities, triggering political and legal disputes. Kerala has approached the Supreme Court of India, arguing that the imposition of NBC infringes upon its constitutional rights under Article 293 of the Indian Constitution.

Constitutional Provisions on Borrowing Powers

Article 292: Borrowing Powers of the Centre

  • Central Government’s Borrowing: Article 292 grants the Central Government the authority to borrow money on the security of the Consolidated Fund of India.
  • Limits on Borrowing: The extent of borrowing by the Centre is determined by laws enacted by Parliament.

Article 293: Borrowing Powers of the States

  • State Borrowing: Article 293 allows State Governments to borrow within India against the Consolidated Fund of the State. However, it imposes certain conditions:
    • If a State has outstanding loans or guarantees given by the Centre, the Centre’s consent is required to raise further loans.
    • The Central government can impose conditions when granting such consent.

Centre’s Role in State Borrowing

  • Article 293(3) allows the Centre to impose conditions on a state’s borrowing if it has existing liabilities or guarantees outstanding.
  • The Centre has wide discretion in granting or denying consent, which has been a point of contention in Kerala’s case.

The Imposition of Net Borrowing Ceiling (NBC)

Scope of the NBC

  • Comprehensive Coverage: The NBC encompasses all borrowing avenues, including open market loans, loans from financial institutions, and liabilities from State public accounts. To curb circumventing of the borrowing cap via State-owned enterprises, the NBC also covers borrowings by these entities.

Purpose of NBC

  • Fiscal Discipline: The NBC is designed to regulate borrowing and prevent states from accumulating unsustainable levels of debt, thus ensuring financial stability.
  • Transparency: By including all borrowing avenues, including off-budget borrowings by state-owned enterprises, the NBC aims to provide a clearer picture of a state’s financial health.

Arguments for the NBC

  • Macroeconomic Stability: The NBC helps maintain macroeconomic stability by controlling the borrowing levels of states, thus protecting the national economy.
  • Compliance with FRBM Act: The NBC aligns with the Fiscal Responsibility and Budget Management (FRBM) Act, aiming to keep the fiscal deficit within prescribed limits.
  • Equitable Resource Distribution: The NBC ensures that wealthier states do not disproportionately borrow, thus promoting balanced regional development.

Arguments Against the NBC

  • Erosion of Fiscal Autonomy: Critics argue that the NBC undermines the fiscal autonomy of states, as guaranteed by Article 293, by restricting their ability to make independent financial decisions.
  • Impact on Developmental Activities: States, particularly Kerala, contend that the borrowing cap restricts their ability to fund key infrastructure projects and social welfare activities.
  • Legal Concerns: The NBC’s impact on the interpretation of Article 293 raises legal questions regarding the extent of the Centre’s authority over state borrowing powers.

Fiscal Responsibility and Budget Management (FRBM) Act

Overview of the FRBM Act

  • Objective: The FRBM Act, 2003 was enacted to promote fiscal discipline and ensure long-term financial stability in India.
  • Key Features:
    • Targets a 3% fiscal deficit of GDP for the Centre.
    • Requires states to enact similar laws to control their fiscal deficit.

Amendments to FRBM Act

  • 2018 Amendment: The FRBM Amendment Act required the central government to ensure that the fiscal deficit did not exceed 3% of GDP and total public debt remained under 60% of GDP.
  • Fiscal Deficit Reduction: By 2025-26, the fiscal deficit is expected to be reduced to below 4.5% of GDP.

Way Forward: Strengthening Article 293

Guidelines for Borrowing Powers

  • Transparency in Decision-Making: The Centre should ensure that the borrowing process is transparent, with clear standards and procedures for accepting or rejecting state borrowings.
  • Consultative Process: The Centre should engage in consultations with states before imposing borrowing caps or conditions, fostering a cooperative federal structure.
  • Equitable Treatment: Borrowing restrictions should apply uniformly to all states to avoid bias or favoritism.

Strengthening Fiscal Federalism

  • Fiscal Autonomy: States should be given the flexibility to manage their finances in a way that reflects their unique economic needs and challenges.
  • Periodic Reviews: The Net Borrowing Ceiling should be reviewed periodically to account for changing economic conditions and developmental priorities.

The Need for More Women in Politics

  • 15 Nov 2024

In News:

India, the world's largest democracy, is at a crucial juncture where women’s active political participation is essential for holistic development and true democratic engagement. The year 2024 demands increased involvement of women in politics to address issues of gender inequality and ensure comprehensive policy representation.

Current Status of Women’s Political Representation in India

Women in Parliament

  • Initial Representation: In 1952, women accounted for only 4.41% of the Lok Sabha. This gradually rose to around 14.36% in the 2019 elections.
  • Recent Trends: In the 2024 elections, women made up approximately 16% of the Lok Sabha, with 74 women MPs, 43 of whom are first-time representatives.

Women in State Legislatures

  • Representation in state legislative assemblies remains low, with the highest percentages in Chhattisgarh (14.4%), West Bengal (13.7%), and Jharkhand (12.4%).

Global Comparison

  • According to the Inter-Parliamentary Union (IPU), India ranks lower than many countries in terms of female representation in parliament, with global averages standing at 26.1%. India lags behind several African and South Asian nations.

Importance of Women’s Political Empowerment

  • Enhancing Governance and Accountability: Political empowerment of women ensures better representation of gender-sensitive issues, promoting accountability in governance.
  • Breaking Patriarchal Norms: Increasing women’s participation helps challenge the patriarchal structure that dominates Indian politics and promotes inclusive governance.
  • Policy and Social Impact: Women in politics are more likely to advocate for policies that address issues like health, education, and gender equality, leading to improved societal welfare.
  • Economic Benefits: Studies suggest that women in political leadership tend to improve economic outcomes for their constituencies by prioritizing social infrastructure.

Barriers to Women’s Political Participation

  • Gender Gaps in Political Ambition: Women are less likely to pursue political careers due to gender conditioning, family pressures, and stereotypes about leadership abilities.
  • Patriarchal Culture: A deeply ingrained patriarchal society hampers women’s political involvement, with male-dominated party structures and social norms limiting opportunities.
  • High Election Costs: The financial burden of running for office often discourages women from contesting elections due to unequal access to resources.
  • Male Gatekeepers in Politics: Political parties often show a preference for male candidates, especially for higher-profile positions, hindering the rise of women leaders.
  • Criminalisation and Corruption in Politics: Growing criminalisation in politics and lack of political education further alienates women from the political process.

Key Legislative and Constitutional Measures for Women’s Political Empowerment

Legislative Measures

  • Nari Shakti VandanAdhiniyam (2023): Provides 33% reservation for women in the Lok Sabha and state assemblies.
  • 73rd and 74th Amendments (1992): Introduced 33% reservation for women in Panchayats and Municipalities.
  • Gender-Neutral Rules: Lok Sabha adopted gender-neutral rules in 2014, promoting inclusivity in legislative procedures.

Constitutional Provisions

  • Article 14 and 15: Ensure equality and non-discrimination, fundamental to women’s political participation.
  • Article 243D: Mandates 33% reservation for women in Panchayats.

International Commitments

  • CEDAW (1979): Advocates for women’s participation in political and public life.
  • Beijing Platform (1995) and SDGs (2015): Call for removing barriers to women’s participation in politics.

Measures for Promoting Women’s Political Participation

  • Quotas and Reservations: Ensuring mandatory quotas for women candidates in party tickets and legislative bodies can help bridge gender gaps.
  • Capacity Building and Training: Offering political training programs for women can empower them with the skills and resources necessary for effective political participation.
  • Strengthening Grassroots Movements: Support for Self-Help Groups (SHGs) and Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs) can build leadership among women at the local level.
  • Supportive Political Ecosystem: Political parties should be encouraged to nominate women for higher office positions, such as the Rajya Sabha or state legislative councils.
  • Raising Public Awareness: Public awareness campaigns focusing on the importance of women in politics can shift societal attitudes and garner wider public support.

Conclusion:

As India moves forward, the active participation of women in politics is not merely a matter of equity but an essential building block for a vibrant, inclusive, and effective democracy. Through structural reforms, public awareness, and the promotion of female leadership, India can strengthen its democratic framework, ensuring that all citizens, regardless of gender, have an equal stake in shaping the nation's future.

Chief Justice of India

  • 13 Nov 2024

In News:

On November 11, 2024, Justice Sanjiv Khanna was sworn in as the 51st Chief Justice of India (CJI) at the Rashtrapati Bhavan, New Delhi, marking a significant milestone in the Indian judiciary. He succeeds Justice D.Y. Chandrachud, who retired on November 10, 2024. Justice Khanna's term as CJI will last until May 13, 2025.

Background of Justice Sanjiv Khanna

Early Life and Legal Career

  • Legal Practice: Justice Khanna began his legal career in 1983 after completing his law degree from Delhi University. He practiced in the District Courts of Delhi and handled cases in constitutional law, taxation, arbitration, and environmental law.
  • Career in Delhi High Court: He was appointed as an Additional Judge to the Delhi High Court in 2005 and became a Permanent Judge in 2006.
  • Appointment to the Supreme Court: Justice Khanna was appointed as a Supreme Court Judge in January 2019, without having served as a Chief Justice of a State High Court, and superseding 32 senior High Court judges.

Key Judicial Rulings of Justice Sanjiv Khanna

Major Constitutional Bench Decisions

  • Abrogation of Article 370: Justice Khanna was part of the Bench that upheld the abrogation of Article 370 of the Constitution, which revoked Jammu and Kashmir’s special status.
  • Electoral Bonds Scheme: He also contributed to the ruling that struck down the 2018 Electoral Bonds scheme, raising questions about the transparency of political funding.

Support for EVMs

  • Justice Khanna defended the use of Electronic Voting Machines (EVMs) and rejected calls to revert to paper ballots, emphasizing the need for technological progress and institutional trust.

Personal Liberty and Bail Decisions

  • Arvind Kejriwal’s Interim Bail: Justice Khanna granted interim bail to Delhi Chief Minister Arvind Kejriwal in the liquor policy case, underscoring personal liberty as a fundamental right.
  • Judicial Review of Bail Conditions: He also initiated discussions on setting standards for bail conditions in cases involving significant political figures.

Role of the Chief Justice of India (CJI)

Appointment Process

  • Article 124(2): A Supreme Court judge is appointed by the President of India, with the senior-most judge of the Supreme Court traditionally becoming the CJI.
  • Qualifications: The CJI must be a citizen of India and have served as a judge in a High Court for at least five years or as an advocate in a High Court for ten years.

Powers and Responsibilities

  • Master of the Roster: The CJI is the "Master of the Roster," responsible for assigning cases to specific benches and determining the court's schedule.
  • Collegium System: The CJI, along with four senior judges, forms the Collegium that recommends judicial appointments for the Supreme Court and High Courts.
  • Ad-Hoc Appointments: The CJI can also appoint ad-hoc judges to the Supreme Court under Article 127 of the Constitution.

Removal

  • A CJI can only be removed through a process initiated in Parliament, requiring a special majority in both Houses of Parliament.

Appointment of CJI in Other Countries

United States

  • The Chief Justice of the United States serves for life, with tenure continuing until impeachment or voluntary retirement.

United Kingdom

  • The Lord Chief Justice in the UK is appointed by a special panel from the Appeal Court or the Supreme Court. The tenure is life, but mandatory retirement is set at 75 years of age.

Conclusion

Justice Sanjiv Khanna’s appointment as the 51st Chief Justice of India represents a significant moment in the country's judicial history. With his extensive experience and legal acumen, he faces numerous challenges, from dealing with case pendency to navigating sensitive constitutional issues. His tenure will likely shape the future trajectory of the Indian judiciary, with a focus on upholding justice and personal liberty while addressing the evolving needs of a democratic society.

What are the costs of population decline?

  • 11 Nov 2024

In News:

India has been witnessing significant demographic changes due to decades of family planning policies. This has led to declining fertility rates in certain States, particularly in the southern and smaller northern regions.

Introduction: Demographic Shift in India

  • Southern States’ Fertility Trends: States like Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Andhra Pradesh, and Telangana have fertility rates below the replacement level (around 1.4–1.5), while Bihar, Uttar Pradesh, and Madhya Pradesh have higher fertility rates (2.6–3).
  • Ageing Population: Southern States face the challenge of an ageing population, with Kerala projected to have 22.8% of its population aged 60+ by 2036, while Bihar will have only 11%.

Economic and Health Impact of Population Decline

  • Economic Consequences:
    • Dependency Ratio: The old-age dependency ratio (the number of elderly for every 100 working-age individuals) has increased significantly in some States. Kerala, for example, had a ratio of 26.1 in 2021, signaling a crisis point.
    • Loss of Demographic Dividend: States with declining fertility rates face the loss of a demographic dividend, i.e., the economic benefit from a large working-age population, which is increasingly burdened by elderly dependents.
    • Health Expenditure: Rising healthcare costs, especially for cardiovascular diseases in southern States, will strain public health systems. The southern States, although comprising one-fifth of India's population, spent 32% of the country’s total out-of-pocket expenditure on cardiovascular diseases in 2017-18.
  • Challenges of Low Fertility:
    • Declining Labour Force Participation: Policies encouraging higher fertility may also reduce women’s labour force participation, undermining the economic growth of these States.
    • Economic Pressures: Southern States, despite higher tax contributions, face a diminished share of central resources due to slower population growth. This is a point of concern in inter-State fiscal relations.

Political Implications of Uneven Population Growth

  • Impact on Federal Structure:
    • The uneven population growth across States will lead to significant changes in the delimitation of constituencies after the current freeze on seat allocation in Parliament expires in 2026.
    • Redistribution of Lok Sabha Seats: Northern States like Uttar Pradesh and Bihar will likely gain more seats, while southern States like Tamil Nadu, Kerala, and Andhra Pradesh will lose seats due to their declining population shares.
  • Challenges in Federal Relations:
    • Southern States’ economic contributions through taxes are disproportionate to the resources they receive from the central pool, leading to growing tensions between high-growth and slow-growth regions.
    • The shift in political power post-delimitation could increase regional disparities, potentially leading to political tensions between States.

Solutions and Policy Recommendations

  • Pro-Natalist Policies:
    • Southern States are considering pro-natalist policies to incentivize higher fertility rates. However, such measures have been largely unsuccessful internationally, especially when women’s economic independence and educational choices are restricted.
    • International Experience: Attempts to incentivize childbearing, without addressing broader socio-economic factors like gender equality, have generally failed in other nations. Maternity benefits, gender-neutral parental leave, and childcare support are key to increasing fertility sustainably.
  • Gender Equity and Work-Family Balance:
    • Work-family policies that support paid maternity and paternity leaves, affordable childcare, and gender-neutral employment policies are essential to empower women to balance family and career.
    • Studies indicate that countries with higher gender equity have better fertility rates because women are less likely to forgo childbearing for career reasons.
  • Increasing Retirement Age:
    • One way to reduce the old-age dependency ratio is to increase the retirement age, which would allow older workers to remain employed longer and support a sustainable economy.
    • Social Security and pension reforms should also be considered to accommodate the ageing workforce and reduce the economic burden on younger generations.
  • Managing Migration:
    • Migration policies should be adjusted to manage the influx of economic migrants into southern States, who contribute to the economy but continue to be counted in their home States for fiscal and political purposes.
    • Migration-based policy reforms could address the challenge of an ageing population in states with declining fertility while ensuring equitable resource distribution across States.

Bharat 6G Mission

  • 10 Nov 2024

In News:

India aspires to lead the world in 6G technology by 2030 through the Bharat 6G Mission. This initiative builds upon the successful rollout of 5G, which reached 98% of districts in just 21 months.

Key Features of 6G Technology

  • Terahertz (THz) Frequencies: 6G will utilize THz waves capable of transmitting significantly more data than 5G, offering ultra-fast data rates.
  • Massive MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output): Supports a large number of devices and simultaneous connections using multiple antennas, improving data transmission and reception.
  • Network Slicing: Creates specialized, smaller networks tailored to specific traffic types, such as video streaming or industrial automation.
  • Enhanced Security: Incorporates advanced encryption and authentication protocols to safeguard sensitive data.
  • Ultra-Reliable Low Latency Communication (URLLC): Ensures ultra-low latency, critical for applications like industrial automation, virtual reality (VR), and augmented reality (AR).
  • Integrated Intelligent Reflecting Surfaces (IIRS): Enhances signal strength and quality, particularly in areas with poor reception.
  • High-Speed Data Transfer: Supports data communication over hundreds of GHz or THz frequencies, facilitating faster transfer rates.

Government Initiatives for 6G Development

Bharat 6G Vision and Strategy

  • Goal: To design, develop, and deploy 6G technologies, ensuring secure, intelligent, and pervasive global connectivity.
  • Core Principles:
    • Affordability, sustainability, and ubiquity aligned with the vision of Atmanirbhar Bharat (self-reliant India).
  • Strategic Objectives:
    • Promote R&D through startups, universities, and industries.
    • Develop affordable 6G solutions and global IP contributions.
    • Focus on transformative applications to enhance quality of life.

Technology Innovation Group (TIG) on 6G

  • Established: November 1, 2021.
  • Task Forces:
    • Focus on multidisciplinary solutions, spectrum management, devices and networks, international standards, and R&D funding.

Bharat 6G Alliance

  • A collaborative effort between Indian industry, academia, and research institutions to develop 5G advancements, 6G products, and patents.
  • Global Alignment: Partners with organizations like the Next G Alliance (US), 6G Flagship (Finland), and South Korea’s 6G Forum.

Applications of 6G Technology

Application Area

Description

Healthcare

Real-time patient monitoring and AI-connected devices.

Agriculture

IoT and AI-driven predictive systems for crop health and irrigation.

Defense & Internal Security

Enhanced surveillance, communication, and unmanned operations.

Disaster Response

High-volume communication for emergency coordination.

Transportation

Ultra-low latency for urban air mobility and traffic management.

Education

High-speed remote learning, immersive AR/VR-enabled classrooms.

Metaverse

3D holographic displays and seamless virtual interactions.

Industrial Automation

Smart factories with enhanced operational efficiency through real-time data.

Smart Cities

Efficient urban infrastructure and real-time monitoring using IoT.

Entertainment & Media

Higher-quality streaming, immersive content delivery.

Environmental Monitoring

Real-time data collection for resource management and conservation.

Challenges in 6G Development

  • Technical Complexity: Development of advanced components and subsystems makes 6G technology highly complex.
  • Infrastructure Deployment: Significant investment and regulatory support are required for the necessary infrastructure upgrades.
  • Spectrum Allocation: The limited availability of spectrum poses challenges in balancing competing demands for bandwidth.
  • Security Concerns: High-speed data transmission increases vulnerability to cyber threats, necessitating robust security protocols.
  • Standardization Issues: Achieving global consensus on standards for 6G interoperability can be slow and contentious.
  • Global Collaboration: Effective international cooperation is critical for technological and regulatory alignment.

Conclusion

India’s Bharat 6G Mission represents a visionary approach to maintaining technological leadership in the rapidly evolving global digital landscape. By investing in research, fostering international collaborations, and pursuing policies aligned with Atmanirbhar Bharat, India can harness 6G to fuel socio-economic growth and strengthen global connectivity.

Uttar Pradesh Board of Madarsa Education Act, 2004

  • 09 Nov 2024

In News:

The Supreme Court recently upheld the constitutional validity of the Uttar Pradesh Board of Madarsa Education Act, 2004 (also called the Madarsa Act), while striking down certain provisions related to the granting of higher education degrees. The Court overturned the Allahabad High Court's previous decision, which had deemed the Act unconstitutional on the grounds that it violated the principle of secularism.

What is the Madarsa Act?

The Madarsa Act provides a legal framework for regulating madrasas (Islamic educational institutions) in Uttar Pradesh. The Act:

  • Establishes the Uttar Pradesh Board of Madarsa Education, which oversees the curriculum and examinations for madrasas.
  • Ensures that madrasas follow the National Council of Educational Research and Training (NCERT) curriculum for mainstream secular education alongside religious instruction.
  • Empowers the state government to create rules for regulating madrasa education.

Allahabad High Court's Ruling

In March 2024, the Allahabad High Court declared the Madarsa Act unconstitutional, citing:

  • Violation of secularism: The Court argued that the Act's emphasis on compulsory Islamic education, with modern subjects being optional, discriminated on religious grounds, violating the secular nature of the Constitution.
  • Right to Education: The Court also claimed that the Act denied quality education under Article 21A, which guarantees free and compulsory education to children.
  • Higher Education Degrees: The Act's provisions allowing the granting of Fazil and Kamil degrees were found to conflict with the University Grants Commission Act, 1956, which regulates higher education.

Supreme Court's Ruling

The Supreme Court overturned the Allahabad High Court's decision on several grounds:

  • Basic Structure Doctrine: The Court clarified that the basic structure doctrine, which applies to constitutional amendments, does not apply to ordinary legislation like the Madarsa Act. Therefore, a law cannot be struck down simply for violating secularism unless explicitly prohibited by the Constitution.
  • State's Authority to Regulate Education: The Court held that the state has the right to regulate education in minority institutions, as long as the regulation is reasonable and rational. It emphasized that the Madarsa Act does not deprive these institutions of their minority character.
  • Right to Education for Minority Institutions: Referring to a 2014 decision, the Court ruled that the Right to Education Act (RTE) does not apply to minority institutions, as it would undermine their right to impart religious education and self-administer.

Striking Down Higher Education Provisions

While upholding most of the Act, the Supreme Court struck down the provisions related to higher education degrees (Fazil and Kamil). It ruled that:

  • Section 9 of the Act, which allowed the Board to grant these degrees, is in conflict with the University Grants Commission Act, which only permits degrees to be awarded by universities recognized by the UGC.

Implications of the Ruling

  • Regulation of Madrasa Education: The ruling affirms the state's authority to ensure quality education in madrasas, balancing religious instruction with secular subjects.
  • Protection of Minority Rights: By upholding the Madarsa Act, the Court protected the rights of religious minorities to run educational institutions while ensuring they meet educational standards.
  • Focus on Inclusivity: The judgment emphasizes the integration of madrasas within the broader educational framework, ensuring that madrasa students receive quality education.

In conclusion, the Supreme Court's decision supports the regulation of madrasa education while safeguarding the rights of minority institutions, except in areas related to the granting of higher education degrees, which remain under the jurisdiction of the UGC Act.

Indus Waters Treaty (IWT)

  • 08 Nov 2024

In News:

Need for modification of the Indus Waters Treaty (IWT) amidst changing geopolitical, environmental, and demographic realities.

Background of the Indus Waters Treaty (IWT)

  • About IWT:
    • Signed in 1960 between India and Pakistan, brokered by the World Bank.
    • Governs the sharing of the Indus River system waters.
  • Historical Context:
    • Origin in the Inter-Dominion Accord of 1948 post-partition.
    • Finalized after negotiations facilitated by the World Bank in 1951.
  • Key Provisions:
    • Eastern Rivers (Ravi, Beas, Sutlej) allocated to India.
    • Western Rivers (Indus, Jhelum, Chenab) allocated to Pakistan, with limited use allowed for India (e.g., hydropower, irrigation).
    • Establishment of the Permanent Indus Commission (PIC) for cooperation and dispute resolution.

India’s Perspective

  • Rationale for Modification:
    • Increased demographic and agricultural demands.
    • Need for sustainable water management.
    • Acceleration of hydropower projects on western rivers permitted by the treaty.
  • Security Concerns: Cross-border terrorism impacting trust in treaty operations.

Pakistan’s Concerns

  • Dependence on Indus System:  Critical for agriculture and drinking water as the lower riparian state.
  • Potential Impacts of Modification:
    • Fear of reduced water availability.
    • Concerns over India’s hydropower projects altering water flow.

Current Challenges

  • Hydropower Projects: Disputes over compliance with treaty provisions regarding hydropower construction.
  • Technical Disputes: Divergent interpretations of treaty terms.
  • Political Tensions: Strained bilateral relations with minimal diplomatic engagement.
  • Climate Change Impacts: Altered precipitation patterns and glacial melt affecting water availability.

Arguments for Modifying the Treaty

  • Addressing Contemporary Challenges: Climate change, technological advancements, and increased water demand.
  • Securing National Interests:
    • Clarifications on hydropower construction.
    • Improved dispute resolution mechanisms.

Risks of Modifying the Treaty

  • Escalation of Tensions: Perceived unilateral actions by Pakistan.
  • Political Sensitivities: Domestic opposition in both countries.

Way Forward: A Balanced Approach

  • Engagement and Dialogue: Bilateral discussions with potential third-party mediation (e.g., World Bank).
  • Cooperation over Conflict: Recognizing mutual benefits of collaboration in water management.
  • Adaptation Measures: Incorporate provisions addressing climate change and technological advances.

Supreme Court Ruling on Property and Redistribution

  • 06 Nov 2024

In News:

A crucial 9-judge bench of the Supreme Court ruled on the scope of government powers over private property, with a focus on Articles 39(b) and 31C of the Constitution.

Key Issues Considered by the Court

  • Article 31C: Whether it still protects laws giving effect to Articles 39(b) and 39(c), even after amendments and past rulings.
  • Interpretation of Article 39(b): The meaning of “material resources of the community” and the limits on government acquisition.

Legal and Constitutional Background

  • Article 31C and 39(b) Overview:
    • Article 31C was introduced by the 25th Amendment (1971) to protect laws related to the distribution of resources for the common good.
    • Article 39(b) (Directive Principle of State Policy) mandates that resources should be distributed to best serve the common good.
  • Historical Context:
    • Kesavananda Bharati Case (1973): The Supreme Court affirmed the Constitution’s "basic structure," impacting the interpretation of amendments to Article 31C.
    • Minerva Mills Case (1980): The Court struck down further amendments to Article 31C.

The Supreme Court’s Ruling in 2024

  • Restoration of the Post-Kesavananda Position: The Supreme Court clarified that the interpretation of Article 31C is restricted, and the protection under this article applies only to laws implementing Articles 39(b) and 39(c), not all directive principles.
  • On Redistributing Private Property:
    • The majority opinion held that not all privately owned properties can be considered “material resources of the community” for redistribution under Article 39(b).
    • The Court dismissed the broad interpretation of "material resources" used in previous rulings (e.g., Justice Krishna Iyer’s dissent in the Ranganatha Reddy case, 1977).

Dissenting and Concurring Opinions

  • Justice Nagarathna’s Concurring Opinion:
    • Acknowledged that certain privately owned resources could be considered material resources (e.g., forests, wetlands), but emphasized a balanced approach.
    • Distinguished between personal belongings and resources that could be considered part of the public domain.
  • Justice Dhulia’s Dissent:
    • Argued for a broader interpretation, in line with past rulings, that private resources could be considered material resources if they served the public good.

Interpretation of Article 39(b)

  • Scope of the Article:
    • Article 39(b) directs the State to ensure that the ownership of material resources is distributed to serve the common good.
    • It imposes a positive obligation on the State to create policies for resource distribution, but does not authorize arbitrary expropriation of private property.
  • Private Property as Material Resources:
    • The Court clarified that private property cannot be deemed a material resource of the community unless specific conditions are met (e.g., scarcity, public welfare implications).
    • The judgment emphasized a case-by-case analysis rather than a blanket approach.

Criteria for Assessing Material Resources

The Court provided criteria to evaluate whether a private property could be considered a “material resource of the community”:

  • Nature of the Resource: What is the resource’s fundamental characteristic?
  • Impact on Public Welfare: Does the resource impact the common good or public interest?
  • Ownership Type: Is the resource privately owned or under state control?
  • Scarcity: Is the resource scarce or in finite supply?
  • Concentration of Ownership: Are the resources concentrated in the hands of a few private entities?

Implications of the Ruling

  • Protection of Private Property Rights: The ruling strengthens protections against arbitrary State acquisition of private property, reinforcing the constitutional safeguards for property rights.
  • Economic Implications: The Court noted that India’s economic trajectory has shifted from socialism to a market-based economy, and that resource redistribution policies should reflect this change.
  • Policy Shifts: The ruling marks a shift away from a socialist economic ideology towards one that emphasizes private property rights, while still considering public welfare in resource distribution.

Conclusion

  • Balancing Individual Rights with Public Welfare: The ruling underscores the importance of balancing private property rights with the need for equitable resource distribution to serve the common good.
  • Implications for Constitutional Interpretation: This judgment marks a pivotal moment in the interpretation of property rights in India, affirming the evolving nature of the Constitution in response to dynamic economic and social policies.

Does Data Justify Subdivision of Quotas?

  • 05 Nov 2024

Context

India's reservation system has long been a tool for uplifting historically marginalized communities, especially Scheduled Castes (SCs) and Scheduled Tribes (STs). However, recent debates have questioned whether the system serves its intended purpose, particularly in light of disparities within the SC groups. The need for a ‘quota-within-quota’ system has been raised to ensure more equitable outcomes across different SC subgroups.

The Reservation System: Origins and Objectives

Purpose of Reservations

  • Historical Background: Established to correct centuries of social and economic exclusion faced by SCs and STs.
  • Mechanism for Equality: Aimed to create opportunities in education, government employment, and public offices for historically marginalized groups.
  • Dr. B.R. Ambedkar’s Vision: Reservations were designed to transition from formal legal equality to substantive equality.

Challenges of the Current System

  • Despite progress, certain SC subgroups seem to have benefited more than others.
  • A Supreme Court ruling has led to calls for a 'quota-within-quota' to address intra-SC disparities.

Exploring Intra-SC Disparities: The Data Analysis

States Examined

  • Key States: Andhra Pradesh, Bihar, Punjab, Tamil Nadu, Uttar Pradesh, and West Bengal.
  • Objective: To investigate whether some SC subgroups have disproportionately benefited from the reservation system.

Findings Across States

  • Andhra Pradesh: Minor differences between SC groups (Malas vs. Madigas), with both groups showing similar socio-economic progress.
  • Tamil Nadu: No significant disparity between Adi Dravida and Pallan groups, both benefiting equally from reservations.
  • Punjab: Subdivision of quotas since 1975 has led to better outcomes for disadvantaged groups like Mazhabi Sikhs and Balmikis.
  • Bihar: The Mahadalit category, introduced in 2007, failed due to political intervention, undermining the policy’s goals.

Key Insights

  • In some states (e.g., Punjab), a subdivision of quotas has been effective in addressing intra-SC disparities.
  • In other states, like Andhra Pradesh and Tamil Nadu, the benefits of reservations are already distributed fairly evenly among SC subgroups.
  • The gap between SCs and upper-caste groups remains much larger than the gap within SCs.

The Issue of Access to Reservations

Caste Certificates as a Proxy for Access

  • Data from IHDS: Less than 50% of SC households in Uttar Pradesh and Bihar report having caste certificates, limiting access to reserved positions.
  • Better Access in Some States: Over 60-70% of SC households in Tamil Nadu and Andhra Pradesh have caste certificates.

Core Issue: Ensuring Access

  • Access Challenges: Without proper access to caste certificates, many SCs are excluded from the benefits of the reservation system.
  • Priority Area: Ensuring that all eligible SCs have access to reservations is a critical concern before considering subdivision.

The 'Quota-within-Quota' Proposal

Concept and Potential Benefits

  • Targeted Assistance: A ‘quota-within-quota’ would provide more focused help to the most disadvantaged SC subgroups, as seen in Punjab.
  • Political Considerations: However, the political motivations behind quota subdivision, as seen in Bihar, can undermine the policy’s effectiveness.

Criticism and Limitations

  • Uneven Need for Subdivision: In many states, the need for further subdivision is minimal, as the benefits of reservations are already fairly distributed.
  • Political Exploitation: The policy risks becoming a political tool rather than a genuine means of achieving social justice, as political influence often determines who is categorized as the most disadvantaged.

Addressing Inequality Beyond Reservations

Income-Based Criteria and Monetary Benefits

  • Current Approach: Monetary benefits (e.g., scholarships, lower fees) are a part of the affirmative action system.
  • Income Criterion: Should be used to determine eligibility for monetary benefits to focus assistance on those most in need.

The "Creamy Layer" Debate

  • Supreme Court’s Suggestion: The introduction of a "creamy layer" exclusion for SCs, akin to the Other Backward Classes (OBCs) model, remains contentious and requires stronger evidence.

Challenges of Economic Mobility

  • Stigma and Discrimination: Economic progress does not necessarily eliminate social stigma or discrimination, especially for historically marginalized groups.
  • Long-Term Goal: While reservations have contributed to creating a Dalit middle class, addressing stigma will require a gradual process.

The Need for Updated Data and Evidence-Based Policy

Data Deficiency

  • Lack of Comprehensive Data: The absence of updated, reliable data on caste-based disparities limits the effectiveness of any policy reform.
  • National Census Delay: India’s national Census, the only source of comprehensive data on caste, has been delayed, exacerbating the problem.

Evidence-Driven Reform

  • Importance of Data: Robust and up-to-date data is essential to assess the true impact of reservations and to make informed policy decisions.

Conclusion: Reforming the Reservation System

  • Reservations’ Success: The reservation system has played a significant role in improving the socio-economic status of SCs and STs.
  • Intra-SC Disparities: While some subgroups benefit more than others, the broader gap between SCs and upper-caste groups remains far more pronounced.
  • Focus on Access: The primary focus should be on improving access to reservations, ensuring that all eligible SCs benefit fully from affirmative action.

RBI brings back 102 tonnes gold from BoE; 60 per cent reserves in India

  • 04 Nov 2024

In News:

England over the past two-and-a-half years, reflecting a strategic shift in its approach to safeguarding gold reserves. This move marks a significant increase in the RBI's domestic gold holdings.

Rise in the RBI's Domestic Gold Holdings

  • Current Status (September 2024):The RBI's domestic gold reserves have grown to 510.46 metric tonnes, up from 295.82 metric tonnes in March 2022.
  • Reduction in Gold Held Abroad:The gold held under the custodianship of the Bank of England has decreased to 324 metric tonnes from 453.52 metric tonnes in March 2022.
  • Gold as a Share of Foreign Exchange Reserves:The proportion of gold in India's total foreign exchange reserves increased from 8.15% in March 2024 to 9.32% in September 2024.

Gold Kept in the Bank of England

  • Overview of the Bank of England's Gold Vault:The Bank of England is home to one of the largest gold vaults in the world, second only to the New York Federal Reserve, housing around 400,000 bars of gold.
  • India’s Gold Held Abroad:The RBI continues to retain 324 metric tonnes of its gold with the Bank of England and the Bank for International Settlements (BIS).
  • Additional Gold Management:Around 20 tonnes of gold are managed through gold deposit schemes.
  • Strategic Role of London’s Gold Market:Storing gold in London provides immediate access to the global London bullion market, enhancing liquidity for India’s gold assets.

Historical Context of India’s Gold Holdings

  • 1991 Balance of Payments Crisis:During a financial crisis in 1991, India had to send 47 tonnes of gold to the Bank of England to secure loans for repaying international creditors.

RBI’s Strategy to Bring Gold Back to India

  • Global Trend of Central Banks Buying Gold:Since the imposition of U.S. sanctions on Russia in 2022, central banks globally have been increasing their gold reserves as a hedge against inflation and to reduce reliance on the U.S. dollar. India has outpaced other G20 nations in this trend, surpassing Russia and China in gold purchases.
  • De-dollarisation:This shift is part of a broader strategy of de-dollarisation, aiming to diversify away from the U.S. dollar amidst rising gold prices and growing geopolitical tensions.

Significance of Repatriating Gold to India

  • Sign of Economic Strength
    • Recovery from the 1991 Crisis:The decision to repatriate gold reflects a significant improvement in India's economic position, a stark contrast to the 1991 economic crisis when India had to pledge gold for financial survival.
  • Optimizing Financial Resources
    • Reducing Storage Costs:Storing gold domestically allows the RBI to save on storage fees paid to foreign custodians, such as the Bank of England.
  • Strategic Significance
    • Enhanced Resilience Amid Global Instability:By repatriating its gold, India enhances its strategic autonomy and strengthens its economic position in a world of rising uncertainties and currency volatility.

RBI's Capacity to Safeguard Gold Domestically

  • Increasing Domestic Storage Capacity:The RBI has been increasing its domestic capacity for gold storage to accommodate rising reserves and reduce dependence on foreign gold safekeeping facilities.
  • Current Foreign Exchange Reserves:As of October 2024, India’s total foreign exchange reserves stand at $684.8 billion, sufficient to cover over 11.2 months of imports.

Diversification of Foreign Exchange Reserves

  • Mitigating Currency Risks:By increasing gold reserves, India diversifies its foreign exchange holdings, reducing reliance on any single currency and shielding itself from global currency fluctuations and economic volatility.
  • Gold as a Stable Asset:Gold serves as a stable asset, providing a safeguard against global economic shocks, and balances India’s reserves portfolio.

Gold as a Hedge against Inflation

  • Preserving Wealth amid Inflation:Gold is traditionally viewed as a hedge against inflation, maintaining or appreciating in value when other currencies weaken. By increasing its gold reserves, India positions itself to better withstand the adverse effects of inflation and ensure long-term financial stability.

Conclusion

The repatriation of gold by the RBI reflects a strategic move to bolster India's economic strength and diversify its financial assets. The decision to bring gold back to India not only signifies an improvement in India's economic fundamentals but also aligns with global trends of central banks increasing their gold reserves to ensure long-term stability and reduce reliance on the U.S. dollar.

WWF Living Planet Report 2024

  • 02 Nov 2024

In News:

  • The WWF Living Planet Report 2024 highlights a drastic 73% decline in the average size of monitored wildlife populations globally from 1970 to 2020.
  • The report underscores the urgent need for biodiversity conservation to maintain ecological balance, food security, and human health.

Key Findings of the 2024 Report

Wildlife Population Decline

  • 73% Decline in monitored wildlife populations over the past 50 years (1970-2020).
  • Freshwater species: Declined by 85%, the most significant drop.
  • Terrestrial species: Declined by 69%.
  • Marine species: Declined by 56%.

Main Threats to Wildlife

  • Habitat Loss: Primary driver, particularly due to the expansion of food systems.
  • Overexploitation: Over-hunting, fishing, and resource extraction.
  • Invasive Species: Non-native species disrupt local ecosystems.
  • Pollution: Water, air, and soil contamination, especially in Asia-Pacific.
  • Disease: Emerging diseases impacting wildlife populations.

Ecosystem Risks and Tipping Points

  • Decline in wildlife signals risks of ecosystem tipping points.
  • Critical ecosystems, like the Amazon and coral reefs, face potential irreversible damage.
  • Impact on global food security and livelihoods due to ecosystem collapse.

India’s Wildlife Status

  • Vulture populations in India remain critically endangered.
  • Tiger populations have increased to 3,682 (2022).
  • Snow leopards have been successfully monitored with 718 individuals recorded.

Case Study: Chennai’s Wetland Loss

  • 85% reduction in Chennai’s wetlands due to urban expansion, exacerbating flood and drought risks.
  • Initiatives like the Tamil Nadu Wetland Mission aim to restore these wetlands to improve ecosystem resilience.

 

Impacts of Wildlife Decline

  • Ecosystem Imbalance
    • Disruption in predator-prey relationships, pollination, and nutrient cycles due to species decline.
    • Leads to ecosystem instability and potential collapse.
  • Loss of Biodiversity
    • Reduced genetic diversity makes ecosystems less resilient to environmental changes.
    • Increases vulnerability to diseases, natural disasters, and climate change.
  • Threats to Food Security
    • Pollinators like bees and insects are essential for crop yields.
    • Loss of pollinators threatens global food supply and agriculture.
  • Human Health Implications
    • Healthy ecosystems regulate disease by controlling pest populations.
    • Declining biodiversity increases the risk of zoonotic diseases, such as COVID-19.
  • Economic Consequences
    • Agriculture, fisheries, and tourism industries depend on healthy ecosystems.
    • Decline in wildlife can lead to job losses and economic instability.
  • Cultural and Social Impacts
    • Wildlife holds cultural, spiritual, and recreational value for societies worldwide.
    • Loss of iconic species diminishes cultural identities and opportunities for nature-based tourism.

 

Challenges in Biodiversity Conservation

  • Inadequate National Actions
    • Despite global commitments (e.g., Global Biodiversity Framework, Paris Agreement, UN SDGs), national actions are insufficient to meet 2030 biodiversity targets.
    • Risk of crossing tipping points that could lead to irreversible ecosystem degradation.
  • Key Drivers of Biodiversity Loss
    • Habitat Loss: Driven by agriculture, urbanization, and infrastructure development.
    • Climate Change: Rising temperatures, extreme weather, and altered precipitation patterns.
    • Overexploitation: Unsustainable hunting, fishing, logging, and resource extraction.
    • Pollution: Industrial, agricultural, and plastic pollution disrupt natural habitats.
    • Invasive Species: Non-native species outcompeting and threatening native populations.
    • Lack of Funding: Inadequate financial resources for effective conservation.
    • Weak Policy and Enforcement: Poorly implemented habitat protection laws.
    • Human-Wildlife Conflict: Increased interactions between expanding human populations and wildlife.
    • Genetic Diversity Loss: Reduced genetic diversity makes species vulnerable to diseases and environmental changes.
    • Awareness Gaps: Insufficient public awareness on the importance of biodiversity.

 

Conclusion and Way Forward

Policy and Action Recommendations

  • Expand protected areas and restore ecosystems to halt biodiversity loss.
  • Engage Indigenous communities in conservation and land management practices.
  • Promote sustainable farming, reduce food waste, and encourage plant-based diets to lessen food production impacts.
  • Shift to renewable energy and reduce fossil fuel use to mitigate climate change.
  • Redirect investments from environmentally harmful sectors to nature-friendly industries.

WWF-India’s Call for Collective Action

  • WWF-India advocates for collective action to align climate, conservation, and sustainable development policies.
  • The goal is to ensure a resilient and thriving future for both biodiversity and human societies.

Tackling Judicial Pendency and Adjournments in India

  • 01 Nov 2024

In News:

The issue of judicial delays and adjournments has become a significant concern in India’s judicial system. President Droupadi Murmu, while addressing the National Conference of District Judiciary in September 2024, emphasized the need to eliminate the culture of adjournments. These delays particularly affect the poor and rural populations, who often suffer in silence, avoiding court due to the fear of protracted justice.

Background of the Indian Judicial System

India’s judicial system has evolved under various legal frameworks, including the Code of Civil Procedure (CPC) and the Criminal Procedure Code (CrPC). Initially, civil courts dealt with a wide range of cases, while criminal courts focused on criminal offenses. The establishment of the Supreme Court and High Courts further strengthened India’s judicial architecture to handle constitutional and appellate cases.

To address the growing caseload, the Indian government introduced the tribunal system through the 42nd Constitutional Amendment Act, 1976, aiming to manage specialized disputes. However, despite these reforms, case pendency continues to rise.

Key Issues Contributing to Judicial Delay and Pendency

  • Judge-to-Population Ratio - India currently has 21 judges per million people, far below the recommended 50 judges per million as per the 120th Law Commission Report. The shortage of judges directly contributes to the growing backlog of cases.
  • Vacant Judicial Positions - As of late 2024, 30% of High Court positions remain vacant, exacerbating the case pendency crisis. The delay in filling these vacancies has resulted in overburdened judges, further delaying case resolution.
  • Legislative Overload - The enactment of laws without conducting prior judicial impact assessments leads to an increase in the number of cases, often without considering the capacity of the judiciary to handle them. This lack of foresight results in excessive pressure on courts.
  • Overworked Judiciary - Judges often face a heavy workload, with some handling multiple responsibilities across different courts. This overburdening leads to mental fatigue, increased errors, and prolonged decision-making.
  • Witness Delays - The absence of witnesses and delays in their appearance in court can significantly prolong the judicial process, contributing to case pendency.

Government Initiatives and Challenges

    • National Judicial Infrastructure Plan (NJIP): The NJIP aims to modernize judicial infrastructure, improving court functioning and case processing. However, its full implementation across the country remains a work in progress.
    • E-Courts Project: The E-Courts project aims to digitize the judicial process, including e-filing and virtual hearings. This initiative has shown promise in reducing procedural delays but still requires wider application.
    • Tribunal System: While tribunals were introduced to reduce the burden on regular courts, their success has been limited, and the abolition of six tribunals in 2021 has added additional pressure on High Courts.
    • Case Timeline Legislation: Laws prescribing time-bound adjudication for sensitive cases have been enacted, but due to inefficiencies in the system, deadlines are rarely met.

Recommendations for Reform

    • Enhance Judicial Strength
    • Increase the Judge-to-Population Ratio: The government should prioritize the appointment of judges to meet the 50 judges per milliontargets.
    • Fill Vacant Positions: High Courts should fill vacant positions six months in advance to ensure a steady supply of judges.
    • Judicial Impact Assessment
  • Implement Judicial Impact Assessments: The Justice M. Jagannadha Rao Committee’s recommendation for judicial impact assessments should be made mandatory. Every new Bill should assess the likely increase in judicial workload, the required number of judges, and the necessary infrastructure.
    • Promote Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR)
    • Encourage ADR Mechanisms: Mediation and arbitration should be promoted as cost-effective alternatives to court proceedings. Public awareness campaigns and legal reforms can encourage the use of ADR.
    • Strengthen Infrastructure and Technology
  • Modernize Court Infrastructure: The judiciary should invest in technology such as e-filing and virtual hearings to reduce administrative burdens and expedite case resolutions.
  • Streamline Administrative Processes: Technology can also help automate administrative tasks, thereby reducing the workload on judges and speeding up case processing.
  • Limit Adjournments
  • Stricter Norms for Adjournments: Judicial bodies should enforce stricter norms for granting adjournments, ensuring that they are not used excessively.
  • Oversight Mechanism: An independent body can monitor the frequency of adjournments and take corrective action if needed.

Conclusion

Addressing the issue of judicial adjournments and case pendency requires a comprehensive approach involving structural reforms, better resource allocation, and the adoption of technology. Strengthening the judiciary’s infrastructure, increasing judicial appointments, and promoting alternative dispute resolution are vital steps toward ensuring quicker, fairer justice. The collaborative efforts of the judiciary, government, and society at large are essential to ensuring that India’s judicial system can meet the demands of justice in a timely and efficient manner.

Analysis of Growing Economic Divide in India

  • 29 Oct 2024

Overview

The Economic Advisory Council to the Prime Minister (EAC-PM)'s report titled "Relative Economic Performance of Indian States: 1960-61 to 2023-24" highlights an alarming trend of widening economic disparities across India's states, which is increasingly threatening the principles of federalism and national unity. The findings reveal significant regional imbalances in terms of contributions to the national income, per capita income, and overall economic development. This analysis delves into the key insights from the report and explores the broader implications for India's federal structure, governance, and policy approaches.

Key Insights from the Report

  • Regional Economic Disparities:
    • Western and Southern States' Dominance: States such as Maharashtra, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu, and Karnataka have consistently outperformed others. These states have benefited from higher private investments, better infrastructure, and a more business-friendly environment. They also enjoy proximity to international markets, especially coastal regions like Gujarat and Tamil Nadu, which have access to ports and export markets.
    • Underperformance of Northern and Eastern States: On the other hand, northern states (with exceptions like Delhi and Haryana) and eastern states like Bihar, Odisha, and West Bengal lag behind in economic performance. These regions face challenges such as poor infrastructure, low levels of investment, and weak governance structures, which hinder their growth potential.
  • Impact of Liberalization (1991):
    • The 1991 economic reforms marked a shift toward market-oriented growth, benefiting states that were already more industrialized or had better urban infrastructure. Southern states, in particular, adapted well to the liberalized environment, attracting higher levels of private investment and expanding their economies.
    • The liberalization process disproportionately favored urban centers like Delhi, Mumbai, Chennai, and Bengaluru, where investments were channelized into growing service sectors, technology, and industries, creating a feedback loop of wealth accumulation in these hubs. Meanwhile, the hinterland remained underdeveloped due to insufficient public investment and the lack of private sector interest in these regions.
  • Investment Disparities:
    • Private Investment: Wealthier states attract a disproportionate share of private investment, which is driven by profitability and market opportunities. These states have better infrastructure, which reduces transaction costs and increases returns on investment. In contrast, underdeveloped states struggle to attract investment due to poor governance, inadequate infrastructure, and perceived higher risks.
    • Public Investment: While the public sector still plays a role in investment, the New Economic Policies (NEP) since 1991 have shifted the focus towards private sector-driven growth. This has further widened the investment gap, as the poorer states receive less public investment relative to their needs.
  • Role of Infrastructure and Governance:
    • The availability and quality of infrastructure are significant determinants of economic performance. States with better roads, energy supply, ports, and communication networks tend to attract more investments. Additionally, good governance, characterized by reduced corruption, better policy implementation, and transparency, also plays a critical role in fostering economic development.
    • In contrast, states with weaker governance structures and poor infrastructure struggle to create an enabling environment for businesses, further compounding regional disparities.
  • Impact on Federalism:
    • The growing economic divide is leading to tensions between the Centre and state governments, particularly in wealthier states that contribute significantly to national income but feel short-changed in resource allocation. These states argue that they are not receiving a fair share of national resources in return for their contributions, leading to growing dissatisfaction with the federal system.
    • The tension is exacerbated by political factors, such as accusations from opposition-led states that the Centre uses public investment to favor states aligned with the ruling party. The growing perception of politicization of resource allocation has the potential to undermine the spirit of cooperative federalism.

Structural Causes of Regional Inequality

  • Economic and Investment Magnetism:
    • Wealthier states attract more private investments, as they offer better returns due to established markets, skilled labor, and urbanization. Cities like Mumbai, Delhi, and Bengaluru serve as economic magnets, drawing talent, technology, and capital, which further consolidates their economic dominance.
    • In contrast, states without such economic hubs or access to global markets struggle to attract investment. The absence of urban agglomerations and the concentration of wealth and resources in a few states perpetuate regional disparities.
  • Policy and Investment Bias:
    • Post-liberalization policies have disproportionately benefited the organized sector, often at the expense of the unorganized sector, which is more prevalent in poorer states. The emphasis on industrial growth and infrastructure development has largely bypassed the rural and informal sectors, which are critical in underdeveloped states.
    • The organized sector has also benefited from government support, such as tax concessions and subsidized infrastructure, which have enabled these industries to thrive in already developed regions. This has widened the gap between the haves and the have-nots.
  • Cronyism and the Black Economy:
    • Crony capitalism and the prevalence of the black economy in poorer states further exacerbate regional imbalances. In some cases, political patronage and corruption divert resources and investments from areas that need them most. This weakens the investment climate, especially in states with higher levels of informal and illegal economic activity.

Implications for Federalism

The growing economic disparity poses a serious threat to India's federal structure. The increasing dissatisfaction of wealthier states with the current fiscal arrangements and the growing demand for fairer resource allocation challenge the spirit of cooperative federalism. A well-functioning federal system relies on equitable distribution of resources and opportunities for all regions to develop.

Policy Recommendations

To address these disparities and strengthen India's federal framework, several policy measures need to be implemented:

  • Enhancing Governance and Infrastructure in Lagging States:
    • Improved governance and reducing corruption are essential in attracting both private and public investments. Additionally, there must be a focus on developing critical infrastructure, such as roads, energy, and health facilities, which are essential for economic growth.
    • States need to increase public investment in sectors like education, healthcare, and social security to improve human capital and productivity.
  • Focus on the Unorganized Sector:
    • A significant portion of the labor force in poorer states is employed in the unorganized sector. Policies should aim to formalize this sector by providing social security benefits, improving labor rights, and increasing productivity through skill development. This could help raise incomes and stimulate local demand, attracting more private investment.
  • Balancing the Organized and Unorganized Sectors:
    • While the organized sector has benefited from liberalization, more attention should be given to the unorganized sector, which forms the backbone of the economy in many poorer states. A balanced approach to economic growth, which includes both organized and unorganized sectors, can help reduce disparities.
  • Shifting Focus from Urban Centers to Hinterlands:
    • Private sector investment must be incentivized in underdeveloped regions through tax breaks, subsidies, and targeted infrastructure projects. This will encourage businesses to expand beyond the major urban centers, thus promoting a more balanced distribution of economic activities.

Conclusion

The widening economic divide in India, as revealed by the EAC-PM report, poses a significant challenge to the country's federalism and unity. To ensure inclusive and balanced development, policy reforms must focus on reducing regional disparities by improving governance, infrastructure, and investment in lagging states. A shift towards equitable growth, addressing the needs of both the organized and unorganized sectors, is essential to promoting national cohesion and ensuring sustainable economic progress across all regions.

Strengthening the Anti-Defection Law to Uphold India's Democratic Integrity

  • 28 Oct 2024

In News:

The Anti-Defection Law, introduced in 1985 through the 52nd Constitutional Amendment, aims to curb political instability caused by legislators switching parties for personal or financial reasons. While the law has helped maintain political stability, it faces several challenges, including delays in decision-making, potential bias in adjudication, and lack of transparency in party directives. These issues undermine its effectiveness in safeguarding democratic integrity.

Historical Context and Genesis

The issue of political defections, exemplified by the term "Aaya Ram, Gaya Ram," traces its origins to the 1960s when frequent party-switching destabilized governments. To address this, the Anti-Defection Law was enacted in 1985, disqualifying members who voluntarily gave up their party membership or defied party whips on critical votes. Initially effective in reducing defections, the law has faced challenges due to emerging loopholes, particularly regarding party "splits" and "mergers."

Gaps and Loopholes in the Current Law

One major loophole was the provision allowing a party split if one-third of its members defected, exploited until the 91st Amendment in 2003, which increased the threshold for mergers to two-thirds. Despite this change, defections continue, particularly through "mergers." Another issue is the role of the Speaker in deciding disqualification petitions. Given that the Speaker is often affiliated with the ruling party, their decisions are sometimes seen as biased, leading to delays in resolving defection cases. Additionally, the lack of transparency in issuing party whips has caused disputes regarding their legitimacy.

Proposed Reforms

To address these challenges, two key amendments are proposed:

  1. Fixed Time Frame for Decision-Making: A clear time frame—such as four weeks—should be established for the Speaker or an adjudicatory body to resolve defection cases. If no decision is made within this period, defecting members should automatically be disqualified.
  2. Transparency in Whips: Political parties should be required to make the issuance of whips public, either through newspaper publications or electronic communication, to ensure that members are fully informed of party positions on critical votes.

Ethical Concerns and Impact on Democracy

While the Anti-Defection Law was introduced to promote political stability, it has inadvertently stifled internal dissent within parties. Legislators are often forced to follow party lines, even when their personal convictions or constituents' interests conflict. This limits their freedom of expression and undermines the representative nature of democracy. Furthermore, the law has not fully curbed unethical practices such as "poaching" of members or defectors seeking personal gain, which continue to destabilize governments and erode public trust in the system.

The Way Forward: Political Will and Comprehensive Reforms

To strengthen the Anti-Defection Law, reforms must balance party discipline with individual freedoms. Key steps include:

  • Independent Adjudication: Establishing an independent tribunal to handle defection cases can reduce political bias and expedite the decision-making process.
  • Clear Timeframes: Setting a fixed timeline for resolving defection cases will prevent delays and ensure accountability.
  • Transparency in Whip Issuance: Ensuring public notice of party whips will reduce ambiguity and disputes.
  • Promoting Ethical Conduct: Strengthening ethical guidelines to discourage "poaching" and protect the integrity of the electoral process.